Genie Manual v759

May 2009
Copyright 2005 - 2009 Genie Solutions Pty Ltd

Genie Manual Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Part I Introduction 2
1 Keyboard ...................................................................................................................................
Shortcuts 2
Part II Hardware Requirements 8

1 Server Machine
................................................................................................................................... 8
2 Client Machine
................................................................................................................................... 10
3 Single User
................................................................................................................................... 11
Part III Backups 14

1 Automated
...................................................................................................................................
Backup 17
2 Restoring...................................................................................................................................
A Backup 21
Part IV Overview 24
1 The File Menu
................................................................................................................................... 24
2 The Open...................................................................................................................................
Menu 26
3 The Records
...................................................................................................................................
Menu 34
4 The Billing
...................................................................................................................................
Menu 36
5 The Patients
...................................................................................................................................
Menu 38
6 The Appts
...................................................................................................................................
Menu 44
7 The Special
...................................................................................................................................
Menu 49
Part V Setting Up Genie 54

1 Practice Preferences
................................................................................................................................... 54
The Practice
.........................................................................................................................................................
Details Window 54
The Miscellaneous
.........................................................................................................................................................
Window 56
The Practice
.........................................................................................................................................................
Letterhead Window 59
The Images.........................................................................................................................................................
and Attachments Window 61
SMS Reminders
......................................................................................................................................................... 62
Carrier Identifiers
......................................................................................................................................................... 62
2 User Preferences
................................................................................................................................... 63
The Details
.........................................................................................................................................................
Page 63
The General
.........................................................................................................................................................
Page 64
The Clinical
.........................................................................................................................................................
Page 66
The Practice
.........................................................................................................................................................
Sites Window 68
The Letterhead
.........................................................................................................................................................
Window 69
The Security
.........................................................................................................................................................
Window 70
The ECLIPSE
.........................................................................................................................................................
Window 71
3 Printing Preferences
................................................................................................................................... 71
Printer Preferences
......................................................................................................................................................... 72
Deleting Printing
.........................................................................................................................................................
Preferences Record 75
Troubleshooting
......................................................................................................................................................... 76
4 Security ................................................................................................................................... 77
Add/Delete
.........................................................................................................................................................
Users 77
User Levels/Access
......................................................................................................................................................... 78
Passwords......................................................................................................................................................... 79
Part VI The Reception Module 82

© 2005-2009 Genie Solutions Pty Ltd I
1 Appointments
................................................................................................................................... 82
Appointment
.........................................................................................................................................................
Preferences 82
Using The.........................................................................................................................................................
Appointments Book 86
Adding An ..................................................................................................................................................
Appointment 88
Edit Patient .................................................................................................................................................. 90
Moving/Copying
..................................................................................................................................................
Appointments 93
Deleting/Undeleting
..................................................................................................................................................
Appointments 94
Finding an ..................................................................................................................................................
Appointment 96
Double booking
..................................................................................................................................................
an Appointment time 97
Appointment ..................................................................................................................................................
Views 97
Appointment..................................................................................................................................................
Status 100
Appointment..................................................................................................................................................
Types 101
Repeating ..................................................................................................................................................
Appointments 105
Printing ..................................................................................................................................................
Appointment Page 106
Linking a..................................................................................................................................................
Procedure to an Appointment 107
Cancellation
..................................................................................................................................................
List 110
Appointment..................................................................................................................................................
Reminders 111
2 Theatre ...................................................................................................................................
Lists 117
Set Up ......................................................................................................................................................... 118
Printing .........................................................................................................................................................
a Theatre List 119
Preop Notifications
.........................................................................................................................................................
Check 120
3 Labels ................................................................................................................................... 121
Built in Labels
......................................................................................................................................................... 121
4 Invoicing
................................................................................................................................... 122
Account.........................................................................................................................................................
Holders 122
Account.........................................................................................................................................................
Holders for Organisations 123
Medicare.........................................................................................................................................................
and DVA Account Holder Records 124
Setting/Increasing
.........................................................................................................................................................
Private Fees 125
Updating.........................................................................................................................................................
Medicare/DVA Fees 126
Creating.........................................................................................................................................................
an Invoice 127
Invoicing.........................................................................................................................................................
an Organisation 128
Invoicing.........................................................................................................................................................
Workcover 129
Adding Items
.........................................................................................................................................................
to an Invoice 133
Other Item
.........................................................................................................................................................
Information 136
HIC Online
.........................................................................................................................................................
Options 136
Searching.........................................................................................................................................................
the Fee Schedule 136
Selecting.........................................................................................................................................................
the Practice 137
Selecting.........................................................................................................................................................
the Site of Service 138
Multiple .........................................................................................................................................................
Procedure & Diagnostic Rules 138
Known Gap.........................................................................................................................................................
Amounts 140
Assistant's
.........................................................................................................................................................
Fees 140
Invoice Memos
......................................................................................................................................................... 143
Checking .........................................................................................................................................................
Appointments Have Been Billed 143
Invoicing.........................................................................................................................................................
from the Patient List 144
Storing and
.........................................................................................................................................................
Deferring Invoices 144
5 Receipting
................................................................................................................................... 144
Receipting
.........................................................................................................................................................
Directly from an Invoice 145
Receipting
.........................................................................................................................................................
an Existing Invoice for a Patient 147
Paying the
.........................................................................................................................................................
Gap 148
Receipting
.........................................................................................................................................................
an Existing Invoice for an Organisation 149
6 Discounts
................................................................................................................................... 149
Applying.........................................................................................................................................................
when Invoicing 150
Applying.........................................................................................................................................................
when Receipting 153
Reversing
.........................................................................................................................................................
a Discount 154
Modifying
.........................................................................................................................................................
a Discount 156
7 Deposits
................................................................................................................................... 156
Accepting
.........................................................................................................................................................
A Deposit 157
Deleting.........................................................................................................................................................
A Deposit 158
II © 2005-2009 Genie Solutions Pty Ltd

Using A .........................................................................................................................................................
Deposit 158
8 Quotes ................................................................................................................................... 159
Preparing.........................................................................................................................................................
Quotes 159
Invoicing.........................................................................................................................................................
Directly From A Quote 163
9 Account...................................................................................................................................
History 163
Viewing .........................................................................................................................................................
a Patient's Account History 164
Reprinting
.........................................................................................................................................................
an Invoice or Receipt 165
Printing .........................................................................................................................................................
a Statement 165
Print Report
......................................................................................................................................................... 166
Finding A.........................................................................................................................................................
Batch 166
Itemized.........................................................................................................................................................
Receipt 166
Modifying.........................................................................................................................................................
an Invoice 167
Modifying.........................................................................................................................................................
an Item 167
Changing .........................................................................................................................................................
the Account Holder or Patient 168
Deleting.........................................................................................................................................................
an Invoice 168
Applying.........................................................................................................................................................
a Credit to an Invoice 169
Editing A.........................................................................................................................................................
Receipt 170
Deleting.........................................................................................................................................................
a Payment 170
Using a Dummy
.........................................................................................................................................................
Bank Account (Refunding a Payment) 171
10 Banking................................................................................................................................... 171
Setting up
.........................................................................................................................................................
Bank Accounts 171
The Banking
.........................................................................................................................................................
Report 172
11 Manual ...................................................................................................................................
Batching 173
Creating.........................................................................................................................................................
a New Batch 175
Receipting
.........................................................................................................................................................
a Batch 176
12 Overseas
...................................................................................................................................
Students (Worldcare) 179
Invoicing......................................................................................................................................................... 180
Batching.........................................................................................................................................................
Worldcare Invoices 180
13 Private Health
...................................................................................................................................
Fund Fees 181
Updating.........................................................................................................................................................
via the Web 182
Importing
.........................................................................................................................................................
Fund Schedules 184
14 HIC Online
...................................................................................................................................
Installation 186
Requirements
......................................................................................................................................................... 186
Installation
......................................................................................................................................................... 186
Install/Upgrade
..................................................................................................................................................
Genie 187
Install HIC ..................................................................................................................................................
Online - Windows 187
Install HIC ..................................................................................................................................................
Online - Macintosh 188
Install iKey..................................................................................................................................................
Drivers 190
Configure ..................................................................................................................................................
Genie 192
Create the ..................................................................................................................................................
PSI Store 193
Set Up for ..................................................................................................................................................
a Proxy Server 194
15 Using HIC
...................................................................................................................................
Online 196
Bulk Bill.........................................................................................................................................................
and DVA Claims 196
Invoicing.................................................................................................................................................. 197
Creating..................................................................................................................................................
a New Transmission 198
Retrieving ..................................................................................................................................................
Reports for the Claim 199
Reviewing ..................................................................................................................................................
Exceptions for a claim 200
Receipting ..................................................................................................................................................
Claim Payments 202
Patient Claims
......................................................................................................................................................... 202
Invoicing.................................................................................................................................................. 203
No Payment/Gap
..................................................................................................................................................
Paid By Patient 204
Patient Paid
..................................................................................................................................................
Full Amount 205
Transmitting
..................................................................................................................................................
Store-And-Forward Claims 206
"Post-Invoice"
..................................................................................................................................................
Claiming and Deleting 208
Online Patient
.........................................................................................................................................................
Verification 208
Using Online
..................................................................................................................................................
Verification 209
Updating.........................................................................................................................................................
Certificates 211
© 2005-2009 Genie Solutions Pty Ltd III

16 Troubleshooting
...................................................................................................................................
HIC Online 213
Error Messages
......................................................................................................................................................... 216
The PSI .........................................................................................................................................................
Store, Certificates & Passwords 217
17 Referral/Reply
...................................................................................................................................
Letters (Patient Correspondence) 217
Setting up
.........................................................................................................................................................
the Default Template 221
Setting up
.........................................................................................................................................................
the 4D Write Area 221
Fields & .........................................................................................................................................................
Expressions Tabs 222
Adding New
.........................................................................................................................................................
Templates 225
Editing Templates
......................................................................................................................................................... 225
Reviewing.........................................................................................................................................................
Correspondence 226
Importing.........................................................................................................................................................
Remotely Typed Letters 227
Ozescribe,
.........................................................................................................................................................
Syberscribe & BDT 229
Exporting ..................................................................................................................................................
Demographics 229
Importing ..................................................................................................................................................
Returned Letters 230
18 Electronic
...................................................................................................................................
Correspondence (Sending via 3rd Party) 231
Configuring
.........................................................................................................................................................
Healthlink 232
Writing the
.........................................................................................................................................................
Letter 233
Checking .........................................................................................................................................................
Imported Letters 234
3rd Party.........................................................................................................................................................
Providers 236
19 Merged ...................................................................................................................................
Letter Templates 236
Setting up
.........................................................................................................................................................
the 4D Write Area 238
Creating.........................................................................................................................................................
the Letter 239
Saving/Deleting
.........................................................................................................................................................
the Template 241
Printing .........................................................................................................................................................
Merged Letters 242
Creating.........................................................................................................................................................
Quote Templates 242
20 Recalls ................................................................................................................................... 244
Creating.........................................................................................................................................................
a Generic Recall Template 244
Printing .........................................................................................................................................................
Recalls 245
Flagging.........................................................................................................................................................
of Patient Record 247
Printing .........................................................................................................................................................
the Recall List 248
Pathology/Radiology
.........................................................................................................................................................
Recalls (Investigation Action List) 248
21 Scanning
................................................................................................................................... 250
Attachments
......................................................................................................................................................... 250
Scanning .................................................................................................................................................. 251
The Attachments
..................................................................................................................................................
Window 251
Searching ..................................................................................................................................................
for Attachment 255
Image Pro
.........................................................................................................................................................
Setup 257
FTP Server..................................................................................................................................................
Installation 257
Registration
..................................................................................................................................................
and Configuration 263
Using Image
.........................................................................................................................................................
Pro 266
Scanning ..................................................................................................................................................
from Within Genie 266
Batch Processing
.................................................................................................................................................. 267
Image Pro
.........................................................................................................................................................
Troubleshooting 269
Scanner..................................................................................................................................................
Issues 269
Unable to ..................................................................................................................................................
make FTP Connection 270
Permission..................................................................................................................................................
Errors (Mac Only) 271
FTP Errors.................................................................................................................................................. 272
22 Tasks ................................................................................................................................... 273
Part VII Clinical 276

1 The Main
...................................................................................................................................
Page 277
Using the
.........................................................................................................................................................
Display Area 279
Using the
.........................................................................................................................................................
Contact List 280
2 The Other
...................................................................................................................................
Page 281
3 Consultation
...................................................................................................................................
Notes 283
4 The Tools
...................................................................................................................................
Menu 290
IV © 2005-2009 Genie Solutions Pty Ltd

5 Specifying
...................................................................................................................................
a Fee to Charge 295
6 Prescribing
................................................................................................................................... 296
Prescription
.........................................................................................................................................................
Display 296
Button Description
......................................................................................................................................................... 298
Adding a.........................................................................................................................................................
New Prescription 300
Searching.........................................................................................................................................................
Prescriptions 305
Printing .........................................................................................................................................................
a Prescription to Multiple Patients 307
7 Recalls ................................................................................................................................... 309
8 Disease...................................................................................................................................
Register 310
9 Diabetes...................................................................................................................................
Care Status (EPC Summary) 314
10 Checklists
................................................................................................................................... 315
Creating.........................................................................................................................................................
a Checklist 315
Linking a.........................................................................................................................................................
Checklist to a Procedure 317
Using Checklists
.........................................................................................................................................................
within a Consultation 318
11 Pathology
...................................................................................................................................
and Radiology 318
Ordering.........................................................................................................................................................
Pathology 319
Ordering.........................................................................................................................................................
Radiology 321
Selecting
.........................................................................................................................................................
the Results Format 323
Importing
.........................................................................................................................................................
Downloaded Results 324
The Downloaded
.........................................................................................................................................................
Results List 326
Matching.........................................................................................................................................................
and Linking Results to Patients 327
Other Buttons
......................................................................................................................................................... 330
12 Reviewing
...................................................................................................................................
Correspondence 331
13 Procedures
................................................................................................................................... 332
Adding a.........................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 332
Pending.........................................................................................................................................................
Procedures 334
The Procedure
.........................................................................................................................................................
Window 335
Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................
Templates 338
Printing .........................................................................................................................................................
an Audit Report 339
Conversion
.........................................................................................................................................................
Ratios 340
14 Images ................................................................................................................................... 342
Attaching
.........................................................................................................................................................
Images 342
Viewing .........................................................................................................................................................
Images 343
15 Offsite Logging
................................................................................................................................... 346
Copying.........................................................................................................................................................
the Data File from the Server 347
Running.........................................................................................................................................................
an Offsite Log 348
Importing.........................................................................................................................................................
Logs 349
Limitations
......................................................................................................................................................... 350
16 Synchronising
...................................................................................................................................
With iCal/Outlook 352
Part VIII Practice Management 356

1 Maintenance
...................................................................................................................................
and Reports 356
The General
.........................................................................................................................................................
Page 356
The Daily.........................................................................................................................................................
Page 358
The Monthly
.........................................................................................................................................................
Page 360
The Practice
.........................................................................................................................................................
Analysis Page 364
The Administrator
.........................................................................................................................................................
Page 368
Other Reports
.........................................................................................................................................................
Page 370
The Disease
.........................................................................................................................................................
Coding & Data Conversion Pages 372
2 Archiving
................................................................................................................................... 372
3 Queries...................................................................................................................................
& Searches 374
The Query
.........................................................................................................................................................
Editor 374
Simple Queries
......................................................................................................................................................... 375
Wild Card
.........................................................................................................................................................
Searches 377
© 2005-2009 Genie Solutions Pty Ltd V

Searching
.........................................................................................................................................................
Across Related Tables 378
Saving a.........................................................................................................................................................
Query for Reuse 379
ICPC and.........................................................................................................................................................
ICD10 Searches 380
Searching
.........................................................................................................................................................
Attachments/Images 382
4 Quick Reports
................................................................................................................................... 383
Report Builder
......................................................................................................................................................... 383
Saving/Loading
.........................................................................................................................................................
Reports 390
Quick Report
.........................................................................................................................................................
Editor (Expert Mode) 390
5 Email ................................................................................................................................... 390
Setup ......................................................................................................................................................... 391
Encryption
.........................................................................................................................................................
and Keys 394
Windows ..................................................................................................................................................
Setup 395
Macintosh ..................................................................................................................................................
Setup 396
Creating/Acquiring
..................................................................................................................................................
Keys 396
Encrypting/Decrypting
..................................................................................................................................................
Emails 398
6 Updates................................................................................................................................... 399
Automated
.........................................................................................................................................................
"Special Menu" Update 399
Manual "Special
.........................................................................................................................................................
Menu" Update 400
Web Update
......................................................................................................................................................... 401
7 Import/Export
...................................................................................................................................
Genie Data 402
Part IX Technical Reference 406

1 4D Tools
................................................................................................................................... 406
Recover.........................................................................................................................................................
By Tags 406
Macintosh .................................................................................................................................................. 406
Windows .................................................................................................................................................. 409
2 Network...................................................................................................................................
Troubleshooting 411
Error -10002
......................................................................................................................................................... 412
Error - 10030/10001
......................................................................................................................................................... 416
Macintosh......................................................................................................................................................... 416
Windows......................................................................................................................................................... 421
Troubleshooting
.........................................................................................................................................................
Check List 425
3 Error 9913
...................................................................................................................................
SOAP Server not Reachable 426
4 Optimising
...................................................................................................................................
Genie Server 426
Assigning
.........................................................................................................................................................
CPU Priorities 427
Adjusting
.........................................................................................................................................................
The Memory Cache 428
5 Advanced
...................................................................................................................................
Configuration 429
Running.........................................................................................................................................................
2 Instances of Genie Server (Mac) 429
Running.........................................................................................................................................................
2 Instances of Genie Server (Windows) 431
Index 435
VI © 2005-2009 Genie Solutions Pty Ltd

Part
I
Introduction
Genie Manual Introduction:
1 Introduction
This manual is intended for use with Genie Version 7 and above. We are regularly adding new features to the
program. New features added after the date your hard copy of the manual was issued are made available on our
web site, and as a pdf. The manual covers both the Windows and Macintosh versions of Genie, since the two
versions work in almost exactly the same way.
Keyboard Shortcuts
Where keyboard shortcuts have been documented, we have used the Windows terminology. Macintosh users
will need to translate the documented key to the Macintosh equivalent, as described below:
Windows Macintosh
Alt Option
Ctrl Command (The Apple Key)
Conventions
We have used a number of font conventions to distinguish various things to make it easier to determine whether
we are talking about a button, a menu item, a field etc.These are:
· Menu Items look like this Open > Appointments

· File paths look like this /Applications/Genie/Genie.app
· Buttons look like this Create Default
· Fields look like this Patients Surname
· Notes look like this This is important. Please read!
Dates and Times

When used on a network, Genie uses the Date and Time set on the server computer. If you find that the date
and time showing in the Appointments window is incorrect, then the only possible cause is that the Date and
Time is set incorrectly on the server. Make sure that you have set the AM and PM time correctly when setting the
time on the server.
1.1 Keyboard Shortcuts
Date Fields
The following keyboard shortcuts can be used for quickly jumping between dates when presented with a date
field
Change date to beginning of week W

Change date to end of week K
Change date to beginning of month M
Change date to end of month H
Change date to start of year Y
Change date to end of year R
2 © 2005-2009 Genie Solutions Pty Ltd

Genie Manual Introduction: Keyboard Shortcuts
Appointments
Open Appointments Ctrl + J
Find Appointment Ctrl + F
Find Appointments for Patient Ctrl + G
New Patient Ctrl + N
Go To Today Ctrl + T
Open Demographic Window Ctrl + E
Open Clinical Window Ctrl + K
Delete Appointments Ctrl + D
Toggle View Ctrl + Y
Print Ctrl + P
Put in Waiting Room Ctrl + M
Invoice Ctrl + I
Receipt Ctrl + R
View Account History Ctrl + H
Print Blank DB4 Ctrl + L
Select a Letter Template Ctrl + Shift/Cmd + T
Move to Different Dr's View Alt + Right Arrow/Left Arrow
Open a Doctor's Preferences Alt - Click on Name Tab
Move an Appointment Alt - Click and Drag
Patient List
© 2005-2009 Genie Solutions Pty Ltd 3

Open Patient List Ctrl + O

Find Patient Ctrl + F
New Patient Ctrl + N
Show All Patients Ctrl + G
Delete Record Ctrl + D
Print Patient List Ctrl + P
Sort a Column Click on Header
Select All Ctrl + A
Select Multiple Contiguous Records Shift - Click
Select Multiple Non-Contiguous Records Ctrl - Click
Invoice Ctrl + I
Receipt Ctrl + R
Account History Ctrl + H
Search with Query Editor Ctrl + S
Select a Letter Template Ctrl + Shift/Cmd+ T

Clinical Window - General

Pathology Request Ctrl + L
Radiology Request Ctrl + U
Create a Letter Ctrl + R
Select a Letter Template Ctrl + T
Open Images Window Ctrl + I
Move to next/previous page Alt + R Arrow/L Arrow
Create a New Task Ctrl + Shift + T
Clinical Window - Summary Page

Add a Prescription Ctrl + M
Print Selected Prescriptions Ctrl + P
Delete Selected Prescription/s Ctrl + D
Add Medication without doses Alt - Click on Add button
Select/deselect all prescriptions Alt - Click on Print button
Back-date a prescription Alt+Ctrl - Click Print button
Clinical Window - Notes Page

Delete Selected Item Ctrl + D
Toggle between windows Ctrl + Z
Pathology & Radiology

Match Ctrl + M
Link Ctrl + L
Unlink Ctrl + U
Print Ctrl + P
Edit Patient Ctrl + E
Invoice Window
Add New Item Ctrl + N
Self Ctrl + 1
Bulk Bill Ctrl + 2
DVA Ctrl + 3
Workcover Ctrl + 4
Other Ctrl + 5
Select Provider in New Item Window Up/Down Arrow Keys
Use Health Fund Schedule Ctrl + P

General
OK or Save Button Enter or Return
Cancel Button Escape
Removing an Item from a Drop-down Menu Alt - select
Wildcard Character for searches (to represent one of @
many characters)
Select/deselect a checkbox Spacebar
Quit the Program Ctrl + Q

Part
II
Hardware Requirements
Genie Manual Hardware Requirements:
2 Hardware Requirements
The following sections outline the current system requirements for Genie. It is intended only as a guide to assist
practices in identifying and planning for the upgrade and purchase of equipment required to run Genie in their
practice.
Practices should always seek independent advice from a suitably qualified IT consultant due to the individual
nature of business networks and the importance of computer and network reliability.
2.1 Server Machine

The MINIMUM specification is provided to indicate the lowest possible requirement at which Genie will run. The
program may not perform adequately at this level and you may experience lock-ups and Genie may quit
unexpectedly.
The RECOMMENDED specification indicates the requirements to allow Genie to run at its best. You should
always consult a computer technician if unsure about the specifications of your existing hardware or
requirements of other software which may be running on your system
NOTE: THE SERVER MACHINE MUST BE RUN AS A DEDICATED DATABASE SERVER. THE SERVER
CANNOT BE USED AS A WORKSTATION.
SERVER Machine (Windows) SERVER Machine (Macintosh)

ITEM Minimum Recommended Minimum Recommended
Specifications Specifications Specifications Specifications
Operating Windows 2000 Windows 2000 ProfessionalMac OSX 10.3# Mac OSX 10.4# (Tiger) or
System Professional Windows 2003 Server (Panther) 10.5 (Leopard)
Windows 2003 Server Windows XP Professional
Windows XP ProfessionalWindows Vista Ultimate
Windows Vista
Business
Processor Intel PIII 500Mhz or Intel Pentium IV or 700Mhz Power PC Power PC G5 or better
equivalent higher or equivalent G4 or better
RAM 1GB 2GB 1GB 2GB
CD ROM Standard High performance (32x Standard SuperDrive (DVD-R/CD-
or above) RW)
Monitor SVGA graphics card and 15" monitor, running Built in monitor or Apple compatible display
a resolution of at least 800x600 at 16 bit running at a resolution of 800x600 or better.
colour (or better).
Printer Any Windows supported printer. Not Any post script printer capable of printing natively
recommended on a dedicated database under Mac OSX. Not recommended on a
server. If printer is required it may be shared dedicated server. If a printer is required, it may
over the network. be shared over the network.
Backup CD-R/RW, DVD, Zip, or removable hard disk CD-R/RW, DVD, Zip, or removable hard disk
Media drives. drives.
Network Support for TCP/IP protocol and network card Support for TCP/IP protocol and network card
rated at 10/100 Mbps CAT 5 cabling rated at 10/100 Mbps CAT 5 cabling (100Mbps)
(100Mbps) or equivalent wireless network or equivalent wireless network adapter.
adapter.
Modem/ Broadband internet connection for pathology Broadband internet connection for pathology and
Internet and radiology downloads. HIC online cannot radiology downloads. HIC online cannot be run
be run from a dedicated database server. from a dedicated database server.
Scanner Scanners should not be installed on the Scanners should not be installed on the server.
server. Install your scanner on a client Install your scanner on a client machine.
machine.

Genie Manual Hardware Requirements: Server Machine
# There are two types of Mac Operating System: "Mac OSX" and "Mac OSX Server". Mac OSX is a satisfactory
operating system to run Genie Server. Mac OSX Server is only suitable if you have a qualified Apple system
administrator.

Genie Manual Hardware Requirements: Client Machine
2.2 Client Machine

unexpectedly.
PLEASE NOTE: HIC ONLINE DOES NOT YET WORK WITH JAVA VERSION 1.6
CLIENT Machine (Windows) CLIENT Machine (Macintosh)

Item Minimum Recommended Minimum Recommended
Specification Specification Specification Specification
Operating Windows 2000 Windows 2000 Mac OSX 10.3 Mac OSX 10.4 (Tiger)
System Professional, XP Professional, XP (Panther) or 10.5 (Leopard)
Professional or Professional or Windows
Windows Vista Vista Ultimate
Business
Processor Intel PIII 500Mhz or Intel Pentium IV or higher 700Mhz Power PC Power PC G5 or better
equivalent or equivalent G4 or better
RAM 1GB 1GB or more 1GB 1GB or more
CD ROM Standard High performance (32 x Standard SuperDrive (DVD-R/
speed or above) CD-RW)
Monitor SVGA graphics card and 15" monitor, running a Built in monitor or Apple compatible display
resolution of at least 1024x768 at 16 bit colour (or running at a resolution of 1024x768 or
better). Resolution of at least 1280x854 required to better. Resolution of at least 1280x854
run in 'wide screen' mode. required to run in 'wide screen' mode.
Printer Any Windows supported printer. If printer is required Any post script printer capable of printing
it may be shared over the network. natively under Mac OSX. If a printer is
required, it may be shared over the
network.
Backup Backups should be performed on the Server Backups should be performed on the
Media machine. Server machine.
Network Support for TCP/IP protocol and network card rated Support for TCP/IP protocol and network
at 10/100 Mbps CAT 5 cabling (100Mbps) or card rated at 10/100 Mbps CAT 5 cabling
equivalent wireless network adapter. (100Mbps) or equivalent wireless network
adapter.
Modem/ Hayes compatible 56K internal or external modem Hayes compatible 56K internal or external
Internet can be used however a broadband internet modem can be used however a broadband
connection for software updates and HIC Online is internet connection for software updates
recommended. and HIC Online is recommended.
Scanner TWAIN compliant scanner, capable of scanning TWAIN compliant scanner, capable of
TIFF and JPEG images. Scanning via Citrix and scanning TIFF and JPEG natively under
Terminal Services sessions is not supported. Mac OSX.

Genie Manual Hardware Requirements: Single User
2.3 Single User

unexpectedly.
SINGLE USER (Windows) SINGLE USER (Macintosh)

Item Minimum Recommended Minimum Recommended
Specification Specification Specifications Specifications
Operating Windows 2000 Windows 2000 Mac OSX 10.3 Mac OSX 10.4 (Tiger)
System Professional, XP Professional, XP (Panther) or 10.5 (Leopard)
Professional or Professional or Windows
Windows Vista Vista Ultimate
Business
Processor Intel PIII 500Mhz or Intel Pentium IV or 700Mhz Power PC G4 Power PC G5 or better
equivalent higher or equivalent or better
RAM 1GB 1GB or more 1GB 1GB or more
CD ROM Standard High performance (32 x Standard SuperDrive (DVD-R/
speed or above) CD-RW)
Monitor SVGA graphics card and 15" monitor, running a Built in monitor or Apple compatible display
resolution of at least 1024x768 at 16 bit colour running at a resolution of 1024x768 or better.
(or better). Resolution of 1280x854 required to Resolution of 1280x854 required to run in 'wide
run in 'wide screen' mode. screen' mode.
Printer Any Windows supported printer. If printer is Any post script printer capable of printing
required it may be shared over the network. natively under Mac OSX. If a printer is required,
it may be shared over the network.
Backup CD-R/RW, Zip, or removable hard disk drives. CD-R/RW, Zip, or removable hard disk drives.
Media
Modem/ Hayes compatible 56K internal or external Hayes compatible 56K internal or external
Internet modem can be used however a broadband modem can be used however a broadband
internet connection for software updates and HIC internet connection for software updates and
Online is recommended. HIC Online is recommended.
Scanner TWAIN compliant scanner, capable of scanning TWAIN compliant scanner, capable of scanning
TIFF and JPEG images. TIFF and JPEG natively under Mac OSX.

Part
III
Backups
Genie Manual Backups:
3 Backups
What is a Backup?
A backup is a copy of your important information which is:
1. Geographically remote from the original

2. Able to be re-installed onto another computer
In Genie’s case the important data is all held in the Genie data file. If you are scanning letters or storing photos,
then these files are held in the Images folder. Ideally, you should have serial backups. That is, you should have
backups for each day for the previous week, and then one permanently stored backup for each week. This is
because it may take some time before you realise that a record is missing or that the data file is corrupted. You
need to be able to look at the state of your data file at various times in the past. If you overwrite each day’s
backup then you lose this ability.
What to Backup?
On Single User or Server machine:
· Genie data files
· Images folder
· Handouts folder (If you have handouts in Open > Patient Handouts)
Where and What are the Genie data files?

The Genie data files are installed in the Genie folder. If you are running Genie over a network then this is the
Genie folder on the server computer. The data files consist of two or more files:
· Genie.4DR which is a small resource file

· Genie.4DD which is the first segment of the main data file
If you have more than 2GB of data, you may also have additional data file segments:- one for each additional
2GB of data. These files are named:
· Genie.4DS
· Genie2.4DS
· Genie3.4DS
· etc
As listed above, you should backup all of these files, i.e. anything ending in .4DD, .4DR, or .4DS.
On Windows they should be found at: C:\Genie\, assuming that Genie is installed in the default location. It may
be installed on a different drive on your computer.
On Macintosh they should be found at: /Applications/Genie/
Note: Genie Solutions will not implement automated backup procedures on your computer network.
This is because we can’t physically check that these procedures continue to work correctly. If you want
to automate backups you must learn how to do it yourself so that you can recognise and fix it when it
breaks.
Let ’s be Brutally Frank...

It has been said that there are two kinds of people in the world. Those who have lost data and those who are
about to.
It is possible for the Genie data file to become irreparably damaged.

It is possible that the entire data file can be lost e.g. a hard drive failure.
You are responsible for the safe-keeping of your data file.

You are responsible for ensuring that backups are taking place and that they are completing successfully.
You should treat the data file like your first-born son. Gaze lovingly on it at the beginning and end of each day.
Know where it is at all times.
Genie does not move the data file. Ever.

If the data file cannot be found in the Genie folder, then Genie didn’t move it. A human did it.
In fact, Genie expects the data file to be in the same folder as the application. If it isn’t you will get a dialog box
when you open Genie, asking you to identify the location of the data file.
Do not move the Genie folder from it’s default install location i.e.the Applications folder on Macintosh, or the root
of a selected drive on Windows. If you can’t find your data file, then we don’t know where it is. We only know
where it should be, not where you or a member of your staff have moved it.
Backups are not difficult to perform. All you are required to do is copy a file from one place to another, or burn a
CD.
If you don’t know how to burn a CD, you should consult the instructions that came with your CD burning software
e.g. Nero or Toast. If you don’t understand these instructions, then it is unlikely that we will be able to explain it to
you any better over the phone, and therefore backups are likely to fail.
If there is no-one in the practice able and willing to perform and monitor backup procedures, then you should
arrange a support contract with a local organisation to do this for you.
If you are using Genie for patient billing then your data file is probably worth tens of thousands of dollars.
If you are using Genie to store your consultation notes, the value is infinitely more.
If you are sued without any consultation notes, then the case will be over before it begins.
Reality Check
Consider for a moment that your data file has gone. Damaged, lost, or deleted. You check your backup and find
that it either hasn’t been occurring, or the wrong file has been getting backed up for the past two years.
You didn’t realise that because you never checked before. Your guts are starting to churn a bit at this stage,and
then you realise that you have $100,000 in outstanding debts and no idea who owes it.
After you’ve choked that down, you also realise that anyone you’ve seen in the past two years can now sue you
with a guarantee of success. So you ring Genie Solutions to demand what the hell we’re going to do about it!
The answer is that, unfortunately there’s nothing we can do about it.
You can try various data recovery utilities like Norton Utilities. There are also some companies which specialise
in recovering files from damaged hard drives. They usually charge a minimum of $2,000 with no guarantee of
recovering anything.
The bottom line is that it’s your data and your responsibility.
At about this time you should be asking yourself: "Why on earth did I delegate the most important task in the
practice to someone who wasn’t capable and confident of performing it?"
It never ceases to amaze us how many practices have a technophobe performing the daily backups. It is a
recipe for disaster.
All we can do is reiterate that your data file is far more valuable than you probably realise. If you give
responsibility for it to someone who is out of their depth, then that is your choice and your responsibility.
Priorities
As in medical practice, disasters are usually the result of a string of minor, unrecognised mistakes.
· Don’t be blasé. When it comes to backups, paranoia is the correct state of mind.
· Learn how to burn a CD.
· The person in charge of backups must have a basic understanding of computer use.
· Backups need to be geographically remote from the original to be effective.
· If at any stage you can’t find your data file, tell someone!
· Read what the computer is telling you.
· THERE IS NO REASON TO EVER CREATE A NEW DATA FILE.
· When asked if you want to overwrite an existing file be very, very sure of what you are doing.
· Always backup before an update. We can make mistakes too!
· Make sure you are backing up the data file rather than the Genie application. There’s no point in backing up
the application because it can be re-installed from the Genie Install CD at any time.
Know where your data file is at all times!

Backup Media
There are several media you can backup to. Which one you decide on will depend on your own circumstances.
CD/DVD
This is probably the commonest solution in use. Writeable CD’s are now very cheap, about 50 cents each if you
buy in bulk. They are also reliable and you can “see” that the backup has been performed.
If you are using Genie to store your clinical notes then a CD backup is a must at least once a fortnight, even if
your daily backup is to some other media. This is because the medico-legal experts tell us that the only thing that
will replace written notes in court is a dated,signed and witnessed CD backup.
Although this has not yet been tested in court, anything else will not suffice. You have to be able to show that
your computerised records have not been modified since their creation.
Tape Drives
These are a matter of personal preference. They are great for quickly backing up entire drives. The problem is
that you can ’t check that the backup has occurred successfully without restoring the tape to the drive.
We don’t like them ourselves but we don’t recommend against them. Be guided by your hardware supplier.
Another Computer on the Network

This is not usually an ideal solution unless the computer holding the backup is a laptop which is taken offsite at
the end of the day. Otherwise, if the surgery burns down during the night you’ll lose both the data file and the
backup.
External Hard Drives

These are cheap, easy and fast and are especially good once your data file and images folder has outgrown a
DVD’s capacity of 4.4GB.
Archiving
As well as performing backups for emergencies, you should also be creating regular archives of your data and
application files.
This is essential if you are keeping computerised consultation notes, but also still a very good idea even if you
are not.
The archive must contain everything needed to open the data file in the same version of Genie. For example, if
you need to open a data file archived 2 years ago, then you really need to open it in the version of Genie you
were using at the time.
On Macintosh, you need to archive:

· Genie - the single user application (lamp)
· Genie.4DD, Genie.4DR, and any Genie<N>.4DS files - the data files
On Windows, you need to archive:

· The Solo Application folder from within the Genie folder.
· Genie.4DD, Genie.4DR, and any Genie<N>.4DS files
Burning these files to a CD, and dating, signing and witnessing it will make it as medicolegally valid as possible,
and will allow you to see the state of your data file at the time the CD was created.
Do not write on CDs with an ordinary oil pen. It can soak through and destroy the CD. There are special pens for
writing on CDs.
Do not write directly on the CD with a biro. This can also scratch the reflective surface and render it unreadable.

Genie Manual Backups: Automated Backup
3.1 Automated Backup

This process configures the automated backup features built in to Genie Server. Once configured, your Genie
data files (i.e. Genie.4DD, Genie.4DR, and any Genie<N>.4DS files) will be saved as a one or more backup
files:
· If you have less than 2GB of data, the backup file will be called Genie[XXXX].4BK.
· If you have more than 2GB of data, there will be two or more backup files (each file holds up to 2GB of data).
These files are named Genie[XXXX-0001].4BK, Genie[XXXX-0002].4BK, etc.
The "XXXX" above represents the backup run number (a sequential number that increments with each backup
run), i.e. 0001, 0002, etc.
Note: This procedure does NOT backup your Images folder. You must back up your Images folder
separately.
The images folder can be found in the following locations:
On Windows the images folder should be found at: C:\Genie\Images on the SERVER, assuming that Genie is
installed in the default location. It may be installed on a different drive on your computer.
On Macintosh the images folder should be found at: /Applications/Genie/Images on the SERVER, assuming that
Genie is installed in the default location. It may be installed on a different drive on your computer.
Important: Due to the nature of this procedure, the most computer literate person in your practice
should follow these instructions. While simple to follow, the implications of getting this wrong can be
devastating.
On your Genie Server:

1. From the File menu select "Backup" i.e. File > Backup. The following window should open:
2. Click the Preferences button. The following window should appear:

3. Set up as above and then select the folder which will store your back up data file by clicking on the button with
three dots in the Backup File Destination Folder section. A browse window will appear, as shown below, from
which you can navigate to and choose a folder in which to save the backup files.
4. Access the scheduler options by clicking the Scheduler menu item on the left under configuration. In the
window displayed below, enter appropriate settings for your practice.
5. Access the back up preferences by selecting the Backup menu item on the left. The settings shown below are

suitable for most practices.
6. Access the Restore settings by clicking the menu item on the left. Ensure the three tick boxes are unchecked.
7. Click the OK button to save these settings.

8. Click the Backup button to start the initial backup. A progress window will appear.
9. Once this process has completed you will be returned to the main Genie Server window. The next scheduled

backup time should be displayed in this window.

Genie Manual Backups: Restoring A Backup
3.2 Restoring A Backup

This process takes a 4D Backup file and restores it into a folder containing the Genie data files i.e. Genie.4DD,
Genie.4DR, and any Genie<N>.4DS files. It assumes that you have been using the built in automation
procedures as outlined in the previous section, and you are set as the administrator of Genie.
1. Ask your clients to log off, then Quit Genie Server.

2. On your server, open Genie single user:
a) On a Mac it is situated: /Applications/Genie/Genie
b) On a PC it is situated: C:\Genie\Solo Application\Genie.exe
3. From the File Menu, select Maintenance & Reports i.e. File > Maintenance & Reports
4. Select the Administrator tab at the top of the screen.
5. Click the Restore a Backup button.
6. You will be prompted to select a 4D backup file. If your backups are less than 2GB in size, it will be in the
format Genie[XXXX].4BK, otherwise it will be in the format Genie[XXXX-0001].4BK. The backups will be
located in the backup folder you have specified as outlined in the Automated Backup section
7. A folder will be created in the same folder as the Genie[XXXX{-0001}].4BK file called Genie[XXXX{-
0001}].4BK-Restore. This contains your restored Genie data files i.e. Genie.4DD, Genie.4DR and any
Genie<N>.4DS files.
8. Close the Maintenance & Reports window and Quit Genie.
9. Move the restored Genie data files i.e. Genie.4DD, Genie.4DR, and any Genie<N>.4DS files to your Genie
folder, replacing any files with the same name (i.e. the corrupted data files that you no longer want)
10.Start Genie single user and ensure the restored database opens and contains the expected information.
11.Quit Genie single user.
12.Restart Genie Server, selecting Genie.4DD if prompted for a data file.
Your Genie data files should now be successfully restored.
Note: If your data file is missing or too corrupted to open the single user version of Genie to perform the
restore operation, you can download a simple 4D restore utility for your required platform (Mac or
Windows) from here:
4DRestore for Mac

4D Restore for Windows

Part
IV
Overview
Genie Manual Overview:
4 Overview
The following section outlines the function of each of the main menus within Genie.
4.1 The File Menu
MIMS Information
Displays the version of MIMS that is currently loaded into Genie and its Disclaimer.
Contact Genie Support

Selecting this option opens a window to allow you to contact Genie Support by Email, through Genie directly, or
Save to Disk to attach to an email or to Print and fax this information.
You can use this Contact method to submit Feature Requests/General Queries or if you tick I am experiencing a
problem with Genie then you will be presented with more options in regards to Bugs/Errors.
This is the preferred option for contacting Genie Support as it provides us with information about your practice
like your GEN number, the version of Genie you are currently using and the platform it is being used on.

Genie Manual Overview: The File Menu
User Preferences
Opens the Preferences record for your current login name.
See User Preferences for more information.
All User Preferences

Opens a window listing the Preferences records for all users, allowing you to double-click to open and edit a
particular user’s Preferences.
It also allows you to specify which days a user works and so which days to display them in the appointment book
for. This option is only available to users with the ability to Modify Other Users' Preferences set in the Security
tab of their own User Preferences.
See Security for more information.
Printing Preferences
Opens the Printing Preferences for the current computer.
See Printing Preferences for more information.
Practice Preferences
Opens a list of Practice Preferences allowing you to double-click on a record to edit the Practice Preferences.
See Practice Preferences for more information.
Maintenance & Reports

Opens the Maintenance window.
See Maintenance & Reports for more information.
Set Administrator
Allows the current Administrator to assign the job to someone else.
Add or Change User

Opens the Login window allowing you to log back in as a different user, change passwords, or add or delete
users from the database.
Change Practice
This item will be enabled if you have more than one Practice Preferences record. It allows you to change to
another practice’s settings, in particular a different letterhead if you need to create some invoices under a
different practice name.
Changing to a different practice only has an effect on the current computer. Other users on the network are
unaffected.
Quick Reports
See Quick Reports for more information.
Import and Export

See Import and Export for more information.
Connections
Allows the setup of automatic exchange of new and modified demographic data with other applications.
Import Lab Demographics

Some pathology providers will provide you with a text file of your patient demographics for those patients seen in

Genie Manual Overview: The File Menu
the previous 12 months for example. They usually provide this in a specific DOS-based format, which cannot be
imported using File > Import.
Ask your pathology provider to supply the information in the same format as used by Medical Director.
Execute Command
This item opens a window which allows you to enter lines of code to manipulate data in your database. This
should only be used under instructions from the Genie Support line.
Start Offsite Logging

Can be used to start offsite logging if it has either ceased for any reason or if you don't have your Preferences
set up to automatically start logging when you launch Genie.
See Offsite Logging for more information.
Import Offsite Log

Used to manually import Offsite Logs, if needed. See Offsite Logging for more information.
Register
Allows you to register Genie and allow access to all functions by entering an unlock code.
Set Practice Type

This allows you to specify the type of practice. Genie then automatically displays different information and
switches on some features and functions required by that type of practice.
Quit (Windows)
Quits Genie. This is the preferred method for exiting Genie on Windows computer. Clicking on the cross (or x) in
the top right of the screen is not advised as it doesn't allow the database exit routines to run. This can cause
unnecessary bloating of the database over time.
Note: This option will not appear on a Macintosh.

To quit Genie on a Mac:
· Select Quit from the Genie Client menu i.e. Genie Client > Quit
· Select Quit from the Genie menu i.e. Genie > Quit
4.2 The Open Menu
Patients
Opens the Patient's List. Inactive patients will display in grey. Flagged patients will display in red. Right clicking
on a Patients name in this window will display a drop down menu allowing you to quickly perform common tasks
(e.g. open the patients demographic window, invoice or receipt a patient, or open their clinical record). To print a

Genie Manual Overview: The Open Menu
list of patients, see the Report Builder section.
Appointments
Opens the Appointment book.
For more information on using the Appointment book, please refer to the Appointments section.
Address Book
Holds all your addresses for Specialist and GP's.
The Merge button allows you to merge two address book records. Highlight the two records whilst holding the
Ctrl key.
The Download Genie Users button allows you download the addresses of other Genie users in your state who
have registered on our Web Service. Once you have downloaded this list, clicking on the Display Genie Users
button will display just this list.
The Web Upload button allows you to upload your address book to the Genie Solutions Web Server so that
other Genie users can download a doctor database into their address book. The Web Download button allows
you to download specific doctors or doctors from a specific postcode etc into your own address book from the
doctor database that is populated by other Genie users on the Genie Web Server. They will then be marked as
Web Import in their address book entry.
The Text Search button allows you to perform a free text search for any word or phrase contained anywhere in
address book records.
New records can be added via the Blue Plus sign.

Enter in the Doctor's details and assign their appropriate Category and/or Specialty. This is particularly relevant
for your Anaesthetists if you wish to reference them in your Procedure records. Assistants need to have the
Assists at Operations tickbox ticked at top right of the window so they can be referenced in Procedures and
billing.
The symbol allows you to locate the address on Google Maps.
The Correspondence tab allows you to enter the Doctor's preferred method of communication details if they use
a Third Party Carrier to send and receive correspondence. Additionally, you can enter in the Doctor's Carrier

Identifiers in this window.
Tasks
Tasks allow you to communicate internally with other users.
For more information see Tasks in the Reception Module.
Email
Opens the Email module within Genie.
For more information on using Email within Genie, please refer to the Email section.
Procedures
Displays a list of patients who have Procedure created for them.
For more information on Procedures, please refer to the Procedures chapter.
Outgoing Letters
Accesses the Review Correspondence window so you can review your outgoing letters before they are sent to
the recipient. See Reviewing Correspondence in the Clinical Section
Incoming Letters
Accesses your letters that have come in from other providers via 3rd party carriers such as Healthlink etc. so you
can check and link them. See Checking Imported Letters in the Electronic Correspondence section.
Importing Transcribed Letters

Opens the Import Letters window which allows you to import remotely typed letters. See Importing Remotely
Typed Letters in the Patient Correspondence section.
Correspondence Log
Keeps track of all incoming and outgoing letters sent electronically via a third party. See Electronic

Correspondence.
Account Holders
Opens up the Account Holders window.
This displays a list of all patients and organisations who have had an Account created for them.
Before a Health Fund or Organisation can be billed, they must have an Account Holder record.
To create a new Account Holder you need to click on the Blue Plus sign which opens the window below.
The Update Balance button can be used in situations in which a patient's account displays an outstanding
balance, yet you know that this is not true. Clicking on the Update Balance button refreshes the account
balance for that account holder.
You can specify which fee schedule an organisation uses when billing by selecting it from one of the two drop
down menus at the bottom right of the window.
You can Blacklist a patient, which prevents an appointment being made for them, by double clicking on their
name in the Account Holders window and ticking the Blacklist checkbox.

Employers
Displays a list of all Employers.
These records are typically created via Workcover claims.

For more information on Workcover claims, please refer to Invoicing Workcover.
Bank Accounts
Provides a list of all Bank Accounts entered into Genie.
This window allows you to edit the details of pre-existing Bank Accounts, as well as Add or Delete
Bank Accounts.
Account Messages
Allows you to set the Account Messages which will be displayed on overdue invoices.
Billing Items
Opens the Billing Items window. To see how to print a list of Private fees, see the Report Builder section. For
information on how to set or increase fees, see Increasing Fees. For importing Health Fund Fees, see Private
Health Fund Fees.

For more information, please refer to Pathology and Radiology Results.

Investigations Action List

Allows you to deal with Patients' pathology results.
For more information, please refer to Pathology Recalls.
Investigations Audit
All Pathology and Radiology requests which are printed from Genie are recorded in this window.
On a regular basis you should check that your requested tests have been performed by clicking on the Audit
button. Genie will then check each request for a matching result. For requests which don't have a matching
result, it should be assumed that the patient hasn't had the requested test performed, and should be followed up
as appropriate.
Note: This audit only checks Pathology requests, NOT Radiology requests.
Additionally, you can re-print any tests which have been ordered (e.g. the patient loses the request form), by
double clicking on the patients name and clicking on the Reprint button.
Patient Handouts
Allows you to store patient handouts (e.g patient information sheets) which have been created in another
program (e.g. Microsoft Word), on either the Client machine or on the Server. Storing the handout on the Server

will allow all users to have access to the handout, while storing the handout on the Client only allows access
from that machine. Documents need to be saved in the Handouts folder within the Genie folder on either
machine.
Genie Message Board

Opens a window displaying all messages posted in the last 24 hours. To subscribe to the Genie Message Board,
go to www.geniesolutions.com.au.
Double clicking on a message will take you directly to that post in the Forum. If you have not recently logged
onto the Forum, you will be required to do so.
Right clicking on the message will allow you to either view the full message in a separate window, or to open the
message board log in window.
MIMS Quarterly
Provided you have a current subscription with MIMS, this opens the MIMS Quarterly allowing you to search for
specific drug information, without having to access a clinical file.
MIMS Annual
Provided you have a current subscription with MIMS, this opens the MIMS Annual providing more detailed drug
information.
NPS RADAR Documents

Provides evidence-based information on new drugs, research and PBS listings and is published by the National
Prescribing Service (NPS), for health professionals.
IVF Treatment Cycles

Becomes active when your Practice Type is set to Obs/Gynae/IVF Specialist.
Day Surgery Admissions

Becomes active when your Practice Type is set to Day Surgery.

Genie Manual Overview: The Records Menu
4.3 The Records Menu
]The items in this menu allow you to manipulate the records of the table currently on display.
Note: This menu is not available from the Appointments screen.
Find, New and Delete

Self-explanatory.
Use Selected
Use Selected reduces the records on display to just those which are highlighted. You would typically use this
when sending a merged letter to a group of patients. Suppose you want to send a letter to everyone of a
particular age. You would do a Search using Records > Search to find the relevant patient records.
There may be 500 records found but you want to send them out in batches. Initially you may only want to send it
to those patients whose surname begins with “A ”. In this case, you would highlight that subsection of patients by
shift-clicking,and then choose Records > Use Selected so that now only that subsection of patients is on
display, and then select and print the letter.
Alternatively, you may want to print a label for John Smith. So you would do a find for “Smith J” and be presented
with perhaps 20 records. If you do a label while all 20 records are on display you will get a label for each of these
records. In this case, you would highlight the one record you want, select Records > Use Selected, and then
print the label.
View All Records

This will display all the records for the current table on display. Alternatively, you can use the View All Records
button.
Replace
Replace allows you to replace the contents or part of the contents of any field in all of the records currently on
display. This can be a very useful, but dangerous feature and should be used with care. Only the Administrator
has access to this feature.
Example 1: Merging Practices

Two doctors amalgamate their practices, but want to “own” their own patients whose records are going to be
imported from another software program. They decide to use the "Custom" field in Genie to specify which
patients belong to each doctor by putting their own initials into this field.
This would be very time-consuming to do it one by one into each record. A better way would be:
1. Import the first doctor’s records
2. Open the Patients list i.e. Open > Patients
3. Click OK to dismiss the search box
4. Click on the View All button to display all the patient records.

5. Select Records > Replace to open the Replace window.
6. The All Contents radio button is selected by default.

7. Click on the Field popup menu and select the Custom field.
8. Enter the initials of the first doctor in the Value area.
9. Click the Replace button.
10.You will be asked to confirm that you have the right field and value selected. If you are sure you’ve got it right,
click on the Replace button to go ahead with the replacement.
11.Import the second doctor ’s patient records.

12.Select Records > Search and search for records where the field Custom is not equal to “JS”. This will display
all the second doctor’s patients.
13.Use the Replace function again to add his initials to the Custom field of all the displayed records.
Example 2: Rename a Street

The local council, in its wisdom, decides to change the name of Bourbong Street back to its original, but
non-politically correct ,“Bourbon Street”.
1. Open the Patients list i.e. Open > Patients
2. Click OK to dismiss the search box
3. Click on the View All button to display all the patient records
Note: You could do a Search at this stage to find all patients where the Address Line 1 field contains
“Bourbong” but it’s not really necessary.
4. Select Records > Replace to open the Replace window.

5. Click on the Text string radio button, and enter “Bourbong” into the top value area.
6. Select Address Line 1 from the Field popup menu.
7. Enter “Bourbon” into the lower value area, then click the Replace button.
Sort
Sort allows you to perform multiple sorts on the records displayed.
To perform a simple sort e.g.by Date of Birth, click on the DOB header in the Patients list.
Find Duplicates
This allows you to find duplicate patient or address book records. You might use this after converting data from
another program where duplicate records may have been created.
Example: Find duplicate patient records

To ensure we don't assume that each patient has a unique full name, we will search on the Surname, First
Name and DOB fields.
1. Click the View All button to display all the records in the database.

Note: If you have very large patient database you may want to do this in sections. You could first find all
those patients whose surname begins with “A” for example.
2. Select Records > Find Duplicates to open the window shown here.
3. Select Surname from the popup menu, then click the Search button. This will display all records where more
than one patient has the same surname. If you started with 10,000 records you’ll probably still have about
8,000 records on display.
4. Repeat the above steps using the First Name and DOB fields to progressively narrow the search. When
finished, if there are any duplicate records in the database they will be displayed on screen.
5. Highlight the offending records and merge them using the Patients > Merge Patients menu item.
See the chapter on The Patients Menu for more information for more information on merging..
4.4 The Billing Menu
Invoice, Receipt and Account History

See the relevant chapters for more information.
Receipt by Invoice Number

This allows you to receipt by searching on the Invoice number rather than first finding the correct patient or
Account Holder.
Quick History
This will display a list of all items billed to the highlighted patient during the past 12 months, including the number
of times it has been billed and the date it was last billed.
This is useful for those Medicare item numbers which are only permitted to be billed a certain number of times in
any 12 month period.
Accept Deposit and List Deposits

See the chapter on Deposits for information.

Genie Manual Overview: The Billing Menu
Print Blank DB4

This will print a blank DB4 form for the highlighted patient.
This is useful for those bulk-billing practices where the patient takes the DB4 into the doctor’s room, where the
doctor will subsequently fill in the item number to charge and the patient can sign the form.
This does not create any billing records in Genie. The actual invoice to Medicare would subsequently still need to
be added to Genie at a later date. Since you already have a signed DB4, you would deselect the Medicare DB4
checkbox in Printing Preferences (File > Printing Preferences) to avoid printing out an unnecessary extra DB4
form.
Print Blank DB4 with Invoice

This does the same thing as the item above except that it also creates the invoice, provided the doctor selects to
Fill the Blank DB4 in the window that comes up when the doctor saves out of the clinical window. For more
information on how this works see Specifying a Fee to Charge in the Clinical section.
If the doctor does not use this feature then you would select Billing > Fill Blank DB4 Forms to enter the item
number to be charged, as per whatever the doctor has written on the blank DB4.
Fill Blank DB4 Forms

Used in conjunction with 'Print Blank DB4 with Invoice', as described above.
Selecting this option will open a list of Sale Items awaiting entry of an item number.
Double-click on each item to open and enter the item number.
Print Pathology DB4

This prints a pathology DB4 form to be sent to the pathology lab. For example, a specimen request, that the lab

Genie Manual Overview: The Billing Menu
has a signed DB4 form for the patient.
Edit Account Type Names

Allows you to edit the Account Type which can be assigned to Patient Accounts.
For setting the fee schedule for account types (other than for Medicare and DVA), see Increasing Fees.
4.5 The Patients Menu

The Patients menu is only available when the Patients List is open.
Find Family
This allows you to highlight one patient record and find other family members. The other family members must
have the same Account ID as the original patient. That is, they all have the same Account Holder.
Holding down the ALT key whilst selecting this menu item will display patients with the same Chart Number.
Holding down the Ctrl key whilst selecting this menu item will display patients with the same Medicare Number.
Find Birthdays
Displays patients whose birthdays fall within a specified date range.
Find Marked, Unmark All Mark Selection & Unmarked Selection

There is a field named Marked in each Patient record. It is a simple tick box which can be used for any purpose

Genie Manual Overview: The Patients Menu
you like.
These three commands can be useful during searches where you need to perform multiple searches on the
patient database.
After you have found a particular group of patients you may want to mark them using Patients > Mark
Selection.
This will give the Marked field a value of TRUE for all the displayed records. This allows you to come back at a
later time and find them again quickly using Patients > Find Marked.
Or you may want to perform a search where:
· Field X is equal to “Y” (e.g. Sex is equal to Male)

· Marked is equal to True.
Note: Before using the Marked field as a Search parameter, you should first select Unmark All in case
there are records already marked from a previous search.
Todays Appointments
Displays a list of patients who have an appointment on a date specified by you. This list can be used to aid in
typing reply letters.
Todays Consultations
This will display a list of patients who have consultation records on a date specified by you.
The next window displays a list of patients with the date of the last letter back to their referring doctor if
applicable.
The Letter Dictated box will be ticked if the doctor ticked this in the consult window (see Adding Consultation
Notes). It will also display whether the letter has been Reviewed/Printed (see Reviewing Correspondence) and
whether it has been sent successfully via a third party, if applicable.
Clicking on the Patients List button will display these records in the Patient List, allowing you to examine each
one if desired.

Letters Dictated Today

Displays a list of patients who have had a consultation and a letter dictated (as governed by the Letter Dictated
box being ticked in the consultation note) on the date specified. This aids in management of typing dictated reply
letters.
Letters for Displayed Patients
Cull Records
This will find all patient records who have not been seen within a certain time period. You will be prompted for
this time period.
This search is made using the Last Opened field. This field is given the value of the current date whenever the
Clinical window is opened and saved, or the patient is invoiced.
If any patient records are found, Genie will offer to mark them as Inactive, by giving the Inactive field a value of
TRUE. You can subsequently search on this field again to find all your inactive patients and perhaps delete
them.
Note: Genie will NEVER delete the records automatically.
In addition it is not possible to delete patient records with attached consultation notes or any billing. Therefore,
once you have a list of all the inactive patients displayed, you can highlight them all by selecting Edit > Select All
, and then clicking on the Delete button.
Genie will only delete those patient records which have no billing or notes attached.
Email Patient Record

Note: The Email Module must be setup in Genie in order for you to be able to Email Patient Records.
This item allows you to email the entire clinical record of the highlighted patient, to another Genie user. It will
create an email in Genie’s email module’s Out Box. The Subject is “Genie Transfer*-Record of X”.
When the intended recipient downloads the email into Genie, the attachments are automatically moved into a
folder called “Export” within the Genie folder.
If you are the recipient of an email with a subject, such as the above,you can import the patient record by
opening the Patients list, selecting File > Import, and clicking on the Genie Format button.
If you have downloaded the email into another email program, then you can still import it by creating a folder
called “Export” in the Genie folder, and then saving the attachments into this folder.
This method could be used as part of a referral to a specialist, or to transfer a patient record from one data file to

a remote data file used by someone in the same practice.
Limitations:
· The transfer can only be made between two Genie data files. It doesn’t work with other software programs.
· The procedure doesn’t check for a pre-existing record when importing the email attachments, so you could
end up with duplicated patient records.
Flagged Patients
Displays all patients who have been flagged, whether or not they are currently over-due for their flagged visit.
You can right click on a patient to unflag them or to access their clinical file
Add a Recall and Recalls Due

See the chapter on Recalls for information.
Review Correspondence
See the chapter on Review Correspondence for information.
Print Batch
See the chapter on Prescribing for information.
Print Prescriptions
This allows you to print certain prescriptions for a group of people eg. antibiotics for post surgery. Find the
people you want to print the scripts for, so that only those patients are on display. Once you select this item it will
ask which scripts you would like to print for the selected patients. The list you are presented with is the list of
scripts you have in your QuickScript menu.
Update Ages
Updates the patient Age field for each of the displayed patient records.
The Age field is automatically calculated from the Date of Birth when a patient record is created and is updated
whenever the Demographic or Clinical windows is opened.
Note: If a patient hasn’t been seen for some time, their recorded age will be incorrect. If you perform a
search based on ages then the results of your search will be inaccurate unless you perform this
function first.
Merge Patients
If you find you have inadvertently created two records for the one patient, highlight the two duplicate records and
then select Merge Patients. The information from the two records will be merged into one record. This procedure
will also combine all images and scanned documents for the two patients.

Note: To highlight two records, click on the first record and then either Shift-Click or Command-Click on
the second, so that both records remain highlighted.
Disease Register
Opens the Disease Register Module. See Disease Register in the Clinical module for more information.
Diabetes Care Status

See Diabetes Care Status in the Clinical module for more information
Item Register
Opens the Item Register Module for the patients on display in the Patients List. The Item Register allows for the
easy monitoring and tracking of how many times a patient has been billed a tracked item number. It is
particularly handy for items such as GP Management Plan items that can only be billed once a year. If searching
for certain patients only eg. >75years old then you would need to do the search in Open > Patients, Records >
Search first, before going to Patients > Item Register.
The Create a Recall button allows you to create a recall record for the highlighted patient.
The Show in Patients List button displays the highlighted patients records in the Patients window.
The Add Task button allows you to add a new task for the selected patient.
The Add Item to Track button allows you to add item numbers to the Register in order for them to be tracked.
Alternatively, you can right click in the column of an item number and add or delete items.
The date provided for each tracked item number refers to the last time this item number was billed to that
patient. The Item Register is particularly useful for allowing you to quickly see when a particular patient was last
billed that item number.
Overdue INR's
Displays a list of patients that are overdue for their INR. This is determined by the date that is entered in the Next
Test date field in the INR Control window in the clinical window (Tools > INR Control)
Pending Births
Displays all pending deliveries, based on records in the Pregnancies table. the pregnancies are displayed by
month (clicking on the month will display a drop down list allowing you to switch to a different month) and can be
viewed for one or all doctors in a practice. You can access a patients Pregnancy record by double clicking on the

patients name.
Clicking the 20 wks Due or 30 wks Due button will open a window displaying all patients who are either 18-22 or
28-32 weeks pregnant respectively, allowing you to send out the relevant invoice.
In order to generate an automated 20 or 30 week invoice, a fee needs to be entered into the Pregnancy record in
the 'Out of Pocket Expense' field in the 'Current Pregnancy' tab. The calculation of the 20 and 30 week invoices
are based on the Agreed EDD field. If no fees are entered into the 20 and 30 week fee fields, then Genie will
automatically calculate them at two-thirds and one-third respectively. Alternatively, you can enter the fees you
wish to charge into these fields.
You can create your 20/30 week item numbers in Open>Billing Items by clicking on the blue plus to add a new
item. Only an item number (eg. 20W & 30W) and description are required if you are splitting the fee 1/3, 2/3
otherwise enter the specified fee in private fee field. Alternatively, you can use the Medicare item eg. 15999.
You can allocate these item numbers through the Invoices Due window by clicking in the Item Number column
and typing the relevant items for 20 and 30 week fees beside the appropriate invoice. This only needs to be
done once.
Note: Unless the patient is between 18 and 22 weeks pregnant or 28 and 32 weeks pregnant, the
invoices will not appear when the 20 wks Due or 30 wks Due buttons are clicked on.
Overdue Smears
Displays all females aged between 20 and 70 (exclusive), who have not been marked as Inactive, and who have
not been marked as Don't Recall for smears in the Clinical window, and who have not had a recorded pap smear
in the past 2 years. For Pap Smears that need to be recalled more frequently than every two years, use the
Recall system.
Note: You need to be either downloading pap smear results electronically, or be manually entering the
dates of pap smears in the clinical record.

Immunisation Module
This opens the Immunisation window allowing you to track your immunisation rate and produce an ACIR report.
4.6 The Appts Menu
Sync with Outlook and iCal

Genie's Appointment Book, Tasks and Address Book can be synchronised with Apple's iCal and Address Book
applications, or with Outlook on Windows computer.Since these applications can be either published to the web,
or subsequently synced to a PDA, this means that it is possible for you to access your appointments and to do
lists from anywhere. Synchronisation occurs in both directions. That is, an appointment created or modified in
iCal or Outlook is subsequently created or modified in Genie.
For more information on the setup and limitations of synchronising please refer to the Synchronising with iCal/
Outlook section in the Clinical module.
Print
Prints out the Appointment page.
For more information, please refer to Printing the Appointment Page.
Appts Type Report

Produces a printed report by Appointment Type for any given day or period of time.
The report produces a numerical count of each appointment type where the appointment cell contains either a
patient or non patient appointment. This can also be accessed through File > Maintenance & Reports:

Genie Manual Overview: The Appts Menu
Appointments Report by Alt-clicking.
Find Appointment
Allows you to search for a specific patient, and locates all of their past and future appointments.
This is a useful feature if you need to find out if a particular patient has an upcoming appointment to see a
Doctor, as well as allowing you to see when they last had an appointment. If the patient is a new patient that has
yet to be entered into the database ie. has a non-patient appointment in brown text then you can still search this
by entering the name in the Notes field of the search box.
Find Appointment for Patient

Locates all appointments for the selected patient.
New Patient
Opens a New Patient Window.
Copy Patient
Copies the Surname, address and account holder details of the highlighted patient into a New Patient window.
This is useful if you need to create new records for multiple members of the same family as it saves you from

having to re-enter in all of their demographic information (providing that they all share the same address, etc).
Change Date
Allows you to change the date of the highlighted patient's appointment.
For more information, please refer to Moving/Copying Appointments.
Undelete
Allows you to Undelete any patient appointments which have been deleted in the past 7 days.
For more information, please refer to Deleting/Undeleting Appointments.
Check Forward Referrals

This allows you to check that future appointments in a specified time frame have valid referrals.
Check Missing Invoices

This will check that all appointments for the day have had an invoice processed for them.
Check Missing Consults

This will check that all appointments for the day have a consultation record with notes entered into the History
field.
Fill Down
Allows you to select and fill multiple cells, either with a patient's appointment, or with a Type. Insert either a
Patient appointment, or a type and highlight the number of cells you wish to fill. Select Appts > Fill Down and
the patients name or the Type will be filled into the selected cells, as well as grouped.
SMS & Email Reminders

Allows you to send either a SMS or Email reminder to patients regarding their appointment times.
The SMS or Email reminder includes information such as provider's name, appointment time and appointment
date. Additionally, you can enter a short message that will be included in either the SMS or Email reminder.
Please refer to Appointment Reminders for the setup and use of this function.

Pending Procedures
Displays a list of all patients with Procedures which have not yet been linked to an appointment time.
From this window you can open the original procedure and make any necessary changes.
For more information, please refer to the Procedure chapter.
Pre-op Notifications Check

Displays a list of patients who have upcoming procedures scheduled and provides a summary of items that need
to be checked for each procedure.
For more information, please refer to the Procedure chapter.
Print Theatre List

Prints a list of patients booked in for a specific hospital and provider.
For more information please refer to Printing Theatre Lists.
Waiting for Cancellation

Displays a list of patients marked as "Waiting for Cancellation".
For more information, please refer to Cancellation List.
Add a Recall
Allows you to add a recall for the patient selected.
For more information, refer to the Recalls chapter.
Recalls Due
Provides a list of patients with recalls overdue or due within 30 days.
For more information, refer to the Recalls chapter.
Review Correspondence
Opens up the Patient Correspondence window. This can also be accessed via the appointments page, using
the Patient Correspondence icon.

For more information on 'Review Correspondence' please refer to Reviewing Correspondence.
Ozescribe Export, Syberscribe Export & BDT Export

Opens the window which allows you to export documents to be typed by either Ozescribe, Syberscribe or BDT.
For more information on these services, please refer to Ozescribe, Syberscribe & BDT.

Preferences
Allows you to set your preferences for the Appointment book.
For more information, please refer to Appointment Preferences.
Pending Births
Displays all pending deliveries, based on records in the Pregnancies table. The pregnancies are displayed by
month and can be viewed for one or all doctors in a practice. You can access a patient's Pregnancy record by
double-clicking on the patient's name.
Clicking the 20 wks Due or 30 wks Due button will open a window displaying all patients who are either 18-22 or
28-32 weeks pregnant respectively, allowing you to send out the relevant invoice.
In order to generate an automated 20 or 30 week invoice, a fee needs to be entered into the Pregnancy record in
the 'Out of Pocket Expense' field in the 'Current Pregnancy' tab. The calculation of the 20 and 30 week invoices
are based on the Agreed EDD field. If no fees are entered into the 20 and 30 week fee fields, then Genie will
automatically calculate them at two-thirds and one-third respectively. Alternatively, you can enter the fees you
wish to charge into these fields.
You can create your 20/30 week item numbers in Open>Billing Items by clicking on the blue plus to add a new
item. Only an item number (eg. 20W & 30W) and description are required if you are splitting the fee 1/3, 2/3
otherwise enter the specified fee in private fee field. Alternatively, you can use the Medicare item eg. 15999.
You can allocate these item numbers through the Invoices Due window by clicking in the Item Number column
and typing the relevant items for 20 and 30 week fees beside the appropriate invoice. This only needs to be
done once.
Note: Unless the patient is between 18 and 22 weeks pregnant or 28 and 32 weeks pregnant, the
invoices will not appear when the 20 wks Due or 30 wks Due buttons are clicked on.

Genie Manual Overview: The Special Menu
4.7 The Special Menu
ImagePro Control
Opens the ImagePro Control window.
For more information on using ImagePro Control, please refer to the ImagePro chapter.
Software Updates
Connects you to the Genie Web Server to check what updates are available relevant to your state, platform and
Genie version. If an update that you require isn't listed, it means it is not yet available for your state, platform or
Genie version.

Ticking the Check for Updates tickbox will give you the option to have automated checks of software updates
either daily, weekly or monthly. This check occurs when the Administrator logs on. The above window will appear
if there are new updates available. The Check Now button checks for updates immediately.
Tick which updates you wish to install using the tickboxes at left then click the Install x Items button. If you
already have an update or don't require it you can tick the Done tickbox at right which will move it to the bottom
of the list until it is next uploaded.
Whenever an update is Installed, there is an option to Store and Activate the update at a later date.
These stored updates can be accessed through File > Maintenance & Reports > Monthly tab.
Below is a description of each of the updates available:
Genie Updater
Allows you perform incremental web updates of the Genie Software, in between receiving update CD's from
Genie Solutions.
Medicare Schedule
Downloads the Medicare Schedule.
DVA Specialist Schedule

Downloads the Specialist DVA Schedule.
MIMS Prescribing Data

Downloads the Full MIMS Data. You need to be registered with MIMS in order to use this data. Please contact
MIMS on (02) 9902 7700 in order to obtain registration. MIMS will be able to provide you with the password you
need to download the Data.

MIMS Data - Incremental

Downloads any incremental updates which may have occurred in between major updates.
ICPC2 Plus Codes

Downloads the ICPC2 Plus Codes.
You need to be subscribed to this service in order to access this coding system. Please use the subscription
form located in the Subscriptions folder, in the Genie folder.
ICD10 Codes
Downloads the ICD10 codes. This is included in the Genie SP package.
Health Funds
There are a variety of Health Funds that make their schedule available to us for download, they will be listed by
name in the software update window.
Workcover Schedules
Downloads the Workcover schedule.
NPS RADAR Files

Downloads the latest NPS Radar Documents. NPS Radar provides evidence-based information on new drugs,
research and PBS listings and is published by the National Prescribing Service (NPS), for health professionals.
Genie Web Site

Takes you directly to the Genie Web Site.
Online Manual
Opens the online version of the Genie Manual.

Get Checklists
Opens a window which displays a list of checklists available for download.
Double-click on the Checklist folder, and select the Checklist you wish to download.
This then makes the Checklist available for use in a patient's clinical file.
For more information, please refer to the Checklists section.
Update Genie Registration

Allows for online registration of the Genie Software. When your registration is due, select this option and you will
be presented with a Registration window. Click the Register button and your registration will be renewed (this is
provided that your registration fees have been paid).

Part
V
Setting Up Genie
Genie Manual Setting Up Genie:
5 Setting Up Genie
The following sections outline the steps required to set up Genie.
5.1 Practice Preferences

The Practice Preferences record stores details about the practice and allows you to set a variety of options
which will affect all users on the network.
You can have more than one Practice Preference record. If so, you will be asked to select a practice when you
log into Genie. You would do this when you have a separate business that operates under a separate ABN eg. if
you sell cosmetic products under a different business name to your practice and require a different letterhead
and ABN to printed on invoices.
Note: In a multi-doctor practice where each doctor wants their own letterhead, there is no need to create
a different practice for each doctor. In this case, use a different letterhead in each doctor's User
Preferences, and select the Use Individual Doctor's Letterheads checkbox, later in this section.
To open Practice Preferences select File > Practice Preferences
This will open a listing of Practice Preferences records. In most cases there will only be one record. Double click
on the record to open the the Practice Preferences window.
5.1.1 The Practice Details Window

In this section you can enter your practice details such as Address, Phone and Fax numbers and ABN.
Clinic Name
This is where you enter in the Name of your Clinic.
VSP Number

Genie Manual Setting Up Genie: Practice Preferences
Vaccination Service Provider number.
ACN Number
If you are a registered Company then enter your ACN here.
ABN Number
If you practice as a solo practitioner or a partnership, you should select the Practice ABN radio button. If your
practice is an associateship, you should select the Doctor's ABN radio button. Genie will then use the ABN
number in each doctor's User Preferences on invoices.
NATA & IVF ID

Used in IVF clinics. Practice Type set to Obs/Gynae/IVF.
SCP ID
Required for practices who perform pathology services for which there is an associated MBS item number.
Leave this blank if not relevant.
Medicare Acct ID
Displays the account ID for Medicare.
DVA Acct ID
Displays the account ID for DVA.
Set Printing by User Name

If your computer name could be different each time you log in then tick this so that your printing preferences will
be associated with your user name rather than with your computer name by default.
Use Full Screen Width for Appointments

This tells Genie whether or not to leave a 50-pixel width margin on the right-hand side of the screen.
On Macintosh, it's a good idea to select this, and then display the Dock on the right of the screen in this free
space, rather than at the bottom of the screen. This can be setup from: Apple menu > Dock > Dock
Preferences.
On Windows this feature is not relevant.
My server is hosted in a time zone x hrs ahead

This is used if your server is hosted in a different time zone. It will adjust the appointment book and service times
appropriately.
No Default Site of Service on Invoices

Makes the users select a site of service when invoicing to avoid billing to the wrong provider number for a
provider that has multiple sites of service.
Allow Invoices To Be Deleted

Only the Administrator can tick this option. If not ticked the Delete button in Account History will be greyed out.
Print Medicare Claim Forms

If you select this option Genie will ask if you want to print a claim form for the patient whenever you invoice a
patient privately. These are the claim forms that the patient would usually fill in at their local Medicare office,
NOT DB4 claim forms for bulk-billed patients. You will need to get a supply of these forms (A4/landscape) from
your Medicare office. You would normally select the Only for Unpaid Accounts radio button. If the patient has
fully paid the account they don't need a claim form.
Please ensure that you are using the current version of Medicare Claim Form. The version on the bottom right

hand side of the form is shown as: PC-1 (697.12.01.06).
Print Overseas Student Claim Forms

This option is for University Medical Centres. It prints the appropriate claim form for an invoice for overseas
students.
GST Rate
Enter the GST rate to apply to items selected as GST applicable.
Purged from
This date shows the date that invoices were culled previous to.
Last Purged
This date shows when the last Cull Invoices was done through File > Maintenance & Reports, Monthly tab.
5.1.2 The Miscellaneous Window
Coding System
Genie can incorporate both the ICPC 2 plus and ICD10 AM disease and procedure coding systems. Or you can
choose not to use either. This is where you specify which coding system you are using.
Auto-Generate Chart Numbers for New Patients

Selecting this option instructs Genie to automatically generate a chart number for new patients. The numbers
generated tick over by one for each new patient, starting at the last entered number.
Warning: If a chart number is changed manually with this option ticked, Genie will auto generate from
the number manually entered, potentially doubling up your chart numbers.
Make the Chart Number the Same as the Patient ID

This will make the chart number the same as the Patient ID automatically generated in Genie to make some
searches in Genie easier.
Auto-create Folders for New Patients

Used if you do not want to use the attachment/imaging function in Genie and would prefer to put images directly
into the patients' images folder.
Make Surnames Upper Case

Tick this if you wish to automatically capatilise the surnames of patients in the demographics window.

HIC Location ID
Your HICOnline or MedClaims location ID [eg. GEN12345]. It is also your customer reference number that you
may be asked to give by Genie Solutions Support.
Use Bulk Bill - tick if you want to use online bulk bill claiming. Allow Emailed Claims - only used under instruction
by Genie Solutions Support
Use Patient Claims - tick if you want to use online patient claiming. Run Real Time By Default - this will create an
online session at the time of receipting a patient claim. See Patient Claims.
Use DVA - tick if you want to use online DVA claiming.
Use Online Verification - tick if you want to verify patients details online with HIC.
Auth Proxy User ID & Password - used if you need to login to a proxy server before accessing the internet. For
information on how to set up the proxy server for HIC online transmissions, see HIC Online Installation.
Default Receipt Type

When receipting direct from an invoice this will allocate the payment amount to the type selected eg. if the
majority of your payments are made by EFTPOS then you would select this as your default receipt type.
Auto-Clean Data when Saving

This performs the same function as the Cleanup Database in Maintenance & Reports except that it happens
transparently at the moment each record is saved. This should reduce the incidence of index and database
corruption, and therefore the need to run 4D Tools. The performance impact should be negligible but it can be
turned off just in case it does impact very busy practices.
Flush Transactions To Disk Immediately

Used under the advice of Genie Solutions Support
Import changes to appts offsite

This allows/disallows the importation of changes made offsite to existing appointments. This is allowed by
default. If you don't want appointment modifications made offsite to be changed in the main data file, you should
untick this option.
Give me a warning if account...

In this section you can specify an overdue amount or an overdue number of days, beyond which Genie gives you
a warning when an appointment is made. The warning consists of a dollar sign inserted in front of the patient's
name in the Appointments Book. This gives you an opportunity to take a look at the patient's Account History
while you have them on the phone and chat to them about paying their bills, before they actually get into the
surgery.
Create Pathology Acknowledgments

Creates acknowledgements (ACKS) for the pathology labs to import back in to their software to acknowledge
that you have received the result files they have sent. These are created in Genie/LabRslts/HL7 ACKS folder on
the machine the pathology software is installed. Any labs that use Healthlink as their software then these ACKS
are put into Genie/Healthlink/Outgoing instead.
Allow Pathology Import on Server

If your pathology software is installed on your server (not recommended) then Genie can import the results
directly in to the Pathology and Radiology window without having to do a manual import using the Import button
in this window.
Default Patient Type

This is the Account Type that you want automatically applied to new patient records e.g. if you mostly private bill,
select private or AMA. If you mostly bulk-bill, select Bulk Bill. You can always change it when completing the new
patient's record.
Allow Blank Referrer Provider Number

Allows for the referring doctor to not have a provider number entered in their address book entry when invoicing.
If not ticked, user will be prompted when invoicing to enter a valid provider number if there isn't one recorded.
Note: This check will always be performed for Online Claiming of any sort regardless as it is a
mandatory check.

Print Remittance Advice

With this ticked a remittance advice slip will print on the bottom of invoices with outstanding balances. Accept
Credit Cards - tick this if your EFTPOS machine accepts manual credit card payments (check with your bank).
Print Invoice Full Descriptions

Ticking this will print item descriptions in full on invoices/statements. Having this unticked will only print the first
line of the description. Descriptions for items can be edited through Open > Billing Items by double clicking on
the item.
Print Doctor and Patient DB4 forms on same page

Tick this if you wish to have your Medicare DB4 forms for both the doctor and patient print on the same A4 page,
rather than two separate A4 pages.
Print Total Balance on Invoices

Tick this if you wish for the account holders total outstanding amount to print on invoices.
Credit Terms
If you enter a number in here, Genie will print "Payment due by <date>", at the bottom of unpaid invoices, where
<date> is the date of the invoice plus the number of days set here. If you don't want this, leave this field set to 0
(zero).
Patient Label
This allows you to specify what label you want printed on invoices e.g. allied health professionals may prefer
"Client".
Invoice Memos
Allows you to edit and add Invoice memos without having to print an actual invoice. For more information see
Invoice Memos in the Invoicing section of the Reception Module.
Give a warning if referral expires within x weeks

This option is for IVF, Ophthalmology, Day Surgery & Other Speciality practice preferences only. When invoicing
a patient a warning will be generated if the patient's referral expires within the number of weeks specified. A
warning is also given if all valid referral start dates are later than the current date.

5.1.3 The Practice Letterhead Window
This window allows you to set up a letterhead which will be printed on invoices and added to letter templates
when you select 'Your Letterhead' from the Expressions tab.
If each doctor in the practice wants to have a different letterhead select the Use Individual Letterheads
checkbox, and set up the letterheads in their User Preferences.
Genie can fit approximately 8 lines onto an invoice letterhead, depending on font size. If you find your letterhead
is being truncated on invoices, you will have to either reduce the font size or cut back on the number of lines.
You can click on the Create Default button to create a default template which you can then edit.
You can click on the Insert Picture button to insert a picture from your picture library. If you don’t already have a
picture in your library, you can import it from an image on your hard drive by clicking the Add button in the
window below

and then clicking on the Browse button in the window below,
and selecting the picture which you have presumably already created or scanned onto your hard drive.
Deleting a Corrupted Letterhead

Sometimes the Letterhead can become corrupted. The symptoms of this are that Genie is unable to print
invoices and x-ray requests, because these are the main areas the letterhead is used.
We rarely encounter this problem and only on Macintosh computers.
However, if this does occur, the letterhead can be cleared by holding down the ALT key whilst selecting File >
Practice Preferences.
You can then open the record and rebuild the letterhead.
If you are using individual doctor's letterheads i.e. the Letterhead from each doctor’s User Preferences, then you
can clear these letterheads by holding down the ALT key whilst selecting File > User Preferences.

5.1.4 The Images and Attachments Window
This window stores the pathway on the server to the Images folder, which by default is stored within the Genie
folder. An explanation of this is already on this page, however there are a couple of very important points to note:
1. This is the pathway on the server, not the client machine.
2. Clicking on the Default button will insert the correct pathway if your Images folder is in the default Genie
location.
3. The most common mistake here is to leave the directory delimiter off the end of the
pathway i.e.“\” for a Windows server, and “:” for a Macintosh server. That is, the specified pathway should end
with one of these characters.
When Genie starts up, it looks for the folder at the specified pathway. If it doesn’t find it, you will receive a
warning. It is expected that you will then fix it, otherwise your linked images may end up in unexpected places,
and you will get errors and possibly crashes when adding or modifying patient records.
Note: If you have more than one Practice Preferences record, make sure this pathway is correct in ALL
of them.
You can test whether the pathway is correct or not by simply deleting and re-typing the last character. If it is
incorrect, you will get a warning that the pathway is invalid. If it’s correct, nothing will happen.

5.1.5 SMS Reminders
This window allows you to specify your Provider for the sending of SMS and Email Reminders if you choose not
to use the Genie 2-way SMS Reminders. By default, Message Media (03 9600 0777) will be the provider.
However you can use any SMS provider that accepts SMS messages in the form of emails, by entering the
appropriate details into this window.
For more information on sending SMS and Email Reminders see, Appointment Reminders.
5.1.6 Carrier Identifiers
If you are sending and receiving correspondence electronically using either Healthlink, EQuery, or
DivisionReport, you should enter the Carrier Identifier assigned to you by this provider in the corresponding field
on this screen. See Electronic Correspondence (Sending via 3rd Party) for further configuration information.
Import RTF letters to 4D write relates to Argus letters that are sent in RTF format rather than PIT or HL7, so
need to be attached to the patient chart rather than imported into 4D Write letter writer. Ticking this MAY allow
the conversion of the RTF files into 4D Write. They will come in via Open > Incoming Letters, but if they come
in as blank letters you will need to untick this again and revert back to them just attaching as an image in the

patients chart.
5.2 User Preferences

Each User on a network has their own Preferences record, which allows you to specify how you want Genie to
work for you.
This allows Genie to work in different ways for different doctors in a multi-doctor practice, and also allows
receptionists to switch off some of the clinical preferences such as pap smear warnings. It also allows each
doctor to have their own letterhead if they wish.
To open your own Preferences record, select File > User Preferences.
To open another user's preferences, select File > All User Preferences, and double click on their name.
5.2.1 The Details Page
The Details page contains fields for your own personal details such as Name, Qualifications, Provider and
Prescriber numbers and Personal ABN number if you are working in an Associateship.
Note: If you are a solo practitioner or in a partnership you should use the Practice ABN which is stored
in the Practice Preferences record.
The Sign Off field allows you to enter your usual way of signing off a letter. These fields can then be referenced
in a referral or reply letter, so that no matter which doctor is typing the letter, their own name will appear at the
bottom.
The Provider Type allows you to specify whether you are a GP, Specialist, Allied health or a Receptionist. If you
are a Specialist, you have the option of selecting your specialty, which is used when registering for web services.
For more information on registering for web services, see The Special Menu.
Note: If your Practice Type is an O&G/IVF clinic, then this menu has Clinician and Scientist instead of
GP and Specialist.

Genie Manual Setting Up Genie: User Preferences
The Default Bank Account menu allows you to specify which bank account the receipt window should default to
when receipting any items billed in your name (to set up bank accounts see Banking).
Check Referral Validity in Appointments will check to make sure a patient will have a valid referral whenever you
book an appointment and also when you arrive them into the waiting room.
Ticking Inactive User will remove this user from the login screen, appointment book and billing menu. It would be
used if a user is going to be away for an extended period of time but intend on returning to the practice. To
reactivate the user simply untick this box.
Show Me In the Appointments Book creates a column for your User Name in the Appointments Book.
De-selecting it will remove your column. Ticking the days that you work will display your column in the
appointment book for those days and not the days that are not ticked.
Appt Interval This option allows you to have a different appointment interval to the default interval set in
Appointment Preferences.
Note: This only has an effect when you are in your own personal view of the Appointments Book. If
everybody has the same interval, you should set this to Use Global.
5.2.2 The General Page
General
Use New Interface will change your icons to our new modernised icons, they will all still perform the same
functions and be in the same locations.
Having Auto Capitalise ticked, will result in the first letter of words in fields in the patient demographic window
being automatically capitalised.
Monitor the Genie Message Board will provide you with an alert when a new message is posted on the Forum.
To subscribe to the message board go to www.geniesolutions.com.au.
Use Navigation Palette allows you to keep track of what windows you have open in Genie. This makes for quick
navigation around Genie.
Open Patient’s List at Startup. If you are a solo practitioner, or do not use the Appointments Book, then selecting
this option will open the Patients List rather than the Appointments Book when Genie is launched.
Display Patient Mugshots Allows you to display a picture of the patient when you open either their Demographics
window, or their Clinical record.

The picture needs to be attached to the patient's file via the Image Browser, assigning it a Type of "Mugshot"
(see Viewing Images).
Warn me of Tasks Due, having this ticked means that a Green Task box will appear whenever you receive a
new task.
Create a separate email account for me Creates an email account for this user as the default when using the
Genie Email module (see Email module).
Confirm Quit gives an extra confirmation box when quitting out of Genie.
Disable Main Window Close Box (Windows only) prevents the user from accidentally quitting out of Genie by
clicking the red cross of the main Genie window.
Display Patient Memo for X seconds Allows you to determine how long a patient's memo will remain on display
when booking in an appointment. Minimum onscreen time is 1 second. Setting this as 0 will still result in memo
being displayed for 1 second
Appointments
Don't send SMS reminders for my appointments refers to the Genie Two-Way SMS process which allows SMS
reminders to be sent to patients automatically at a specified time before their appointment. If you do not want
this process to run for your patients then tick this option.
I do not bill inpatient services through the appointment book Ticking this box will prevent the display of the dialog
box asking whether an invoice is to be Inpatient or Outpatient, when billing from the Appointment book. This
would be relevant to a General Practitioner who would not usually be billing for inpatient services or a Specialist
who may only bill for inpatient work from the Patient List or directly from the procedure.
Play a sound when a patient arrives in the waiting room for this user.
Invoicing
Show Me In the Billing Menu You must have this selected if you are a provider of services, otherwise your name
won’t appear in the menu in the New Item window.
Warn me of Future Dated Services Having this ticked means that Genie will alert you when billing if you enter a
service date which is in the future.This should be ticked for non clinical staff that do the billing to be sure they do
not bill an invoice that is future dated by mistake eg. invoicing from a future appointment instead of today's.
Use Type-Ahead When Billing means that Genie will try to predict the complete item number you are entering.
Correspondence
Save Word Letters as Attachments This option should be ticked if the user prefers to type in Word rather than
directly in Genie's letter writer. Explanation of using Word through the referral/reply template can be found in the
Button Description section of Referral/Reply Letters. Once the letter is reimported into Genie using the red W in
the Referral/Reply letter it will actually be saved as an attachment rather than as Correspondence Out. This is to
avoid any issues with Word crashing Genie on some occasions.
Make Letters Undeletable when Reviewed Having this ticked prevents letters from being deleted after they have
been reviewed by the Doctor.
2Hippo Identifier 2Hippo is a third party provider for sending correspondence electronically. This is to enter their
individual identifier if you are signed up to use them.
Synchronising
Synchronise Genie to Outlook/iCal (One way only) This will synchronise Appointments and Tasks to

Outlook/iCal only and not back from Outlook/iCal into Genie. This was due to appointments deleted from Genie
being reinstated into Genie upon synchronisation from Outlook/iCal. For more information on synchronising see
Synchronising With iCal/Outlook in the Clinical section
Synchronise the Address Book Tick this if you wish to Synchronise your Address Book (See Synchronising with
iCal/Outloook in the Clinical Module). Tick 'Only synchronise those with an email address' if you wish to only
synchronise address book entries which have an email address
HIC Online / PKI

Tick Use iKeys to Sign Claims, if you use iKeys to sign claims.
Tick Check for Expiring PKI Certificates if you want to be notified when your certificates are due to expire.
Copy Menus
Clicking this button will display a list of all users in Genie. You can copy menus such as Current Problems, Past
History, and QuickScript from the user you select to the current user preferences.
5.2.3 The Clinical Page
General
Default Item No: This is the item number which will appear as the default to be charged when you close the
clinical record from the Appointments Book. You should enter your most commonly used item number. If you do
not want the charge box to appear when you close the clinical file then leave this field blank.
Use Large Clinical Window If your screen resolution is set to 1280x754 or higher in the display properties of your
computer, then you can take advantage of the larger clinical window (See Clinical).
Open Clinical window to Notes Page Selecting this option instructs Genie to open to the Notes page of the
clinical window rather than the Summary page, if you are not using the Large Clinical Window.
Use Small Font For Drop Down Lists This is for those who have extensive drop down menus for Current
Problems and Past History, for example, so the whole menu can be seen.
Remind Me To Start Offsite Logging Selecting this option will make Genie ask if you want to start offsite logging
whenever you open this database with the single-user version of Genie. See the Offsite Logging Chapter for
more information.

Extract Path Results PIT Format Selecting this checkbox instructs Genie to attempt to extract individual results
from PIT-formatted files, and insert them into a Consultation record so that they can be graphed. This only works
for some pathology providers, depending on how they present the results. If you are getting nonsensical results
in consultation records you should deselect this checkbox.

Move to Action List after linking Select this if you want to use the Pathology Action List for dealing with pathology
and radiology results. (See Pathology Recalls).
Check for Missing Run Numbers If this is selected, Genie will check for missing pathology results whenever the
Pathology & Radiology window is opened. If a run is missing Genie will warn you about it for 30 days. It is
expected that you would contact the lab and request them to send the missing run again. You can switch off this
warning, however this is not recommended.
Bulk Bill Pathology Selecting this will instruct Genie to automatically mark the Bulk-Bill option on printed
pathology requests.
Note:The patient must have a valid Medicare Number for this to work.
Copy Results to Interested Parties Having this ticked results in Pathology & Radiology results being copied to the
patients interested party when doing a request form.
Offer to store INR Results ticking this will provide a prompt to save INR results into the INR Control after they
have been imported. INR Control is accessed through the Tools menu in the clinical file of the patient.
Offer to store TFT Results ticking this option will prompt you to save imported TFT results into the Thyroid
Control. Thyroid Control is accessed through the Tools Menu in the clinical file of the patient.
Prescriptions
Print Medication List on Scripts Selecting this option sets the checkbox for printing the patient’s medication list
whenever a prescription is printed to ON by default. (see the clinical window).
Print Certificate on Scripts As for Print Medications above but for a Medical Certificate
Use Meal Times for Scripts Selecting this option will change the way you specify dosage and frequency for
prescriptions. Existing prescriptions will continue to print with the current dose and frequency, until you fill in the
new dosage fields. This is not an option which you should frequently change back and forth, so you should
decide on the method you wish to use and then stick with it. Also this option is doctor specific, so if you share
patients with other doctors in your practice, you should ALL decide on one method or the other.
NPS RADAR Alert If you have the NPS RADAR documents installed, a summary is displayed for the first three
times that a new RADAR drug is prescribed. When this checkbox is ticked, the summary information is
displayed every time the new drug is prescribed until it is retired from the NPS RADAR documentation.
Access MIMS Annual via the internet This will access MIMS Annual documents via our Web Server rather than
via the local machine. This will mean that the MIMS Annual will no longer need to be installed or updated on
each client machine as it will be updated on our Web Server by us.
Interaction Checking If you are using MIMS for prescribing, you can set the level of drug <-> drug interaction
checking here. Level 3 is usually the best compromise. If you set it to Level 5, it will warn you of just about
everything, and you will become de-sensitised to the warnings.
Prompts
Do Not Show Prompts Window Having this ticked, will prevent any Prompt windows from being displayed.
Pap Smear & Mammogram Alert Selecting this option will give you a warning if a pap smear/mammogram has
not been recorded whenever you open the clinical record of a female between 20 and 70 and who has not been
marked as having had a hysterectomy in their Past History.
Immunisation Alert Warns you if the child has less than the expected number of Immunisations for his/her age.
Overdue Recalls Alert Warns you if there are any overdue recalls for the patient.
Warn of Recent Pathology Results If you enter a number here, Genie will give you a warning if there are any
recent results within that time frame when opening the clinical record.
Other Warnings Depending on the age and sex of the patient Genie will warn if you haven’t checked a variety of
the parameters stored in the Consults Parameters e.g. BP, Weight,Height, Cholesterol, PSA.

5.2.4 The Practice Sites Window
If you work in multiple sites with different Provider numbers, this is where you can set up your extra sites.
To add a new site, click on the blue Add button. This will add a new line to this window with the cursor flashing in
it, ready to type the name of the site. Tab to enter the Provider number for this site.
LSPN Number
This is used by Practitioners who perform imaging services e.g. ultrasound scans at various sites of service. If
you don't need this leave it blank.
Setting a Default Site

If you have more than one Practice Preferences record, you can specify which of these sites is to be the default
for each practice. That is, when an invoice is being created, which of these sites will be chosen by default in the
Sites popup menu.
Double-click on a site to open the window shown below.
If you have more than one Practice Preferences record, select the practice from the lower menu.

5.2.5 The Letterhead Window
If you are in a multi-doctor practice and each doctor wants to have their own letterhead, then this is where you
can set up your letterhead. By default, Genie uses the letterhead set up in your Practice Preferences record File
> Practice Preferences. However, if you select the 'Use Individual Doctors Letterhead' checkbox in Practice
Preferences, then Genie will use the letterhead of whichever doctor is the Provider of a billed service.
Note: You can copy the letterhead already set in Practice Preferences.
You can also insert pictures or logos in the letterhead (see Practice Preferences)
Note: Genie allows approximately eight lines worth of text in the letterhead. If you find that your
letterhead is being truncated when printing invoices, then you will have to reduce the size of it here by
either reducing the font size or reducing the number of lines.
Deleting a Corrupted Letterhead

Sometimes the Letterhead can become corrupted. The symptoms of this are that Genie is unable to print
invoices and x-ray requests, because these are the main areas the letterhead is used. We rarely encounter this
problem and only on Macintosh computers. However, if this does occur, the letterhead can be cleared by holding
down the ALT key whilst selecting File > Practice Preferences. You can then open the record and rebuild the
letterhead.
If you are using individual doctor's letterheads i.e.the Letterhead from each doctor’s User Preferences, then you
can clear this letterhead by holding down the ALT key whilst selecting File > User Preferences.

5.2.6 The Security Window
This window allows you to set the security level for each user in Genie. In order to change any of these settings,
you need to click on the Padlock icon and enter in the Administrator's password.
Export Patient Records

If this is ticked, this user has enough privileges to export patient records out of Genie.
Delete Patient Records.

Having this option ticked allows this user to delete patient records in Genie.
Note: Patient records cannot be deleted from Genie if the patient has either clinical or billing information
entered in their file.
Open the Maintenance Window

Allows this User access to the Maintenance & Reports window (File > Maintenance & Reports)
View Financial Reports

Allows this User access to Financial Reports in the Practice Analysis tab of Maintenance & Reports.
Only view their own financial reports

Restricts viewing of summarised financial data to this User's data only. They will not be able to view other
doctors' reports. Receptionists will not be able to access any of the financial reports if this option is ticked,
regardless of whether they have View Financial Reports ticked.
Modify Saved Invoices

Allows this user to edit invoices in patients' Account Histories
View Clinical Information

Allows this user to view the clinical records of all patients
Modify Other User's Preferences

Allows this user to make modifications to other User Preferences records.
Cull or Archive Records

Allows this user to cull and/or archive records in Genie
Use the Execute Command menu item

If this option is not ticked, this user is prevented from accessing the Execute command window (File > Execute
Command).

5.2.7 The ECLIPSE Window

Still under development...
5.3 Printing Preferences

Each computer on a network has its own set of Printing Preferences, which instruct Genie to use a particular
printer and tray for different printing jobs.
It follows that each computer on a network must have a different name, otherwise there will be printing confusion
unless all computers print to the same printer.
Naming a Computer
On Macintosh, the name is set in the Sharing Preferences, in System Preferences, as shown below.
In this case, the computer name is “Laptop”.
On Windows, the name is set in the System Control Panel, accessed from the Start menu > Settings > Control

Genie Manual Setting Up Genie: Printing Preferences
Panels > System
Bear in mind that renaming a computer on a network, may upset a host of other settings, such as automatic
mounting of other drives, automated batch copying of files, backup systems and Genie’s pathway to the Images
folder if you change the name of the server.
Note: If you don’t know how to reset these links, then leave renaming of your computers to your
network administrator.
5.3.1 Printer Preferences

To open Printing Preferences select File > Printing Preferences.
If you are on a network the IP address of your computer is displayed in the top left of this window. This is a quick
and easy way of finding out your IP address.

Windows:
Macintosh:
There are twelve different printing jobs listed on this page i.e. prescriptions, pathology requests, x-ray requests
or plain A4 jobs, accounts, labels, private medicare claim forms, overseas students claim forms, and DVA and
Medicare DB4 forms.
Note: There is a big difference between private Medicare claim forms and Medicare DB4 forms. Don’t get
them confused! The Medicare claim form is used by the patient to lodge a claim with Medicare in order
to receive their rebate, while the Medicare DB4 form is used when bulk billing a patient.
Separate Preferences for each Genie user on this computer: only referrers to people who are using Terminal
Services.

Medicare DB4, should only be ticked if you are using HIC Online.
e.g.
You can have the DVA Claims ticked if using either manual batching, or HIC Online. If you use HIC Online, you
are able to print out a computer generated voucher, instead of using the manual slips.
For each job, you can select the appropriate printer from the black drop-down menu.
This menu will display all the printers installed on your computer. If the printer you want isn't shown, then you
need to install it. Consult Mac Help, or Microsoft Help for instructions on how to install printers.
On Windows, once you have selected a printer, the available trays for that printer are displayed in the Tray menu
to the right of the printer. Select the tray that you want each job to go to.
On Macs, the button allows you to save the options in the Print dialogue screens.
Automatic tray selection works on all the laser printers we have tested. However, if it doesn't work as expected
on your printer, you should select the Ask For Print Settings checkbox, so that it can be switched manually in the
Print Dialog.
For each job you can instruct Genie to display the Print Dialog before printing, by selecting the Ask For Printer
Settings checkbox.
The Print Dialog is the window that usually appears when printing in which you can change printers, set the

trays, set the number of copies etc.
If you don't select this option, then Genie will just print immediately to the selected printer. Plain A4 and Letters
will always print to the default printer.
If you are using a single bin printer you can, in fact, select the Bypass Printing Preferences checkbox and have
everything print to your default printer. This makes printing a little faster because Genie doesn't have to find out
the current printer, nor change to a different printer everytime you print.
Keep resource file between logins, if left unticked, will automatically delete the Genie.res file from the 4D
preferences folder when quitting the client to ensure that updated resources (e.g. version number and date, etc)
are downloaded from the server when the server is updated. If you do not wish for this to occur then tick the
option to keep the resource file.
Adjusting the Print Area

The 4 green and blue arrows at the bottom left of this window are used to adjust the position of printed text on
the page.
Because each printer has different default margins you may need to adjust the positioning for prescriptions in
order for them to print in the correct position on their pre-printed sheets.
5.3.2 Deleting Printing Preferences Record

Occasionally the Printing Preferences record may become corrupted and printing may be affected. In this case,
the record can be deleted by going to File > Printing Preferences and clicking on the Delete button down the
bottom of this window.

You will be asked to confirm this action.
If you click Delete, then Genie will delete your current printer preferences, and you will need to re-select them.
5.3.3 Troubleshooting
Printing Problems are probably the most common problem encountered by anybody using a computer. There
are literally dozens of things that can go wrong ranging from the simple i.e. the printer isn’t switched on to the
complex eg a corrupted printer driver.
Before calling the Genie support line you should perform a few simple diagnostic steps to at least exclude some
common problems.

1. Switch the printer off and on again. If there is a blockage in the queue this may clear it.
2. Check the Printer Queue to see if there is a blockage that has stopped printing.
· On Macintosh, open the Print Center utility at /Applications/Utilities/Printer Setup Utility/. In fact, it’s a
good idea to create a shortcut to the Print Center in your Dock.
· On Windows, select Start Menu > Printers and Settings and open the relevant Printer.
3. Check the cabling! Unplug and re-insert the cable at either end.
4. Reselect the printer in Genie’s Printer Preferences.
5. Try printing from another application. If you can’t then the problem is with your printer. If you can, then the
problem is probably with Genie.
6. Try printing from another computer on the network.
If you still haven’t found the cause, call our support line. But performing these few simple steps first, can turn a
prolonged consultation with our Help Desk into a short one!
5.4 Security
This chapter covers password security, limitation of access to various parts of Genie, and the prevention of fraud
by practice staff.
5.4.1 Add/Delete Users
Add User
To add a new user to the database, click on the Add User button in the Logon Window.
The window below will appear asking you to enter the Administrator's password.
The Administrator's password is the password which the Administrator uses to log in, so you either need to be
the Administrator, or else know his or her password in order to be able to do this.
Click OK, and then enter a User Name for the new user.
In a large multi-doctor practice it is advisable to keep the User Name as short as possible, as this is the name
which will also appear in the Name tabs in the Appointments book.

Genie Manual Setting Up Genie: Security
The user's name will now appear on the Login window.
When this user logs in for the first time, they will be prompted to set up their User Preferences. For more
information on setting up User Preferences, see User Preferences.
Delete User
You can also delete a User Name from the Login Window by highlighting the user you want to delete, and then
clicking on the Delete User button.
Again, you need to know the Administrator's password to delete a user.
Note: If the deleted user has any appointments, these will also be deleted!
A user can still be deleted if they have billing data in the system, however it is probably better to just make these
users inactive by selecting the Inactive checkbox in the user's Preferences record.
This prevents their name from appearing in the Login window.
5.4.2 User Levels/Access
The Administrator
The Administrator has the highest level of security. Only one user can be the Administrator. Typically this would
be one of the principals or a trusted practice manager.
Only the Administrator can perform the following functions:

· Assign someone else to be the Administrator.

· View the Audit Trail of modified invoices and receipts.

· Password-protect the Maintenance and Reports Window
· Password-protect changes to invoices and receipts.
· Add and delete new users.
Other User Levels

All other Users have their user level set by the Administrator through their own individual User Preferences
Security tab. See The Security Window for more information on this.
5.4.3 Passwords
It is strongly recommended that every user have their own password, preferably known only to them, and
perhaps the Administrator. This is to ensure that in a large practice with several reception staff, nobody else can
change invoices and receipts under your name.
Note: It is especially important for the Administrator to have a password and change it regularly. The
Administrator will presumably be either an owner of the practice or a trusted receptionist or practice
manager.
When choosing your password make sure it isn’t something obvious like “password”, your name, a family
member, or your dog’s name. Ideally it should be a random mixture of letters and numbers, or else an easily
remembered word with suitable letters replaced by numbers e.g.“snoopy ” becomes “sn00p1”. However, now
that I’ve put this in the manual it would be very foolish to use this particular one!
You should also change your password regularly.
Passwords can be created or modified in the Login window. You can do this either:
· At the time of login
· By selecting File > Add or Change User when in the Appointments view.

In the Login window, highlight your name, and then click on the Set Password button.
The window below will open.
If you are creating a password for the first time, leave the first field blank, otherwise enter your current password
in the New Password and Re-enter New Password fields. Click OK.
Now, whenever you login you must highlight your name and then enter the password in the bottom field of the
Login window.
Forgotten your Password?

The Administrator will need to call the Genie support line for help on 1800 801 228.

Part
VI
The Reception Module
Genie Manual The Reception Module:
6 The Reception Module

The following chapters relate to procedures most relevant to Receptionists.
6.1 Appointments
The Appointments book is the module that ties everything in Genie together. It is possible to use Genie without
using the appointments book, but in doing so you will lose out on many of the efficiencies to be gained in fully
integrating the receptionists’ and doctors’ desks. Genie has been designed so that both doctors and
receptionists work from the same screen so that each can see immediately what is happening within the
practice, and so that each can communicate easily and quickly with each other.
The keyboard terminology used here is for Windows. On Macintosh the corresponding keys are:
Windows Macintosh
Alt Option
Ctrl Command (Apple Key)
Moving Around
You can use the Return,Tab or Arrow Keys to move to different appointment times.
To add notes to the Notes or Name fields, press the Enter key (on the numeric keypad). This places the cursor
within the appointment.
6.1.1 Appointment Preferences

To initially set up your Appointment Preferences select Appts > Appt Preferences
or click on the Appointment Preferences button.
The Appointments Preferences window will open as below:
Start Time: Enter here the time of the earliest appointment you would usually make.
End Time: Enter here the time of the latest appointment you would usually make.

Genie Manual The Reception Module: Appointments
Note: Enter the time in 24 hour time mode i.e. 6PM =1800.
Appointment Interval
This is the length of a normal appointment. If your appointment times vary then enter the shortest appointment
interval which will be used.
For example, if you are a specialist practice and your new patient appointments are 30 minutes, but your
follow-up appointments are 15 minutes, you should enter 15 minutes as the interval. You can later specify new
appointments to take 2 appointment slots (See Appointment Types for more information).
Hide Calendar
Ticking this will change the appointment view between wide and tall format. In wide format, the calendar is not
displayed. This can also be changed via clicking once on the date in the calendar on the appointment book.
Track Current Appt Row

A yellow highlight will appear on the time if selected in the time column. This allows you to easily keep track of
the appointment row selected if you have multiple Doctors entered into the appointments page.
Delete Appointments After X Days

This value specifies how long you want to actually keep an appointment record in the Appointments book. Most
practices would set this to about 180 days (6 months). You can set it to as long as you want, but be aware that if
you retain the records for a very long time then the Appointments Book will run more slowly. Each time you click
to display a new day, Genie must search through all the appointment records to find just that day’s
appointments. Searching through 10,000 records is obviously going to be faster than searching through 100,000
records. When the last client machine quits out of Genie at the end of the day, Genie will delete all appointments
older than the specified number of days. This is one of the reason why client computers should quit out of Genie
at the end of the day even if you elect to leave the server running.
Note: Naturally, only the actual appointment record is deleted. All billing and clinical records for the day
are retained.
Refresh Screen Every X Seconds

If you use Genie as a single user then this setting is irrelevant. On a network it instructs Genie to display
changes which may have been made on another computer on the network. The usual setting would be around
60 seconds. The minimum allowed setting is 20 seconds. If a refresh occurs whilst you are typing in an
appointment cell then you are “kicked out” of the cell during the refresh. If this occurs often enough to be
annoying then you should increase the refresh time.
Note: You can force a screen refresh at any time by clicking on the TODAY button.
Open to View
The Appointments Book has three different views: Providers, Dates and Rooms. As a general rule specialist
practices will probably prefer the Dates view, and general practices will probably prefer the Providers view. This
setting just tells Genie which view to open as the default when the Appointments book is opened. You can switch
between views at any time by clicking on the appropriate View button.
Days Shown in Dates View

The Dates view displays appointments with a column for each date. You can specify how many columns you
want to see when moving to the Dates view. That is, the number of days ahead you would like to see at any one

time.The usual setting would be 7 days. The larger you make this value the slower Genie will be in displaying all
the appointments.
First Day of Week

This is the first day that will display on the calendar on the appointments page, usually either Sunday or Monday
depending on your preference.
Inserting Appointment Details

Genie allows you to automatically insert a variety of patient details when an appointment is made. These are
Date of Birth, Chart Number, Referral Details and Patient Memo. These Notes are only visible when displaying a
single provider’s appointments.
Check for Double Appointments

This alerts you to the fact that another appointment has been booked into that particular time slot already. It then
provides you with the ability to decide if you want to double book this appointment, or cancel the creation of this
appointment. This is useful in larger practices, where receptionist may be making appointments at the same
time.
Check for Future Appointments

Checks to see if the patient has any appointments booked in the future from either the Current Date, or from the
Date which you are making the appointment for.
Keep Time Column in View

This is useful for practices which have a large number of Doctor's entered on their appointments page as it
keeps the time column in view when scrolling across the screen.
Check for Cancellations

Alerts you to the fact that there are patients waiting for a cancellation. For more information on how to use the
feature, see Cancellation List.
Require User to login again after X minutes of inactivity on this machine

If a time is entered in this field, the user will be presented with the login window after the specified period of
inactivity. They will be required to select their user name and enter their password. In order for this feature to
work, either the Appointment window or the Patients list must be left open.
Don’t Print Empty Appointments

Selecting this option instructs Genie to print only those appointments cells which have been filled. That is, if you
have 30 appointment slots in a day, but only have five patient appointments, then only the five appointments will
be printed. Most people would not select this option so that they can actually see where the empty slots are on
the printed day sheet.
Modify Columns
This allows you to specify which columns are on view in an individual doctor's appointment view and which

columns you wish to print when printing a single provider’s appointments (see Printing Appointment Page).
Note: You must have opened the Preferences window from a single provider’s page for this button to be
enabled.
Percent Reduction When Printing

Printing of the Appointments book is WYSIWYG i.e what you see is what you get, no matter what view you are
in. Usually this will mean that the appointments will print out on several A4 pages. You can reduce the printed
size here so that it will fit on just one page. Usually somewhere around 70% will do it, although you may have to
experiment to get it just right.
Appearance
Allows you to change the font style, row height and font size of the appointments book.
Preferred Patient Phone No.

This is the phone number that will display in the providers individual view in the Phone column by default.
Calculate Waiting Times From

When you register a patient as having arrived in the waiting room by clicking on the Coffee Cup icon,
Genie will start calculating the waiting time until their clinical record is opened by the doctor.
This waiting time can be calculated in two ways. Either by the time between arrival and being seen, or by the
time between their actual appointment time and being seen. If you calculate it on the latter method, then the
waiting time for a patient that arrives and is seen before their actual appointment time may be a negative
number. You should choose the method most suitable to your practice. That is, if you see patients on a walk-in
basis, select the Arrival Time option, otherwise select the Appointment Time option. You can switch options at
any time and the waiting times will be recalculated for anyone that hasn’t actually been seen yet for that
particular day.
Note: If you open the clinical window prior to entering the patient into the waiting room, the waiting time
will be calculated from the actual appointment time, even if your preferences indicate it should be
calculated from the arrival time.
Column Order and Rooms:
Column Order allows you to sort the order in which the Providers names will appear on the appointment book.
Drag the names in the list to reorder. The top-most name will appear as the left-most column on the appointment
screen.
'Rooms' in Genie can relate to either the Hospital or Day Surgery where the surgeon operates so that a theatre
list can be produced. Alternatively, the 'Rooms' in Genie can be used as a triage system allowing you to know

which room a patients is waiting in to see the Doctor. See Rooms for more information.
Rooms
The Room button allows you to assign a patient to a specific room. You can assign a patient to a
room by selecting their name from the Appointment book and clicking of the Room drop down menu and
selecting the appropriate room.
The Room column in the appointment book allows you to quickly see which room a patient has been assigned
to.
6.1.2 Using The Appointments Book
Button Description
Note: Each of these buttons will be described in more detail in the following sections.
The calendar allows you to skip forward and backwards for both the year and the month. If you click on the
month name a drop down list of all months will appear allowing you to jump ahead to the required month. The
arrows on either side of TODAY allow you to skip forward or backwards by either one day or one week
respectively.

The grey double headed arrow button in the calendar allows you to skip forward the selected number of weeks
from today's date. Holding down the Alt key will allow you to skip forward the required number of weeks from a
date other than today's date.
The HELP button opens up the Genie manual as a PDF document. Alt clicking on this
button will open the Genie web-based manual.
Opens up the Appointment preferences window. See Appointment Preferences.
Opens up the Referral/Reply letter template. See Referral/Reply Letters.
Opens a New Patient window. See Adding An Appointment.
Opens the Edit Patient window. See Edit Patient.
Opens the Merged Letter Template. See Merged Letter Templates.
Opens the Label module. See Labels.
Allows you to make an appointment for another family member, provided they are on the same account.
See Account Holders.
Places the patient in the waiting room.
Allows you to toggle between different columns on the appointment book. See Appointment Views.
Used to create Repeating Appointments. See Repeating Appointments.
Opens up a Procedure window. See Procedures.
Opens the Patient's clinical record. See Clinical module.
The Delete button. Allows you delete patient and non-patient appointments.
Creates a 'quick invoice'. Prints an invoice for the item selected from the drop down list.
Prints the Appointment page. See Printing Appointment Page.
Opens up the Invoice window. See Creating an Invoice.
Ungroups appointments.
Groups appointments.
Opens the Recalls Due window. See Recalls.

Opens the Patient Correspondence window. See Reviewing Correspondence.

A right mouse click on a patient appointment will produce a drop menu (see below) which lists many of the
above commonly used functions.
6.1.2.1 Adding An Appointment

Move to the cell you want by using the keyboard, or clicking once on the cell.
Type the patients Surname or the first few letters of the Surname. If you want to narrow the search to the
patient’s First name, you can do so in one of two ways:
· Enter a space after the surname and then type the first few letters of the patient's First name. Eg.“smi jo ”
to search for John Smith.
· Enter a comma after the surname and then type the first few letters of the patient's First name. Eg.
"bloggs,ma" to search for Mary Bloggs.
Then press the Tab or Return key.

A list of matching patients will be displayed for you to select from.
If Genie cannot find a matching patient record, then what you have typed will remain in the cell and become
coloured brown signifying a non-patient appointment.
If this is meant to be a non-patient appointment such as “Breakfast Meeting” then this is fine. If you are sure that
the patient does indeed have a record then you should check what you have typed. Either you have spelt their
name incorrectly, or their name has been entered into the database incorrectly in the first place. A common
mistake is to have entered the first name into the Surname field and vice versa. If you find that they are not in the
database and you wish to create a record for them, then select the cell again and select “New Patient” (or Ctrl +
N) from the Appointments menu.
A new patient record can also be created by clicking on the Add a new patient record button on the
appointments page
A new patient record will be created with the Surname and First name as entered into the appointment cell. Fill in

whatever other details you have and then Save the record and the appointment cell will be updated accordingly.
If you don’t want to create a record for them at this stage because they are a new patient and may not actually
turn up, then leave the appointment as is. You can use it later to create the patient record if and when they
arrive.
6.1.2.2 Edit Patient

The Edit Patient window can be accessed from the following places in Genie:
• The Appointments Book
• The Patient Clinical Window
• The Patients List
To bring up the Edit Patient window, click once on the desired entry and then click on the small Edit Patient
icon
The Edit Patient window allows you to make any required changes and adjustments to the Patient's
demographic details. The symbol allows you to locate the address on Google Maps.
It is also where you assign the Patient's Account Type, which will govern what fees are charged by default when
invoicing.

An Account Holder record must be created in order to invoice a patient by clicking either the Self or Other radio
button (see Account Holders). This must be an individual, it cannot be an organisation. The account holder can
be changed at the time of invoicing to be that of an organisation or DVA etc.
Referral details can be added by clicking on the small Blue Plus next to the Referring Dr table which displays a
search box for the Address Book. The Referring doctor address details can be edited via the small Doctor icon,
and the referring doctor can be deleted via the Garbage Can icon. To edit or change the Referral period, double
click on the Referring doctors name in the Referring Dr table.
The Memo box can be used to type reminders for the patient that you will be alerted to when you make an
appointment for the patient and when you put them in the Waiting Room when they arrive for their appointment.
It is often used to remind you to give the patient something such as Xrays. The length of time that this memo is
displayed for can be adjusted in your User Preferences in the Clinical tab.
The Swipe Card button can be used in conjunction with a card reader. Click the button then swipe the card and
it will enter the patients Medicare Number and Expiry Date. It can also be used in the appointment book, click
into an appointment cell then swipe the card and this makes the appointment for you.
Verify Online will be available if you use HIC Online. It verifies the patient information you have in Genie with
that held at Medicare Australia and will let you know if there is any differing information. This helps prevent
patient information based rejections in Online Claiming. See Using Online Verification for more information.
The Update Family button allows you to automatically update the demographic details (i.e. home address and
home phone number) of all patients that share the same Account ID number ie. by the parent having Self
selected in their account holder box and all others in the family having Other selected with the parent being the
account holder.
The Notes button allows you to make extended, progressive notes on the patient, if required. These are stored
in the patients clinical file as a Document. If a patient has a Primary Note entered, the Notes button will display
in red text with an asterisks (Windows) or just *Notes for Macs.
The Envelope button next to the patients address and the account holder details allows you to print an
envelope displaying the patients or the account holders address respectively. Additionally you can also choose to
include a return address on these envelopes.
The Email icon allows you to enter the patients email address. This allows you to then email
correspondence to this patient.
The Memo field allows for brief entries, such as patient reminders like "Collect Xrays". Such reminders will then
appear in a red Memo box the next time the patient is booked in for an appointment or gets placed in the waiting
room via the Coffee Cup icon.
The Employer tab allows you to enter Workcover claim information (for more information on Workcover claims
see, Invoicing Workcover).

The Partner tab is where you enter partner and next of kin details. The Alias fields will be used when ECLIPSE
health fund claiming is incorporated into Genie.
The Misc. tab allows for recording of information such as hospital UR number, student details (used by
university medical service sites), as well as the culture and country of birth for the patient.
The Conversions tab is activated by having your Practice Type set to 'Plastic Surgery' and allows you to track the
number of patients who call to enquire about a procedure, the percentage who progress to a consultation with a
provider, and the percentage who subsequently proceed to have the procedure performed. Further information is
available in the Procedures section.

6.1.2.3 Moving/Copying Appointments
Moving Appointments
Appointments can be moved to a different cell on the page by dragging and dropping with the Alt key held down.
Only one appointment can be moved at a time, unless the appointments have been grouped.
Note: You must first highlight the appointment you want to move, before pressing and holding the Alt
key. Otherwise the cell which is selected when you press the Alt key will be the cell that is moved.
Appointments can also be moved to a different date by selecting Appts > Change Date, or right clicking on the
appointment and selecting Change Date.
This will open the window below. This window will allow you to move the appointment date of the currently
selected appointment.
Copying appointments
Appointments can be copied and pasted into another cell, either on the same day or on another day. To do this,
you can use the keyboard shortcuts for copying and pasting i.e. Ctrl-C and Ctrl-V respectively.
Note: Attached procedures will not be copied if you use this method. If the appointment has an attached
procedure, then you MUST use the Change Date function described above.

6.1.2.4 Deleting/Undeleting Appointments
Deleting Appointments
Highlight the appointment or appointments to delete and then either click on the Delete button, or hit the
Delete key on your keyboard or use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+D.
If the appointment is linked to a patient, you will be asked to confirm the deletion from the appointment book or
mark the appointment as 'Did Not Arrive' or 'Cancelled by Patient'. Ticking either of these options will allow you
to create a consultation note in the patients clinical record and/or insert a patient memo for future reference.
These Did Not Arrive and Cancelled by Patient options will not delete the patients appointment, so a further
deletion using 'Just Delete it' is necessary, if required. If, however, you tick 'Just Delete it' and 'Make a
consultation note' this will delete the appointment from the appointment book as well as make a consultation
note in the patients clinical file.
Ticking 'Keep Type' allows you to delete the appointment without deleting the appointment Type.
Note: Non-patient appointments are deleted immediately.
If a procedure is linked to the appointment, then you will be given a choice of deleting the procedure altogether,
or keeping a record of it in the patients clinical file. If you Keep the procedure a further prompt will ask if you
would like the procedure to be marked as pending or finalised.
If the patient has an appointment with another practitioner/s in the practice it will also prompt as to whether you

would like to delete these also.
Note: On both Macintosh and Windows machines, the Backspace key does not actually delete the
appointment. It will delete the contents of the cell, but the appointment will reappear at the next screen
refresh.
Undeleting Appointments
Deleted patient appointments are held in the system for 14 days and can be “undeleted ” by selecting Appts >
Deleted Appointments.
This will open up a window which will display all the appointments which have been deleted in the last fourteen
days, as well as displaying not only the name of the User who deleted this appointment, but also the time that
the appointment was deleted, and how the appointment was deleted.
Select the appointment/s you wish to restore, by ticking the box and then click Restore x selected
appointment/s. This will re-insert the appointment/s back into their original time slot.
Note: If there is already another appointment in this time slot, the appointments will be double booked.

6.1.2.5 Finding an Appointment

Ctrl + F will allow you to search for a specific patient, and locate all of their past and future appointments.
This is a useful feature if you need to find out if a particular patient has an upcoming appointment to see a
Doctor, as well as allowing you to see when they last had an appointment. If the patient is a new patient that has
yet to be entered into the database ie. has a non-patient appointment in brown text then you can still search this
by entering the name in the Notes field of the search box.
Clicking the Print button will give you the option to print just the future appointments for the patient and/or just a
certain Type of appointment. In the below example it would print all future Antenatal appointments for the patient.
Using the Next button on the Appointments page will allow you to search for the next available
appointment for either a specific Doctor, or a specific Type of Appointment.

If the first available appointment located is not suitable, use the Find Again button to move to the next available
appointment for either that Doctor, or Appointment Type. To find a previous appointment for the selected
Appointment Type, Ctrl click on the Find Again button.
6.1.2.6 Double booking an Appointment time

To double book an appointment time, double click or right click on the required appointment time in the time
column.
This will create another time slot directly below the original time e.g. if you double click on 10.45am then another
time slot will appear in green text called 10.45AM.
OR
Enter in the appointment details as per usual in the newly created appointment cell. Upon refresh the duplicate
time will display as red in the time column and will mark the corresponding duplicate time with asterisks in all
other providers' columns to avoid double booking them.
Note: If nothing is entered into this appointment slot by the next screen re-fresh then this cell will
disappear.
6.1.2.7 Appointment Views

There are three different ways of viewing the Appointments Book:
Providers Dates Rooms
Select the View you want by clicking on the appropriate button.
In each view, you can also choose to view the appointments for all the providers in a practice, or just the one

provider by using the tabs across the top of the Appointments screen.
You can switch to different tabs by clicking on the appropriate tab, or using the keyboard shortcut, Alt-Left or
Right Arrow key.
Appointment Columns
When in the Individual Provider view the following columns are available:
Notes: Provides a free text area for information about the appointment, e.g. confirmed. Information
can be added by default via options in Appointment Preferences
Phone: The phone number inserted depends on what phone numbers have been entered in the
patient's demographic window. In order of preference, Genie inserts the Work, Home or
Mobile number depending on what has been entered.
Type: Displays the Appointment Type, e.g. New Patient
Account Type: Displays the patient's account type, as selected in the patient's demographic window.
Invoice: Displays what item is to be charged, or what fee has been charged.
Arr: Timed the patient was put into the waiting room.
Wait: Displays how long the patient has been waiting (see Appointment Preferences).
Room: Displays which hospital they are booked into for Theatre, or which room they are currently in
at the surgery, as specified in Appts > Edit Rooms.
Created: Date the appointment was created
By: Displays which user originally created the appointment.
Toggling the View

When you are in a view showing just the Appointment Names you can quickly view the Appointment Notes by
clicking the Toggle button. Clicking it again will restore the Appointment Names. The shortcut for this
button is Ctrl-Y.
Adjusting Column Widths

The slider at the bottom of the bank of buttons on the left of the screen is used to adjust various column sizes,
depending on which view you are in.
Providers View - All: Each provider’s column is resized.

Dates and Rooms Views: Each date or room column is resized.
Providers View - Individual: The slider bar is not present because each column can be adjusted individually by
using the Modify Appointment Columns option obtained by right clicking anywhere on the appointment page.
You can then type the width you require by slow double clicking in the width cell for that column. The

measurement is in pixels so just increase/decrease until you get the width you require on screen.
Note: These preferences are unique to each machine on the network.
Adjusting Column Order

Column order can be changed by selecting Appts > Appt Preferences... and clicking the Column Order &
Rooms tab. The Providers names will appear on the appointment book by dragging accordingly. The top person
will be first column etc.
Changing Fonts, Font Sizes and Row Heights

If the default font and row heights are too large or small, they can be changed to suit your own machine or
eyesight.
These can be done through Appts > Appt Preferences...

In general, the easiest-to-read onscreen font for Macintosh is “Geneva”, and for Windows “Arial”.
Navigation Palette
You may like to turn on the Navigation Palette through your User Preferences , File > User Preferences.
This will keep track of all the windows you have open in Genie to make for quick navigation between windows.
6.1.2.8 Appointment Status

Each appointment has its own status.
In waiting room In with Doctor Patient Appointment
Ready to Invoice Invoiced Non-patient

Appointment
Waiting for Cancellation
The Status of an appointment is initially assigned when the appointment is made i.e. it will either be a 'Patient
Appointment' or a 'Non-patient Appointment', depending on whether or not a matching patient record has been
found and linked to the appointment. The Status of an appointment is reflected in the colour of the text rather
than the background colour. For example the default colour for a Patient appointment is Black, a non-patient
appointment is Brown.
When the patient is added to the Waiting Room by clicking on the Coffee Cup icon, the status is
automatically changed to 'In Waiting Room'.
The seven status items which are installed with Genie are used by the program for various tasks, and therefore

cannot be deleted.
You can modify the original seven’s colours, and add or delete any new items you wish by selecting 'Modify' in
the Status popup menu. This window behaves in the same way as the Type window (see Appointment Types).
6.1.2.9 Appointment Types

The Type of appointment can be used to change the background colour of the appointment to distinguish it at a
glance from other appointments. It can also be used to automatically assign multiple slots for a particular type of
appointment.
Commonly used types might be 'New Patient', 'Follow Up', 'Post Op', 'Theatre', etc.
To Set-Up
You can add, delete and modify different Types by selecting 'Modify' in the Type popup menu.
This will open the window shown here:
To set the background colour for a particular Type, select the Type from the list on the left, then click on the
coloured bar containing the Type name on the right.
Use the Delete and Add Type buttons to delete or add a new Type.
Tip: Create a Type called 'Clear' and set the background colour to White. You can then use this type to
'Un-Type' an appointment.
You can specify how many slots you want the Type to fill if it is applied to a patient appointment. e.g. New

Patients take 30 mins, which is 2 slots (if your appointment intervals are set to 15mins).
If you set up a Type called exactly 'No Appointments' then patients cannot be booked over this type.
If you set a Type called exactly 'Antenatal', and apply it to a patient appointment, the gestation displays in the
appointment cell.
Using Types
Once you have set up your Types there are two ways to use them
1. To organise your patients
2. To organise your diary
1. To Organise your Patients

You can organise your Patients using Types so at a glance you can see which Patients are, New, for Follow-up,
Theatere, etc., just by the background colour of the cell.

Using Types will also block off the specified number of cells (see Appointment Type Set Up) of a Patient
appointment. To allocate a Type to a Patient appointment, highlight the required appointment, then select the
Type from the Type drop down menu.
This will block off the nominated number of cells (provided these cells are available below the appointment), and
changes the background colour of the appointment.
An Appointment Type report can be generated through Appts > Appts Type Report. This will show how many
patients of each Type have been booked in a given time period. It will also report on Non Patient Appointment

Types in the Non-Patient Appointments tab.
2. To Organise your Diary

Types can also be used to organise times of unavailability or to block off Theatre times for patients to be booked
into.
For example, let's say the Doctor operates on Mondays from 1pm to 5pm. Highlight the cells from 1pm to 5pm
and select the Type you have set up from the Type menu, e.g Mater OT (Figure 1). This will change the colour of
these cells and patients can be booked in these time slots with the colour remaining (Figure 2).
Figure 1 Figure 2
You can also group and ungroup this time block as desired by using the Grouping button.
This time block can then be set up to repeat every Monday (see Repeating Appointments).

6.1.2.10 Repeating Appointments

Appointments can be made to repeat either individually or as a block by highlighting the appointment/s to repeat,
and then clicking on the Repeating Appointment button .
This will display the window below:
Select the desired repeating interval from the popup menu, and enter the number of times you want the
appointment to repeat in the field provided, then click the Save button.
Rules:
1). Patient appointments are never overwritten by a repeating non-patient appointment.
2). Non-patient appointments are always overwritten by another repeating non-patient appointment.
3). If two patient appointments are conflicting, you will be asked if you want to:
'Skip', 'Skip All', 'Replace' or 'Replace All'.
'Skip' leaves the existing appointment alone.
'Replace' will replace the existing appointment.
'Skip All' will leave all future patient appointments untouched.
'Replace All' will replace ALL future conflicting patient appointments.
Example: You have a breakfast meeting on the first Monday of each month.
1. Create a Type (if not already done) called Breakfast Meeting, and go to the date of the next meeting and
highlight the appointments slots required.
2. Go to the Type drop down menu and select 'B'fast Meeting'. This will automatically mark the selected cells as
that Type.
3. With the cells still highlighted, click on the repeating button. Select Every 4 Weeks from the popup menu, and

enter 12 to make this appointment repeat for the next year.
Deleting Repeating Appointments

To delete a repeating appointment:
1. Highlight the appointment/s and click on the Repeating Appointment button.

2. Set the Repeat Interval to None, and then click Save. This will delete all future instances of the Repeating
appointment.
3. Click on the Delete button to delete the current instance.
6.1.2.11 Printing Appointment Page

The Appointment page can be printed in two formats:
1. Printing appointments for all doctors
2. Printing appointments for an individual doctor
Printing Appointments for all Doctors

1. Select the day in the appointment book that you wish to print the appointment list for
2. Select the All Tab
3. To adjust the size of print out, and whether to print blank appointment cells, go to Appointment >
Preferences
For more information, see Appointment Preferences

4. Click on the Printer icon from the appointment page
Printing Appointments for an Individual Doctor

1. Select the day in the appointment book that you wish to print the appointment list for
2. Select the Individual Doctor Tab
3. Go to Appointment > Preferences and click Modify Columns
Tick the columns of the appointment book that you wish to print in the Print column, and click OK. This window
also allows you to specify which columns are on view in for that individual doctor's appointment view.
4. Click on the Printer icon from the appointment page
6.1.2.12 Linking a Procedure to an Appointment

This can be used for booking Patients into surgery and printing Theatre lists.
A procedure can be linked to a patient's appointment in two ways.

1. If the procedure is created via the appointment book
2. If the procedure is created in the patient's clinical record.
Appointment book

1. Highlight the patients name on the appointment book, and click on the Procedures icon
2. This will open up a Procedures window.
3. Complete all the necessary details and when finished, click OK.
4. This will result in the procedure being linked to the appointment selected.
Clinical Record
If the Doctor creates a Procedure for a patient via their clinical record, but doesn't know when the patient is
available to have the procedure, they should tick the box called 'Needs an Appointment', and the OK button will

turn to Appointment Pending.
This way the Procedure remains 'Pending' until it is linked to an appointment using the Procedures button on
the Appointment page.
If the patient has more than one Pending Procedure, you will be able to select the appropriate procedure when

linking to an appointment
Deleting an Appointment with an Attached Procedure

If you delete an appointment that has an attached procedure, Genie will prompt you as to whether you wish to
keep this procedure.
You will also be prompted as to whether the procedure is completed or if you would like it to go on the list of
pending procedures. This would be used for circumstances where people cancel surgery with the intention of
rebooking when a more appropriate time is organised.
6.1.2.13 Cancellation List

The cancellation list allows you to place patients on a list who request an appointment with a specific doctor, but
are unable to get an appointment straight away.
To place patient's on the cancellation list, you need to firstly set this up in your appointment preferences, Appts
> Preferences. Make sure that you have Check for Cancellations when Deleting ticked.

To Use Waiting for Cancellation

1. When a patient phones for an appointment, and can't get one on the required day, book them in for a future
appointment.
2. Make this patient's appointment Status 'waiting for cancellation'
3. The next time you delete a patient appointment you will be provided with the following prompt:
4. Select the patient from the above list that you wish to book into the freed appointment, and click Insert.
5. This will insert the selected patient into the nominated appointment slot.
You can keep their future appointment also by ticking Keep This Appointment Also.
To view the cancellation list at any time go to Appts > Waiting for Cancellation.
6.1.2.14 Appointment Reminders

You can send patients an appointment reminder by mail, email or SMS.
To send a reminder via mail, you can set up a template reflecting the appointment information (see Merged
Letter Templates for information on setting this up). Once you have an appointment reminder letter set up you
would need to select each patient individually from the appointment book and click the Merged Letter
Template icon. You would then select your appointment reminder letter and print it for each person. This is
a little tedious if you are wanting to send bulk reminders, so you may want to opt for SMS or email reminders.
If sending an email, the patient needs to have their email address entered into their demographics. Similarly,
they will need a mobile number entered if sending them a SMS.

6.1.2.14.1 Genie Two-Way SMS

The major advantage of this method over using another third party carrier, is that your patients’ SMS replies are
automatically collected and displayed in your appointments book, without any intervention on your part. This
should prove to be a huge time-saver for reception staff, since they will no longer have to make, or answer, any
telephone calls regarding appointment reminders.
Setup
To use Genie’s SMS system, you need to pre-purchase SMS credits. There is a sliding scale of costs depending
on volume purchased:
Cost Schedule: (Minimum Quantity: 500)

500+ 22 cents per message
* Please note that these are interim prices until a final agreement has been reached with our suppliers. These
prices may change in the future.
To purchase, select Special > Software Updates and click on the PDFs tab. Download the item named SMS
Purchase Authority.pdf, print it, fill in the details, then fax it back to us on 07 3720 2802. We are currently
implementing an online purchasing web page to make this quicker and easier.
IMPORTANT: Remember to include your HIC Location ID. This is the ID starting with “GEN” followed by
5 digits, and is displayed in the top right corner of your appointments book. If you don’t include this, we
may not know who you are!
If there is a provider in your practice that does not wish for any of their patients to receive SMS reminders then
you can mark them as Don't send SMS reminders for my appointments in their User Preferences, General Tab.
Before you first start sending, you will need to go to Appts > Genie Two-Way SMS and click the Setup button
to open the window below:

At the top of this window you can create the message you wish to send.
Use the Name Format popup to specify how the provider’s name should appear e.g. Dr Izzy Better, Dr Better,
Izzy etc.
Use the Date Format to specify how the appointment date should appear.
As you make these changes, the sample message in blue will be updated below. The number of characters in
the sample message is also shown.
Note: If your message is greater than 160 characters, it will be split into two SMS messages, costing
you twice as much to send!
Remember to take into account the number of characters in the longest provider’s name, if you are in a
multi-doctor practice.
Next, you can specify whether you want reminders to be sent for just consultations, just procedures, or both. If
you tick the checkbox named Check for Replies 10 minutes and 1 hour after sending, Genie will automatically
check for replies at these times, as long as you do not quit out of Genie on this machine during that time.
Finally, you can automate the entire sending and receiving of replies. Only one computer on the network can be
designated to perform the sending and retrieving of messages. By default this will be the computer you are
currently working on. However, you can change it to another computer on the network if you wish, by selecting it
from the popup menu.
IMPORTANT NOTE: Although the name of your server machine may appear in this popup, you cannot
use the server to send and receive messages. You must select a client machine.
When sending SMS messages automatically you can choose to either send a reminder for all appointments for
the following day, or you can send reminders in the afternoon for appointments due the following morning, and
send reminders in the morning for all appointments due the same afternoon.
If you select the latter option, Genie will assign a random time at which they will be sent. You can change this
time to something else if you wish, but please avoid sending on the hour or half-hour, otherwise we may end up
with hundreds of hits on our server at 5:00PM. This isn’t a major problem, however it may cause delays in
sending the messages on.
You must also specify the time of your first afternoon appointment, so that Genie knows which messages to
send in the morning of the same day, and which to send the afternoon before.
Once you have finished setting up, click the OK button to save your settings.
Sending and Receiving Manually

To manually send SMS messages you will need to go to the day of appointments you wish to send messages for
and then go to Appts > Genie Two-Way SMS. This window will display all the patients with appointments for the
day displayed.

If you are in Today’s appointments, then only those patients with an appointment after the current time are
displayed.
Note that patients can be marked as “No SMS” in their demographic window.
In the top right corner of the SMS window, the Show Remaining Msgs button, when clicked, will display in red
how many pre-purchased SMS messages you have remaining.
Purchase Msgs will allow you to purchase SMS credits online. This function is not yet available so instead
downloads the PDF fax form.
The Monthly Report and Daily Report buttons will show the date and time at which our server received the
messages from you; the date, time and detail of the messages that were sent to the patient’s mobile; and the
date, time and detail of the reply received from the patient.
Once you have ticked/unticked the people you would like to send a message to click the Send button.
In the individual provider’s appointment book display there is a column named Confirmed. You can move this
column anywhere you like so that it can be viewed more easily. To do this, open Appts > Appt Preferences and
click the Modify Columns button, then drag and drop the Confirmed column to the position you want e.g as
shown below:
You can adjust the width of the column by changing the number in the Width column.
After the SMS reminders have been sent, the Confirmed column will display “Awaiting Reply”, as shown below.

If you have selected the automatic checking option in Setup, then Genie will check for replies 10 minutes and 1
hour after sending the message. You don’t have to do anything. If the patients have sent replies then they will
just automatically appear in the Confirmed column.
To manually check for replies, you can go to Appts > Get SMS Replies
OR
Appts > Genie Two-Way SMS, click the Receive tab and then click the Get Replies button.
Note: Our beta-testing suggests that 50% of patients who receive a reminder, will send a reply. Of these,
50% reply within 3.5 minutes, and 95% have replied within one hour. Your practice manager may want to
do a manual receive first thing in the morning to catch the remaining 5%.
Note: If you send two reminders to the same mobile phone number e.g. for a mother and child who both
have an appointment then, depending on the order in which she replies, the two appointments may get
the answers swapped around. If the replies for both are the same, there’s no problem, but if she cancels
the child’s appointment, but confirms her own, then it may appear around the wrong way, so this should
be borne in mind.
Sending a Single SMS Message

You can also send just a single message to any patient by right-clicking on their appointment and choosing
SMS. This will create the standard appointment reminder message, but you can overwrite this with any message
you like:
If the patient replies to this message, this will also display in the Confirmed column of the appointment book.
Toggle SMS Replies

If you have the All tab selected in the appointments book, i.e. you are viewing all providers’ appointments, you
can select the Appts > Toggle SMS Replies menu item to replace the patients’ names with any replies
recorded. Select it again, or click the TODAY button to toggle back.
TROUBLE-SHOOTING
In order to use Genie’s SMS system, you must be able to send webservices messages to our server. If you can
view the Software Updates window in the Special menu then you’re ready to go.
If you cannot view the Software Updates window, then the most likely reason is that you are running a proxy
server. You should contact your network administrator and ask them to open Port 8080 so that you are able to
connect to “www.geniesolutions.com.au”.

6.1.2.14.2 Email Reminders

You will need to set up your Genie Email Module if you want to send email reminders or SMS reminders via a
third party carrier.
If you wish to send Email Reminders to patients go to Appts > Email Reminders to open the following window:
This window will only mark those patients with an email address in their demographics, and who haven’t already
received an SMS reminder. The reason for this is that, if you send both an email and SMS reminder, then the
patient may choose to reply to the email, and ignore the SMS, in which case you will lose the automated benefit
of an SMS Reply.
For this reason also, it is important that you send any SMS reminders before sending email reminders, because
Genie can tell if an SMS reminder has been sent, but is unable to tell if an email reminder has been sent.
Even if you aren’t using SMS Reminders, you can still use the Confirmed column in the appointments book. You
can type directly into it, or right-click and select Mark as Confirmed.
6.1.2.14.3 Old SMS Method

If you wish to send SMS reminders via another third party organisation, you will need to have your Genie Email
Module setup and to contact your chosen provider in order to set up an account with them. You can use any
SMS provider that accepts SMS messages in the form of emails. However, by default, Message Media (Ph: 03
9600 0777) will be the provider. If you wish to use an alternative SMS provider you will need to enter their details
in Practice Preferences > SMS Reminders. For more information on this, please refer to SMS Reminders.
Once we receive confirmation from your SMS provider that you have set up an account with them, we will
contact you with the required password.
To send your reminders, go to the day that you wish to send reminders for and select Appts > Old SMS Method
. Tick whether you would like to send the patient an email or SMS then click the Send Email or SMS button. If
sending SMS you will be prompted for the password that should have been given to you by Genie Solutions.

You will then be presented with a box to enter additional information to send if required eg. Please phone 1234
5678 if unable to attend. The SMS or Email reminder already includes the provider's name, appointment date
and appointment time, so there is no need to enter this information into the box.
Once you have confirmed your additional information the following message will appear:
You now need to go into Open > Email and click the Get Mail icon to actually send your messages.
Once you have received confirmation of the patients appointment by return phone call or email you can mark it
as such in the Confirmed column in the appointments book. You can type directly into it, or right-click and select
Mark as Confirmed.
6.2 Theatre Lists

There are two important factors to consider when printing a Theatre list:
1. You need to have 'Rooms' set up in Genie
2. You need to have entered in a Room (hospital) into the Procedure window.

Genie Manual The Reception Module: Theatre Lists
6.2.1 Set Up
Setting Up Rooms
Rooms are essentially all the Hospitals/Day Surgeries that your Doctors may operate at.
These can be added via Appts > Appt Preferences > Column Order and Rooms
To add a room, click on the Blue Plus button. To delete a room, click on the garbage can. You can drag rooms
up and down the list to change the column order of the rooms in the appointment book.
Bookings for these hospitals can be viewed on the Appointment book via the Hospital view.
Note: The 'Hospital' view just filters out the appointments that don't have a procedure attached, or don't
have a room specified, in the procedures window. It is not an independent appointment page. Any
appointments booked in this view will also show in the Provider and Dates view.
Selecting a Room (Hospital) in the Procedures Window

A patient will only appear on the Theatre list if the hospital is specified in the Details tab of the Procedures

window, which is then linked to that appointment.
6.2.2 Printing a Theatre List

To print a Theatre list, you need to go to the day of the surgery in the Appointments book and select Appts >
Print Theatre List.
You can choose whether you want to print the whole Theatre list, or just a specific time period as highlighted in

the appointment book. You can change the Start Time by entering the appropriate start time in this field.
Select the Doctor and the Hospital as appropriate.
Print Times will print the times of the procedures as specified by the slot they booked into in the appointment
book
Print Number will print the order number next to the procedure
Print Nothing will just print the procedures in order without times or an order number
Print Item Numbers will print the item numbers listed in the quote section
Referrer's Email will print the patient's referring doctor's email address
Referrer's Fax, as above but for Fax number
Consent Status will print that Consent has been signed or not as determined by the tick box in the Preop tab of
the Procedure window
Account Type will print if ticked, as specified in the patient's demographics
Fasting Time as specified in the Details tab of the Procedure window
Mark as Final will put FINAL on the theatre list, otherwise it will be marked as DRAFT
Once you have done this, click the Print button and your Theatre list will be printed. If you would like to Email the
Theatre list, you can click the Email button. This will email the list in plain text provided you have the Email
module set up in Genie and your hospital listed in Open > Address Book with an email address. If you want to
send the email as an attachment you will need to save it as a PDF and attach it to an email.
Note: If the printed Theatre list is incorrect, then you have probably failed to select a hospital for the
procedure in the Procedure record. Or, you haven't actually linked a procedure to the appointment yet.
6.2.3 Preop Notifications Check

You can do a quick check the day before a theatre list to make sure that Hospitals and Assistants have been
notified.
Select Appointments > Pre-op Notifications Check

The window below will open displaying a quick summary of items to check for each procedure.
For more information, please see the Procedures chapter.
6.3 Labels
Labels can be printed from many sections within Genie, including the patient list, account holder and address
book by clicking on the Label icon.
When you have a record highlighted (i.e. patient name or account holder) and click the Label icon, a drop down
menu appears with the options of 'Label Editor' or 'Built in Labels' and if there are label templates imported into
the Label folder, these will also appear in the drop down menu.
You can use Genie's Built-in Labels (for Avery 7 x 2 or Dymo Labels) or customise your own labels through
Label Editor.
6.3.1 Built in Labels
Select the type of label you want from the drop down list at the top of this window (e.g. Specialist Chart). There
are a variety of options, so print each and decide which is best suited.
Select whether you are using Avery or Dymo labels. If you are printing Dymo labels, select the Dymo Label
Printer for labels in your Printing Preferences (File > Printing Preferences).
Select how many labels you would like to print (any number between 1 and 14) and for Avery label's select your
starting label from the template shown at the left. For Dymo labels, you will also need to select the correct label

Genie Manual The Reception Module: Labels
size from the Select size... drop down menu.
If you find that your labels are printing outside of the margins use the Edit Template button to adjust them
accordingly. If you need to adjust the entire label template you can do this by clicking on the Edit Template
button, and expanding the window to full view. Drag the mouse over the whole page, releasing the mouse once
you have covered the page. The invisible references will now be visible. You can nudge all fields left, right, up
and down by hitting the arrow keys on your keyboard. You can save these changes by clicking the Disk icon and
closing out of this Edit Template window.
Click the Print button.
Display in list will put the selected label in the label pop down menu so that this screen can be bypassed in
future. Bear in mind you will not be able to select starting label or number of labels if you print straight from the
label icon.
Note: The label editor facility available in previous versions of Genie is no longer available, nor is it
supported.
6.4 Invoicing
Genie allows you to invoice and receipt patients and organisations. Invoices can either be regular invoices or
batched invoices. Batched invoices are used for bulk-billed Medicare and DVA claims. You can also batch
invoices to other organisations e. g. private health funds.
6.4.1 Account Holders

Before a patient or an organisation can be invoiced, they must have a record in the Account Holders table.
You assign the Account Holder for a patient from the patient’s Demographic Window/Edit Patient.
Clicking on the Self radio button in the middle left of this screen makes the patient their own account holder, and
creates a new record in the Account Holders table. Clicking the Other button allows you to make another patient
the Account Holder for this patient. This would usually be the parent or guardian of the patient. You must have
already created a patient record for the parent or guardian and assigned them to be their own Account Holder.
IMPORTANT: THE ACCOUNT HOLDER FOR A PATIENT MUST BE ANOTHER HUMAN BEING. YOU MUST
NOT MAKE AN ORGANISATION THE ACCOUNT HOLDER EVEN IF THE PATIENT IS A DVA OR
WORKCOVER PATIENT.
The majority of specialists would usually have all their patients marked as Self. GPs who are seeing the whole

Genie Manual The Reception Module: Invoicing
family would probably use the Other button to assign the head of the family to be the Account Holder. This will
allow any changes made to the Head of Family record to be replicated to other family members, using the
Update Family Button.
For Pediatricians and one-off child visits there is no need to create a patient record for the head of the family. In
this case, click on the Self radio button to make the child their own Account Holder.
Then click on the Account Holder’s address window.
This opens the Account Holders record.
In this window you can change the first name of the child to the parent/guardian name. This is the name and
address which will print on invoices and statements. So although the child is marked as their own Account
Holder, when you print invoices they will be addressed to the head of the family.
The Account Holder record contains the name and address of the Account Holder, as well as the Medicare
number and account balance.
6.4.2 Account Holders for Organisations

Before you can invoice an organisation such as Workcover, an Employer or a Private Health Fund, you must first
create an Account Holder record for them.
To do this select Open > Account Holders.

The list of Account Holders opens.
Click on the Add button (Blue Plus) to create a new record.
If you want to batch the invoices for this organisation, tick the Batch Process Invoices checkbox. Batch
processing means that instead of sending an individual invoice for each patient contact, the invoices are stored
and printed as a batch perhaps weekly or monthly.
The printed batch is a listing of all the invoices stored and can be forwarded with or without the individual
invoices attached, depending on the organisations requirements. See the section on Batching later in this
Chapter.
In summary:
Patient Account Holders are assigned from the patient’s Demographic/Edit Patient window. Other organisations
are added from the Account Holders table (Open > Account Holders).
6.4.3 Medicare and DVA Account Holder Records

The Account Holder records for Medicare and DVA are special cases. They should already be present in the
Account Holders table. The naming of these records is important. They must be named exactly 'Medicare' and
'Dept of Veterans Affairs' respectively. Note that there is no point after 'Dept' and no apostrophe in 'Veterans'.
When Genie is launched it searches for these 2 records and stores their unique Account ID numbers in Practice
Preferences (File > Practice Preferences), as shown below.
Note: You must not change the names of these two records, nor create new Account Holder records
with the same name.
Whenever you send an invoice to either of these records they are automatically batched and a DB4 form is

printed instead of an ordinary invoice. This is provided that you have them ticked in Printing Preferences (File >
Printing Preferences).
If you want to send an ordinary invoice to the Dept of Veterans Affairs, you must create a new Account Holder
record and name it anything BUT 'Dept of Veterans Affairs' (e.g. DVA Reports).
When you want to invoice to this account, click the Other button in the Invoice window and search for this record
(see Invoicing an Organisation for more information).
6.4.4 Setting/Increasing Private Fees

To set or increase private fees or any custom fees you may have added through Billing > Edit Account Types,
use the Increase Fees button in Open > Billing Items.
This will change the specified fee for all items on display. To restrict the list to certain item numbers, highlight the
required items and select Records > Use Selected.
Increase Fees allows you to increase the fee by a percent or an amount above what it is currently set, OR above
the AMA or MBS schedule fee. To set it to a percentage or amount below put a minus sign (-) in front of the
figure.
You can also set the rounding of the fee in cents.
If the OK button is greyed out, it is because you either haven't selected a fee to change from the drop down
menu at the top or a radio button to specify how you would like the fee to be changed.
Importing the AMA Schedule

Note: You must ring the AMA and ask them to send you the schedule. Genie is not allowed to distribute
it because the AMA wants to limit access to it to just AMA members.
You can import the AMA schedule from the Billing Items window (Open > Billing Items). Select Import AMA
Schedule from the Import Fee Schedules drop down list. You will be asked to select the text file to import. Click
Okay and navigate to the AMA CD. Once you have selected this, click Open and the AMA Schedule will be
imported into Genie.

Adding Non MBS Items

If you need to add items that are not part of the Medicare Benefits Schedule that you may charge companies for
eg. Medical Reports then this can be done through Open > Billing Items by clicking on the Blue Plus button.
Enter in a code, brief description, and any fees. You can specify to apply GST by ticking the GST applies to this
item tickbox, this will then produce another tickbox specifying whether the fees entered include GST or not.
6.4.5 Updating Medicare/DVA Fees

To update the Medicare and DVA fees on 1 November and 1 May, go to Special > Software Updates on any
client machine and click the Check Now button in the window that appears. Click on the Fee Schedules tab.
Tick the Medicare Schedule and if you are a specialist practice also tick the DVA Specialist Schedule (the DVA
schedule is included in the Medicare Schedule for GPs). Click the Install x Items button and the fees will be
updated across the network, ready for use immediately.
Note: As stated, the fees will update immediately so only perform the update on the date the fees are

effective from.
6.4.6 Creating an Invoice

Invoices can be created from several places:
1. The Appointments Book
2. The Patients List
3. The Account Holders List
4. From within a Procedure record (based on the quote).
Creating an Invoice from the Appointments Book

Click on the Appointment of the patient to be invoiced.
Then either select Billing > Invoice or click on the Invoice button (the dollar sign) or right click on the
appointment and select Invoice from the drop down menu.
The Invoice window will open as shown below.
Across the top right of this screen are 6 buttons which determine who this invoice is to be sent to i. e. which
person or organisation is going to be responsible for payment.
The Account Type you have set for the patient, in the patient's demographics window, determines which of these
is set by default. The keyboard shortcuts for these buttons are Ctrl +1-6. You can however over-ride these as a
one-off (e. g. bulk-billing a usually private patient).
If the patient has an Account Type of Private, then the Self button will be automatically selected and the Account
Holder for the patient will be displayed.
If the patient has an Account Type of Bulk Bill then the Bulk Bill button will be selected and Medicare will be
designated as the Account Holder responsible for this invoice.
If the patient has an Account Type of Veterans Affairs then the DVA button will be selected and the Dept of
Veterans Affairs will be designated as the Account Holder responsible for this invoice.
Note: When Bulk Bill or DVA are selected, Genie uses the Medicare and Dept of Veterans Affairs
accounts as described above. Any invoices to either of these accounts is automatically treated as a
'Bulk Bill' contact, meaning that a DB4 form will be printed for DVA, and a Bulk-Bill assignment form for
Medicare, assuming you are electronically transmitting. If you are not transmitting electronically then
Medicare does not allow you to print a DB4 form. You must use the manual vouchers.
The Workcover, Other and Health Fund button will need to be selected manually accordingly.
If billing to a Health Fund, there needs to be a corresponding Account Holder. If you attempt to bill a Health Fund
without a corresponding Account Holder record, you will be asked if you would like to add one. Alternatively, an

Account Holder record can be created or attached to a Health Fund via Open > Billing Items and clicking on
the Health Funds button. Double click on the Health Fund of interest and click on the magnifying glass beside
'Account Holder'. This will then allow you to search for the corresponding Account Holder or create a new one for
that Health Fund.
6.4.7 Invoicing an Organisation

If you want to send an ordinary invoice to DVA, or another organisation e.g. an Insurance Company, click on the
Other Button.
You will be asked to search for the Account Holder to whom you want to send this invoice.
Enter the first few letters of the Account Holders name and click OK.
If you click the Health fund button it skips the above step and makes the account out to the health fund as
selected in the patients demographic screen provided there is an account holder record for it.
If a matching record is not found for either of the scenarios above, you will be asked if you want to add a new
Account Holder record.
Once the correct Account Holder is selected, proceed to Adding Items to an Invoice.
If you are wanting to invoice an organisation in relation to something that does not involve a particular patient
then this can be done through Open > Account Holders. Search for the organisation you wish to bill, highlight
the organisation and select Billing > Invoice. You will be presented with a simplistic version of an invoice that
you can then add items to.

6.4.8 Invoicing Workcover

There are 2 ways of invoicing Workcover.
1. Using the 'Other' button

When you add the item to the invoice you can manually enter the Claim Number into the Notes field.
Alternatively, you can create a Current Problem record (by clicking on the Blue Plus) in the patient’s clinical
record and enter the claim Number in the Notes field of the Current Problem record, as shown below.

When you add the item to the invoice, click on the Paperclip icon to the right of the Notes field.
This will display a list of all the Current Problems for the patient, from which you can select the relevant problem
for this visit.
This will automatically insert the problem and the Claim Number in the Notes field of the item.
2. Using the Workcover button

This is the more correct way of invoicing Workcover and incorporating Worckcover claims.
Note: An employer MUST be added for this method to work.

This is done from within the patient’s Demographic/Edit Patient window.
Click on the Blue Plus to search the Employers table.
If a matching record for the Employer is not found you will be asked if you want to create a new Employer
record.

Click OK and a new Employer record will be created as shown below.
Fill in the Employers details.
If you plan to invoice the actual Employer at any stage, click on the Add to Account Holders button to
automatically create a record in the Account Holders table. If an Account isn't created for the Employer, the
Employer's details will still be held in the Employers table (Open > Employers).
You then need to assign the Insurer for this employer, if known. Click on the Select Insurer button.
This allows you to search the Account Holders table for the organisation providing Workcover insurance to this
employer.
If no matching record is found you will be asked if you want to create an Account Holder record for the insurer.
Once you have assigned the insurer, save the Employers record. The next time you see an employee of this
organisation all you will have to do is assign the Employer to the patient.
Next, you need to create a Workcover claim in the patient’s clinical record. This is done using the Claims button

on the Employers tab. Claims can also be added in the clinical file by the Doctor, through the Tools menu.
or
Click Add and a new claim window will open as shown below.
Enter the Date and Time, the Injury and Cause and the Claim Number if known. If an Employer has not already
been assigned to the patient, you can do this from this window by clicking on the Select Employer button.
Note: You cannot save this record until an Employer has been selected.
Once you have assigned an Employer and created a claim, you can click on the Workcover button in the new
invoice window.
You will be asked to select the injury to which this invoice relates, in case the patient has several claims in
process.
6.4.9 Adding Items to an Invoice

Once you have determined which patient or organisation is going to be responsible for the invoice, you can add
the item/s to it.
If the invoice has been created from the Appointments Book, and the doctor has specified the item numbers to
charge (see Specifying a Fee to Charge), then there will be item/s and messages listed in the Item/s to Charge

box at top right of the invoice screen.
If any of these items do not need to be added to the invoice, for whatever reason, then they must be removed
from this box by double clicking on them before clicking the Add Item to Invoice button.
When you click the Add Item to Invoice button you may be prompted regarding Inpatient or Outpatient services,
if this is not relevant then it can be turned off in the doctor's User Preferences by ticking the 'I do not bill inpatient
services through the appointment book' in the Clinical tab.
The fee that is entered is in accordance with the Account Type specified in the patients demographics window. If
it needs to be changed for any reason then you can simply click into the fee field and change it. In this example
we would change the ECG fee to be the rebate amount as specified in the message in red.
If you do not know the fee, then you can double click on the item which will bring up the item window with all the

fees listed at right.
If you need to add another item other than those specified in the Item/s to Charge box or the doctor has not
specified the item/s to charge, then click the Add Item to Invoice button to open a new item window like the
above. Enter the item number and press the TAB key. Genie will insert the appropriate fee for the Account Type
of the patient, depending on what is specified in the patient's demographics, i.e. Private, AMA, Schedule etc.
If this is not the fee you wish to charge this time then simply click on the word of the fee you wish to charge on
the right hand side. eg. if you had a Private patient that you wanted to charge rebate fee as a one off, click on the
word Rebate on the right and it would put the rebate fee in the Amount field.
If any items requires the No. of Patients Seen to be entered, like home/hospital visits, then you can enter this in
the field to the right of the item number. Similarly, if the item requires multiple quantities, these can be entered in
the Quantity field which prevents you from having to enter the same item number multiple times.
Note: when using Quantities, the Amount field will still display the amount per item not the total amount
for all quantities.
Once you are done, click the Save button to add this item/s to the invoice.
Inserting Private Fees on the Fly

When you first start using Genie, the items in the Billing Items table will only have the Medicare Schedule and
Rebate fees filled in.
You can open the Billing Items table (Open > Billing Items) and insert your own private fees/descriptions at any
time, however you can also do this on the fly as you are creating invoices.
In the new item window note that the various fees are displayed on the right-hand side of this window.
You can click into these fields and enter your usual Private Fees.
These will be saved so that the next time you invoice this item the appropriate fee will be automatically inserted.
Similarly, you can change the text in the Description field either permanently, by editing as appropriate and
saving the invoice or just for this item by ticking the Description for this Invoice item ONLY.

Note: If you cancel the invoice, none of the above changes will be saved.
6.4.10 Other Item Information

You may sometimes need to modify or include extra information for the item.
If the patient has a valid Private Health Fund, the Use Private Fund Schedule tick box will be enabled. Clicking
on this tickbox will insert the fund's fee for this particular item.
Service Date
If you are invoicing for a service which occurred on a different day, you should change the Service Date to the
correct date.
Service Time
The Service Time is automatically taken from the Appointment time. If the Service Time is significantly different
and it is important that it be recorded correctly (e.g. for a second visit on the same day), then you may want to
change the time of the service.
If the service was an inpatient service then the Inpatient Services checkbox should be ticked. This will change
the rebate and gap amount to reflect the 75% Schedule Inpatient Rebate.
Notes
The Notes field prints on invoices and DB4 claim forms, and is transmitted through HIC Online. The most
common use for this field is to enter Workcover claim numbers, second visit on same day details, Inpatient
details and an operative assistant's name and provider number, as well as noting whether the item is 'not normal
aftercare'.
Time Spent
The Time Spent field does not have to be completed unless you have a specific need to record this.
6.4.11 HIC Online Options

If you are using HIC Online then some or all of the options shown below may also be visible in the new item
window.
These should all be self-explanatory, however you need to mark them as appropriate otherwise your claims may
be rejected (see Using HIC Online chapter for more information).
6.4.12 Searching the Fee Schedule

If you are unsure of what item number to charge, you can search the Billing Items table (Open > Billing Items)
for an appropriate item number by clicking on the Search Fee Schedule button at the bottom of the new item
window.

This will open a Search window allowing you to search on either the item number or the description.
For example, you want to invoice for a colonoscopy but you can't remember the exact item number but you know
that it starts with "3209". You can enter this in the Item field of the Search window and this will find all items
beginning with "3209".
If you have no idea what the item number is, then you can search for a word that you think will be in the
description, in this case,“colonoscopy ”. If you just enter “colonoscopy” into the Description field then Genie will
search the Billing Items table for a record whose Description field starts with “colonoscopy”. It is unlikely to find
anything.
Instead, we could use the wildcard character, "@", before "colonoscopy". During a search the wildcard character
can represent one or many characters. By searching for "@colonoscopy" Genie will find any record with
"colonoscopy" anywhere in its description.
In this particular case it finds ten matching records. Select the item you want to invoice and click the OK button.
The selected Item Number will be inserted into the Item field of the new item window.
6.4.13 Selecting the Practice

Genie allows you to invoice from multiple practices by allowing multiple Practice Preferences each with their own
address and letterhead (see Practice Preferences). If you bill from multiple practices then after adding items to
an invoice you should select the appropriate practice from the Practice popup menu which appears in the middle
of the invoice window.

This will insert the appropriate practice letterhead on the invoice.

If you only have one Practice Preference record then you can ignore this popup.
6.4.14 Selecting the Site of Service

Below the Practice popup menu is the Practice Site menu.
This menu is unique to each provider in a practice. It is built from the practice sites specified in each provider's
User Preferences (see The Practice Sites Window). It is used where a provider has two or more provider
numbers for different practice sites.
This menu has no effect on the letterhead printed on the invoice. It does however change the Site of Service and
Provider Number printed on invoices and DB4's and on electronically transmitted claims.
Normally you would only have multiple sites specified if you have a different Provider Number at each site.
However, even if you have the same Provider number at different sites it can still be useful to distinguish
between them so that you can see how much is actually earned at each site.
It may not be worthwhile travelling to Woop Woop every Wednesday! This breakdown can be viewed in the
Billing Vs Income Report in File > Maintenance & Reports > Practice Analysis (see Practice Analysis ).
6.4.15 Multiple Procedure & Diagnostic Rules
Multiple Procedure Rules

When Multiple Procedure items are added to an invoice, Genie allows you to apply the Multiple Procedure Rule
(MPR) to the items.
Those items which are affected by the MPR should already be marked as such in the Billing Items table (Open
> Billing Items), as shown below.
The Multiple Procedure Rule Applies to This Item checkbox is automatically ticked when importing the Medicare
Schedule. However, if it doesn’t seem to be working properly, then you should open the Item’s record (Open >
Billing Items), by double clicking on the item and check that this checkbox is ticked.
When invoicing procedures you should enter the full normal fee for each item. When the second procedural item
has been added a new button will appear on the invoice screen, as shown below.
You should continue adding all the items to the invoice. When you are finished, click on the Calculate Multiple
Procedures button.
Genie will work from the most expensive item down applying the multiple procedure rule, based on the Medicare

Schedule Fee.
The rule applies differently to GPs and Specialists, and sometimes Organisations. You can specify what MPR to
apply when billing an Organisation, via the Account Holder record (Open > Account Holders).
You can specify whether you are a GP or a Specialist in your User Preferences (see User Preferences). If the
calculation isn't working correctly, then this is the most likely case.
It doesn't matter in what order you enter the items. Genie will still work from the most expensive down. The
important thing is that you enter all the items with their full fee to be charged before clicking the Calculate
Multiple Procedures button.
Note: If you are entering multiple procedural items which took place on different days on the one
invoice, then Genie will calculate each day's items separately, so that there is no need to create a
separate invoice for each day's items.
Note: If there are items on the invoice for which the Multiple Procedure Rule applies, and you forget to
press the Calculate Multiple Procedure button before trying to save or print the invoice, you will be
presented with a reminder window which will allow you to go back and calculate the multiple procedure
rule before saving the invoice.
Diagnostic Rules
If either the DIMSR or MVUSSR (diagnostic imaging and vascular ultrasounds) rule applies, a DIMSR or
MVUSSR button will appear.
Click this and the appropriate rule will be applied to the billing items.

6.4.16 Known Gap Amounts

When doing surgery accounts and billing the Private Health Fund direct, you can apply a fixed gap amount by
using the Use Known-Gap Schedule button. This will assign a fixed Gap amount across the items on the
invoice.
Alternatively, you can charge your own private fee and Genie will calculate the Gap for you and display it in the
Gap box.
The Maximum Known Gap can be entered through Open > Billing Items in the Health Funds button. Double
click on the health fund name:
Enter the Max Known Gap and click OK.

Note: The Max Known Gap will need to be obtained directly from the individual health funds, Genie
Solutions does not have access to this information.
6.4.17 Assistant's Fees
Include Assistant's Fee

Genie allows you to add an assistant's fee to an invoice by clicking on the Include Assistant's Fee button.
Provisos:
· At least one of the items on the invoice must include the text "(Assist)" in the Description field, or
have 'Assistant Billable' ticked in the Billing Items record (Open > Billing Items).

· If you add your own item numbers which you want to attract an assistant's fee then you will need to
tick Assistant Billable in the Billing Items record (Open > Billing Items).
· The assistant must have a record in your Address Book (see the Open Menu Chapter).
When you click on the Include Assistant's Fee button you will be asked to find the provider in your Address
Book.
Enter the first few letters of the assistant's name, then press OK to search the Address Book and select the
assistant.
Once you have selected the assistant, the window below will appear asking what fee you would like to insert for
the assistant.
The choices are, 1/5th of the surgeon's fee, the permissible Medicare Schedule Fee, or the permissible Private
Fund Fee if the patient is privately insured, and you have imported the Fund's Schedule (see Importing Fund
Schedules).
Select the fee to charge and then click OK.
Invoice as Assistant
The Invoice as Asst. button allows you to create an invoice for when your doctor was an assistant for a
procedure and does their own invoicing for this.
Provisos:
· At least one of the items on the invoice must include the text "(Assist)" in the Description field, or
have 'Assistant Billable' ticked in the Billing Items record (Open > Billing Items).
· If you add your own item numbers which you want to attract an assistant's fee then you will need to
tick Assistant Billable in the Billing Items record (Open > Billing Items).
· The surgeon who performed the procedure must have a record in your Address Book (see the Open
Menu Chapter).
When you click on the Invoice as Asst. button you will be asked to search for the surgeon who performed the
procedure in your Address book.

Enter the first few letters of the surgeons name and press OK, to search the Address Book and select the
surgeon.
Once you have selected the Surgeon, the window below will appear asking what fee you would like to insert for
the assistant's fee.
The choices are the same as when Including an Assistants Fee (see Including Assistants Fee above).
Select the fee to charge and click OK.
You will notice that the procedure item number has been replaced in the invoice by either item number 51300 or
51303, depending on the fee of the procedure item number.
The surgeons name will be inserted into the Notes field of the invoice, as well as the surgeons provider number
(if entered in their Address Book entry) and the item number for the operation.

6.4.18 Invoice Memos

Genie provides the ability to insert a memo at the bottom of printed invoices. You can have as many different
memos as you like.
The memo field is at the bottom left of the invoice window.
When the invoice window is opened Genie automatically inserts the default memo. Unless you want a standard
memo on every invoice, you should leave the Default Memo blank.
To add a new memo, go to File > Practice Preferences: Miscellaneous tab, click on the drop down menu at
the bottom right of the window and select Add. Give the memo a name and enter the actual text in the Memo
field.
When you want to add this memo to an invoice, simply select it from the drop down menu at the bottom of the
invoice window.
To modify the wording of a memo, select it and simply change the wording in the memo field in the invoice
window. When you TAB out of this field your change will be saved.
Note: Whenever you delete or modify a memo in the invoice window, you must continue on and actually
print the invoice, otherwise your changes won't be saved. This is because invoicing works within a
transaction, which allows you to cancel the invoice at any time without any changes being saved.
For this reason, you can also modify invoice memos from your Practice Preferences record (File > Practice
Preferences) in the Miscellaneous tab, as shown below.
Note: To delete a memo, hold down ALT key whilst selecting it from the menu. To reset the Default
Memo to be blank, delete the memo text and continue on to print the invoice, or delete the text from
Practice Preferences.
6.4.19 Checking Appointments Have Been Billed

All patients that have been invoiced from the appointment page will change status to Invoiced (Blue) and will
show a figure in the Invoiced column of the provider's tab. For a more reliable check, short of going into each
patient's account history, go to the day in the appointment book that you would like to check and select Appts >
Check Missing Invoices.

6.4.20 Invoicing from the Patient List

If the patient to be invoiced doesn’t actually have an appointment, you would invoice them from the Patients list.
Find and highlight the patient’s record, then select Billing > Invoice. This opens the usual invoice window. Click
the Add Item button to open the new item window.
In a multi-doctor practice, Genie won’t know who the Provider is, nor what the item to charge is, so these fields
will be left blank.
Until you specify the Provider, the Save button is disabled and you are unable to save the record. To select the
provider, either click on the black arrow to display a menu of names, or use the Up and Down arrow keys.
The names in this menu are those users who have the Show Me In The Billing Menu checkbox selected in their
User Preferences (see User Preferences).
Note: When you select a Provider, their default item number (as specified in their User Preferences) is
inserted automatically, but can be overwritten if necessary.
6.4.21 Storing and Deferring Invoices

Instead of immediately printing an invoice, it can be Stored or Deferred by clicking or either the Store or Defer
button in the new invoice window.
The two are very similar, however deferring an invoice gives you more control over when the invoice is
eventually printed.
When an invoice is stored, it is assumed that at the end of the month you will print all the stored invoices from
within the Maintenance & Reports window (see Monthly Chores). When you do this, all stored invoices are
immediately printed. Stored invoices are ideal for things like home visits.
Deferred invoices on the other hand are printed individually only when you choose to print them. For example,
imagine that you admit a patient to hospital on the 28th of the month and whom you discharge on the 4th of the
following month. You raise an invoice for each daily visit. If you stored these invoices then they would get printed
with all the rest on the last day of the month. At the end of the following month, another set of invoices would be
printed. In this situation it is much better to defer each invoice. Then, when the patient is discharged, go to File >
Maintenance & Reports > Monthly Chores and click the Deferred Accounts button, select the patient from
the list of deferred invoices and print all their invoices at once (For more information, refer to Monthly Chores) .
Stored and Deferred invoices can also be printed individually, using the Printer icon in the Patients Account
History (Billing > Account History).
6.5 Receipting
The following section describes how to receipt individual invoices for patients and Organisations. For information
on receipting manual batches see Manual Batching. For how to receipt HIC Online claims, see Using HIC Online
.

Genie Manual The Reception Module: Receipting
6.5.1 Receipting Directly from an Invoice

After you have finished adding items to an invoice, you have the choice of printing the invoice, storing, deferring,
or receipting it.
The Payments field will already be highlighted as shown.
If the patient is paying immediately simply start typing in the amount that they are paying in this field.
Note: There is no need to click the cursor in this field as it is already highlighted. You also don't need to
enter zero cent amounts i.e. if the patient is paying $72, just type "72". You don't need to type "72.00".
Click the Receipt button.

The Receipt window will open as shown.
Genie will default to the receipt type based on whatever is selected in the Practice Preferences (File > Practice
Preferences > Miscellaneous). The amount which is being paid will already be applied against the invoiced
item.
If the patient is paying by the default receipt type then you just have to click the Print button again to print the
Invoice/Receipt.
If the patient is paying by some other means e.g. cheque, then click on the appropriate radio button e.g. a
personal chq.
The payment has now been moved to the Personal Chq field. Fill in the Cheque details. You don't have to enter
the cheque number, however it will appear on your Bank Deposit slip if you do.
You can also split the payment e.g. if the patient pays part in cash and part via EFTPOS. In this case just type
the relevant amount into each field.
Note: In this case you cannot click on the Radio buttons because these move the entire payment
amount.
Now click the Print button to print the Invoice/Receipt.

Note: If you click the Cancel button at this stage, only the Receipt is cancelled. The Invoice has already
been saved.
Troubleshooting
If the Print button is disabled there are two possible causes.
The first is that you haven ’t assigned a Bank code to the receipt, in the top left corner of this window. Bank
Accounts are created in the Bank Accounts table accessed via the Open>Bank Accounts menu. They can then
be assigned as the default account for individual doctors in their User Preferences (see User Preferences).
The second is that there is still money to be allocated as indicated in green near the Auto-Fill button.
6.5.2 Receipting an Existing Invoice for a Patient

If the original invoice was billed directly to the patient, then you would normally receipt from the Patients list,
unless the patient coincidentally had an appointment today as well in which case they can be receipted from the
Appointments Book.
In either case find and highlight the patient then select Billing > Receipt to open the Receipt window.
The Receipt window will open as above, listing all outstanding items for the patient. If the patient is paying for all
of them at once then you can simply click on the Auto-Fill button to automatically allocate payments against
each of the items.
Otherwise, you will need to manually allocate each payment against the appropriate item by clicking in the
Payment field. If the patient is making a part payment, you will need to slow click in the Payment field in order to
enter in the payment amount.
If you need to edit the fee amount of an invoice for some reason, you can do this by slow double-clicking in the
Fee column. Alternatively you can double click on the invoice and open up the Edit item window.
Note: when you receipt directly from an invoice, only the items on the invoice are displayed in the
receipt window.
If a patient is to be billed for a consultation today, but also wants to pay for a consultation from the previous
week, you should either:
Invoice and receipt them for today’s consultation and then receipt the previous week’s,
or

Invoice them for today’s consultation and save the invoice un-receipted, and then receipt today’s and the
previous week’s with one receipt.
If the account holder has been blacklisted, at the time of receipting a payment you will be given the opportunity to
de-blacklist the account holder:
6.5.3 Paying the Gap

If a patient only ever pays the Gap amount you can remind yourself of this by ticking the Pays Gap Only tickbox
in the patients demographics, which then will be indicated in the invoice screen. However, Gap payments can
still be allocated without this being ticked.
Enter the Gap payment amount into the Payment field on the invoice and click the Receipt button. The Gap
amount will be assigned for each item in the receipt window.
If you need to force in a Gap Payment amount (e.g. receipting an existing invoice with multiple items for a
patient) you can do this by holding the ALT/Option key while clicking on the Auto-Fill button.

6.5.4 Receipting an Existing Invoice for an Organisation

If the original invoice was billed to an organisation such as a Health Fund and it has not been batched (see
Manual Batching), then it must be receipted from the Account Holders list.
Select Open > Account Holder
Search for the Organisation, highlight it and then select Billing > Receipt.
Fill in the total payment amount and type in the fields at top left of the Receipt window. Allocate the payment to
the patient's specified on the Organisations' statement, by clicking in the Payment field associated with those
patients. To help with locating the relevant patient's, columns can be sorted by clicking the column header.
6.6 Discounts
Discounts can be applied at the time of invoicing, whilst receipting an invoice, or from the Account Holders
screen.
Discounts are recorded in the patients Account History, in the payments section. They will also be reflected in
the corresponding provider's Billing v Income report (File > Maintenance & Reports > Practice Analysis).

Genie Manual The Reception Module: Discounts
The Daily Billing report (File > Maintenance & Reports > Daily Chores) allows you to track discounts on a
daily basis.
6.6.1 Applying when Invoicing

You can apply a discount whilst invoicing, either at the stage of adding an item or after an item has been added.
Discounts can also be applied at the receipting stage but this is discussed in Applying when Receipting.
To apply a discount in the Add Item to Invoice screen, select the provider and add an item number as usual.
You can then discount the item based on a percentage by clicking on the black drop down arrow or a dollar
amount by just typing the amount into the Discount field. If you enter a percentage discount, it is automatically
converted to a dollar amount.

Once you have entered all other necessary item information, click the Save button.
In the Discount column you can see the discount given.
If you need to change the discount at this stage or indeed need to apply a discount, click in the Discount column
which will allow you to choose the percentage you wish to discount. If you prefer to give a dollar discount
amount, select 'Other' from this drop down list and type in the discount figure.

The 'Total for this Invoice' will display the discounted total.
Enter in the Payment amount, if any, and click Receipt.
Note: Even if there is no payment you still must click Receipt to process the discount.
This will take you through to the usual receipt window. In the receipt window you can enter a reason for the
discount by right clicking in the Discount column. An asterisk next to the discount amount denotes no reason has
been given. If a reason is not added the discount will display the Reason as 'Unspecified' in the patients Account
History.

Selecting Edit Discount Reason will open a window allowing you to enter a reason for the discount. You can use
a pre-entered discount reason by clicking in the reason field and selecting the reason from the drop down list.
Select the appropriate reason. If you enter a new reason, after clicking OK you will be asked if you wish to
permanently add this reason to your list of reasons.
6.6.2 Applying when Receipting

You can apply a discount to an unpaid invoice at the time of receipting.
In the receipt window, click in the Discount column and select the appropriate discount percentage or dollar
amount by selecting 'Other...'.

After selecting the amount you will be asked to enter in the reason for applying the discount. You can select a
saved reason from the drop down list, or you can type in a new reason.
If you enter a new reason, after clicking OK you will be asked if you wish to save this reason to this list
permanently.
The balance owing will be adjusted to reflect the discount.
Receipt the amount as per usual.
6.6.3 Reversing a Discount

If a discount was applied incorrectly, or is no longer valid, you can reverse discounts through the patients
Account History (Billing > Account History).
Highlight the invoice in the left hand column which will display the associated discount in the Payments section.

Highlight the discount and click Delete.
You will be required to enter a reason for deleting the discount which will be tracked in the Sales Audit.

6.6.4 Modifying a Discount

Discounts can be increased either through the patients Account History window or when receipting.
In the patients Account History window, highlight the relevant invoice in the Invoices column which will display
the items at right. Slow double click in the Discount field for the item and enter in dollar amount or the
percentage followed by a percent (%) sign.
Discounts applied in this manner will be on a cumulative basis, meaning any further discounts will be added to
the already existing discount amount.
If a discount has been applied incorrectly using the above method, it will need to be deleted from the Payments
section of the Account History window.
At the time of receipting, the discount amount can be increased by clicking in the discount field and selecting the
appropriate discount amount.
6.7 Deposits
Genie allows you to accept deposits from patients. You would usually use this feature when you require a
deposit or full payment to be paid pre-operatively.

Genie Manual The Reception Module: Deposits
6.7.1 Accepting A Deposit

To accept a deposit, find and highlight the patient’s record in either the Patient List (Open > Patients), or the
Appointment page then select Billing > Accept Deposit.
This opens the Deposit window as shown below.
Fill in the Provider and Payment details then click OK .
You will be asked if you want to print a receipt for the patient.
Click the Print Receipt button to print out the receipt. The receipt states that this cannot be used for Medicare
purposes.
A banking record is also created, and the patient’s account balance will be credited with the deposit amount.
Note: A deposit should be accepted and applied on SEPARATE banking days ie. banking should be
sealed between accepting and applying a deposit. Accepting a deposit and applying the deposit before
sealing the banking batch will cause problems when trying to reconcile the banking. It will also produce
incorrect data in the Billing vs Income report.
You can view all current deposits by selecting Billing > List Deposits at any time.

6.7.2 Deleting A Deposit

List current deposits by selecting Billing > List Deposits. This will open the Deposits List.
Highlight the deposit to delete, then click the Delete button. You will be required to enter a reason for
deleting this deposit. This deletion is then tracked in the Audit report. This will update the patient’s account
balance.
If the banking has not yet been sealed, then the deposit’s banking record will also be deleted.
Deposits can also be deleted from the patient's account history (see Deleting a Payment).
6.7.3 Using A Deposit

When you next come to invoice this patient, the Apply Deposit button will be enabled in the Invoice window.
After adding the items to the invoice, click on the Apply Deposit button and a list of held deposits will appear.
Tick the box to the left of each deposit which you want to use to pay for this invoice.
Note: A patient can have multiple deposits and you can select multiple deposits in the window above.
Click the OK button, and the sum of the deposit(s) selected will be entered into the Payment field for this invoice
as shown below:
If the deposit is equal to the amount billed, the invoice can be printed at this stage and will be shown as fully
paid.

If there was an outstanding amount and the patient wanted to pay the remaining amount on the invoice ($500.00
in the above example) you will need to receipt this separately. Genie will distinguish between the deposit and
today's payment (eg. $500.00) so that only today's payment will show up on today's banking.
Click the Receipt button to open the Receipt window. Today's payment will be allocated to the default payment
type (as set up in Practice Preferences), and the deposit will be allocated to the payment type it was originally
entered as.
If you forget that you have a deposit on hold, Genie will remind you when you click the Receipt button.
You can also apply a deposit from the Receipt window using the Apply Deposit button.
6.8 Quotes
Quotes can be created for either Procedures that are booked, or Procedures which are yet to be booked (i.e.
Pending Procedures).
Procedures which have been booked can be accessed through the patients clinical file, or from the appointment
book.
If a quote is required prior to booking in the Procedure, the Procedure can be added and marked as 'Pending'
via the Tools menu (Tools > Add Procedure). For more information see Adding a Procedure.
Either way, Quotes are then prepared through the Quotes Tab of the Procedure window.
6.8.1 Preparing Quotes

Genie Manual The Reception Module: Quotes
1. Add all your items through the Blue Plus if they have not been inserted already by loading a template (see
Procedure Templates).
2. Select the Procedure type.
3. Select the Patients Private Fund, if not already selected.
4. Select the Fee Schedule that you want to use from the Fee Schedule drop-down menu or use the No Gap/
Known Gap buttons as appropriate
No-Gap Agreement
If you have a 'No-Gap Agreement' or prior approval from the fund, then click the Use No-Gap Schedule button.
This will insert the fund's own fee into both the Fee and Rebate Fields.
Known Gap Agreement

If you have a 'Known Gap Agreement' and you want to charge your own Private fees tick the Don't Overwrite My
Fee box and then click the Use No-Gap Schedule button which will keep your private fee but insert the health
fund rebate into the Rebate field. Genie will calculate the Gap accordingly.
If you want Genie to apply a fixed Gap amount to the Quote then click the Use Known-Gap Schedule button
which will prompt you for the Maximum Known Gap amount for the Health Fund selected in the quote and
distribute the Gap amount that you choose to the items on the quote.
The Maximum Known Gap can be entered into Open > Billing Items, Health Fund button by double clicking on
the fund name and entering the gap amount into the Max Gap Amount field.
For information on importing Health Fund fees in general, see Importing Fund Schedules.
Note: The AMA Fee Schedule can be imported from the Billing Items window. You must ring the AMA
and ask them to send you the schedule. Genie is not allowed to distribute it because the AMA wants to
limit access to it to just AMA members.
NB: When there are multiple operation items in the list, the Multiple Procedure Rule will be applied
automatically according to what is selected in the drop down list.
You can edit the fees which are automatically inserted by placing the cursor in the Fee field and changing the
fee.

To change the fee permanently, highlight the item and then click the Edit button.
This will open the Billing Items record for that item, allowing you to edit the fee amount.
The Rebate amount calculated in the Quote depends on whether or not the patient is privately insured, and
whether you have specified the procedure as an inpatient or outpatient procedure (see table below).
Insured? Inpatient or Outpatient? Rebate Calculated

No Outpatient 85% Medicare Rebated
No Inpatient 75% Medicare IP Rebate
Yes Either 100% Schedule
Yes (No-Gap or Known Gap) Either Health Fund Rebate
Assist Fees
An assistant's fee can be included by clicking on the Include Assistant's Fee button.
This will only work if the text "(Assist.)" is present in the Description field of the item, or it the 'Assistant Billable'

box is ticked. This text will be present for all items for which Medicare allows an assistant fee to be charged,
unless you have deleted it yourself.
If you have created new items yourself, for which you want to bill an assistant fee, then you must enter "(Assist.)"
in the Description of the item, or alternatively, tick the 'Assistant Billable' box.
When you click on the Include Assistants Fee button, the window shown below will appear.
This window allows you to specific whether the fee should be one-fifth of your own fee, the Medicare fee, the fee
allowed by the patient's private fund, or your own private fee.
If the option for the Private Fund is $0.00, this means that you either
· don't have a record for item 51303 in the Billing Items table
· haven't imported the fund's schedule of fees, or
· don't have the percentage factor that the fund allows for this item.
To check, click on the item and then click the Edit button to open up the 51303 record.
The Fee percentage should be imported for most of the funds automatically, however you may need to manually
add the percentage in some cases.
However, you will need to contact the fund directly to find out what these are because we don't have that
information.

Printing a Quote
To print a Quote, select the Quote template using the drop down menu at the bottom left of the Quote window.
The item information and fees will be transcribed to the Quote template, and can then be printed using the
Printer icon at top right of this window.
For information on setting up Quote templates, see Creating Quote Templates.
6.8.2 Invoicing Directly From A Quote

This would really only be used if there were no complications in surgery and the invoice will be exactly as quoted.
Click on the Invoice button and an invoice will be created with all items and fees as in the quote.
You could then assign the Account Holder (e.g. Health Fund) and Apply Deposits as per usual.
If billing to a Health Fund, there needs to be a corresponding Account Holder. If you attempt to bill a Health Fund
without a corresponding Account Holder record, you will be asked if you would like to add one. Alternatively, an
Account Holder record can be created or attached to a Health Fund via Open > Billing Items and clicking on
the Health Funds button. Double click on the Health Fund of interest and click on the magnifying glass beside
'Account Holder'. This will then allow you to search for the corresponding Account Holder or create a new one for
that Health Fund.
If the Quote is vastly different to what needs to be invoiced just invoice through the Billing menu (Billing >
Invoice)
6.9 Account History

A patient’s or an organisation’s billing history can be viewed by selecting Billing>Account History from either
the Patients list, the Appointments Book or the Account Holders list.

Genie Manual The Reception Module: Account History
6.9.1 Viewing a Patient's Account History

Highlight the patient in either the Patients list or the Appointments Book, then select Billing > Account History.
This will display all the items billed to or for that patient. It will not display items billed to other members of their
family.
To view all items billed to any member of a family, search for the Account Holder’s record in the Open >
Account Holders window and then select Billing > Account History.
The Account History window will open as shown below.
This window lists all invoices on the left with the account holder name in bold.
If the patient has any deposits, these will be displayed in the Payments area, down the bottom of the Account
History window.
Click once to select an invoice and the items invoiced will be displayed in the top right hand side of the screen,
with any associated payments, credits, deposits or discounts being displayed in the lower half of this screen.
Clicking on the individual items of the selected invoice will highlight the associated payment for that item in the
payments area.
SHIFT + Click will allow you to select a list of invoices and their associated details, while CTRL + Click allows
you to select multiple specific invoices. CTRL + A will highlight all invoices.
The Item, Fee, Discount and Credit columns can be modified by slow double-clicking to adjust the entered
amounts.
Note: The Discount and Credit columns work on a cumulative basis, i.e the amount entered will be
added to the existing amount.
Unpaid invoices only can be viewed by clicking the Show Outstanding button.
In this window, you can:

· Reprint invoices
· Print a statement
· Open and modify an existing invoice

· Change the account holder and/or the patient if an invoice has been billed to the wrong person or organisation
· Modify invoiced items
· Delete invoices, payments and deposits
· Apply a credit to invoiced items if they have been overcharged, or to write them off as a bad debt
6.9.2 Reprinting an Invoice or Receipt
Reprinting an Invoice
Select the required invoice(s) from the left hand column of the Account History window and click on the Printer
icon
Note: Medicare and DVA items won't print unless you have selected the Medicare DB4 and DVA Claims
checkboxes respectively in Printing Preferences.
Reprinting a Receipt
Select the invoice from the left hand column of the Account History window and then select the associated
receipt from the Receipt window. Click on the Printer button.
6.9.3 Printing a Statement

Highlight the relevant invoices on the left hand side of the Account History, and then highlight the items at right
which you wish to include in the statement.
Click the Statement button. (This button will not be available until you highlight the relevant items in the top right
hand side of the Account History screen).
You can highlight contiguous (adjacent) items by SHIFT-Clicking, or non-contiguous items by CTRL-Clicking on
each item.

6.9.4 Print Report

The Print Report button prints out a report of all transactions.
Follow the same steps as in Printing a Statement.
6.9.5 Finding A Batch

The Find Batch button can be used to display all the items in a particular Medicare, DVA or other organisation's
batch, assuming you have got to the Account History window from the Account Holders list for either Medicare,
DVA or the organisation.
6.9.6 Itemized Receipt

You can print an itemized receipt by highlighting the required invoice in the Invoice column and clicking the
Itemized Receipt button. This will print a receipt detailing the method/s of payment for that particular invoice.

6.9.7 Modifying an Invoice

To modify an invoice, double click on the invoice in the left hand column.
This will display a form similar to the original invoice.
From here you can Add and Delete items from the invoice, select the referring Doctor, change the Site of
Service or Practice as well as adding an Invoice Memo.
6.9.8 Modifying an Item

To change an actual item's details, either slow double click in the item fee field or double-click on the item at the
top right of the Account History and the Edit Sale window will open.
In this window, you must first click the Edit button before you can change anything. This is to prevent you
accidentally overwriting an entry.
You can:
· Change the Provider of the service in case you have accidentally billed it to the wrong provider

· Change the fee, as long as the invoice has not already been paid or the fee is greater than the amount paid.
· Change the item number if the wrong item number has been billed
Note: Changing the item number does not automatically change the fee as well. You need to manually
adjust the fee.
· Change the number of patients seen if this was for a hospital or nursing home visit
· Change the Service Date and Time, and whether or not the service was an inpatient service or not
· In the bottom left of this screen is the Batch number. If this item has been batched to Medicare, DVA or
another organisation, then the Batch number will be inserted here. Deleting the Batch number automatically
removes this item from the Batch.
· You can also enter a note into the Notes field e.g "second visit", if you are manually batching.
· If you are using HIC Online a number of other options also appear in this window relating to inpatient services,
same day services etc.
Once you have made the necessary changes click the Save button to close this window.
Note: Changes made in this way create an audit record which can be traced back to the date and time of
the change and the log-in name of the person making the changes (File > Maintenance & Reports:
Administrator).
Note: You can password-protect the ability to change invoices in this way by ticking the Password
Protect Billing Changes button in the Practice Preferences record. Assuming the practice Administrator
has assigned him/herself a password, then only those people knowing this password will be able to
make changes. It would be prudent to change this password on a regular basis.
6.9.9 Changing the Account Holder or Patient

If an item has been billed to the wrong patient or account holder, highlight the invoice in the left hand column and
click on the Change button.
This allows you to change either or both of these.
The changes are automatically made to any associated payments.
Note: Changing the patient does not automatically change the account holder, so change the account
holder to the patient's name before changing the Current Patient.
6.9.10 Deleting an Invoice

It is possible to delete an invoice if the Allow Invoices to be Deleted checkbox is selected in Practice Preferences
(File > Practice Preferences: Practice Details). This checkbox can only be selected by someone who knows
the Administrator's password.
Having this checked does increase the risk of fraud, however it can be very useful in those situations where a
transaction has been processed by mistake.
Highlight the invoice on the left to be deleted. Click on the Delete button.

You will then be asked to enter in a reason for deleting the invoice.
This reason will then be recorded in the Audit trail.
6.9.11 Applying a Credit to an Invoice

Credits should really only be applied to write off a bad debt, as user error can generally be handled by editing the
invoice directly (see Modifying an Invoice and Modifying an Item).
NOTE: DO NOT USE THIS TO RECEIPT INVOICES!
To apply a credit, slow double click in the credit column of the item and enter the credit amount.
You will be asked for a reason (default being Bad Debt) and your initials.
If there is an existing credit against the item the credit will change to zero when you enter the column but the new
credit will be added to it.
Once you click the OK button, a credit record will be created and displayed in the Payments area

6.9.12 Editing A Receipt

You can also edit some components of a receipt by double-clicking on the payment in the bottom right of the
Account History list.
6.9.13 Deleting a Payment

Highlight the payment/deposit/credit you wish to delete.
Click the Delete button to the left of the payments area.
You will be asked for a reason which will be recorded in the Audit trail (File > Maintenance & Reports:
Administrator).
If you plan to re-receipt this item, then you should change the date in the receipt window to the date the money
was actually received.
The reason for this is that where a practice pays it's employee doctors on the basis of money received, then they
may have already been paid for this receipt. If you now receipt it again on a different date, then the doctor may
get paid twice, once for the original receipt, and again for the new receipt.

6.9.14 Using a Dummy Bank Account (Refunding a Payment)

Sometimes you may need to reverse a payment that has already been banked, and then re-receipt the patient.
Your daily banking will therefore be incorrect because you haven't actually received the payment on that day. In
this case, you could use a dummy bank account to store the payment.
Create a new bank account called Dummy Account with a code of "Z" for example (see Banking section for
more details on creating bank accounts).
Assign the receipt to the Dummy Account by entering the code (Z) into the top left of the receipt screen.
When you print the daily banking sheet, the Dummy Account will print out on a separate page that you can throw
away or keep for your records of billing changes. Your real banking sheet will be correct.
6.10 Banking
Genie can handle multiple bank accounts for multiple doctors.
6.10.1 Setting up Bank Accounts

Before you can receipt, you must have at least one bank account record. You can add, modify and delete Bank
Account records by selecting Open > Bank Accounts.
Each Bank Account must have a unique Bank Code, which can be up to 3 characters in length.
The Bank Code can be anything you want. Most people use the initial of the actual bank e.g.“N” for the National
Bank. In a multi-doctor practice, where each doctor has their own account, you could make each Bank Code the
initials of the relevant doctor.
In each provider’s User Preferences (File > All User Preferences), you must assign a default bank account, as
shown below.
When you create a receipt, Genie will use the default bank account of the first provider in the list of outstanding
items.

Genie Manual The Reception Module: Banking
6.10.2 The Banking Report

To create a Banking Report select File > Maintenance and Reports to open the Maintenance window, then go
to the Daily Chores page.
Click on the Daily Banking Report button to view the current batch.
If You Bank Every Day

If you bank every day, then you just need to click on the Print button at the very top left to print out the report.
You will be asked how many deposit slips you would like printed. Usually, you would select 2 - one for the bank
and one for your own records. You will also be given the option to print EFTPOS and direct deposits (ie. banking
that isn't taken to the bank) on a separate page.
A separate report is generated for each bank account.
With the report in hand you should now reconcile it against what you have in the till.
Note: If a receipt has been recorded as the wrong type e.g. a cheque instead of cash, you can

Genie Manual The Reception Module: Banking
double-click on the relevant bank record and correct this.
Once you have reconciled, simply click on the Seal This Batch button. This seals off the current batch so that
any further receipts will go into the next batch.
If You Don’t Bank Every Day

If you don’t bank every day but still want to reconcile the till, follow the procedure detailed below.
On Day 1:
Print the report and reconcile it with the till.
Then click the Reconcile button to mark the displayed records as having been reconciled.
Bundle the monies with the bank deposit slip
On Day 2:
Click on the Show Unreconciled radio button to display everything that has been receipted since you reconciled
on Day 1.
Print the report and again reconcile with the till.
Click the Reconcile button again to mark Day 2 ’s records as having been reconciled.
Bundle the monies with the bank deposit slip
Day 3 (Banking Day):

Click on the Show Unreconciled radio button to display everything that has been receipted since you reconciled
on Day 2.
Print the report and again reconcile with the till.
Click the Show Entire Batch radio button to display all receipts for Day 1, 2 and 3.
Click the Seal This Batch button.
Take your 3 bundles of deposits to the bank.
If You Forget To Seal

Click Show Until Date, enter the date the banking was meant to be sealed, then click Seal This Batch. If you
then close out of the banking report and go back in, only today's banking will be listed.
Show Totals: Gives the total of each payment type without detail.
Print Payment & GST Report: If you bill GST, this shows the breakdown of GST in the batch. This is only used
if you bank GST separately.
Note: This is NOT the GST report used for taxation purposes, that is located in File > Maintenance &
Reports: Practice Analysis.
6.11 Manual Batching

Manual batching of invoices is used for Medicare and DVA bulk-billing where HIC Online is not being used, or for
Private Health Funds and hospitals who may prefer to receive a weekly or monthly batch of invoices for services
performed.
Select File > Maintenance and Reports to open the Maintenance window.

Genie Manual The Reception Module: Manual Batching
Click on the Daily Chores tab.
Click on the Manual Batching button to open the Manual Batches window.
This window displays on the left, a list of previous batches which are awaiting payment and receipting.
Clicking on the Show Finalised radio button will display batches which have been receipted already.
Clicking on a Batch on the left will display the items in that batch in the list on the right.
You can delete a batch by highlighting it and then clicking on the Clear Batch button. This doesn’t delete any of
the items. It simply removes them all from the batch so that they will appear in the next batch created.
A batch can be reprinted at any time by clicking on the Reprint button.
If a batch has been fully receipted but for some reason isn't showing as finalised, clicking Finalise will do so.

6.11.1 Creating a New Batch

To create a new batch, click on the New Batch button to open the New Batch window.
Select the type of batch from the radio buttons at the top of the screen i.e. Medicare, DVA or Other.
Note: Clicking on the Other radio button will display a list of Account Holders which have the Batch
Process Invoices checkbox ticked in their Account Holder record in Open > Account Holders.
In this example, we will click the Medicare button. This makes visible a menu from which we can choose the
Provider.
Once a Provider is selected, another menu appears from which we can select the Site of Service, in case there
are multiple sites with different provider numbers.
Note: If you are creating a batch for Other, then this menu does not appear, as it isn’t necessary to split
the batch into different sites.
Once a site is selected, a field for the Batch Number becomes visible.
For Medicare and DVA it is a good idea to use the batch numbers on the DB1 manual batch headers sent to you
by HIC, or you can make up your own batch numbers. It is a good idea to make the batch number consist of 2
letters followed by 4 numbers, the first letter being the type of batch it is e.g. for a Medicare Batch use something
like "MA0001". Make the next batch "MA0002" and so on.
This will avoid any conflicting batch numbers if and when you move to HIC Online, where the batch numbers are
automatically generated in the format of a single letter followed by 4 numbers.
Once you have entered a batch number, press the TAB key and you will notice that this batch number is applied

to all the items in this list.
The Batch No. field in each item record is in fact all that ties an item to a particular batch. Removing the batch
number from the Batch Number field removes that item from the batch. It will then be included in the next batch
that you create.
You can do this manually through the patients Account History (see Modifying an Item), or you can simply click
on the item/s to highlight and then use the Remove Highlighted or Keep Highlighted buttons as appropriate.
Any removed items will appear in the next batch created.
For Medicare and DVA batches it is a good idea to Print List before saving and mark off what is in your batch
with your manual vouchers, as it is the manual vouchers that you need to send to HIC.
The final step is to click the Save button. This will print a Summary Sheet of all the items in the batch, and for
DVA, a DB1 form for the Provider to sign before the paperwork is mailed to the Health Insurance Commission.
The New Batch window will automatically close and the new batch will appear in the list of batches on the left.
6.11.2 Receipting a Batch

When you receive payment for a manual batch from Medicare, DVA or another organisation, you must receipt it
through the Manual Batches window also.
To do this, highlight the batch to be receipted in the list of batches on the left of the Manual Batches window, and
then click the Receipt button.

The usual Receipt window will open as shown below.
Enter the cheque amount in Cheque 1 for Medicare and DVA, or Cheque 3 for a Private Fund or other
organisation.
If the cheque amount exactly equals the amount you have claimed (an unusual occurrence!), then all you have
to do is click the Auto-Fill button and then click the Store button to save the Receipt. (There’s no need to print a
receipt for Medicare or DVA).
Dealing With Exceptions

Quite often Medicare or DVA will either not have paid for a particular item at all, or will have paid a different fee
to that claimed.
In this case, we need to either fix the problem with the item that is preventing them from paying, and then
remove that item from the batch and resend it with the next batch. Or, we need to adjust the fee charged to
match what they have agreed to pay.
If, for example, we have forgotten to enter in the Item Notes field that this was a second visit on the same day,
then Medicare will usually refuse to pay.In this case, we first need to fix the problem.
You do this by double-clicking on the item in the Receipt window. This will open the Edit Sale window.

Before you can make any changes in this window,you must first click on the Edit button.
Then enter “2nd visit etc.” in the Notes field. Click the Save button to close this window.
Then click the Remove checkbox to remove the item from this batch, so that it will be resent with the next batch.
If Medicare/DVA is paying the item but at a different amount, double-click on the item to open the Edit Sale
window above.
Click on the Edit button, and change the fee to whatever they are paying. This will then leave a record in the
Audit Trail.
Click the Save button to close the record, but DO NOT remove it from the batch.
Work through each problem item in this way until you have dealt with them all. At this stage your claimed amount
should equal what is being paid and you can then click on the Autofill button to automatically allocate the correct
payments against each item.
Finally, click the Store button to save the receipt.
This batch will now be listed in the Show Finalised column of the Manual Batches window.
Note: If Medicare, DVA or an organisation pay for multiple batches on the one cheque then receipt each

batch separately using the batch total, not the cheque total, and use the same cheque number which will
then total correctly on the banking report.
6.12 Overseas Students (Worldcare)

Genie has the ability to invoice directly to Worldcare Assist (OSHC Worldcare)or Medibank Private for overseas
students. In the case of Worldcare Assist, batched invoices can be emailed directly from within Genie for simpler
processing.
SETUP:
In Practice Preferences: (File > Practice Preferences)

Tick the 'Print Overseas Claim Forms' checkbox.
A new field will be made available in which to enter the code to denote overseas students e.g.“OS ”.
If you have an agreement with Worldcare Assist, enter the Provider Code which they have assigned to you.
In Account Holders: (Open > Account Holders)

Create a new Account Holder named 'OSHC Worldcare'. Note that the name must be exactly: OSHC Worldcare.
Tick the Batch Process Invoices checkbox.
If you don’t already have one, create a new Account Holder named 'Medibank Private'. Note that the name must
be just: Medibank Private.
Tick the Batch Process Invoices checkbox, if you want these invoices to be batched.
In the Patient Record (Demographic)

Create a new Private fund named 'OSHC Worldcare' by clicking Add Fund... from the Private Fund drop-down
menu.
Again, it must be just: OSHC Worldcare.
When you assign this fund to a patient, their Fee Type will automatically be marked as 'OS', or the code which
you specified in Practice Preferences.
If their overseas fund is Medibank Private, you must manually enter 'OS' into their fee type.

Genie Manual The Reception Module: Overseas Students (Worldcare)
6.12.1 Invoicing
OSHC Worldcare
When you create an invoice for a patient who has a Fee Type of 'OS' and who has a private fund of 'OSHC
Worldcare' the invoice will automatically be assigned to OSHC Worldcare.
Add items as usual and Print the invoice, which will print an OSHC claim form for the patient to sign.
OSHC Worldcare invoices are then emailed to Worldcare (See Batching Worldcare Invoices).
Medibank Private
When you create an invoice for a patient who has the Fee Type 'OS' and who has a private fund of 'Medibank
Private' you must select Other and search for Medibank Private as the account holder.
Add items as usual and Print the invoice. You will be prompted to either Store or Print and Store - YOU MUST
CHOOSE PRINT AND STORE so the patient can sign the Medibank Private claim form that prints out.
You can then send these claim forms to Medibank Private individually or as a batch (See Manual Batching).
6.12.2 Batching Worldcare Invoices

NOTE: TO BATCH TO WORLDCARE YOU MUST HAVE THE EMAIL MODULE SET UP IN GENIE (See Email
)
Open the Maintenance window (File > Maintenance and Reports) and go to Daily Chores.
Click the Manual Batching button.
Click the New Batch button.
Click the Other radio button and select “OSHC Worldcare” from the displayed list.
Select the provider.
Enter a Batch number. This should be something like WA1001, then WA1002, WA1003 etc. for subsequent
claims.
Press the Tab key to assign the Batch number to the displayed items.
Once you have done this, a button called Email to Worldcare will appear.
Click on this button. The first time you do this you will be asked to create an email address record for Worldcare.
Subsequently, you will simply be asked to confirm that this is still the correct email address.
Genie will then create an email to Worldcare with a file attached containing the claim data. The actual file is
created in a folder named 'Worldcare Batches' inside the Genie folder. The file name is your Provider code,
followed by an underscore, followed by the Batch number.eg. UMHS_WA1001.csv.
You don’t have to do anything with this file. Genie just stores it here in case you need to check the contents if
there is a problem. You can delete these files regularly if you wish. However, don’t delete it until you have sent
the actual email to Worldcare, otherwise it will arrive without its attachment!
To view, encrypt and send the actual email, select Open > Email. The email module will open displaying your
Inbox. Select the Outbox and you should see the email sitting there. The email is not actually encrypted or sent

Genie Manual The Reception Module: Overseas Students (Worldcare)
until you manually do so by clicking Encrypt and then Send Now. If you have set up email to check for new mail
at regular intervals the email will not be encrypted. (For more information on encryption see Encryption and Keys
)
IMPORTANT NOTE: This email must be created on the same computer that will be used to send it. That
is, you cannot create this email on one computer and then send the email from another computer,
because the second computer cannot access the attachment stored on the first computer.
6.13 Private Health Fund Fees

Genie incorporates all the major Private Health Fund Schedules including AHSA, AXA, HCF, MBF, Medibank
Private, Mutual Community and NIB. These schedules are available from the quarterly Genie update CD, and
also from our FTP site.
To set up Health Funds in order to import their Fee Schedule, go to Open > Billing Items and click the Health
Funds button.
This displays a list of all the Health Funds recorded in your data file. The checkboxes on the right indicate that a
particular fund belongs to the AHSA and uses their common schedule of fees. You should scroll through these
to ensure each fund is marked correctly.
To add a fund, click on the Add button. And subsequently to delete a fund you will not use, or to delete multiple
enteries of a fund, click the Delete button. To edit a fund, double click on the fund name in the list and then Save
.
The Create Schedule button allows you to add a fund for which the schedule has not been supplied to Genie
Solutions, but you are aware of the percentage of the fee in relation to the Medicare Schedule.
Close this window when finished.
Assistant Fee Percentages

If you invoice an Assistant’s fee for a procedure, you also need to specify the percentage of the schedule for

Genie Manual The Reception Module: Private Health Fund Fees
each private fund.
You only need to do this for item number 51303.
To do this, go to Open > Billing Items and find the record for item 51303 and open it.
In the lower half of the record you will find the list of private fund fees.
The Fee percentage should be imported for most of the funds automatically, however you may need to manually
add the percentage in some cases.
However, you will need to contact the fund directly to find out what these are because we don’t have that
information.
6.13.1 Updating via the Web

If you have an internet connection, updating the fund schedules is even easier.
Select Special > Software Updates
This will connect you to the Web Server running in our Brisbane office, click the Check Now button. This will

check for updates that are available for your platform, state and Genie version. Click the Fees Schedules tab.
Tick the health funds you wish to import fees for and click the Install x items button. You will be prompted as to
whether you would like to apply the update now or store for later activation.
If you choose Apply Now the fees will be updated across the network, ready for use immediately.
If you Store and Activate Later you will be prompted for an activation date.
The fees will download and import into the relevant funds provided the name is spelt exactly as displayed above.

If not, you will be asked which fund in Genie you wish to download the fees into.
If you have a slow (i.e. Dial Up) or no internet connection, contact Genie Solutions for a Fee Schedule CD.
6.13.2 Importing Fund Schedules

To import the fund schedules after an update has been performed using the Genie Update CD, select Open >
Billing Items.
Click on the Import Fee Schedules popup and select Import AHSA Schedule to import the AHSA fees or select
Import Other Schedules (i.e non-AHSA funds).
The window below will open asking you to identify the schedule you want to import.
This list is made up of all the non-AHSA funds in your data file. If you have entered multiple different names for
AXA or any of these other funds then you will need to either clean up your list of funds first (see Private Health
Fund Fees), or perform this import for each different name you have used for a particular fund.

In this case we are going to import the AXA schedule.
Click Open and you will be instructed to open the AXA text file in the Health Funds folder.
Navigate to the AXA folder within the Health Funds folder, within the Genie folder and open the file inside to
commence the import.
Note: Some funds such as AHSA and MBF have a different schedule for each state, so you will need to
also select the correct file for your state.

Genie Manual The Reception Module: HIC Online Installation
6.14 HIC Online Installation

Note: Since October 2005, the HIC has operated under the name "Medicare Australia". We have retained
references to "HIC" to maintain consistency with the program and familiarity with our users.
HIC Online is a facility which enables claims to be made directly to the HIC using secure transmissions over an
Internet connection.
HIC Online provides the following functionality:

• Bulk Bill
• DVA
• Patient Claims (both real-time and store-and-forward)
• ACIR (not yet supported in Genie but planned for a future release)
• Online Patient Medicare Verification
• Online Patient Health Fund Transmissions i.e. Eclipse (not yet supported in Genie but planned for a future
release)
HIC Online relies on PKI (Public Key Infrastructure) technology to ensure all communications with the HIC are
conducted securely and confidentially.The use of PKI guarantees that messages are sent from a known and
trusted source, they can’t be read by anyone but their intended recipients, their contents haven’t been tampered
with in transit, and that the sender cannot dispute that they created and sent the message.
NOTE: HIC ONLINE DOES NOT YET WORK WITH JAVA VERSION 1.6
6.14.1 Requirements
In order to start using HIC Online you must:
1. Get a HIC location (minor) ID from Genie Solutions. If you are a registered Genie user you. It is made up of
the letters “GEN” followed by a five digit number. Check in your Practice Preferences (File > Practice
Preferences, under the Miscellaneous Tab) if you are unsure.
2. Register for Online Claiming with Medicare Australia and apply to for a Healthcare Location Certificate for
your practice. You may also apply for a Healthcare Individual Certificate for each provider although this is
not required to use HIC Online. If you do wish to use them, Individual certificates should be requested on
iKeys rather than SmartCards. You can obtain the necessary application forms at
http://www.medicareaustralia.gov.au/provider/business/online/register/index.jsp or by calling 1800 700 199.
If you are unsure about this process it would pay to ring Medicare Australia to have it clarified. The Location
Certificate is provided on a CD. The Individual Certificates are provided on iKeys -small tokens - which plug
into a USB port on your computer, so you must have a spare USB port available.
3. Have your Genie software updated to allow use of HIC Online.
6.14.2 Installation
There are five steps to follow to ensure a successful installation. The steps should be performed in the following
order:
1. Install/Upgrade Genie
2. Install the HIC Online components from a recent Genie CD or through the Software Updates in the Special
menu in Genie.
3. Install the iKey Drivers (only if you are using individual certificates).
4. Configure Genie for HIC Online use.
5. Create the PSI Store in Genie.
Important: You must be logged in as both the administrator for the local machine, and as the Genie
administrator.
Note: If you are using an iKey do not connect it to your computer yet. This will be done at a later stage in
the process.

6.14.2.1 Install/Upgrade Genie

Before attempting to install the HIC Online components, it is recommended that you update to the latest version
of Genie. More information on this procedure can be found in the Updates section of the manual.
6.14.2.2 Install HIC Online - Windows

Important: Before commencing the HIC Online installation, the computer must be logged in as the
'Administrator' or a user with administrative rights. This ensures that all installed files and folders have
their permissions set correctly.
1. Insert the Genie CD into the machine(s) from which you wish to perform HIC Online transmissions. This will
either be the standalone machine for a Genie Single User or a client machine for a Genie network. If the
Genie Setup program starts, press the Cancel button to exit it.
2. You must have previously opened and logged into Genie at least once on this machine before performing this
installation.
3. Quit Genie or Genie Client if they are running.
4. Using Windows Explorer, view the contents of the Genie CD.
5. Double-click on the HIC Online folder to open it.
6. Double-click on the HIC_Online_Installer.exe program to commence the installation.
7. You are presented with the Welcome screen. Click the Next button to continue.
8. You are presented with the Select Destination screen.
9. Choose the Genie folder in which to install HIC Online. This will normally be C:\Genie, unless you previously
installed Genie into a different folder.
10.Click Install.
A window will display the progress of the installation. The installer may automatically install the appropriate Java
Runtime Environment. If so, be patient and do not Cancel the Java installation or configuration progress

windows.
When the HIC Online installation is complete, the following window is displayed.
Note: HIC Online may not work correctly until the computer is restarted.
Open the Regional Options in Control Panel (Start > Settings > Control Panel > Regional Options) and
ensure that region is set to English (Australia). Also ensure that the date separator is set to a forward slash, i.e.
"/".
Note: If you will be running HIC Online in a thin client environment, e.g. using Terminal Services or
Citrix, you must ensure each client uses a different location for their log files. The default location of
each log file may be over-ridden manually as described in the Log Files section of Troubleshooting.
6.14.2.3 Install HIC Online - Macintosh

Important: Before commencing the HIC Online installation, the computer must be logged in as the
'Administrator' or a user with administrative rights. This ensures that all installed files and folders have
their permissions set correctly.
1. Insert the Genie CD into the machine(s) from which you wish to perform HIC Online transmissions. This will
either be the standalone machine for a Genie Single User or a client machine for a Genie network.
2. You must have previously opened and logged into Genie at least once on this machine before performing this
installation.
3. Quit Genie or Genie Client if they are running.

4. Using Finder, view the contents of the Genie CD.

5. Double-click on the HIC_Online_Installer.mpkg program to commence the installation.
6. You are presented with the Welcome screen. Click the Continue button.
7. You are presented with the Installation Type screen.
8. Click the Install button.

9. You will be prompted to enter the user name and password of an Administrator user on your computer. This is
a Mac OSX Administrator user and is not the same thing as the Genie user chosen to be the Administrator in
Genie.
10.Enter the name and password of an Administrator and click the OK button.
The HIC Online installation then completes.
Open the International Control Panel in System Preferences, click the Formats tab and ensure that region is set

to Australia. Also ensure that the date separator is set to a forward slash, i.e. "/".
6.14.2.4 Install iKey Drivers
Overview
This step is only required if you will be using iKeys to sign claims. Signing claims with iKeys is no
longer mandatory within HIC Online. Each provider must elect whether or not they will be signing claims when
they register for HIC Online with the HIC. If none of the providers in your practice will be using an iKey, proceed
to Step 4.
In order to be able to read the Healthcare Individual Certificate information from your iKeys, special software
must be installed.
Uninstall Old Drivers

If you have previously installed any iKey drivers on your computer you first need to ascertain whether these are
up-to-date. If they are not, they must be completely removed from your system.
1. Click on the Start menu and go to Settings->Control Panel

2. Open the Add/Remove Programs Control Panel
3. Scroll through the list of installed programs,looking for the Rainbow iKey drivers
4. There are two programs whose latest versions are:
-Rainbow iKey 2000 Series AS v4.7.0
-Rainbow iKey Driver v3.4.4.103
5. If you do not have these drivers, you must uninstall the old drivers from your system. If you cannot find a
corresponding program for the Rainbow iKey 2000 Series AS v4.7.0, it was previously called iKey2000

Authentication Solution so it may be listed under that.
Click on each driver to select it and then click the Change/Remove button. Click Yes when asked if you are
sure you want to remove the selected program.
You may be prompted to remove a shared file:
If this prompt appears click the Yes To All Button and accept the subsequent warning. The remove Programs
process will continue and should end with a message to say that the uninstall was successfully completed.
6. Once both old drivers have been uninstalled, you must reboot the computer before proceeding.
Install New Drivers

If you have a new iKey, or received your iKey after August 2003, install the software from the CD which came
with your Individual Certificate, following the instructions provided on the CD.
If you received your iKey prior to August 2003, or if you have lost the CD which came with your iKey, use the
installer in the iKey3.4.4 folder in the HICOnline folder on the Genie CD as follows:
1. Double-click on the setup.exe file in the iKey3.4.4 folder in the HICOnline folder on the Genie CD.
2. Agree to the License conditions by clicking the Yes button.
3. The installation will proceed with a window displaying the progress.

4. When finished, you will be prompted to restart your computer.
You must restart your computer before proceeding.
6.14.2.5 Configure Genie

Now that all of the required software has been installed,the next step is to configure Genie to use HIC Online
rather than MedClaims or DiskClaims. Start up Genie.
If any of the providers will be using an iKey to sign their claims, choose All User Preferences from the File menu.
For each provider who will be using an iKey, double-click on their name in the list, and select the General tab.
Tick the Use iKey to Sign Claims checkbox and Save the User Preferences.
If you wish to receive a warning when your PKI certificates are approaching their expiry date, you can tick the
Check for Expiring PKI Certificates checkbox. If this is ticked, when you login you will be alerted of any
certificates which will expire within the next 30 days.
Choose Practice Preferences from the File menu and double-click on your clinic name from the provided list.
Select the Miscellaneous tab.
If you are a registered Genie user, your HIC Location ID should already be entered. This should be of the form
GENnnnnn, where nnnnn is a five-digit number. Contact Genie Solutions if you are unsure of your HIC Location
ID.
Click the checkboxes to select the HIC Online functions which you wish to use. If you will be doing Real-Time
Patient Claims and wish to use this as the default (as opposed to Store-And-Forward Patient Claims), tick the
Run Real Time by Default checkbox.
Ensure the Allow Emailed Claims checkbox is unticked. This option should only be used under the direction of
Genie support staff.
If you access the Internet through a proxy server to which you need to be authenticated, you can enter here the
User ID and Password with which you authenticate. Otherwise leave these fields blank.
Save the Practice Preferences.

Note: If you have more than one location certificate, it will be necessary to create a Practice Preferences
record with a new HIC Location ID for each additional location certificate.
6.14.2.6 Create the PSI Store

The final step is to import your Location and, if you are using iKeys your Individual certificates, to a central
repository. This repository, hereafter referred to as the PSI Store consists of a single file normally named as your
HIC Location ID followed by .psi (e.g.GEN00001.psi). The PSI Store can be created anywhere on your hard
drive, but for simplicity we recommend it be located in the HICOnline folder in your Genie folder.
Note that previous versions of HIC Online (versions 2.6 and below) held the certificate repository in a different
format. This old format consisted of a folder called cryptostore and two files: certs.map and cryptostore.
properties. These folders and files were normally located in the PKI folder within your Genie folder.
Login to Genie. Choose Maintenance & Reports from the File menu and go to the Administrator tab. Click the
HIC Online PSI Store button.
There are two ways to create a PSI store:
1. Creating a New PSI Store from Scratch.

Use this option if you have never used HIC Online before and you have the CD from Medicare Australia and
any iKeys you wish to use.
2. Importing an Existing PSI Store
Use this option if you have already created a PSI store and you wish to use it from HIC Online within Genie.
1.Creating a New PSI Store from Scratch

Insert the floppy disk containing your location certificate.
Click the Blue Plus button to create a new PSI Store.
The Create PSI Store window will open.
If you are using more than one location certificate, you must select the HIC Location ID for which this PSI store
will be used from the drop-down list at the top. Default names and locations for the certificate files, trust file and
PSI store will automatically be filled in. These should normally be correct but may be changed here if necessary.
Follow the red prompts at the bottom of the window to complete the fields on the form. Remember that
passwords are case-sensitive. Location passphrase is also known as the PIC code. Don’t forget to tab out of the
last field (Confirm Location Passphrase) when finished.

Once all of the fields have been successfully filled in, the OK button will be enabled. If it is not enabled, rectify
the problem identified by the red prompt at the bottom of the window.
Click the OK button to create the new PSI store.
If you are not using iKeys, you can close the PSI Store list window as you are now ready to use HIC Online.
Otherwise, you now need to register the iKeys in the PSI store. Double-click the newly created PSI store in the
list window.
Using each of your iKeys in turn, ensure that the iKey is plugged in to your computer and click the Register
Token button. You will be prompted for your Individual Certificate passphrase which was supplied with each iKey
by the Health eSignature Authority.
Enter the passphrase and click the OK button. Remember that the password is case-sensitive. You may change
the passphrase after the configuration steps are complete to something more easy to remember by using the
PassPhrase Utility (Start > Programs > Rainbow Technologies > iKey 2000 Series Software).
Once all iKeys have been registered, click the Save button, then close the PSI Store list screen.
2. Importing an Existing PSI Store

Click the PSI Store Import button.
The Import PSI Store window will open.
Follow the red prompts at the bottom of the screen to complete the form. Once all of the fields have been filled in
correctly the OK button will be enabled. Click the OK button to complete the import process.
6.14.2.7 Set Up for a Proxy Server

Note: This should only be performed by the IT support contact who set up your Proxy Server. These
steps MUST NOT be performed if you DO NOT use a Proxy Server.
This must be performed on each client machine that will be used for HIC online transmissions:
1. Right click My Computer and select Properties.
2. Click the Advanced tab
3. Click the Environment Variables button
4. In System Variables, click New.
5. Variable Name is: easy_parm1
Variable Value is: -Dhttp.proxyHost=<proxyip> (where <proxyip> is the IP address of the Proxy Server)
6. Click OK
7. Click New
Variable Name is: easy_parm2

Variable Value is: -Dhttp.proxyPort=<port> (where <port> is the port number of the Proxy Server)
8. Click OK
9. Click OK to close out of the Environment Variable window and again to close My Computer.

Genie Manual The Reception Module: Using HIC Online
6.15 Using HIC Online

The following sections describe how to use HIC Online for:
1. Bulk Bill and DVA claims

2. Patient Claims
3. Online Patient Verification
6.15.1 Bulk Bill and DVA Claims

Select File > Maintenance and Reports. Go to the Daily Chores tab and click on the Medicare/DVA
Transmission button.
This will open the Medicare Claims Control window:
The Claims Control Window allows you to perform all functions related to electronic claiming of Medicare and
DVA payments, including:
· Creating a new transmission
· Retrieving Payment and Exception reports for a claim
· Dealing with any exceptions
· Receipting claim payments
· Printing claims
· Viewing the status of each claim
A claim can be in one of four states:

1. Awaiting Reports - the claim has been submitted to the HIC however the payment and exception reports
have not yet been received.
2. Exceptions to Review - one or more exceptions have been identified by the HIC. These must be dealt with
before further processing of the claim is allowed.
3. Ready to Receipt - the payment report has been received and there are no outstanding exceptions for the
claim. The payment can now be receipted and the claim finalised.
4. Finalised - the claim has been fully paid and receipted.
Claims at each state can be displayed by selecting the desired state from the Show drop-down list. This makes
it simple to retrieve reports for those claims awaiting them, deal with claims which have outstanding exceptions,
and receipt those claims which have no exceptions and where payment has been received.
If you have more than one location certificate, a drop-down menu will be visible at the top of the window, from
which you can select the HIC Location ID with which you wish to work.
To enable a smooth transition from MedClaims to HIC Online, the Claims Control Window will operate on claims

created with both MedClaims and HIC Online.
Printing Claims
Details of the services contained within a claim can be printed from the Medicare Claims Controls screen by
selecting the claim and clicking the Print button.
6.15.1.1 Invoicing
The invoicing process for Bulk Bill and DVA patients when using HIC online is much the same as when not using
HIC Online. The only difference is the availability of several extra checkboxes and radio buttons on the Add Item
to Invoice window.
The checkboxes allow standard over-ride flags to be sent as part of the claim. Only the checkboxes applicable to
the current billing scenario will be visible, e.g.if the item number used is for a diagnostic imaging service, the Self
Deemed checkbox will be visible, otherwise it will not.
If the provider is marked as a specialist in their User Preferences and the patient does not have a valid referral,
extra radio buttons will be displayed.
These radio buttons are used to provide a reason for treating the patient without a valid referral.
Should you need to add any additional information in order to get the claim successfully processed, any text
entered in the Notes field will automatically be sent through with the claim to the HIC. Note that if there is any
text sent through, the claim will not be automatically processed. It will be referred to an operator for manual
intervention.
After the invoice has been created, the settings made to these over-ride flags can be altered in the Edit Sale
window. This window is accessible by double-clicking in a Sale (service) in most places they are displayed, e.g.
Account History, Receipt window, Claim contents, etc.

6.15.1.2 Creating a New Transmission

To create a new HIC Online transmission, click the New Transmission button at the top left-hand corner of the
Claims Control Window.
If the Use Bulk Bill or Use DVA checkboxes have been ticked on the Practice Preferences screen, the New HIC
Online Transmission window will open, otherwise the New MedClaims Transmission window will open.
Tip: To force the New Medclaims Transmission window to open, hold down the ALT key while clicking
the New Transmission button.
Separate claims must be created for each provider. The Provider is chosen using the Provider drop down list at
the top of the window.
Note: If the chosen Provider uses an iKey to sign claims, the correct iKey must be used. If the wrong
iKey is used, the transmission creation will fail.
If a provider has more than one provider number, a separate claim must be created for each different provider
number. The Provider number is chosen using the Provider No drop down list at the top of the window. Provider
numbers are listed only for the items available to be transmitted for the selected provider, i.e.if there are no items
to be transmitted for a particular provider number, that number will not be displayed in the list. If only one
provider number is available, the drop down list will be greyed out and unable to be changed. The Sites of
Service corresponding to the selected provider number will be listed in blue text under the Provider No drop
down list.
Medicare or DVA services are specified using the Medicare/DVA radio buttons.
Claims are also required to be separated by Inpatient and Outpatient services and Pathology or Other Services.
Services for Inpatients or Outpatients are specified using the Outpatients/Inpatients radio buttons and
Pathology items are specified using the Pathology radio button.
If the provider is not a specialist, claims are also required to be separated Diagnostic imaging items. If the list of
Services to be transmitted includes diagnostic items, the Diagnostic radio button will appear and must be used
to transmit the diagnostic items.
To remove a sale/s from the displayed list, highlight and click either the Remove Highlighted or Keep
Highlighted button as appropriate. The sale/s removed will then be included in the next new claim.
When satisfied with the list of sales to be included in the claim, click the Create Transmission button. The first
time you use HIC Online, you will be prompted for your Healthcare Certificate Location passphrase. After a

successful transmission it will be recorded in the database and you will not be prompted for it again.
Enter your location passphrase and click OK or press Enter to continue.
If the chosen provider uses an iKey to sign their claims, the first time in the session, or if the iKey has been
swapped, you will be prompted for the Healthcare Individual passphrase associated with the iKey currently
inserted in the computer:
After a short delay (approx. 5 -10 seconds) you will be returned to the New HIC Online Transmission window
and the message to be transmitted will be displayed in the Message window. If an iKey was used to sign the
claim, the message will appear encrypted.
The Transmit button is now enabled at the bottom of the window. Clicking this button will send this message to
the HIC for processing and return you to the Claims Control window.
6.15.1.3 Retrieving Reports for the Claim

Two reports are produced for each claim:
1. A Payment report
2. An Exception report.
The payment report provides such information as the Date Paid, the Run Number and the Amount Paid.
The exception report provides details about any exceptions found in the claim. Examples of exceptions might be
· the patient’s Medicare card issue number is out of date

· the amount claimed for the service is incorrect

· an additional service on the same day was not marked as a non-duplicate service, etc.
All exceptions for a claim should be dealt with (as described in the next section Reviewing Exceptions for a
Claim) before attempting to receipt the claim.
Select Awaiting Reports from the Show drop-down list on the Claims Control window to list all claims for which
payment and/or exception reports have not yet been received.
Select the claim(s) for which to retrieve payment and/or exception reports by highlighting them in the list
(additional claims can be selected by shift-clicking or control-clicking on them).
Click on the Retrieve Reports button. If this button is greyed out, it means that either the claim was created
using MedClaims, and therefore the reports must be downloaded using your Mednetwork or Optus Messenger
software, or that the reports have already been retrieved.
Once the reports have been retrieved, the claim will be moved to either the Exceptions to Review list or, if the
claim did not have any exceptions, the Ready to Receipt list.
The Payment Report will fill in the Date Paid, Run No, and Paid columns on the Medicare Claims Control
Window.
The Exception Report will fill in the Exceptions column on the Medicare Claims Control window, i.e. change it
from 'N/A' to a number.
Note: When retrieving reports, it is common for several claims to be paid with the one Payment Report.
This means that claims which you have not selected may have their Payment Reports returned when
retrieving reports for a different claim.
The same is not true for Exception Reports, i.e. only the Exception reports for those claims you have
selected when you click the Retrieve Reports button will be returned.
The result of this phenomenon is that you will likely end up with claims which have Payment Reports
but do not have Exception Reports. These claims will remain in the Awaiting Reports list until their
Exception Reports are retrieved.
When the Retrieve Reports button is clicked for these claims, the following window will appear.
At this point you should click the No button as there is no need to re-retrieve the Payment Report.
If, for some reason HIC had to pay you for the batch or part thereof manually, ie. sent you a paper statement of
payment rather than an online report, then these can still be receipted simply by clicking the Receipt button. You
will get an alert to the effect that there has not yet been a payment report received or that the claimed does not
match paid, you may have outstanding exceptions. Are you sure you want to receipt? to which you select OK
and proceed to the receipt window where you can receipt the claim as appropriate.
6.15.1.4 Reviewing Exceptions for a claim

If a claim contains any exceptions, they must be dealt with before the claim is receipted. Exceptions for a claim
are identified in the Exception report which is retrieved from the HIC as described in the previous section
'Retrieving Reports for the Claim'.
The number of exceptions for a claim is listed in the Exceptions column of the Medicare Claims Control
window. If the number is 0, the claim has no exceptions. If the number is N/A, either the Exception Report has
not yet been retrieved from the HIC, or it has been deleted for some reason. In either case, the exception report

should be retrieved from the HIC before proceeding.
Select Exceptions to Review from the Show drop-down list on the Claim Control window to list all claims for
which exceptions have been identified. Select the claim for which to review exceptions by clicking once on it in
the list. Note that exceptions must be dealt with one claim at a time.
Click on the Review Exceptions button. If this button is greyed out, it means that either the claim did not have
any exceptions (the Exceptions column will contain 0), the exception report has been deleted (the Exceptions
column will contain N/A), or that the Exception Report has not yet been retrieved (the Exceptions column will
contain N/A).
The Claim Exception window lists all exceptions associated with the claim. Each exception must be dealt with
before the claim payment can be receipted.
Clicking once on each exception will display more detail about that exception, such as if the Medicare number is
incorrect, or the amount claimed is incorrect. It will also display the Medicare or DVA card number currently held
by the HIC for the selected patient.
To assist in dealing with the exceptions, a report of all exceptions in the claim can be produced by clicking the
Print button.
The first step in determining what to do is to determine whether or not the claim has been paid. This is shown in
the Paid column in the picture above.
If the claim has been paid:

The exception is usually something simple such as an incorrect claim amount, or an incorrect Medicare number.
However, you need to fix the problem before receipting otherwise the next time you claim for this patient, the
claim may be rejected.
If there is a problem with the item, click on the Edit Item button to open the original item, and change whatever
is wrong, e.g. incorrect fee.
If there is a problem with the patient’s details, click on the Edit Patient button and fix whatever is wrong, e.g.
incorrect Medicare number or Individual Reference number.
Once you have fixed the problem, click on the Delete Exception button.
If the claim has not been paid:

The reason is usually more serious e.g. it has already been paid, or it is a duplicate item on the same day which
has not been specified as such.
Whatever the reason, you need to determine whether or not you plan to resubmit the item.
If you plan to resubmit the item:

You must first fix the problem by clicking on either the Edit Patient or Edit Item buttons, and changing whatever
is wrong.
Then click on the Remove Item From Batch button. This removes the item from the current batch so that it will
be automatically included in the next transmitted batch.

Click on the Delete Exception button.
If you do not plan to resubmit the item:

For example, you realise that you have accidentally billed the patient twice.
In this case, there’s no point in editing anything. You would simply click on the Remove Item From Batch
button.
Click on the Delete Exception button.
You would then need to open the patient’s Account History and Delete the relevant item’s invoice, so that it is not
included in the next transmitted batch.
In all cases, once you have taken the appropriate action, you should click the Delete Exception button at the
bottom of the window to indicate that the exception has been dealt with. You should not use the Delete
Statement button except in extreme circumstances, as this deletes all the displayed exceptions and so would
require the exception report to be retrieved again from the HIC. The statement is deleted automatically once the
last exception has been deleted.
Once you have dealt with all the exceptions and the list is empty, click the Close button at the bottom of the
window to return to the Medicare Claims Control window.
6.15.1.5 Receipting Claim Payments

Once payment and exception reports have been received for a claim and all exceptions have been dealt with,
the payment for the claim is ready to be receipted and the claim will move to the Ready to Receipt list.
Select Ready to Receipt from the Show drop-down list on the Claim Control window to list all claims for which
payment reports have been received and which have no outstanding exceptions. Select the claim for which to
receipt payment by clicking once on it in the list. Note that payments must be receipted one claim at a time.
Click on the Receipt button. If this button is greyed out, it means that the claim has outstanding exceptions
(check the Exceptions column in the list to make sure it is 0).
This will bring up the Genie receipting window from the which the receipt can be created as per normal. Make
sure that the amount you are receipting matches the amount that was actually paid by Medicare.
Once a claim has been fully receipted it is automatically finalised. Finalised claims can be viewed by selecting
Finalised from the Show drop-down list.
If, for some reason HIC has part-paid or completely paid you for a batch manually, ie. sent you a paper
statement of payment rather than an online report, these can still be receipted by clicking the Receipt button.
You will get an alert to the effect that there has not yet been a payment report received or that the claimed
amount does not match the paid amount as there may still be outstanding exceptions. Select OK when asked if
you still wish to receipt and proceed to the receipt window where you can receipt the claim as appropriate.
6.15.2 Patient Claims

The Patient Claims function submits the patient’s claim directly to Medicare on behalf of the patient. It operates
in two modes:
1. Store and Forward
2. Real-Time
In Store and Forward mode, the claims are “batched” up and transmitted to the HIC at a later time when
convenient. This is similar to the way in which Bulk Bill and DVA claiming works. At the time the invoice or
receipt is generated, the patient claim content is created and stored in the Genie database. At some later time,
e.g.the end of the day, all of the claims which have been created are batched up and transmitted to the HIC. In
this mode, the Internet connection only needs to be available when the claims are transmitted.
In Real-Time mode, the patient claim is created and transmitted to the HIC at the time the invoice or receipt is
generated. In this mode, the Internet connection must be available when the invoice or receipt is created. This
removes the need for batching up claims at the end of the day, however it will slow down the invoicing and

receipting process while the transmissions are performed. For this reason, a broadband Internet connection is
strongly recommended for sites wishing to do Real-Time Patient Claims.
Enabling Patient Claims

Before you can use Patient claims you must enable it in your Practice Preferences. Choose Practice
Preferences from the File menu and double-click your practice name in the list to open it. Go to the
Miscellaneous tab and ensure that Use Patient Claims is ticked in the HIC Online area. If you will normally be
performing Real-Time Patient Claims, tick the Run Real-Time by Default checkbox.
6.15.2.1 Invoicing
When Patient Claiming is enabled and the invoice is being created for the Patient’s Account Holder (Self), a
Patient Claims area is displayed on the invoice screen.
The Use Patient Claims checkbox indicates whether a Patient Claim should be created for the current invoice.
The drop down list allows default values to be set for the current Account Holder:
· Ask Me - the Use Patient Claims checkbox is available but defaults to being unticked.
· Always - the Use Patient Claims checkbox is available and defaults to being ticked.
· Never - the Use Patient Claims checkbox is unticked and unable to be ticked.
The same over-ride flags as used with Bulk Bill and DVA invoicing are also available when adding an item to an
invoice using Patient Claims.

6.15.2.2 No Payment/Gap Paid By Patient

If no payment amount is entered for the invoice, when the Print button is clicked, the Create Patient Claim
window is displayed.
This window provides the following options:

· Transmit this Claim: to choose whether the claim is to be sent in Real-Time mode or Store-And-Forward
mode. If the Use Real-Time by default checkbox is ticked in Practice Preferences, the Now radio button will
be selected, otherwise the Later radio button will be selected.
· If you have more than one PSI store, and therefore more than one HIC Location ID, you can choose the HIC
Location ID you wish to use from the drop down list. The default value will be the one for the Practice
Preferences you are currently logged in under.
· Send Payment To: to choose whether the cheque will be sent to the Patient’s address held by Medicare, or to
another specified address.
Note: The address cannot be a Post Office box.

6.15.2.3 Patient Paid Full Amount

If a payment amount is entered for the invoice, when the Receipt button is clicked the Receipt window is brought
up as usual, however the Patient Claims area is displayed with the same values as entered on the invoice.
These can be changed here if required. When the Print button is clicked, the Create Patient Claim window is
displayed.
In addition to the options provided by the unpaid Patient Claim window, this window provides the following
options:
· Payment Method: to indicate whether the Patient’s benefit should be paid by Cheque or EFT. This value is
saved in the Account Holder’s record, so the default value for the current Account Holder will automatically be
selected.
· Never Store Bank Details: if the benefit is to be paid by EFT, this checkbox indicates that the Account Holder’s
bank account details should never be stored in the Genie database. If they are stored, they will automatically
be filled in for each Patient Claim for this Account Holder. If this checkbox is ticked, the user is never
prompted to save the bank account details when they have been entered.
· Bank Account Details: if the benefit is to be paid by EFT, the Account Holder’s bank account details must be
supplied. If the details have previously been saved with the Account Holder, they will automatically be filled in.
Clicking the OK button results in a Patient Claim being created. The following message is displayed while this
occurs:
For Store-And-Forward claims, a Lodgement Advice will be printed and the invoice/receipting process is now
completed. Refer to Transmitting Store-And-Forward Claims for information on how to batch and submit these
claims to the HIC for processing.
For Real-Time claims, once the claim has been created, it is automatically submitted to the HIC. While this
process is occurring the following message is displayed:
If the claim is successful, either a Statement of Claim and Benefit Payment or a Lodgement Advice is printed
out, depending on whether or not the invoice has been paid.

If the claim is unsuccessful, the Patient Claim Errors window will be displayed.
This window lists all of the services which have generated errors. Clicking on a service will display the
corresponding error message in red. In the example displayed, the service has failed because the servicing
provider has not been registered for HIC Online.
Depending on the nature of the error, it may be appropriate to edit the Item, Patient, Claimant, or Provider
details. Buttons are provided on this window to take you directly to the entity in question. If it is simply a matter of
the patient or claimant’s Medicare Number or Individual Reference Number being incorrect, these can be easily
updated to the values held by the HIC by clicking on the Update Patient and Update Claimant buttons.
Some errors may not be serious enough to cause the claim to be rejected. These errors have a Y in the
Acceptable column. If all of the errors are Acceptable, the Accept button will be enabled. Clicking the Accept
button will send the claim to the HIC for manual processing.
If all of the errors which have an N in the Acceptable column have been dealt with by editing the Item, Patient,
Claimant or Provider details, the entire claim can be resubmitted by clicking the Resubmit button.
Clicking the Cancel button will return you to the Create Patient Claim window. If the problems cannot be rectified
from here, click the Cancel button to skip the Patient Claims process and print out a normal invoice or receipt.
6.15.2.4 Transmitting Store-And-Forward Claims

Patient Claims created using the Store-And-Forward method must be batched and transmitted to the HIC. This
functionality is accessed with the Patient Claims Transmission button on the Daily Chores tab under
Maintenance & Reports.
Clicking this button takes you to the Patient Claims Control window.
Again, if you have more than one HIC Location ID, you can choose which one you wish to use from the
drop-down menu at the top of the window.
To create a new transmission, click the New Transmission button. This will open the New Patient Claim

Transmission window.
This window lists all store-and-forward Patient Claims which have not yet been batched and submitted to the
HIC. If necessary, you can remove claims from the current transmission by clicking the Hold checkbox beside
the claim.
When you are happy with the claims to be transmitted, click the Create Transmission button. This will batch up
to 30 of the displayed claims into a single transmission. When the transmission has been created, the Transmit
button will be enabled at the bottom of the screen and the message “Transmission created successfully” will
appear above it in blue.
Clicking the Transmit button will send the claim to the HIC for processing and will return you to the Patient
Claims Control window.
If for any reason you need to delete a Store-And-forward transmission, select the transmission from the list on
the left, and click the Delete Transmission button. This will remove both the transmission and the claims within
the transmission.

6.15.2.5 "Post-Invoice" Claiming and Deleting

From time to time it may be required to create a Patient Claim after a normal invoice or receipt has already been
generated. This is achieved from the Account History window. There are two buttons on this window: Create
Patient Claim and Delete Patient Claim.
To create a new patient claim, select the services which you wish to include in the claim and click the Create
Patient Claim button. This will open the Create Patient Claim window from which you proceed as if you were
creating the claim during the invoice or receipting process.
Same Day Deleting

Should you wish to retract a Real-Time Patient Claim after it has been submitted to the HIC, this is possible
using the Same Day Delete function. As it’s name implies, this function can only be used on claims on the same
day on which they were created.
Same Day Delete is performed from the Account History window using the Delete Patient Claim button.
To delete a claim, select one of the services in the claim and click the Delete Patient Claim button. You will be
prompted to confirm the deletion of the claim (or claims if more than one is encompassed by the selected
services). If the delete request is confirmed a reason for performing the deletion must be selected from the
supplied list.
The claim will then be deleted or an error indicating why the claim could not be deleted will be returned.
6.15.3 Online Patient Verification

Online Patient Verification provides the facility to verify, prior to claim submission, the patient’s eligibility for
claiming Medicare benefits, and verify that the patient is known to the Health Fund and holds a “hospital” level of
cover.
There are three types of Online Patient Verification available:

1. A Medicare check
2. A Health Fund Check
3. Both a Medicare and Health Fund check
Genie currently implements only the Medicare check.
If the patient’s identity is able to be established from the details transmitted, any discrepancies in the patient’s
first name, Medicare card number, or Individual Reference number are highlighted, with the ability to update the
details in Genie if necessary.
Enabling
Before you can use Online Patient Verification you must enable it in your Practice Preferences. Choose File >

Practice Preferences and double-click on your Practice name in the list to open it. Go to the Miscellaneous tab
and ensure that Use Online Verification is ticked in the HIC Online area.
An Internet connection must be established in order to perform Online Patient Verification.
6.15.3.1 Using Online Verification

To check a patient’s eligibility for Medicare open the patient’s demographic window (Pencil button) and click the
Verify Online button at the bottom of the window.
The following window will be displayed while the request is processed by the HIC:
The request will return with one of the following responses:
1. The patient is eligible for Medicare.

2. A message indicating that one or more of the patient’s Medicare number, Individual Reference number, or
First Name do not match the values held by Medicare. In this case the value(s) held by Medicare are displayed
in the message.

After clicking OK, you will be prompted to update the values held by Genie with those returned from Medicare.
If the patient’s first name is being updated, a prompt as to whether the value currently held in the First Name
field in Genie should be moved to the Known As name in Genie.
3. A message indicating that the patient could not be identified on the Medicare system from the details provided
in Genie.
4. Some other error message. In this case the action taken will depend on the error message returned.

6.15.4 Updating Certificates
Location Certificates
Location Certificates expire every two years and require a CD from Medicare Australia to update. The following
procedure only needs to be performed on one transmitting client machine. The other transmitting clients on your
network will update the next time they log in. To perform a Location Certificate update:
1. Insert the CD or floppy disk into any HIC enabled client computer.
2. Select File > Maintenance & Reports
3. Under the Administrator tab, click the HIC Online PSI Store button.
4. Double click on your PSI store entry as shown below:
5. Click the Update Location Certificates button. The following dialog should appear:
6. Click the Browse button to the right of the Signing File field. In the dialog box that opens, navigate to and
select the fac_sign.p12 file on your CD or floppy disk. Click Open.
7. The location of the fac_encryption.p12 file should automatically be entered after successfully selecting the
fac_sign.p12 file. If this is not the case, you will need to navigate to and select this file using the Browse
button to the right of the Encyption File field.
8. Enter the new location passphrase (PIC code) as provided by Medicare Australia.
9. Press the Tab key to activate the OK button.
10.Click OK
HIC Certificates
HIC Certificates supplied by Medicare also expire every two years. Genie will warn you about one month prior,
that your certificates are about to expire. To update your certificates you will need to download and install new
certificates as described in the following procedure.
Note: For the following procedure to work, an active Internet connection is required.
1. Log out of Genie (this is important)

2. Log in to Genie
3. If you get a step about expiring certificate ignore this
4. Go to File > Maintenance & Reports
5. Click on the Administrator tab

6. Click the HIC Online PSI Store button

7. Double-click the name of your PSI store in the list
8. Click the Update HIC Certs button
If you are running a network, you only need to perform this on one of the client computers. The server and all the
other clients will automatically get the updated PSI store next time they use HIC Online.

Genie Manual The Reception Module: Troubleshooting HIC Online
6.16 Troubleshooting HIC Online
Diagnostic Self-Test
If you are experiencing problems trying to use HIC Online, the first thing to do is run the Diagnostic Self-test by
clicking the Check HIC Online Installation button under the Administrator tab of Maintenance & Reports.
This will produce a text file which will identify any problems with your HIC Online installation and the suggested
course of action to remedy any such problems.
HIC Online Plug-in

An integral component of the HIC Online installation is a plug-in for 4th Dimension, the database on which Genie
runs. The plugin is called HICOnline.bundle. It is located in different places depending on whether you are using
Macintosh or Windows, and whether you are running a Single User or Server.
· On Macintosh
It is located in the Plugins folders of the Genie and Genie Server packages
Single User: /Applications/Genie/Genie.app/Contents/Plugins/HICOnline.bundle
Server: /Applications/Genie/Genie Server.app/Contents/Plugins/HICOnline.bundle
· On Windows
It is located in the Plugins folder of the Solo Applications and Server folders.
Single User: \Genie\Solo Application\Plugins\HICOnline.bundle
Server: \Genie\Server\Plugins\HICOnline.bundle

You should be using at least version 2.2.3.4 of this plug-in. To see which version you are using on Macintosh,
click on the HICOnline.bundle file and choose Get Info from the File menu. On Windows, drill down within the
plugin through the Contents folder into the Windows folder (HICOnline.bundle\Contents\Windows), right-click on
the HICOnline.4DX file and select Properties from the drop-down list. Click on the Version tab. The File version
is displayed at the top.
If you are using a version less than 2.2.3.4, you should update your Genie software (from the Special menu in
Genie or from the download on the Genie website).
Java Files (Windows Only)

The HICOnline installation process creates a number of Java-related files on your PC. These are located in two
places as follows:
Genie\HICOnline\Lib
Note: If you are using Java Runtime Environment version 1.3.1, the following files must also be located
in the Genie\HICOnline\Lib folder:

Genie\HICOnline\LogicPack
If any of these files are missing, you should re-run the HIC_Online_Installer.exe program for the type appropriate
to your installation, i.e. Single User or Transmitting Client.
HICOL_LIB_PATH (Windows Only)

The HICOL_LIB_PATH environment variable tells HIC Online where to find the jar files above. This variable is
set automatically by Genie, however it can be overridden if necessary.
If it has not been correctly set, you will get the following error:
To set the HICOL_LIB_PATH manually follow these steps:
1. Right-click on your My Computer icon and select Properties from the drop-down list
2. Go to the Advanced tab
3. Click on the Environment Variables button
4. Look for the HICOL_LIB_PATH variable in the System Variables pane at the lower half of the window
5. If the HICOL_LIB_PATH variable exists highlight it and click the Edit button, otherwise click the New button
and enter HICOL_LIB_PATH in the Variable Name field
6. Enter the location of the HICOnline Lib folder into the Variable Value field, e.g.
C:\MySpecialLocation\HICOnline\Lib\
7. Click the OK button (a total of three times) to close each of the windows
DLL Files (Windows Only)

The HIC Online installation process creates four DLL files, EasyClaimC.dll, pthreadVC.dll, PsiCore.dll and
PsiJNI.dll. All of these files are placed in the Genie\HICOnline\Bin folder.
If any of these files are missing, you should rerun the HIC_Online_Installer.exe program for the type appropriate
to your installation, i.e. Single User or Transmitting Client.
Frameworks (Macintosh Only)

The HIC Online installation process creates two framework folders:
· EasyclaimC.framework
· PsiCore.framework
These folders contain a number of files and folders required for correct operation of HIC Online. Both of these
folders are created in the Frameworks folder in the Library folder at the root of the hard drive. If either of these
framework folders is missing, you should rerun the HIC_Online_Installer program.

6.16.1 Error Messages

Any time an error is encountered during HIC Online processing, the HIC Online Error window will be displayed.
This window displays four important pieces of information:

1. The error code is displayed in the title bar.In the example, the error code is 9202.
2. The category of error is displayed at the top of the window. This describes the area in which the error
occurred. In the example, the category is “Data Validation Error ”.
3. The error reason. This will normally tell you why the problem occurred. In the example, the reason indicates
that we are trying to set the value of something to a value which is not permitted.
4. The step at which the error was encountered is displayed in bold. This will tell you what you were trying to do
when the error occurred. In the example, we are told that we are trying to set the Payee Provider Number to
2127441G. This is not a valid provider number (the correct number is 2127441H).
For data validation errors which seem to be caused by incorrect service or patient information, the error window
also allows you to edit the service or patient to which the error most likely applies (unless the error occurred
during the Transmit phase at which point there is no way for Genie to know to which patient or service the error
applies).
In any case, the function that was being performed when the error occurred is abandoned so that the error can
be attended to before retrying the function.
Log Files
Three log files record the underlying processing that occurs as part of using HIC Online. In the event that you are
having a problem that is difficult to diagnose, the HIC or Genie Solutions may request you to either view these
log files or send them via email for further analysis.
1. easyclaim.log - this records processing performed by Java
2. easydll.log - this records processing performed by the EasyclaimC.dll
3. ecplugin.log - this records processing performed by the Genie HICOnline plug-in
By default, all three log files are located in the Genie\HICOnline\Log folder although this may be over-ridden as
follows if desired, e.g. for running in a thin client network.
1. easyclaim.log - the location of this file is determined by the log4j.properties file located in the Genie folder.
This file contains the line: log4j.appender.A2.file=./HICOnlineLog/easyclaim.log
The location of the log file can be altered by changing the location indicated by this line to the required value.
2.easydll.log - the location of this file is determined by the easy_api_log environment variable. By default this is
created as a system environment variable. In order to allow different users on the same system to have
different values for this environment variable, it should be changed to be a user-level environment variable.
3. ecplugin.log - the location of this file may be determined by the ho_plugin_log environment variable. In the
absence of this environment variable (the default state) the log file is automatically created in the
Genie\HICOnline\Log folder. If this environment variable is present, however, the log file will be created in
the location specified by this environment variable. In order to allow different users on the same system to
have different values for this environment variable, it should be created as a user-level environment variable.
To set or change an environment variable manually follow these steps:

1. Right-click on your My Computer icon and select Properties from the drop-down list.
2. Go to the Advanced tab
3. Click on the Environment Variables button
4. Look for the variable in the User or System Variables panes
5. If the variable exists highlight it and click the Edit button,otherwise click the New button and enter the required
variable name (e.g.ho_plugin_log) in the Variable Name field.
6. Enter the required variable value (e.g.C:\Documents and Settings\Mary\HICOnline\Log\ecplugin.log) into the
Variable Value field
7. Click the OK button (a total of three times) to close each of the windows.

6.16.2 The PSI Store, Certificates & Passwords

The PSI Store is the place where details of your encryption and digital signing certificates are held. The PSI store
is a file which by default is located at:
Genie\HICOnline\<your HIC Location ID>.psi
The PSI store is created and maintained using the HIC Online PSI Store function located in File > Maintenance
& Reports: Administrator. Any changes to the PSI store (including it’s creation) need only be done from one
client machine. Any other clients will pick up the changes the next time they use any HIC Online functions.
Passwords
Passwords are issued with both the Healthcare Location Certificates and the Healthcare Individual Certificates
when they are obtained from Medicare Australia. HIC Online cannot be installed or run without these passwords
so it is vitally important they be kept in a safe place when they are received.
The Location Certificate passphrase used for the PSI store is changed by the user and remembered by Genie
when the PSI store is created. If, however, the PSI store needs to be recreated for some reason, the initial
password supplied by Medicare Australia will be required.
If you are using iKeys, the Individual Certificate passphrase associated with each iKey is required each time a
claim is made. If you forget or lose this password the key is useless and must be returned to Medicare Australia
to be reset. Additionally the keys are configured such that 10 consecutive incorrect password attempts will lock
the key and again it must be returned to Medicare Australia to be reset.
6.17 Referral/Reply Letters (Patient Correspondence)

This chapter deals with letters written regarding a particular patient to somebody in the Address Book, typically a
referral to a specialist or a letter back to a referring doctor. For the purposes of this chapter we will refer to them
as referral letters.
Referral letters can be created by clicking on the button with a Quill icon from either the patient’s clinical
window, the Appointments Book or the Patient's List.
Alternatively you can use a couple of different options in the Patients menu, which takes advantage of the
Letters Dictated tickbox in the New Consult window. See the Patients Menu.

Genie Manual The Reception Module: Referral/Reply Letters (Patient Correspondence)
Clicking on this button brings up the Search window to allow you to search the Address Book.
Enter the first few letters of whichever field is appropriate, then click OK. You do not have to fill out every field,
remember this is just a search...
If you require a blank letter just click OK without entering any search criteria.
Note: If you have already assigned a referring doctor to the patient, in the patient's demographics (see
Edit Patient) then this window does not appear, and the letter is automatically addressed to the referring
doctor.
If a matching record is found in the Address Book then a new letter will open using the Default Template.
Place your cursor in the body of the template and type your letter. Print or Save the letter as appropriate.
Button Description
The Default Letter drop down menu displays a list of different types of letter templates available, and allows you
to add new templates. For example, GP's may want to have a standard referral template for a 5 yearly check
colonoscopy. Once you have created the template you can select it from this list and just hit the Print button
without having to do any typing at all. Or you may have three specialists, each of which has their preferred
formatting of Referral/Reply letters, so in this instance you could select the Doctor's template from this popup
menu. For more on adding new templates, please see, Adding New Templates.
The From popup menu allows you to choose the doctor from whom the letter is being written.
The names in the menu are those users who have the Show me in the Billing Menu checkbox in User
Preferences ticked. If your name is already in this list then you will be selected automatically when the letter is
opened. If a receptionist is typing the letter, then s/he needs to select the doctor before the letter can be saved.
The To field will be the heading of the letter, naturally it defaults to who the letter is addressed to but can be
changed if required, without affecting the letter itself. Please note that this will not readdress the letter, you need
to do this using the readdress icon (see below)
Prefers can be set in the addressee's Address Book entry. This is how the receiving doctor prefers to receive
their letters.
The Send Via 3rd Party checkbox allows you to send the letter via Argus or Healthlink. For more information on
this please see Electronic Correspondence.
The Reviewed checkbox would normally only be used by specialists where someone else is usually typing the
letter. The doctor would tick this box after reviewing the letter to let the receptionist know that it was ready to
send.
The Printed checkbox is automatically checked when the letter is either printed, faxed or emailed.
The Flagged for Followup checkbox is used for important referrals where you need to ensure that the patient
actually attends the specialist. When a reply letter is received, you would then check the Reply Received
Checkbox.
To see how these checkboxes are used in practice, see Reviewing Correspondence.
Can't Delete will not allow the letter to be deleted at all from the database once saved.
The Spellchecking checkbox provides an integrated spell checking facility into letter writer. To check spelling at

the end of your document, select Tools > Spelling.
Learned words are stored in a dictionary file names Perso69632.dic located within your Genie folder. This is
updated each time you Quit out of Genie. If you wish to edit the dictionary you need to go to:
Windows Genie Solo: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\4D
Windows Genie Client: C:\Documents and Settings\<Windows Log in Name>\Application Data\4D
Macintosh: Library/Application Support/4D
In here will be a file named perso69632.dic or similar. Open this with Notepad or Textedit or similar. Make the
required changes and save.
The Edit Template button will open the underlying template for this letter to allow you to make permanent
changes to the letter, affecting all future letters, not just the one in view.
Convert to Text allows you to edit/format an inserted reference eg. an address without it highlighting and
deleting the whole reference.
The Email button creates an email in Genie’s built-in email client, and places it in the Outbox. If you have
entered an email address in the addressee’s record (in Open > Address Book), then the email will be sent the
next time you send or receive email. When a letter is emailed, any images which have been inserted are
automatically sent as attachments to the email. For more detail on using Email in Genie, see Email.
Note: If you want your letters to keep their formatting when encrypted then select 'Send as RTF
attachment' when prompted. This is provided the receiver can actually receive in RTF though.
The Labels buttons allow you to print sticky envelope labels for either the patient or the addressee.
Genie’s built-in labels currently handle only A4 with 14 labels per sheet, or the Dymo Labelwriter series, or
otherwise custom labels can be setup. For more information please see the Labels chapter.
The Envelope button allows you to print an envelope for the Addressee and/or the CC's. When printing an
envelope you have the option to print the following: return address details, the patient's name and addressee's
(or CC's) phone number, down the left hand side of the envelope.
Additionally you can choose the envelope size, on Window machines. On Macintosh machines this option does
not appear as you can set your envelope size in the Printing Preferences (File > Printing Preferences) Page
Setup button.
The Print button will print the letter, defaulting to the printer which you have selected in the 'Letters' option
of File > Printing Preferences.
The Full Page button makes the 4D Write word processor open to full page to type if you wish. This also
allows you to fax the letter using whatever fax software you have installed on your computer.
The Word button will open the letter in Microsoft Word. You must, of course, have Word already installed
on your computer. This feature is for those people who prefer to use Word’s Autotype and AutoCorrect
functions. Once you have finished writing the letter in Word, Save and Close the Word document and return to
Genie.
Note: If would like to use this function it is recommended that you turn on the option to save letters

reimported from Word as attachments in the General tab of your User Preferences (File > User
Preferences).
You will notice that the Word button is now coloured red. Clicking again on this button will import the Word
document back into 4D Write with all formatting retained. If the import is successful, the Word document is then
automatically deleted from your hard disk. It is temporarily stored in a folder called “Letters” within the Genie
folder.
Note: You must remember to close the Word document before attempting to import it back into Genie,
otherwise it won’t work!
The Edit Doctor button opens the addressee’s record in the Address Book, allowing you to add or modify
any of their details. e.g. Email Address.
The Re-Address button allows you to select a different addressee for the letter. This would most commonly
be used where the letter has defaulted to the referring doctor, but you wish to send a letter to someone else
about the patient.
Note: This button will only work when you initially open the letter. Once the letter has been saved, the
references are “frozen”. In this case you would need to copy the contents of your letter, recreate a new
letter, change the doctor and paste in the copied contents.
The CC button places a CC with address information at the bottom of the letter. You can CC anyone in the
Address Book, and can have as many CC’s as you like. Holding down the Ctrl key will put the CC address in a
window envelope format. Once a person has been a CC on a letter you have the option of marking them as an
'interested party'.
Interested parties can be accessed through the CC button or the Interested Parties button in the patient's
clinical or demographic window. You can edit the list of Interested Parties through this icon or by selecting 'Edit
Interested Parties' from the CC button.
The CC section appears once you add a CC and allows you to send your CC letters to their recipient via a third
party if necessary. If you right click on the CC, you can edit their details or print envelopes/labels for them.
The Save button saves what you have already written without closing the window. This can be useful when
writing a long letter in case you have a sudden crash.
Macros
Macros assist in your typing by expanding typed shortcuts to bigger blocks of text as programmed by you, a la
Spellcatcher and As-U-Type.
The Macros are triggered by typing your shortcut followed by a Space or Carriage Return or by selecting the
shortcut from the Macros menu.

This is also where they can be disabled if necessary and where new Macros can be added through Edit
Macros... Or by highlighting what has been typed already and pressing Ctrl M. If you currently use Spellcatcher
or As-U-Type you can import your existing macros, by selecting Edit Macros and clicking on the Import button.
This will give you instructions on how to first export your existing macros from Spellcatcher and As-U-Type. You
can then import this file.
6.17.1 Setting up the Default Template
Whenever you create a new letter by clicking on the Quill icon, Genie uses the template called 'Default
Template'. Therefore, your default template should be for the type of letter you most commonly write. As a
general rule, for GP’s it would be a referral letter and for specialists, a letter back to the referring doctor.
To edit this template, click on the Edit Template button. This will open a window like this:
Note: You cannot change the name from 'Default Letter'. You can however delete this template, in which
case Genie will immediately recreate a fresh template called 'Default Letter'. This can be useful if the
template ever becomes corrupted.
In the middle of the screen is a Default button. Clicking this will wipe the current template and enter a default
template containing all the usual information you might need.
The DMMR button creates a Domiciliary Medication Management Referral template.
6.17.2 Setting up the 4D Write Area

Before filling in the body of the letter it is a good idea to perform a few basic setup tasks.
First, select File > Page Setup and make sure that this is set to A4 and that the correct printer has been
selected.

Determine whether or not you want to have headers and/or footers, via the View menu, within the 4D Write area.
Headers are a separate area at the top of a word processing document which will print on every page of a
multi-page document. They are usually used for page numbering. Footers are a separate area at the bottom of
the page which also print on every page of a multi-page document.
The majority of people choose not to have headers and footers. Whether or not you have headers and footers is
unimportant. What is important is that you are consistent. If you do have headers and footers in this type of
letter, you should also have them in all your letter templates. Otherwise, when an ordinary letter template is
copied into patient correspondence you may end up with a duplicated letterhead.
To select or deselect Headers and Footers, use the View menu within the 4D Write area. Selecting the Header
or Footer option will either tick or untick this option.
Finally, you should set the printable margins.

The numbered scales along each side of the letter are called Rulers. If you place the cursor over the current
margin setting, it will become a double-ended arrow as in the picture below.
You can now click and drag the margin left or right to suit. This has the effect of moving the width of the body of
the letter. You can do the same for the other three sides of the template to adjust the left, right and bottom
margins.
If you are using a header, then clicking within the header area allows you to do the same to adjust the size of the
header.
6.17.3 Fields & Expressions Tabs
Fields Tab
The Fields tab lists the tables in Genie that can be referenced in a letter.

To view the individual fields within the tables click on the plus (+) sign (or the arrow left of the table), then insert
the field by double clicking or dragging and dropping into the template.
For example, if you wanted to insert a patient's DOB, expand the Patient's table by clicking the plus (+) (or arrow
left of [Patients]), then either drag and drop DOB into the template, or place the cursor where you want the field
to be inserted in the template and double click on DOB.
If you want to change the format of a date, for example, double click on it in the template and an insert 4D
Expression box will come up with Formats on the right hand side.
Note: If you are referencing fields from the Procedures/Consults/Checklists etc tables you can load a
specific Procedure/Consult/Checklist etc from the Expressions tab otherwise Genie will load the most
recent of these by default.
Expressions Tab
The Expressions Tab lists common references and clinical fields that can be inserted into the template by
dragging and dropping, or by double clicking the expression you require.

If there is information you need to insert that isn't in the Expression tab, then you can reference individual fields
through the Fields Tab.
Allergies: Lists the patients allergies as well as associated reaction as entered in the
Allergies box of that patients clinical record
Anaesthetist's Phone: Displays for quote templates only and will pull in the phone number for the
anaesthetist listed in the procedure record for the selected patient
Current Medications: Lists the patients current prescriptions from the script area of the clinical file,
excluding those marked as category H (Hidden) or S (Single Course)
Current Problems & Current Inserts Current Problems from clinical file in point form or with included notes
Problems + Notes: respectively. You will be prompted how you would like this formatted once in the
template ie. bullets, indents etc.#
Employer Insurance Details Inserts the patient's Employer's insurance details
Immunisations: Lists all the immunisations that the patient has had. Includes the date of
immunisation
Life Events Displays any events entered in the Life Events window of the patients clinical file
Obstetrics History: Inserts overview of the patient's obstetric history.
Past Hx & Past Hx + Notes: Inserts Past History from clinical file in point form or with included notes
respectively. You will be prompted how you would like this formatted once in the
template ie. bullets, indents etc.#
Patient's Address: Inserts the patients full name and address.
Patient Preferred Name: Inserts the patients Preferred Name, as entered in their demographic window, in
the Known As field
Picture from Library: Allows you to insert a picture from your Picture Library
Prescription History: Inserts all medications listed in the Patients Script Archive. Scripts are entered in
the Script Archive once they have been printed
Procedure Complications: Loads the Audit Summary from the Post-Op tab of the Procedure window. The
procedure can be selected by using the 'Load Procedure' expressions
Procedure Items: Inserts the item numbers associated with the loaded procedure as entered in the
Quotes tab of the procedure
Procedure Side: Enters the side of the procedure as specified by the tick boxes in the procedure
window
Recalls: Inserts all recalls this patient has listed in their file. Includes the Recall due date
and Recall Reason
Recall Date & Recall Inserts the appropriate date and recall reason if used from the Recall Due window
Reason:
Serial Measurements: This will insert the serial measurements for the selected patient of the reading
selected from the window that appears eg. height, weight, BP etc. It is best
formatted in Courier or Monaco font.
Sex Expression: Converts the patients Sex to an expression eg. him/her or man/woman etc
Sign Off: Inserts the sign off as specified in user preferences so that the sign off will reflect
the person who is logged in when typing the letter, good in a multi doctor practice
where all doctors write referral letters.
Smoking Info: Notes whether the patient is a non-smoker or smoker. If marked as a Smoker
(ticked) any extra information entered in the Smoker field will also be inserted
Today's Date: Brings up a window with options for the format of the date. Be sure to tick
Automatic update or else the date will always reflect that of the date the template
was created.
Your Letterhead: Copies and pastes the letterhead from Practice Preferences or User preferences
depending on how your practice is set up. Due to the letterhead just being pasted,
any changes to the letterhead in preferences will not be reflected in templates,
they will need to be edited separately or reinserted into the template.
# Note: Current Problems and Past History items marked as 'confidential' (indicated by a tick against the
item) will not be inserted into the letter.
Expressions relevant to the patient that can be added when typing the letter:
Last Height, Weight & BP: Inserts the patients last recorded height, weight, and BP

Pathology Results: Allows you to insert selected Pathology results into the body of the
letter
Insert Consult Notes: Allows you to insert selected Consultation notes into the body of the
letter
Insert Checklist: Allows you to insert checklists which have been added to the patients
clinical file
Attachments: Allows you to insert the selected attachment
6.17.4 Adding New Templates

To add another letter template, select 'New Template' from the Default Letter drop down menu.
This copies the Default Template into a new window. This is why it's important to get the page setup and
margins correct in the Default Template before adding new templates. Make any changes you want in the
content of the letter. Give the template a new name, in the box at the very top left of this window and then click
the Save button.
6.17.5 Editing Templates

If you want to make a permanent change to your letters, for example, changing the font of your letterhead, you
must make the change in the actual template. If you change it in the letter itself, it will only be changed for that
one letter.
To edit a template, select the letter from the Default Letter drop down menu, then click the Edit Template
button.
Make any changes that you want, then click the Save button. You will be asked if you want to update the current
letter.
If you click the Update Now button, the current letter will be overwritten with the new template and anything you
have already started typing will be lost. Therefore, if you have already started writing a letter, click the Update
Later button. This will leave your current letter intact, and the next letter you create will have the changes you
made to the template.

6.17.6 Reviewing Correspondence

This is designed to allow doctors to review letters that have been typed, which can then printed by the
receptionist.
To access Review Correspondence either go to Open > Patients, Patients > Review Correspondence.
or click the Review Correspondence icon from the appointment book.
This opens a window in which the correspondence can be displayed according to different criteria. It will open to
'To be Reviewed' by default.
This will display all letters which have not been reviewed by the doctor, and which have not yet been printed. To
print reviewed letters select Reviewed but Unprinted, from the To Be Reviewed drop down menu.
The Method drop down on this page displays the preferred method of communication for the addressee of the
letter. You can display just those letters marked for a particular method by selecting it from the drop down menu,
e.g. selecting "Mail" will display those letters to be printed and mailed.
Highlight all these letters by choosing Select All from the Edit menu. Click the Print button to print all the
highlighted letters in one go.
Letters to be faxed or emailed must be opened and sent individually.
Note: Eventually, all letters in Review Correspondence should end up in the 'Printed' section. Do not
delete letters from within Review Correspondence as this will delete the original letter from the patients
clinical file. The letters displayed in Review Correspondence are not another copy of the letter from the
patients clinical record, it is the same letter, just being viewed from a different location. Trying to delete
letters from with Review Correspondence will result in the following warning:
Reviewing Letters Offsite

Letters can be reviewed offsite in two ways. First, you can use Offsite Logging.
Alternatively, clicking on the Word button will export any highlighted letters as Word documents.
They are placed in a folder called "Letters Folder" inside the Genie folder, on the local machine. If the Letters
folder doesn't exist, Genie will automatically create it.

This folder can then be taken home on a laptop, floppy disk, external drive etc. The following day, replace the
Letters folder in the Genie folder, on the local machine that will import the letters, open the Correspondence
window and click on the Import button. This will import the Word documents with any changes, and
replace the original 4D write documents. You will be asked if you want the imported letters to be marked as
having been reviewed. Click Yes.
Once the import has finished, you will be asked if you want to delete the Word documents in the Letters folder.
You should agree to this, otherwise they will still be there the next time you do this procedure unless you delete
them manually in the meantime.
6.17.7 Importing Remotely Typed Letters

If your letters are typed by a remote typist i.e. someone not using Genie, then Genie has the ability to import
these letters and link them to the correct patient.
The requirements for this are:

· the letters must be typed in Word.
· each letter must be in it's own document i.e. you can't have 10 different letters in the one Word document.
· the document must be saved with a specific name i.e. the name of the document must be the patient's
surname, followed by first name, followed by Date of Birth as an 8 character string, with semi-colons between
each piece of information. For example, a letter about John Smith, born on 4 July 1956 would be named:
Smith;John;04071956.
Optionally, you can add the date of the letter to the end of this name, e.g. Smith;John;04071956;22092005. If the
optional date is not used, Genie will mark the date of import the date of the letter.
To import the letters, click on the Import Letters button in Review Correspondence or go to
Open > Import Transcribed Letters.
The first time you do this, you will be asked to identify the folder in which you have stored the letters.
Note: You need to highlight the actual folder, not the letters contained within the folder.
Click the Choose or OK button, and the Link window shown below will open.
The document names are listed in the left-hand column. The patient to whom the corresponding documents
should be linked are displayed in the right-hand column.
Genie initially tries to match the correct patient using the above-mentioned naming conventions i.e. either the

PatientID number or a "Surname;FirstName;DOB" naming convention. If Genie cannot find a suitable match,
"???" will be placed in the second column.
In this case double-clicking on the document name displays a search window, allowing you to manually find the
correct patient.
To add the addressee (which will be displayed as the title of the letter in the Correspondence list in the patients
clinical file), click once to view the letter to see who it was to. Double click to bring up the address book search
window and find the correct Doctor which will then be inserted into the addressee column.
Letters can also be sorted as to whether they are incoming i.e. from a Specialist (through Argus or similar), or
outgoing i.e. to a Specialist. Incoming letters will go into 'Correspondence In' (green quill), and outgoing letters
will go into 'Correspondence Out' (red quill).
Once you have correctly linked all the documents, click the Import Letters button and Genie will import the
letters, attaching them to the designated patient.
The letters which have successfully been imported will be automatically moved to a "Processed" folder within the
designated Letters folder. Periodically you should then manually delete these "processed" letters.
Importing Letterheads
Genie can't import logos or letterheads created in Word documents. Additionally it can't import anything in a
Word header. Therefore if you are going to be using services such as Ozescribe or Syberscribe, the following
steps will allow you to still attach you logo or header to the imported document.
1. Open a Referral/Reply letter via the Quill icon.

2. Click on the popup menu which is currently saying Default Letter and select New Template.
3. Put your usual logos/letterhead in here and name the template exactly: LetterheadLink
Note: The logos you insert must already reside in your Picture Library i.e. insert them into the template
using the Picture from Library expression in the Expressions Tab on the left hand side of this window.

Note: When you have finished, this template should only contain the information that won't be imported
from Word documents.
4. When importing a letter through the Import Letters button in the Review Correspondence window, Genie will
slot the information in your LetterheadLink template above the text that is imported from the Word document.
Note: You can check if you have created the 'LetterheadLink' template correctly by checking to see if
there is a checkbox called Insert My Letterhead in the Import Letters window.
6.17.8 Ozescribe, Syberscribe & BDT

Genie integrates with the OzeScribe, Syberscribe and BDT transcription services.
They will type your letters and return them to you in Microsoft Word format. The letters can then be imported into
Genie and automatically linked to the correct patient record. We have developed an import and export routine to
make this process as simple as possible.
6.17.8.1 Exporting Demographics

So that you don’t have to dictate the patient’s and referring doctor’s demographic information for each letter,
Genie can export this information from the Appointment Book window for all appointments within a selected
period.
To do this, select Appointments > Transcription Export

The window below will be displayed.
You will need to select which Transcription service you use from the drop down menu.
The default date range is for the previous fortnight, however this can be changed if you prefer.
In a multi-doctor practice, you can also select just a particular doctor.
Two files are exported, named 'Patients.txt' and 'Associates.txt'. They will be placed inside a folder named
'OzescribeOut', 'SyberscribeOut' or 'NTS_Out' which will be automatically created inside your Genie folder.
If a file named 'Patients.txt' already exists in this folder, you will be asked if you want to overwrite it.
If you are sure the existing file has already been uploaded, then you should click the Proceed button to overwrite
the existing file.
The 'Patients.txt' file and the 'Associates.txt' file are not automatically deleted once they have been uploaded to
Ozescribe, Syberscribe or NTS.
Note: The same process applies for BDT Export but you will need to highlight the patients required for
the export on a daily basis.
6.17.8.2 Importing Returned Letters

The letters created by Ozescribe will be named with either the patient's ID number, or be in the format of
"Surname;FirstName;DOB".
Note: The patient's ID number is the internally generated Patient ID field, displayed in the top left corner
of the Patient Demographic window. It is not the file or chart number which either you or Genie may
have entered in the Chart field.
To import returned letters from either Ozescribe, Syberscribe, NTS or BDT, follow the steps outlined in Importing
Remotely Typed Letters.
Reasons for Failure

This window will only import files which have an extension of .doc or .txt.

Genie Manual The Reception Module: Electronic Correspondence (Sending via 3rd Party)
6.18 Electronic Correspondence (Sending via 3rd Party)

Correspondence such as referral/reply letters can be sent to and received from other doctors electronically via a
third party into Genie. This third party could be an organisation such as Healthlink or direct through the Genie
Solutions Web Server. The following sections will explain both methods.
Healthlink is a company which acts as a “middle man” for the secure storage and forwarding of encrypted letters
between doctors, and for pathology and X-ray results for some providers.
To send letters via Healthlink, both doctors must have the Healthlink client application installed on a computer on
their network, and both must have a Healthlink EDI. The EDI is usually an 8 character identifier, which is
basically the name of your mailbox on the Healthlink server.
The Healthlink Client application is cross-platform, so this can be used on either Windows or Macintosh
computers.
In a nutshell, Doctor A writes a letter to Doctor B. The letter is exported from Genie in HL7 format, and includes
Doctor B’s EDI. The Healthlink Client application picks up the letter, encrypts it, and sends it to Doctor B’s
mailbox on the Healthlink server. Doctor B uses the Healthlink Client application to retrieve any letters in his
mailbox.
These are then imported into his practice management program, which should also produce an
acknowledgement (ACK) that the letter has been received. This ACK is uploaded to Doctor A’s mailbox, and is
downloaded the next time Doctor A launches the Healthlink Client application. Genie imports the ACK, and
marks the original letter as having been received.
This can all be set up to happen seamlessly so that there is virtually no interaction required by the end users.
Setup
Note: Genie also supports the following 3rd Party Providers:
· Argus
· DivisionReport
· ePIT
· AllTalk (eQuery)
· Health Network
· Healthlink
· 2 Hippo
· MedEmail
· Medical Objects
· Promedicus
To configure one of these above programs to work with Genie, substitute 'Healthlink' with the name of
the program as listed above.
If your provider is Healthlink, EQuery or DivisionReport, enter the Carrier Identifier assigned to you by this
provider in your Practice Preferences record in Genie. See Carrier Identifiers for more details.
On the computer on which the Healthlink Client application is installed, create a folder inside the Genie folder

and name it “Healthlink”. Inside this folder, create another two folders named “Incoming” and “Outgoing”.
Limitations:
1) Only one instance of Healthlink can be running on the network

2) The "Incoming" and "Outgoing" folders must not exist on the server
3) There must not be more than one "Incoming" and "Outgoing" folder on the network
If Healthlink is running on the server, you will need to consider moving it to a client machine, where you
would create the appropriate "Incoming" and "Outgoing" folders.
Configure the Healthlink program to use these two folders for it's correspondence.
6.18.1 Configuring Healthlink

Note: For the configuration of any of the other carriers' software, you will need to speak to them direct.
Please consult the list of 3rd Party Providers at the end of this section.
Open HMS Advanced Options. There should be a shortcut on your desktop.
Select Configuration/User Settings.

Click on the Message Types tab, then scroll down and highlight “RSDAU”.
Click on the Directories tab, then click the Edit/More button.
Set the Outgoing and Incoming Message Directories to the Outgoing and Incoming folders created earlier.
Click the Close button, select Save in the File menu, then Exit in the File menu.
6.18.2 Writing the Letter

After writing the letter, click on the 'Send via 3rd Party' checkbox, select Healthlink from the popup menu which
appears. If you haven’t already entered the Addressee’s/CC's Healthlink EDI, you will be reminded to enter it,
and the Address Book record will open. If you select Healthlink as the Preferred Method of Communication in the
Address Book record then you will not need to select this each time you create a letter for this doctor.
Click the Save button to save and close the letter. Genie will export the letter in HL7 format, into the “Outgoing”
folder that was set up previously. If the letter needs to be reviewed first then do not tick the Send via 3rd Party
until it is reviewed.
Note: You can actually create the letter on any computer in the network, but it is only exported on the
computer with the Healthlink Outgoing folder.
Genie checks for any letters to be exported every 5 minutes, or by Ctrl clicking on the Quill icon.

Note: The Delivery Acknowledged button is deliberately disabled. This is only ticked when Genie
receives an ACK back from the addressee.
CC letters can be sent electronically also, their Preferred Method of Communication just needs to be entered in
their Address Book entry. This can be done by right clicking on the CC and selecting Edit.
Provided the Send checkbox is ticked, the letter will also be sent to the CC via the corresponding 3rd Party once
it is saved.
You can still send CC letters via a 3rd party even if the primary recipient does not have a 3rd party carrier. Tick
the Send for the CC but leave the Send via 3rd Party unticked as this refers to the primary recipient only.
6.18.3 Checking Imported Letters

Genie also checks the Incoming folder for letters and ACKS every 5 minutes. If it finds a new letter it will be
imported into Genie automatically and a Task will be sent to the Addressee of the letter. If Genie cannot
determine who the Addressee is then the Task will be sent to the Administrator of Genie.
To review any incoming letters, go to Open > Incoming Letters
You can select letters to a certain doctor by selecting the name from the Doctor drop down list. Double-click the
first letter to begin reviewing.

Reviewing letters is very similar to checking your pathology and radiology results (see Matching & Linking
Results). Genie will try to Match the letter as best it can to someone in the database otherwise you can create a
New patient based on the information given in the letter. Once the letter is matched you can Link it to the
patients clinical file and it will move to the next letter for linking.
If the incoming letter is received in RTF format then the linking process is slightly different depending on whether
you have the Import RTF Letters to 4D Write ticked in your Practice Preferences under the Carrier Identifiers tab.
Ticking this MAY allow the conversion of the RTF files into 4D Write in which case they will go into Open >
Incoming Letters and the above linking process will apply. If they come in as blank or scrambled letters then
you will need to untick this and Genie will automatically attach them to the patients chart as an image. In order to
do this, Genie searches for the correct patient, by matching surname, first name and DOB with the information
held within the incoming letter. If it doesn’t find a matching patient, it will create a new patient record using the
information within the incoming letter.
Correspondence Log
Genie also keeps a log of all outgoing and incoming letters, so that you can see exactly when and on which
computer any letter was imported or exported, and also whether it has been read yet or not. This is also how you
can find out which 3rd party carriers this machine exports/imports for, if any.
The Correspondence Log can be accessed via Open > Correspondence Log OR through the Review
Correspondence window by clicking the Correspondence Log button OR through File > Maintenance &
Reports: Administrator tab
To view more detail of an entry, simply double click it.

6.18.4 3rd Party Providers
Company Address Phone Email Website

ArgusConnect Suite 4 (03) 5335 support@argusconnect. www.argusconnect.com.au
Greenhill Enterprise 2220 com.au
Centre
University Drive
Mt Helen Victoria 3350
DivisionReport Level 36 (02) 9290 sales@cnshealth.com.au www.cnshealth.com.au
60 Margaret Street 9890
Sydney NSW 2000
eClinic 657 Nicholson Street (03) 9381 helpdesk@eclinic.com.au www.eclinic.com.au
Carlton North VIC 3054 4567
eQuery 2 Hunter Street (03) 5995 support@lrsupport.com. www.gippspath.com.au/
Cranbourne VIC 3977 7880 au equery.htm
2Hippo 1300 789 assist@2hippo.com www.2hippo.com
828
Healthlink Geoff Sayer 1800 125 Geoff.Sayer@healthlink. www.healthlink.net
PO Box 566 036 net
Caringbah NSW 2229
Medemail 1800 006 www.medemail.com.au
818
Medical Objects P O Box 5048 (07) 5445 info@medicalobjects. www.medical-objects.com.
Maroochydore BC QLD 5037 com.au au
4558
ProMedicus 450 Swan Street (03) 9429 support@promedicus. www.promedicus.com.au

Richmond VIC 3121 8800 com.au
6.19 Merged Letter Templates

Merged Letter Templates are letter templates which can be set up once, and then used to create letters to one
or many patients or addressees. They are very similar to referral-type letter templates (see Patient
Correspondence), except that they don’t link a patient with a record in the Address Book, and should not need to
be edited for each patient.

Genie Manual The Reception Module: Merged Letter Templates
The templates can be accessed from many different windows including:

• The Appointments Book
• The Patient Demographics Window
• The Patient Clinical Window
• The Patients List *
• The Address Book List *
• The Account Holders List *
*Letters printed from the Patients, Address Book or Account Holders List will print to everybody
displayed in the list, not just those highlighted in the list.
Letters printed from the Appointments Book, the Demographics Window or the Clinical Window will
print only for the selected patient.
In all the above cases, templates can be created or opened by clicking on the Templates button.
This will display a menu of your available templates in a Letter Templates window.
In this window you can Print the letter without opening it or Open and print from within the template window.
To create a new template, select Add Template. This will open a new word-processing document. The following
chapters will explain how to set up the new template.
You can categorise your existing templates using the Add Category button and then drag and drop the letter
template(s) onto the category created. Templates can also be moved between categories by dragging and
dropping from one category to the other.
Delete Item allows you to delete templates or delete categories. Any templates from a deleted category will just
be moved out on their own and can then be dragged into another category if needs be.
Expand All allows you to expand all categories to see all templates. To expand one category click the plus icon
next to the category or double click the category.
Collapse All collapses all categories.

6.19.1 Setting up the 4D Write Area

Before filling the body of the letter it is a good idea to perform a few basic setup tasks.
First, select File > Page Setup and make sure that this is set to A4 and that the correct printer has been
selected.
Determine whether or not you want to have headers and/or footers. Headers are a separate area at the top of a
word-processing document which will print on every page of a multi-page document. They are usually used for
page numbering. Footers are a separate area at the bottom of the page which also print on every page of a
multi-page document.
The majority of people choose not to have headers and footers. Whether or not you have headers and footers is
unimportant. What is important is that you are consistent. If you do have headers and footers in this type of
letter, you should also have them in all your letter templates. Otherwise,when an ordinary letter template is
copied into patient correspondence you may end up with a duplicated letterhead.
To select or deselect Headers and Footers, use the View menu.
Selecting the Header or Footer option will either tick or untick this option.
Finally, you should set the printable margins.
The numbered scales along each side of the letter are called Rulers.
If you place the cursor over the current margin setting, it will become a double-ended arrow as shown in the
picture below.
You can now click and drag the margin up or down to suit. This has the effect of moving the body of the letter
either closer or further away from the top edge of the paper.
You can do the same for the other three sides of the template to adjust the left, right and bottom margins.

If you are using a header, then clicking within the header area allows you to do the same to adjust the size of the
header.
6.19.2 Creating the Letter

The actual letter can be created quite quickly using the Expressions Tab. This will insert various pieces of data
at the point where the cursor is flashing, by either double-clicking or dragging and dropping the required
Expression. For more information on what each expression will insert, refer to Referral/Reply Letters.
E.g. First, select Your Letterhead from the Expressions Tab and either double-click or drag and drop this
expression onto your letter. This inserts the Letterhead you have set up in either Practice Preferences or your
individual User Preferences (File > Practice Preferences or File > User Preferences).
Press the Return key to move down a line, then select Today's Date from the Expressions Tab. The following
window will appear, asking how you would like the date to be formatted.
Select your preferred format from the list on the left. Select <No Time> from the list on the right, unless you want
the time to be displayed on the letter.
Remember to also select the Automatic Update checkbox, otherwise whenever you use this template the date
displayed will always be the date on which you created the template!
Note: You can change the Date Format at any time by double-clicking on the Date on the page.
Move the cursor down another couple of lines, and select Patient's Address from the Expressions Tab.
Move the cursor down another couple of lines, then begin the actual letter. Type "Dear ".
We now want to reference the patient’s title and Surname, so that no matter what patient we send the letter to, it
will have their correct title and name e.g. “Dear Mr Smith” or “Dear Mrs Jones”.
To do this we will need to use the Fields Tab, to reference the Title field.
This displays a list of tables in the database available for referencing within letters. Click on the plus (+) sign or

the arrow to the left of the Patients table, and all the fields in the Patients table will appear in a list.
Select the Title field as shown below, and either double-click or drag and drop this field onto the template.
Repeat these steps to insert the Surname field.
You can then proceed to write the desired letter. e.g. A recall letter using Recall Date and Recall Reason in the
Expressions Tab, or an Appointment Reminder, or Medical Certificate letter using the [Appointments] start date
from the Fields Tab.
You can see what references you have inserted by clicking the View > References which will display the
references in grey.
Alternatively, use can use the View References button in order to display the references.
Note: Be sure to turn this view off before saving the template. Otherwise, your templates will print out
with the references instead of the patients details!

6.19.3 Saving/Deleting the Template
Any changes you make to the template are not actually saved until you click the Save button.
You will then be provided with the following warning:
If you close the template via either the Close button, or the Close Box (red cross), then none of the changes you
have made to the template will be saved.
This is to allow you to open the template, add a personal note for a particular patient, and then close the window
without having the personal note automatically saved in the template, which someone else may subsequently
use for a mass mail out to 500 patients.
You can name the template in the Title box and categorise it using the Category drop down menu. Categories
are added through the Letter Template window, see the beginning of this chapter.
Saving A Copy In Patient Notes

If you want to save a copy of the letter in the relevant patient’s clinical record, select the checkbox named Save a
Copy in Clinical Record.
You would usually do this if the letter had any medico-legal value, so that in a year’s time you would still have
exactly what was mailed to the patient, because the actual template may well have been modified or deleted in
the meantime.
The copy of the letter is created when the letter is actually printed, or emailed. If you were not actually printing
the letter but still wanted to create a copy in the patient’s record, you can click on the Copy button to the right of
the Print button.
Creating a Consultation Note

Alternatively, you can choose to have a consultation record created with a note like “<Template Name> sent
25/9/03” automatically inserted.
To do this, select the Create a Consult after Printing checkbox.
You would usually only choose one or the other of these two options. Selecting both is probably overkill.
Use for Quotes

Selecting the Use For Quotes checkbox will make this template available from within a Procedure record.
However, you would normally create a quote template from within the procedure. See Creating Quote Templates

for more details.
Deleting Templates
Templates can be deleted from your list of Templates by clicking the Delete Item button in the Letter Templates
window. See the beginning of this chapter.
6.19.4 Printing Merged Letters

Click on the large Print button in the top right of this window.
If you are printing from a list i.e. printing to one or more patients, account holders, or address book entries, you
will be asked to confirm that you wish to print a letter for all of the displayed results. If you would only like to print
to a selection of records in the list, then you will need to highlight the records required and then go to Records >
Use Selected, otherwise Genie will print for everyone on display by default.
Once the template has been printed, the type of letter (i.e. Recall Letter) is recorded in the patients clinical
record, in the 'Correspondence Out' tab on the Notes page.
Note: If any of the displayed patients have been marked as inactive or deceased, a letter will not be
printed for them.
For more detailed information on using 4D Write, please refer to the 4D Write Reference.pdf situated in
your Genie folder.
6.19.5 Creating Quote Templates

To create or edit a Quote template select the template from the menu in the lower left corner of the Quote tab in
the Procedures window.
If you don't already have a quote template, select 'Add Template' and you will be asked to enter a name for the
template.
After doing this, a new template will automatically open.
Note: You can have as many different types of Quote templates as you like. You could also create a
template here to act as an Operation report.
When a new Quote template is created, it includes the basic information about the Procedure. This information

is "referenced" from the fields in the underlying Procedure record.
You can see the references by clicking on the View References button
This will display the template as shown below:
You can reference other fields in the Procedure record, or the Patient's record. For information on how to do this,
please refer to the Fields & Expressions Tabs.
You will probably want to add your own patient information to this template. For example, disclaimers about
Anaesthetist and hospital fees, etc. Once you have typed this information into the template, you need to save it
by clicking on the Save icon.
Before you do this though, you need to let Genie know where to insert the actual quote information when you
next open this template. To do this, highlight all the text from "Item No" down to the "Out of Pocket Cost", as
shown below:

Then replace this section of the quote template with "XXX", so that it now looks like this:
Click the Save button.
Note: Don't save the template with references showing otherwise it will print like this.
At the top of this screen there are four checkboxes
The Use for Quotes checkbox should already be ticked. This tells Genie to display this template in the popup
menu in the Procedures record.
You will probably want to also check the Save a Copy in Patient Correspondence checkbox. This will make a
copy of this Quote and save it in the patient's record so that you have a record of what was actually quoted. This
occurs when you print the record.
If you aren't printing the record you can still save a copy by clicking the Copy to Patient button.
6.20 Recalls
Recalls are setup either in the Clinical window, through Patients > Add a Recall, or through Appts > Add a
Recall
For more information on adding Recalls, see Recalls in the Clinical Module.
6.20.1 Creating a Generic Recall Template

In order to print out the recalls when they fall due, you first need to create a Merged Letter Template. You can
have as many different types of letters as you like. For example, you may have a specific letter template for Pap
Smear recalls, and a different template for Fluvax recalls.
You can also create a generic recall letter which simply states the reason for the recall and the due date.
To do this, create a new letter template. For instructions on how to do this, please refer to the Merged Letter

Genie Manual The Reception Module: Recalls
Templates chapter.
Use the Expressions Tab to reference the Recall Reason and Recall Date fields,
so that the text of your letter might read something like this:
"Our records indicate that you are due for «[Recalls]Reason» on «[Recalls]Due Date»".
Note: When you are entering the reason it's a good idea to make it so that it will appear natural in this
sentence.
6.20.2 Printing Recalls

On a weekly or monthly basis, open the Patients List, via Open > Patients and select Patients > Recalls Due,
or select the Recall icon from the Appointments page.
This will display all recalls which are either overdue or are due within the next 30 days.
Overdue recalls display in red, while recalls due in the next 30 days display in green.
The list of recalls can be sorted by clicking on any of the column headers.

To print a recall letter, highlight the required patients, and click on the Merged Letter Template button to
select the template you wish to use from the Templates window.
This will open the selected template. Use the Printer icon at the top right of the window to print a letter for all
the patients who were previously selected.
Once printing has been completed, you will be asked if you want to re-assign the recalls to their next due date. If
you click OK, then the non-recurring recalls will be marked as Completed. They are not actually deleted.
Recurring recalls will be set to the next due date.
You can view all Completed recalls i.e. printed, non-recurring recalls, at any time by selecting Completed Recalls
from the popup menu as shown.
Completed recalls display in blue.
The Last and Action Details fields will be marked with today's date and the name of the letter template used.

Note: The Recalls Due section in Genie is used to print reminder letters to the patient only. It does not
monitor for whether the patient has been in for an appointment or not. A recall is considered to be
completed in Genie when a Recall Letter is printed, NOT when the patient comes in for their
appointment. This is monitored through Flagging. See Flagging of Patient Record for more information.
If you don't automatically update the printed records when asked, you can do this by clicking on the Reassign
Selected button.
6.20.3 Flagging of Patient Record

When recalls are printed, the patient record is also automatically flagged. If the recall is currently overdue, then
the Flagged Date is set to one week ahead. Otherwise, the Flagged Date is set to one week after the recall is
actually due.
When a user enters this file, they will be notified that it is flagged and for what reason.
After the Flagged date has passed, the user who assigned the recall will be notified that the recall is overdue
when logging into Genie.
When the nominated Administrator (signified with a red tick beside their username on the login screen) logs into
Genie, they will see a list of all flagged patients for all providers, regardless of whether it was a flag generated by
printing a recall or sfor some other reason.
A list of Flagged patients can be viewed at anytime through Open > Patients and then Patients > Flagged
Patients.

6.20.4 Printing the Recall List

To print the Recalls Due list, click on the Printer icon. If you wish to only print a selection of records on display in
your Recalls Due window, highlight the required records, and go to Records > Use Selected from the menus
above the Recalls window. This will remove from display any non highlighted records, allowing you to just print
the selection.
Clicking the Printer icon will open a pre-existing Quick Report template allowing you to print all the details
contained in the Recalls Due window (i.e. Due Date, Patient, Pt Phone, Reason, etc).
6.20.5 Pathology/Radiology Recalls (Investigation Action List)

The Investigation Action List allows the receptionist or practice nurse to deal with each result as requested by
the reviewing Doctor.
This would normally be done once or twice per day. As each result is dealt with it is removed from the list.
As new results are reviewed by the doctor, they are added to the list, so this list is constantly "rolling over" each
day.
To open the Investigation Action List select Open > Investigations Action List.

The Action List will open as shown below.
The Action to be taken is noted in the Action column. If the action to be taken is marked as "Recall", then it will
be marked in red. All other actions are marked in green, or in black if "No Action" is required.
In the above example, the patient is to be recalled. The home phone number is listed, so you would normally call
the patient and make an appointment for them. You can open the patients demographics using the icon if
you need any other information/phone numbers.
Genie can check to see if the patient already has an appointment booked, by clicking on the Check Appts
button.
If no appointments are found you can click the Appointment Book button to open the Appointment book.
Once you have made the appointment, click on the Remove From List button, to open the window below.
Before you can click OK you must have entered at least your initials.
The information entered into this window is saved with the result, so that you can look back at a later date and
see who spoke with the patient and what was done.
Select the Patient has been notified of result checkbox if you have actually spoken with the patient.
Because this is a recall, you will probably want to select the Flag Patient's Record checkbox if the reviewing
doctor has not already done so. Enter the date after which you want Genie to warn you if the patient's record
remains flagged.
In the Message Given or Action Taken field enter what you have either done or told the patient.
Click OK to remove this result from the list.
Note: You can select multiple results at once by highlighting them with SHIFT-click, or simply selecting
all results. You can then move through the above window quickly without having to click on the
'Remove From List button', or enter your initials for each result.
Instead of, or as well as, phoning the patient, you can also use the Merged Letter Template button to
send one or many of the patients in the list a letter or email.
You can view the actual result by double-clicking on it in the list, assuming you have clinical privileges in your
User Preferences Security tab.

Genie Manual The Reception Module: Scanning
6.21 Scanning
Genie can handle scanning in two ways:
1. Scan externally to Genie, and attach images to individual patient files (see Attachments). This is designed for
practices that do minimal scanning.
2. Integrated imaging system in Genie (ImagePro) which handles bulk scanning either direct to a patients file or
to multiple patient files via the use of a Process (holding) folder (see ImagePro).
The Folder Hierarchy

Because Genie doesn’t store file attachments in the data file, it is necessary to build a folder hierarchy, that is,
folders within folders, in which Genie will automatically place attached files, and keep a reference to them, so
that they can be opened and viewed at any time.
Genie builds this folder hierarchy automatically, with new folders being created when needed. The location of the
“root” storage folder is specified in the Images & Attachments tab of your Practice Preferences (File > Practice
Preferences). By default, this is a folder named 'Images' in the Genie folder on the server computer.
If you are using Genie on a single computer, Genie treats this computer as the “server”, and creates the storage
folders in the same way as if you were on a network. If you subsequently upgraded to a network, you would just
have to copy this folder into the Genie folder on the server, and change the pathway stored in your Practice
Preferences.
Inside this folder, another 26 folders named “A” to “Z” are also created. In each of these folders, each patient
with attached files, will have their own folder, the name of which will be their Surname followed by their initial
followed by their unique Patient ID number.
The Patient ID number is automatically generated whenever a new patient record is created. It can be viewed in
the top left corner of the Patient Demographics window.
For example, John Smith’s folder may be named “SmithJ1234”, and it could be found at the following pathway
on the server:
/Applications/Genie/Images/S/SmithJ1234/ or C:\Genie\Images\S\SmithJ1234\
Any files that are placed in this folder will be able to opened from John Smith’s patient record, on any of the
client machines.
New files which are added to a patient record from the client machine are automatically copied to the patient’s
folder.
That is, there are 2 ways of linking a file to a patient record. First, they can simply be placed in the patient’s
folder, if it exists. Secondly, they can be linked to the patient record on the client machine. In this case, Genie will
automatically copy the file to the patient’s folder, creating a new folder if it doesn’t already exist.
If a folder for the patient doesn’t already exist, you can create it manually, naming it according to the format
described above i.e. Surname+Initial+Patient ID.
6.21.1 Attachments
Genie allows you to link files stored on your computer’s hard drive, to a patient record. These files can be of any
type including scanned images, digital photographs, movies, text documents, etc.
The attached files remain on the computer’s hard drive. They are not imported into or stored within Genie’s data
file, as this could quickly bloat the data file to a huge size. Instead, Genie simply stores the pathway to the file, so
that it can find it again.
If you are running Genie on a network, then Genie will actually copy the file to a folder on the server, thereby
making it available to everyone on the network.
Important Points
1. On Windows, there cannot be any spaces in the pathway to the TempImages folder created in the Genie
folder on the client machine. This means that the Genie folder should be situated at the root of your hard

drive. If it is in the Program Files folder you will not be able to open any stored files.
On Windows clients: C:\Genie\TempImages\
2. When you attach a file to a patient, a copy is made on the server. Genie does NOT delete the original file. If
you are using Genie on a single machine you will now have 2 copies of the file on the one machine. If hard
disk space is a concern, you should delete the originals manually.
3. If you have a mixed network of Macintosh and Windows machines, any file created on a Macintosh must be
assigned a 4 character suffix consisting of a point plus 3 letters, such as “.jpg”,“.pdf”,“.gif”,“.bmp”,".doc”. If you
don’t do this, then these files will not be able to be opened on a Windows client.
4. When you delete a file from the list, Genie deletes both the reference to that file AND the actual file on the
server.
5. When a document is opened on a client machine, remember that this is actually a copy of the original on the
server, and any changes you make to it are not automatically saved in the original. For example, if you open a
digital photo in Photoshop, make changes to the picture, and then save the changes, those changes have
only been made to the file which was copied to the TempImages folder on the client.
To save the changes to the original, click on the Add to List button to add the copy in the TempImages folder,
overwriting the original on the server. (ImagePro will allow you to make changes to the Original document.
(See ImagePro for more details)).
6. Error 43 -File not found.

If you get this message when attempting to open an attachment, it means that the server has been unable to
find the file at the expected pathway. There could be 2 reasons for this:
a. The file has actually been deleted from the patient’s folder on the server, or
b. The pathway stored in your Practice Preferences is incorrect.
7. Attachments are not handled by Offsite Logging.
6.21.1.1 Scanning
Genie does have the ability to scan directly in to a patient’s record, using ImagePro. For more information on
Using ImagePro, please refer to the ImagePro section.
If you intend to scan images or referral letters, the scanner should ideally be attached to one of the client
machines. Some scanning software can be unstable, so it’s usually not a good idea to have it attached to the
server, because if the server computer crashes, your whole network goes down.
Most scanning software will allow you to designate a default folder for scanned images. You can create this
anywhere on your hard disk. Alternatively, you could scan directly into a patient's storage folder on the server, if it
already exists.
You can create a patient folder manually if you wish. However, you will need to know their Patient ID number (in
the Demographics window), and you will need to ensure that their name is entered correctly in Genie.
6.21.1.2 The Attachments Window

Open the patient's clinical record.
Click on the Attachments button.

If ImagePro is NOT registered, the Attachments window displayed below will open.
Adding an Attachment
Click on the Add Attachment button.
Select the file you wish to add in the Open window.
Genie will then copy the selected file to the patient's storage folder on the server machine.
This may take a few seconds to complete.

If Genie is unable to copy the file for any reason, you will receive an alert message warning you that the file was
unable to be copied. Likely reasons for this are a lack of hard disk space, or a lack of memory. In general, Genie
can copy files up to approximately 600Kb in size.
When an attached file is highlighted the Attachments window should look something like this.
The pathway to the storage folder for the selected attachment is displayed in red at the bottom of the screen.
The suffix eg “jpg”,“bmp”,“pdf” etc. is displayed as the Windows type. On Macintosh computers, the Macintosh
Type and Creator are also shown.
Opening an Attachment
You can use the Up and Down Arrow keys on the keyboard to highlight the attachment you want to open. It can
then be opened by either double-clicking on it, pressing the Return or Enter keys, or by clicking the Open File
button.
What Actually Happens

When the Open File button is clicked, Genie sends a request to the server, which returns a copy of the file
stored on the server. This copy is then placed in a folder named TempImages which is created automatically
inside the Genie folder on the client machine. It is actually this copy which is then opened by Genie. When the
Attachments window is closed, any files in the TempImages folder are deleted.
What This Means

There are several advantages to this method of handling attached files:
1. All attached images are stored on the server in a single folder for easy backup.
2. Several doctors/receptionists can review the same file at the same time because each is actually using a copy
of the original.
3. On Macintosh, because Genie is internally copying the files to and from the server, you don't need to have File
Sharing turned on in order to access a file on another machine.
4. On Windows, for the same reason as above, there is no reason to Share the Images folder.
5. This method still works in a mixed-platform environment. Even if the server is a Macintosh, Windows clients
can still open a Macintosh file on the server, because when it is copied to the Windows client, it is recreated
locally as a Windows file. The reverse is also the case if you have a Windows server and a Macintosh client.
This assumes that the original file has a cross-platform parent application such as Photoshop, Word, Excel.

Deleting an Attachment
To delete an attachment, highlight the file you want to delete, then click the Delete File button.
Genie sends a message to the server requesting that the stored file be deleted.
If for any reason the file is unable to be deleted you will receive a warning. The most likely reasons for this are
that the file is locked, or is in use by another application.
Saving Changes to an Image

The Save Back to Server button will become activated after an image has been opened. It will save any changes
made locally to a document back to the server's Images folder.
Updating the List

The Update List button searches the patient's storage folder on the server, looking for any files situated in this
folder which haven't yet been linked to the patient record.
If it finds any, these files will be automatically linked to the patient. You would use this button if you had manually

placed any files into the patient's folder on the server.
If you do this regularly, for example if you are scanning correspondence directly into the patient's folder on the
server, then you should check the 'Update Folder Contents Automatically' checkbox.
The Update procedure will then run whenever the Attachments window is opened.
Adding Information
You can record a variety of information about each attachment, including its type, who it is from, and a number
of keywords to allow searching the database for all attachments of a particular type or description.
Highlight the Attachment to edit, then click the Information button to open the window shown below.
You can change the name of the attachment here also. Genie will automatically change the name of the file on
the server.
Note: You cannot have 2 files with the same name in this list because the operating system will not
allow you to have 2 files of the same name in the same folder.
6.21.1.3 Searching for Attachment

You can subsequently search the patient database for patients with a particular type of attachment by clicking on
the Images button in the Patient list (Open > Patients).
This opens the following Search window.


6.21.2 Image Pro Setup

Image Pro is an optional module for professional image-handling within Genie. It allows scans, photographs and
videos to be directly acquired and linked to the selected patient. It also allows subsequent manipulation of
acquired images.
Requirements
1. QuickTime v5. 0 or higher must be installed on your computer. You can get the latest version from
http://www.apple.com/quicktime/
2. FTP server software must be running on your Genie Server computer if you are using Genie on a network.
3. An Image Pro registration number from Genie Solutions.
6.21.2.1 FTP Server Installation

Genie uses FTP commands to transfer files to and from the server computer. If you only use the single-user
version of Genie, then you don't need an FTP server and can ignore the rest of this section.
The following sections deal with the installation of FTP software on your Genie Server. Only 1 section will apply
to your practice.
We recommend the use of a freeware program called TYPSoft FTP Server, for Windows machines.
Macintosh machines have a built in FTP Server. There are 2 basic versions of MacOS X available, each with
their own installation instructions:
· MacOS X (most common)

· MacOS X Server
To find out which version your server is running, select the Apple in the top left hand corner of your screen and
go to 'About This Mac', i. e. Apple > About This Mac
6.21.2.1.1 Windows Server

There are many FTP server applications available as freeware on the Internet. We have included one of these,
called TYPSoft FTP Server, on the Genie Installer CD. You will find it in the Shareware folder. The installer is
called "ftpserv.exe".
1. Double-click on the installer named "ftpserv. exe" in the Shareware folder on the Genie CD.
2. Follow the onscreen prompts. You can install it anywhere although it's probably best to install to the Program
Files directory. A new directory named TYPSoft FTP Server will be created by the installer.
3. Launch the TYPSoft executable (Start > (All) Programs > TYPSoft FTP Server > TYPSoft FTP Server).
The window shown below will open.

4. Select Setup > Users to open the Users window shown below.
5. Click on the New User button and enter a user name. This can be anything you like (keep it obvious, as it has
no bearing on any security issues on the actual machine).
6. Enter a password in the Password field (again, keep it obvious). This can be changed at any time, even if the
word <<Encrypt>> is written in this field, simply by highlighting and typing in this field. Click on the Browse (...)
button to select the root directory i.e. the Images folder inside your Genie folder, normally C:\Genie\Images\.

7. Navigate to, and click on the Images folder as shown below:
8. Tick the Virtual Directory Showing checkbox, and enter the maximum number of users allowed to login under
this user name. This would be the number of workstations in your network.
Note: Everyone on the network can use the same login name and password as long as you allow more
than one user for the account.
9. Leave the Time-Out field as zero.
10. Click on the pathway in the Directory Access area in the top right of the screen above. In this case, the
pathway is C:\Genie\Images\.
11.Select the Files and Directory options as shown in the window below, then click the Save and Close buttons

to close this window.
12.Select Setup > FTP to open the window shown below:
13. Set the 'Max. of User' to '0'.

14. Select the 'Launch FTP Server on Windows Startup' checkbox, and then click the Save and Close buttons.
6.21.2.1.2 MacOS X
Enabling the FTP Server on Mac OSX 10.5 (Leopard)
1. Open the System Preferences (Apple > System Preferences)

2. Click the Sharing Control Panel
3. Click the File Sharing service and then click the Options... button at the bottom right of the window.

4. Tick the 'Share files and folders using FTP' option, then click Done
5. Close out of the System Preferences
Enabling the FTP Server on Mac OSX 10.4 (Tiger) and below

1. Open the System Preferences (Apple > System Preferences)
2. Click the Sharing Control Panel

3. Tick the 'FTP Access' box as shown below:
4. Close the System Preferences window.
Setting Administrative Privileges on Macintosh

When using FTP with a Macintosh Genie server, you need to use the user name and password of a user with
administrative privileges.
1. Open the System Preferences (Apple > System Preferences).

2. Click the Accounts Panel
3. Check that the 'Allow user to administer this computer' checkbox is ticked, as shown below:
4. Close the System Preferences window.
6.21.2.1.3 MacOS X Server

If your server is running the Mac OSX Server operating system, the FTP component of the server is not
configured to run by default and needs to be configured by your System Administrator. Genie Solutions is unable
to provide assistance with configuration of hardware, networks or third party software.
6.21.2.2 Registration and Configuration

Before you can use Image Pro you need to purchase a registration code from Genie Solutions. Once you have
this code:
1. Open Genie and select File > Register.

2. Enter the Licensed To and Registration Key exactly as provided.
3. If you have entered it correctly, the Register button should become enabled.
ImagePro Preferences
Note: If you use the single-user version of Genie, then you don't need to fill in any preferences, since
you won't be using FTP.

Select Special > ImagePro Control and click on the Network Setup button to open the window shown below:
Server IP Address
This is the IP Address of the server computer. You can get this address automatically by clicking the Query
Server button.
FTP Root Directory

This is the pathway to the Images folder, unless it has already been specified when setting up the FTP server on
the server computer.
On Windows or MacOS X Server operating systems, then you should have already specified the Images folder.
In this case, you just need to enter a single forward slash in this field i.e. "/".
On Mac OS X (non Server) operating system then you need to specify the full pathway, which would usually be
/Applications/Genie/Images/.
Note: The name of the hard drive is not included. This pathway must begin and end with a forward
slash.
Test Settings
Once you have entered the details here, click on the Test Settings button. If you have entered the correct
details, and the FTP server is running on your server computer, then a dialogue similar to the one shown below
will appear:
If you get an error message, read the instructions in the Image Pro Troubleshooting section.
Setting Preferences
Open the ImagePro window (Special > ImagePro Control). The bottom part of this window contains your
Preference settings. These settings are unique to each machine on a network.
Preferences are not automatically saved permanently unless you click the Save Preferences button after

changing something.
Before you start scanning or acquiring digital photographs via ImagePro, you must specify the image format and
quality you want. Generally JPEG is the best format for colour scans and photos. To set the quality, click on the
Options button.
The easiest way to set the quality is to specify the maximum file size in the Target Size field as shown below.
Note: This size is in bytes, so if you want to limit the file size to 200 Kilobytes, you need to enter 200,000
here.
The only problem with larger, high quality images, as far as Genie is concerned, is that they will be slower to
copy back and forth over a network.

6.21.3 Using Image Pro

The ImagePro Control window can be accessed by selecting Special > ImagePro Control in either the
Appointments Book or the Patient’s list.
6.21.3.1 Scanning from Within Genie

This is the easiest method if you just have a single document, such as a referral letter from a newly arrived
patient. In this case you would click on their name in the Appointments Book, open the ImagePro Control window
(Special > ImagePro Control) and click on the Scanner icon. Or you can right click on the patients name and
select Scan. This will scan straight to the patient's file without bringing up the ImagePro Control window.
If you open the ImagePro Control window, you can choose to scan the document as a PDF (either single or multi
page) by ticking the 'Save scans as PDF', otherwise choose the file type from the Save scans and photos as:
drop down menu.
Note: In order to view PDF documents on Windows, you will need to download and install Ghostscript.
Please see Installing Ghostscript for further details.
You also have the options to:

· Acquire Multiple Images,
· Hide device GUI, which will prevent the scanner software window from coming up,
· Enable Automatic Document Feeder,
· Enable Duplex Scanning if your scanner can scan double sided documents in one scan
· And, Less Capability Negotiation which may help in some circumstances where the direct communication
between the scanner and Genie does not work.

The scanner’s own window will launch. Most scanners have a button or a menu command to return the scanned
image to a requesting application.
Once scanning has started you should see the following window.
Once scanning has completed, you will be asked to name the file.
You don’t have to enter the file type extension when naming the scan. Genie will do this for you automatically,
based on the file type you have selected in the Preferences.
Genie initially places the scan into a folder named 'TempImages' inside the Genie folder. It then converts the
scan to the image format and size which you have specified in Preferences. It then copies the resultant file to the
patient’s image folder on the server.
6.21.3.2 Batch Processing

If you have multiple documents for multiple patients to scan, the procedure outlined below is highly
recommended and will yield considerable time savings.
Note: While this section has been written with scanning in mind, the procedure applies for other types
of documents such as digital photographs etc.
Configuration
Note: Each client machine that will be scanning or processing (uploading) documents needs to
complete these configuration steps:
1. Create a "Holding Folder" called something like "Scanning" on a client machine. This can be anywhere on
your hard drive, the Desktop is usually convenient.
2. Set up your Scanner's Software to scan to this Holding Folder.
3. In Genie, open Image Pro Control i.e. Special > ImagePro Control.

4. Click on the small folder icon in the top part of the ImagePro Control window and select your Holding Folder,
so that Genie knows where to look for newly scanned documents.
You can then scan your documents into the Holding Folder using your scanners software independent of Genie.
As Genie has no impact on how the scanned document is captured, you need to set the desired image format
and quality from within the scanner’s own software i.e. the options set in Genie for Ad Hoc scanning will have no
effect. JPEG or black and white TIFF, with a resolution of about 150 dpi are usually best at keeping your image
size below 100KB.
Importing Scans
Once a bundle of documents have been scanned to the holding folder, the next step is to import them into Genie
so they can be accessed from the clinical record. To import the scans into Genie:
1. Click on the Process Folder button in the ImagePro Control window. This displays the contents of the holding
folder, as shown below.
Preview Images needs to be ticked if you want to be able to preview the images in the preview pane on the right.
Open Info Window When Processing will open the below info window for all images so further detail about the
image can be added when processing.
Use Patients Subfolders allows you to select which of the patients subfolders you want an image to go into when
processing the images. eg. Op Photos, Referrals etc. These are added through the patients Image Browser
window. For more information on adding subfolders refer to Viewing Images in the Clinical Module.
To view an image, click once on the name of the scan. You can zoom in on a scan simply by clicking on the

displayed image, and zoom out by Shift-clicking. If for some reason the image will not display in the display area
simply double click on the Description of the image and it will open the image in a separate window.
2. To change the date of the image, (e.g. to the date of the referral letter) slow double click in the Date column.
You can right click to change the date to today's date for one image or all images in the list.
3. To rename the image, slow double click in the Description column. The name of an image is for display
purposes only in Genie, it does not change the original name of the file on the Server. For this reason,
images can be named using any type or amount of characters, and the same image name can be used for
more than one patient.
4. To attach a single image to a patient, double click in the Patient column next to the image name. If you have
multiple images that you need attach to the same patient, you can highlight the images using Ctrl-click or
Shift-click, then click the Link to Patient button.
5. You will be presented with a Search window to allow you to specify the patient to whom this image/s belongs.
If you link an image to the wrong patient you can unlink this image by double clicking on linked images name
and choosing 'unlink' when prompted. This will allow you to then link this image to the correct patient.
If you right click on the patient's name you can open their clinical file for reference.
6. Once you have finished assigning the scanned documents to the relevant patients, click on the Process
Images button. Genie will process each image, copying each one to the appropriate patient folder on the
server.
As the scanned documents are processed, Genie moves the original file into a folder called “Processed” which is
automatically created within the Holding Folder. These can subsequently be deleted manually if you wish.
The buttons at the top of this window allow you to apply filters, show more information, rename, draw and
annotate on images, delete, and open the Image Browser window for the highlighted patient.
6.21.4 Image Pro Troubleshooting

The following section outlines some of the common problems and error which may be encountered when using
ImagePro.
6.21.4.1 Scanner Issues

The most common scanner problem is encountered when scanning directly to a patient file. If your scanner is:
1. Installed correctly on your computer,

2. Connected to your computer and
3. Turned on
then it may be a compatibility issue.
When starting an acquisition session with TWAIN, Genie and the driver must first go through a negotiation
phase. During negotiation, Genie examines the capabilities of the driver and establishes the settings, based on
which the image will be transferred. This procedure is clearly defined in the TWAIN specification, and a properly

written TWAIN driver should support capability negotiation. Unfortunately, there exist device drivers that do not
comply with the specification, and such drivers might cause problems during capability negotiation, or may not
work at all.
To date, we have tested Genie with Canon, HP and Epson scanners. The majority of HP and Epson scanners
appear to be fine, but Canon in general do not. As we do not recommend specific hardware, the best idea would
be to check the returns policy with your supplier.
If your scanner doesn’t work with Genie, try selecting the 'Less Capability Negotiation' checkbox in ImagePro
Control Preferences.
If it still doesn’t work, or causes Genie to crash, then we're afraid there’s nothing we can do about it, unless and
until the manufacturer releases a driver update which more closely conforms to the expected TWAIN
specification.
In this case, you can still easily and effectively attach scanned documents to the correct patients by scanning
from outside Genie into a holding folder (see Batch Processing chapter for more information)
6.21.4.2 Unable to make FTP Connection
This message means that Genie is unable to make an FTP Connection with the server. Click the Check Details
button and then the Test Settings button which will give you more detail as to what the cause is.
The possible causes are:
1. Problem: There is no FTP Server running on the server.

Solution: On MacOSX, open the Sharing Control Panel and make sure that the FTP Access checkbox is
ticked.
On Windows, make sure that the FTP Server program is running (Start > Programs > TYPSoft
FTP Server > TYPSoft FTP Server). There should be a small blue icon with an “F” in the task
bar or System Tray at bottom right of screen, near the time.
2. Problem: The IP Address of the server has been changed.

Solution: Open Special > ImagePro Control and click Network Setup button, delete the IP Address, and then
click the Query Server button. After a second or two, the IP Address of the server will appear in
the IP Address field.
3. Problem: The FTP Root Directory in the Network Setup is incorrect.

Solution: On MacOSX, as long as your Genie folder on the server is still inside the Applications folder, then this
should be /Applications/Genie/Images/
On Windows, the FTP Root Directory should be just a forward slash (/)
4. Problem: The login name and/or password is incorrect.

Solution: On MacOSX, the Login Name is the “shortname” of the actual login account of the server computer.
This name can be seen by opening the Accounts Control Panel in the System Preferences. It is
not your Genie user name and password.
On Windows, the Login Name and Password is the name and password which you set up in the
TypSoft FTP program. It is not your Genie user name, nor is it the login name of the actual
computer.
5. Problem (Windows Only): The TYPSoft FTP Settings are incorrect.

Solution: Be sure the options in Setup > Users in the TYPSoft FTP Server program on the server are as
specified in FTP Server Installation.
If you still can’t make a connection to the Server check the following:

1. Check the front window of the TYPSoft FTP server to see if there are any error messages. Perhaps another
application or process is already using Port 21.
2. Have you recently installed or switched on a firewall? If so, you may need to make an exception for Port 21.
3. Delete and recreate the User in the TypSoft FTP server.
Note: Everyone on the network can use the same login name and password as long as you allow more
than one user for the account, in the setup.
There are no other causes for a failed connection, so if you are still getting this error message, go back to the
beginning and double-check your settings again.
6.21.4.3 Permission Errors (Mac Only)

Permissions errors are prevalent on Macintosh computers. The single best way to avoid them is to only have
one account set up on each computer i.e. the administrator. Problems arise with multiple accounts because if a
folder is created by one account, and then someone logs in under another account, then that folder is “off-limits”.
The second account cannot add, delete or modify anything in the folder. This usually results in a -5000 error.
Sometimes the Permissions for different folders just become incorrect. In this case you need to reset them by
clicking on the folder to highlight it, and then select “Get Info ” from the File menu.
Make sure that the Permissions are set to Read & Write, and click the Apply to Enclosed Items button.
You can also Repair Permissions using the Disk Utility, found at /Applications/Utilities/Disk Utility/.
Alternatively, use a Shareware program like Cocktail to schedule a Repair Permissions on a regular basis.
Other errors on Macintosh:

-43 File not found. This means that the file Genie is looking for at a particular location, isn’t actually there, or has
been renamed, or has a name longer than 32 characters and you are using a Macintosh.

6.21.4.4 FTP Errors

10047 FTP 421 -Service not available,closing control connection.
10048 FTP 425 -Can ’t open data connection.
10049 FTP 426 -Connection closed;transfer aborted.
10050 FTP 450 -Requested file action not taken.File unavailable (e.g. file busy).
10051 FTP 451 -Requested action aborted:local error in processing.
10052 FTP 452 -Requested action not taken.Insufficient storage space in system.
10053 FTP 500 -Syntax error,command unrecognized.
10054 FTP 501 -Syntax error in parameters or arguments
10055 FTP 502 -Command not implemented.
10056 FTP 503 -Bad sequence of commands.
10057 FTP 504 -Command not implemented for that parameter.
10058 FTP 530 -Not logged in.
10059 FTP 532 -Need account for storing files.
10060 FTP 550 -Requested action not taken.File unavailable (e.g. file not found, no access).
10061 FTP 551 -Requested action aborted:page type unknown.
10062 FTP 552 -Requested file action aborted.Exceeded storage allocation (for current directory or dataset).
10063 FTP 553 -Requested action not taken.File name not allowed.
10064 No response has been received within the given timeout period (See Unable to make FTP Connection).
10065 Not an FTP file.
10066 Error in processing Base64.
10067 Error in processing AppleSingle.
10068 Error in processing Quoted-Printable.
10069 FTP session was closed by the server.
10070 Not an FTP directory.
10071 TCP session was closed by the server
10072 Invalid encode kind
10073 Invalid decode kind
10074 An asynchronous DNR call did not complete
10075 An asynchronous OpenTransport call did not complete
10076 OpenTransport bind failed.248 Genie Manual ImagePro
10077 OpenTransport connect failed
10078 Maximum MacTCP streams reached
10079 Error in processing uuencode
10080 Cannot load ICMP library
10081 Error in processing MacBinary
10082 MacBinary checksum error
10083 Could not open a file
10084 No FTP information received
10085 Unknown FTP information received
10086 Proxy connection failed
10087 Standard file I/O error
10088 FTP reentrant error
10089 SLI.DLL is not loaded

Genie Manual The Reception Module: Tasks
6.22 Tasks
Tasks are a way of communicating internally either as a way of recording phone messages or as a reminder for
yourself or other users.
Tasks are accessed through the Open menu (Open > Tasks). The tasks listed are the tasks that are yet to be
completed. The User or type of Tasks displayed can be changed using the drop down menus at top right. Tasks
highlighted in red are tasks that have been marked as urgent.
Double click on a Task to view its details. This will automatically mark the Task as 'Read'.
If the Task is linked to a patient, the patients clinical file can be opened by clicking on the Stethoscope icon. If
the Task is linked to an Address Book entry the Address Book details can be viewed by clicking on the Doctor
icon.
To reply to the Task click the Reply button, which will open up another Task window with the body of the original
Task copied into it.
If the Task is complete, tick the Completed box and save using the OK button.
To send a task, click the Blue Plus button and type a subject in the subject line and the detail of the message in
the large blank text area. Ticking the Urgent box will mark the task as urgent, and the task will be displayed in
red. Enter the date that you or the recipient want to be notified. Mark who you want the message to go to by

Genie Manual The Reception Module: Tasks
ticking the box next to their name in the 'Send Message To' column on the right, or you could select your own
name so the task acts as a reminder.
You can also link the task to a patient by either creating the task while in their clinical record though Tools > Add
Task, or clicking on the Link to Patient button. This will keep a record of the task in the Tasks section of the
'Other' tab. Similarly, the Task can be linked to a person in the Address Book using the Link to Address Book
button.
When you receive a Task as either green for non-urgent tasks or red for urgent, as below.
You can view your Tasks by clicking in the green or red area or close the Task notification box by clicking on the
red cross or circle. This box will keep reappearing until you have read all your tasks and when you receive a new
Task. Tasks can be viewed and marked as completed at any time through Open > Tasks.

Part
VII
Clinical
Genie Manual Clinical:
7 Clinical
The Clinical window can be opened from either the Appointments Book or the Patient ’s list. To open from the
Appointments Book, click once on the appointment to highlight it, and then click on the Stethoscope
button.(Shortcut Ctrl-K).
To open from the Patient’s list, double-click on the record or press the Enter key, once the desired record is
highlighted.
The Clinical window has up to five different pages, depending on your practice type and screen resolution.
There are two layouts for the clinical record. If your computer and monitor support a screen resolution of
1280x754 or higher, then you can tick the Use Large Clinical Window in File > User Preferences. This is a
much more useful window, because all the major information is displayed on the one page. So, if possible, it is
highly recommended that you increase your screen resolution to take advantage of this feature. Additionally, on
large screens/high resolutions, the Clinical window will open to the full window width, and includes a vertical
splitter which allows the sizes of the display area and prescription area to be modified.
Button Description
The Edit Patient button opens the patient's Demographic details.
The Pathology Request button opens the Pathology request window. See Ordering Pathology.
The Radiology Request (Ribcage) button opens the Radiology request window. See Ordering Radiology.

Genie Manual Clinical:
The Referral/Reply button opens a Referral/Reply letter. See Referral/Reply Letters.
The Recall button opens the Recall window. See Recalls.
This icon allows you to open another patient's clinical record (This should only be used in situations where
you need to quickly refer to another patient's file whilst in consultation i.e. interrupted with a phone call regarding
another patient). Option/Alt clicking on this icon will display a list of patients with the same Medicare number.
The Merge Letter Template button displays a drop down list of available templates. This can be used for
things such as Medical Certificates, or Immunisation History. For set up of these templates see Merged Letter
Templates.
The Image Browser button opens up either the Attachments or the Image Browser window, depending on
whether ImagePro is registered. See Attachments, or Images.
The Add/Edit Consult button opens a new consult window or edits your current consultation. See Consultation
Notes.
7.1 The Main Page

The Main (or Summary plus Notes) page displays the patient’s Current Problems, Past History, Current
Medication List, Allergies, Smoking and Alcohol history, Pap smear details and flag information.
If the patient has unlinked results (i.e. in Open > Pathology & Radiology) a flashing red arrow in the top right
corner of the window will alert you to this fact. You can then view and link these results via the Unlinked Result/

Genie Manual Clinical: The Main Page
s button. The Next Appt button will show all future appointments for the patient. Alt clicking on this button will
show all appointments, past and future, for the patient.
Pap Smears
The Last Pap field will be filled in automatically if you download electronic results. Alternatively it can be filled in
manually to stop warnings for overdue smears appearing and to mark correctly the patient on the Overdue
Smears list in the Patients Menu. If the patient is not a regular of the practice or no longer is required to be
recalled for smears eg. hysterectomy, you can tick the Don't Recall for smears tickbox which will prevent them
from appearing on the Overdue Smears recall list.
Flagging
Ticking the Flagged tickbox will prompt you for a reason and the number of days the patient needs to be seen
by.
When a User enters a flagged patient's file they will be notified that it is flagged and provided with the flag
reason. After the flagged date has passed, the user to which the flag is assigned will be notified when logging
into Genie. Flagged patients can be viewed at any time through Patients > Flagged Patients in the Patient List.
In the right upper corner of the Main (or Notes) page is a list of "Contacts" for this patient. This Contacts list
contains previous consultation records, Attachments, Correspondence out and in, Procedures, Pathology &
Radiology, Documents, Workcover, Health Assessments, Care Plans, Antenatal Visits.
Above this Contacts List, the icons are:
Show Last 10 Consults tickbox will display the last 10 consultations in the display area.
Interested Parties, populated by CCing a letter to someone in the Addressbook.
The Garbage Can deletes the highlighted entry in the All Contacts List.
The graph icons graph results in PIT and HL7 format respectively. In order to graph PIT results, you
must have 'Extract Path Results PIT Format' ticked in User Preferences. To graph HL7 results, see Track
Individual Pathology Results, in Maintenance & Reports.
Below the contact list is a display area. Clicking on any records in the Contact List will display that record's
contents in the display area. Although you can cut and paste, and even type in the display area, nothing you do
here is saved in the actual record.

Between the contact list and the display area and above prescriptions is a splitter
Dragging the splitter up or down will adjust the relative sizes of the contact list, display or prescription area.
When using the smaller clinical window (i.e. screen width <1280) the splitter in the Notes page remembers its
position.
Adding Current Problems/Past History

A Current Problem or Past History item can be added by clicking on the respective menu and selecting either:
a). 'Add to Menu' which will be used for common problems that are likely to be used for other patients, or
b). 'New' which adds the problem only to that patient.
The small Blue Plus next to Current Problems also allows you to add a New problem to the current patient.
To delete Current Problems/Past History items from the patients record, double click on the problem and use
the Delete button.
To delete problems from the list of Current Problems/Past History, select the relevant drop-down menu, hold
down the ALT key and highlight the item to delete. Let go of your mouse, let go of the ALT key.
7.1.1 Using the Display Area

Clicking on the Current Problem or Past History item displays the Notes field of the record, as well as all
consultation notes in which that problem has been set as one of the Presenting Problems.
Clicking on an allergy will display the reaction.
Right clicking on the Presenting Problem, Current Problem, Past History or Allergies entries will display a
shortcut popup window

Clicking on a prescription will display the MIMS Quarterly Information.
Drag and Drop Features

The Current Problem and Past History list can be:
1. Sorted by simply dragging and dropping each record into the position in which you want it to permanently
appear.
2. Dragged and dropped between each other, to convert a Current Problem into a Past History for example.
3. Dragged onto a prescription to set the reason for that medication.
4. Dragged onto a consultation record to set the Primary Presenting Problem. If there is already a primary
presenting problem, this becomes a secondary presenting problem.
7.1.2 Using the Contact List

Individual records can be displayed by clicking on the record in the Contact List. The up and down arrow keys
can be used to navigate from record to record.
The contact list can be sorted by Date, Title and Provider by clicking the appropriate header.
The contact list can also be sorted by Type by clicking the appropriate tab, i.e. Consults, Images,
Correspondence in, Correspondence Out, Procedures, Pathology, Documents, Workcover claims, Health
Assessments, Careplans, Antenatal and Tasks. The tabs displayed will depend on what Practice Type you have
set in File > Set Practice Type.
Double clicking on an item in the Contacts list will allow you to edit the entry by opening the appropriate window.
Right clicking on an entry will allow you to open and edit the contact, edit the name or delete.

Genie Manual Clinical: The Other Page
7.2 The Other Page

The Other page (or Checklists/Script Archive and Social pages) contains records of previous scripts printed for
the patient, previously performed checklists, tasks relating to the patient and any vaccinations/immunisations the
patient has had.
Checklists will display all checklists performed on the patient, which saves you from having to scroll through
consultation notes to find them. You can delete a checklist from the Clinical window by right clicking on the
required checklist, and selecting Delete Item from the drop down menu.
See the Checklists chapter for more information.
The Script Archive logs all previously printed scripts. The Info button will display all changes made to a selected
medication. See Prescribing for more information.
Life Events is an area where sensitive information about the patient can be added without typically being on
display while the patient is in consultation.
Vaccinations
Vaccinations will list all vaccinations given to the patient. More detailed information about the vaccine eg. batch
number etc, can be viewed by double clicking on the vaccination.
To delete a vaccination from the patients clinical record, right click on the required vaccination and select Delete

Item.
In order to add a vaccine to a patient, you must first populate a list of common vaccines using the Add to Menu...
option in the drop down list. If the vaccine is one that you would not regularly give, then select New... which will
only add it to that patient.
The Add to Consult Notes button makes an entry in the consultation record that the vaccination was given.
Setting Childhood Schedule

To set up the childhood schedule you must first have all childhood immunisations added to the vaccinations
menu, using the Add to menu.. option in the drop down list.
Click the Set Childhood Schedule button.
To add an immunisation to an age schedule drag and drop the required immunisation from the column on the
right over the top of the age on the left. To delete an immunisation added by mistake, double click on it on the

left.
When an age schedule is selected from the Vaccination drop down list, it will firstly prompt you to add a recall for
the next immunisastion due and will then place all immunisations set for that age group into the Vaccination
area. These can then be edited appropriately with a double click.
7.3 Consultation Notes

To open a new consultation note, you can either type Command or Ctrl N OR Tools > New Consultation OR
click the Add Consult (or Consults) button at the top of the clinical window.
Presenting Problems
Presenting Problems aid in searching and reporting consults, as well as providing you with headings for your
consults in the Contact List.
To enter the Presenting Problem/s, you can select the problem from the menu at the top left of the Consult
window.
Presenting Problems Menu

Genie Manual Clinical: Consultation Notes
This menu can contain up to five sections:
1. Add to Menu
New Problem
2. Current Problems
3. Past History
4. Previously used consultation reasons for any patient
5. Previously used consultation reasons for this patient (if it is not already listed at 1, 2, 3, or 4
above)
User added items can be deleted by holding down the ALT key, selecting the Presenting Problem drop-down list
and highlighting the problem to delete. Let go of your mouse, let go of the ALT key.
You can add multiple problems for each consultation.
If the problem you want is not in this menu, select Add to menu... and enter in the name of the problem.
If the problem is a rare or one-off problem select 'New Problem' which will add it only to that patient.
Enter the problem and click OK.

If you are using ICPC or ICD10 coding, a separate coding window will appear.
Select the appropriate item from the list, or just click OK to use what you have typed.
The Presenting Problems can be added to the Diagnosis field by double clicking on them.
The Presenting Problem can be deleted or added to the Current Problem list by right clicking on the problem.
A Presenting Problem can also be deleted using the small Garbage Can icon.
Adding Consultation Notes

To add consultation notes simply start typing in the History, Examination, Treatment/Plan and Diagnosis areas.
The consult is saved when the clinical record is saved, or when OK is clicked in the new consult window.
Checklists can aid in note taking, particularly for standard examinations and pre op checks. See the section on
Checklist.
Macros can also be used to aid in faster note taking i.e. text expansion from a typed shortcut, a la Spellcatcher
and As-U-Type. The macro feature is available in Letters, Consults, and certain fields in Pregnancies, IVF,
Checklists, Tasks, Email, and Procedures.
Macros are triggered by typing your shortcut followed by a Space or Carriage Return. Or by using the small drop
down arrows next to History, Examination, Treatment/Plan and Diagnosis to select the Macro you would like
inserted.
The Macros button is where you can set up your Macros. If you currently use Spellcatcher or As-U-Type you can
import your existing macros, by selecting Edit Macros and clicking on the Import button. This will give you
instructions on how to first export your existing macros from Spellcatcher and As-U-Type. You can then import
this file.
The Drawing Template button opens the Drawing Template Module. You can edit the templates using
the icons on the Tool bar down the left hand side of the template window.

If you wish to add your own images/templates, then you will need to copy these into C:\Genie\Drawing
Templates\ (PC's), or Applications:Genie:Drawing Templates: (Mac's).
You can access a previously saved drawing by opening the relevant consultation record, and clicking on the
Drawing Template button. Select 'open and edit a drawing attached to this consultation' and highlight the
required drawing from the presented list.
Additionally, you can add a new or delete an attached drawing for this consultation.
The Letter Dictated tickbox aids your typist and you in keeping track of dictated letters (See Today's
Consultations in The Patients Menu)
Consult notes can be edited directly within 24 hours or appended thereafter by double-clicking on the consult in

the All Contacts List of the general clinical window.
Measurements
BP/Weight radio button displays all previously recorded measurements.
The Pathology radio button will display previous pathology results that are imported into Genie in PIT format
(provided the Extract Path Results PIT Format is ticked in File > User Preferences) or HL7 format (provided
Track Individual Pathology Results is set up in Maintenance and Reports) or those manually entered into the
Measurements window.
VAs displays previous visual acuity records
To add a new Measurement record from within a consultation, you can either use the shortcut Ctrl N or click on
the Blue Plus sign.
A new Measurement record window will open, which has the field that you are clicking in already highlighted, see

below.
The Measurement will appear in the display area when the corresponding consultation record is displayed.
To delete a measurement record, highlight it and click the Garbage Can icon.
Some of these measurements can be graphed by clicking the Graph button.
Note: For patients over 20 years of age, their previous height is entered automatically the next time a
new measurement record is opened.
Keeping Separate Consultations

To add another consult when one has already been created for that day, simply open up another new consult
window (Tools > New Consult or Ctrl N).
If you don't wish to create a separate consultation for the same day, then just use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl Z
or Tools > Modify Today's Consultation, or the Edit Consult button, as this will open up the existing
consultation window. It will create a new consultation if one doesn't already exist.
Viewing Consultation Notes

Consultation notes can be viewed singly in the display area by clicking on the record, or several at a time by Shift
or Control clicking on the required consults.
They can also be viewed according to their ICPC code. If you are using ICPC coding a pop-up menu will appear
above the All Contact list. This codes display presenting problems by Chapter, allowing you to view all
Neurological type consultations for example.
Printing Consults
Once you have your required Consults or Pathology results highlighted and on display in the display area (by Ctrl
or Shift clicking the required consults), you can then print the display area by selecting File > Print or clicking the

small Printer icon.
Deleting a Consult
To delete a consult from the All Contacts List, highlight the required consult and then click on the Garbage Can
icon. Or you can right click and select Delete.
Note: Within 24 hours this will delete the consult altogether. After 24 hours the consult isn't deleted per
se, it is just hidden from the Contacts List.
Alt clicking on the Garbage Can icon will display the deleted consults in the Contacts List. Alternatively, you can
print a Consultation Summary, Tools > Consultation Summary, which gives you the option to Include Deleted
Consultations.
Checking Consults Have Been Created

You can check that you have made consultation notes for all appointments of a particular day by going to that
day in the appointment and selecting Appts > Check Missing Consults. This will check for a consultation
record for the date selected and for notes typed into the History field. You will need to have typed notes into the
History field for this feature to work.

Genie Manual Clinical: The Tools Menu
7.4 The Tools Menu

The options that are displayed in the Tools menu will depend on which Practice Type is set in File > Set
Practice Type.
Below are the options for General Practice which covers most options in the various Practice Types.
Interested Parties
Opens the list of all Interested Parties associated with this patient eg. referring doctor etc. This list can also be
accessed wherever you find this icon.
New Consultation
Opens a New Consultation window
Modify Today's Consultation

Allows you to edit the existing consultation for the current day. If there is no consultation for the day it will create
a new one.
Consultation Summary
Allows you to print out a summary of the patient's consultations.
Print Complete Record

Prints out the Patient's complete clinical record. You will first be prompted as to what components of the clinical

record you would like to print.
Quick History
Displays a list of all the item numbers which have been charged for this patient in the last 12 months.
Open Current Pregnancy

Will open or start a new pregnancy for this patient. Only available if patient is marked as female in their
demographics.
Add Task
Allows you to assign a task as a reminder to yourself or to another user about the current patient. This will be

listed in the Other or Checklists/Script Archive tab of the clinical record.
You can print out Tasks by selecting the Print button. (For more information on Tasks see the Reception
Module).
Add Procedure
Opens up a Procedure window. For more information see the Procedures chapter.
Add Pathology Result

Creates a Pathology Result.
Add Document
Opens up a document window which allows you to enter free text. This document can then be accessed via the
Documents Tab in the 'All Contacts List'.
Add Workcover Claim

Creates a Workcover Claim. Workcover certificates can be generated from within this window by clicking on the
Blue Plus sign. Alt-clicking on the Blue Plus will allow you to use a certificate from a different state, for those
practicing in border regions. Previously created Workcover Certificates will be stored in this window, and are
accessible by double clicking on the certificate details.
For more information on creating and invoicing Workcover claims, see Invoicing Workcover.
Lesions
Opens the Lesions module which allows for easier tracking of excisions of lesions and ordering/tracking of
histopathology.

GP Managment Plans
Opens up a GP Management Plan History where you can view past plans as well as create new ones.
To add a new Plan click the New button. This opens up a GPMP Template window. Select your template using
the Template drop down menu, many of which can be downloaded from the Genie Solutions FTP site.
Alternatively, you can create your own using the New Template option. The set up of these templates work in the
same way as Referral/Reply Letters (Patient Correspondence).
Add Care Plan - old method

Creates old style Care Plans which are then accessed via the Care Plans Tab in the All Contacts List.
These have now been replaced by GP Management Plans.
Add Health Assessment

Allows you to create Health Assessments, covering areas such as Allied Health, Nutrition and Mental
functioning. Health assessments can be saved and then accessed via the Health Assessments Tab in the All
Contacts List.
Add Centrelink Certificate

Allows you to add a Centrelink Certificate.
Estimate PEFR
Provides an estimate of the Peak Flow Rate based on height.

INR Control
Allows you to keep track and control patient's INR doses.
Thyroid Control
Allows you to keep track and control patients with thyroid conditions.
Percentile Charts
Displays Paediatric Percentile Charts.
Alcohol Audit
Opens an Alcohol Disorders Identification Test. The results of the test are placed in the Treatment/Plan section
of the consult window. This occurs even if you have not yet created a new consultation record. This also applies
for the Mini Mental State Examination and the Aged Depression Scale
Mini Mental State

Opens a Mini Mental State Examination. The outcome of this examination will be placed in the Treatment/Plan
section of the consultation record.
Aged Depression
Opens a Geriatric Depression Scale questionnaire.
PASI Scores
Opens Face, Hand & Foot/Whole Body PASI Scoring system for psoriasis.
DAS Scores
Opens DAS Scoring system for rheumatology.

Genie Manual Clinical: Specifying a Fee to Charge
7.5 Specifying a Fee to Charge

When saving out of the clinical file, you will be prompted to enter in an item to charge.
Note: You will only be prompted for Items to Charge if you enter the clinical file via the Appointments
Page and the patient has not yet been invoiced for that day (indicated by no dollar value in the Invoice
column of the Appointments screen). You must also have a Default Item entered into your User
Preferences.
Items displayed in the list are those that have been specified as 'Display in List of Commonly Used Items' via
Open > Billing Items. If you wish to add more items to this list, click on the Add Items to List button. The
items must be a valid MBS items or be added to Open > Billing Items before they can be added to this list. To
remove items from this list, click the Remove Item button.
The item number entered in your User Preferences as your Default item will be the one that will be ticked by
default. If you do not wish to charge this item, simply untick it and tick another. If you wish to charge multiples of
the same item then click into the number box to the right of the item. To remove multiples right-click or Alt-click
in the number box.
If bulk billing a pensioner or child under 16, the incentive item (ie.10990/10991) will be ticked automatically,
provided you fulfill all the criteria listed:
1. It is in the list of items
2. Your Practice Type is General Practice
3. Your default item number in your User Preferences is either 3, 23, 36, or 44.
4. The patient's Account Type in their demographics is 'Bulk Bill'
5. The patient is either under 16 or has a HCC or Pension number entered into their demographics.
If you wish to relay a message to reception, use the Message to Reception area. Any text entered in this area
will appear beside the patient's name in the appointment book, bound by [square] brackets.
If you wish to type or continue typing your clinical notes after the patient has left the consult, you can still specify
the item to charge by saving out of the file, and enter straight back in (e.g. using Ctrl K) to type your notes.

Genie Manual Clinical: Prescribing
7.6 Prescribing
MIMS Subscription
Genie uses prescribing data supplied by MIMS Australia. This is supplied on the quarterly update CD to those
users with a current MIMS subscription for electronic prescribing data.
To subscribe to MIMS:
Visit their website at http://www.mims.com.au, or
Phone MIMS on 1800 800 629, or
Print, complete and send the subscription form supplied with Genie. This is in the Subscriptions folder, inside the
Genie folder on your hard drive.
MIMS Prescribing Data

The MIMS Prescribing data is the equivalent of the MIMS quarterly book and is supplied as raw data which is
imported into your Genie database at each official Genie update. It is initially installed within a folder called
“MIMS Data” within your Genie folder.
When Genie is launched it searches for this folder. If it finds it, Genie offers to import the new information. Once
it has been imported, Genie deletes the contents of the MIMS Data folder, so that you aren’t asked to update at
each startup.
If your MIMS subscription is more than 4 months out of date you will be presented with the following window. If
you click the Delete MIMS button the MIMS database will be deleted, resulting in you no longer having access to
this information.
Clicking once on a prescription in the Prescription list will display the MIMS Quarterly in the display area (only if
your screen supports the large clinical window).
MIMS Annual
The MIMS Annual is the equivalent of the large “Blue Book”. This is also supplied on each quarterly update CD.
The MIMS Annual can be accessed directly from within Genie. It is generated from XML files held in the MIMS
Annual folder in the Genie folder.
Double clicking on a prescription in the Prescription List will open the MIMS Annual in a web browser.
7.6.1 Prescription Display

The column order in the prescription list can be changed by clicking on the title of the column and dragging to
required position. Column width can be adjusted by positioning the cursor on the divider between column titles
until a double arrow appears then clicking and dragging the column to the desired width.
A single click on a drug will display the MIMS Quarterly information in the display area, provided you have the

large patient window (see Clinical).
A double click on a drug will open the MIMS annual entry in a web browser window which includes drug images.
To delete a prescription, click on it to highlight it, and then click on the Delete button (Garbage Can icon).
You can delete multiple prescriptions at once by shift-clicking or Command-clicking and highlighting the required
prescriptions. When deleting a medication, you are asked for a reason but only if the medication is not "once-
only" (i.e. assigned a category of 'S'), and it has previously been printed, otherwise it will be deleted immediately.
You can also choose to create a class allergy to this medication when deleting the prescription. This reason can
be accessed through the Info icon and the MIMS Quarterly display. If you re-prescribe a previously deleted
medication, the old prescribing history, as well as the reason for stopping the medication will be displayed again.
To modify the reason, dose, frequency, instructions or repeats slow double-click in the area you want to modify.
These changes are shown in the display area along with the MIMS Quarterly when a medication is clicked as
well as in the Info icon, which can also be found in the Script Archive in the Other tab. However, these changes
are not retrospective. Changes are only tracked for drugs linked to MIMS, and which are not marked as "once-
only" (i.e. category S). Prescribing changes can be modified by clicking on the Info button, or right clicking on

the medication
Right clicking on the Category, Medication and Reason columns will display contextual popups depending on
which column you right-click.
7.6.2 Button Description
The QuickScript button allows you to quickly prescribe a medication for a patient. To add
to this list see Adding to QuickScript in Adding a New Prescription.
The Add button is used to add new prescriptions to the patient’s current medication list. ALT-clicking on
this button allows you to quickly add the actual drugs the patient is taking without having to specify strengths and
dosages. This is useful for specialists who simply want to record the patient’s medications without intending to
actually print a prescription for them.
The Information button, tracks any changes made to the prescription dose, reason etc. It shows the Type
of Change, Dose and Reason. You can insert a reason by right clicking in the reason column for a list of
common reasons or slow double clicking to add your own. Alt clicking on the Information button displays the
Progressive Medication History information.
The Print button will print the selected medications i.e. the medications which have a tick in the first
column.
ALT-clicking on this button will select or deselect all the prescriptions.

CTRL-ALT clicking allows you to backdate a prescription.
The Batch button batches the selected prescriptions for later printing. GPs might use this when printing
nursing home prescriptions. You would batch each patient’s prescription rather than printing them immediately.
Subsequently, select Print Batch from the Patients menu and all the prescriptions will be printed at once (Open >
Patients, Patients > Print Batch).
Note: Authority prescriptions cannot be batched.
The Medication Review allows you to perform a review of all the patient’s current medications, which can
subsequently be printed or saved as a consultation record.
The CMI button will display Consumer Medicine Information for the selected medication, if it is available.
CMI information is supplied by MIMS and is not currently available for all medications.
On a network, this information is stored on the server in a folder called CMI in the Genie folder. The files are
stored as Acrobat pdf’s. When you select a particular item, the pdf is automatically copied from the CMI folder on
the server to a CMI folder on the client machine so that the next time you view that particular CMI it is opened
directly from the client machine.
Note: On Windows, you must have Acrobat Reader installed on your machine to open, view or print
these files.
The Medication Sheet button allows you to print a six week nursing home sheet, a 2 week medication

sheet for hospitals both with or without dates entered. Additionally you can print prescription labels for the
Compact Business System.
Provided you have NPS RADAR Alert ticked in your User Preferences, this button will become active
when an NPS RADAR review is available for the drug you have selected, as well as a RADAR summary popping
up the first three times you prescribe a medication with a current NPS RADAR review. The NPS RADAR is
updated either through the Special menu or through the Genie CD updates.
The Delete button will delete the selected medications. If only one medication is selected there is no
warning. If more than one medication is selected you will be asked to confirm the delete command.
The Reset button can be used to restore the default prescription display.
Ticking the Reg 24 checkbox will print the Regulation 24 request on prescriptions i.e.“Regulation 24. Please
dispense all repeats.”
The TPG button will display a list of generic equivalents for the selected medication, allowing you to change the
current medication to the equivalent without having to delete and re-prescribe it.
The Strength button allows you to change the strength of the selected prescription without having to delete and
re-prescribe it.
Checking the Certificate checkbox will print a sick certificate in the lower right area of the prescription. Checking
the Drug List checkbox prints the list of current medications in the lower left area of the prescription.
Note: If you want to print a certificate without actually printing a prescription, you can create a new drug
called “Certificate” and enter it in your QuickScript menu. Then when you need a certificate “Prescribe”
the drug called certificate and print! Alternatively, create your own sick certificate using a merged letter
template.

7.6.3 Adding a New Prescription

Click on the Add button (Blue Plus icon) to open the new prescription window. Prescriptions can also be added
from within the Consult Window using the Add Script button.
Genie begins searching the MIMS database once the third letter has been typed. You can narrow the selection
by continuing to type more of the drug name.
To prescribe one of the displayed drugs, use the Up and Down arrow keys to highlight the desired drug and then
press the ENTER key, click the Select button or double-click on the desired drug.
Dose, Frequency, Instructions
Once the medication has been accepted you can specify the dose in the dose combo box, by either:
1. clicking the drop down arrow and selecting the appropriate dose from the list
2. by typing the first few letters/numbers of the dose and Genie will type ahead any matching doses in the list
3. by typing a dose not in the list in full and Genie will give you the option to save this dose to your list
Press the TAB key to move to the Frequency field. The cursor will move to the Frequency combo box. This
works in exactly the same way as the Dose window.
For many medications the Instructions field may be filled automatically by the MIMS Quarterly. To enter your own
instructions, press TAB to move to the Instructions combo box which works the same way as the dose and
frequency combo boxes.

Once you have been through these steps the prescription window should look like this:
The Repeats filed automatically defaults to the maximum number permissible. To change this to Nil repeats
enter "0" or "n" in this field.
The 'Category' box allows you to assign a category to the prescription. Prescriptions marked as Single Use (S)
are automatically deleted from the patient's record once they are more than 30 days old. Deletion occurs during
the Cleanup process when the last client machine quits Genie. Additionally, prescriptions marked as Single Use
(S) and Hide (H) will not be referenced using 'Current Medications' for Referral/Reply Letters. If you wish to have
such medications referenced, then you will need to change this reference field to 'Prescription History' (see
Referral/Reply Letters (Patient Correspondence) for more information).
Antibiotics, vaccinations, and cough mixture, etc are automatically marked as a Category S medication.
At this stage you can click the Save button, or press ENTER to save the prescription to the patient's record.
However there are several other actions you may also take using the buttons in this screen.
The Memorise Dose checkbox will "remember" the dose, frequency and instructions for the selected medication,
so that the next time you prescribe it in this window, the does, frequency and instructions fields will be filled
automatically.
The MIMS 1/4 button will display the MIMS Quarterly information for the selected medications.
The MIMS Annual button will open the MIMS Annual application. Genie expects to find the MIMS Annual within
the Genie folder on the client machine.
Add to QuickScript
The QuickScript menu is a place to store your most commonly prescribed medications, allowing you to quickly
prescribe any item in the menu for any patient.
If you want to add the selected medication, as well as the associated dose, frequency, and instructions,
information to your QuickScript menu, click on the Add to QuickScript button.

When a QuickScript is added, information regarding the category and reason for the medication is saved.
Although Genie places no limitations on the number of items you can have in this menu, some versions of
Windows will not display the menu if you have more than 32 or 64, depending on your screen resolution. If you
exceed the number of items capable of being displayed, then nothing happens when you click on the menu.
To get around this problem, there is actually an invisible button between the Quickscript menu and the Add
button.
If you hold down the ALT key whilst clicking in this area, the last item in the QuickScript menu will be deleted,
allowing you to once again view and edit the menu.
In order to add any further items to the QuickScript menu, you would either have to delete some of the existing
items, or increase the screen resolution in your Display Control Panel.
Drug Interactions
Once a drug is selected to be prescribed, Genie performs an allergy interaction and pregnancy check. If an
interaction with another drug in the patient's current medication list is found, the following window will be

displayed.
This window contains an explanation of the interaction and indicates the severity. You can still prescribe the
medication by clicking the Prescribe button. The Interaction Level can be set in your User Preferences. It ranges
from 0 to 5, where 0 has no interaction checking at all, and a level of 5 has all possible and potential interactions.
A level of 3 is usually the best in practice. This covers Low, Moderate and High degrees of interaction, but does
not include Unestablished interactions or those of No Clinical Significance. You can change the level of
interaction checking by clicking the Modify button at the top right of the new prescription window. This will open
your User Preferences (see User Preferences for more information). Click on the Clinical tab and set the level in
here.
If the patient has been marked as allergic to the selected drug, or it's class, an allergy warning will be displayed.
As with interaction warnings, you still have the ability to over-ride the warning by clicking on the Prescribe
button.
For drugs dangerous to pregnant women the following warning will appear
Add New Drug

The Add New Drug button allows you to add new drugs to the Drug Index. These can either be for increase
quantities of an existing drug, or a totally new entry For example, if the patient is currently on Accupril20mg daily
but needs to increase to 20mgbd, then you will probably want to add an entry for a quantity of 60 with 5 repeats
to be prescribed as an Authority item. To do this, find and highlight the current entry for Accupril20mg.

Click on the Add New Drug button. The following window will appear:
Click on the Copy button.
Enter the quantity required
Enter the number of repeats required.
Click on the Authority button.
The new drug entry will appear in the prescriptions window, allowing you to select it for prescribing.
To add a totally new drug entry, click on the Add New Drug button. When asked if you want to create a New

Drug or Copy an existing one, click the New button. The following window will appear:
Enter the details of the drug and click the Save button. You will then be able to search on this information in the
new prescriptions window.
User Added Drugs

The User Added Drugs button will display a list of drug entries added by users i.e. not supplied by MIMS
7.6.4 Searching Prescriptions

Genie allows you to quickly search the database for:
· All patients taking a particular drug.

· All patients on two or more particular drugs.
· All patients on more than any particular number of drugs i.e. Polypharmacy.
For example, to search for all patients taking an ACE-Inhibitor:
Open the Patients list by selecting Open > Patients.
Click on the Rx button

to open the following window
This window allows you to search by Brand Name, Generic Name or Class. To search for ACE-Inhibitors, click
on the Class radio button and the following window will appear
Enter the Brand Name of any ACE-Inhibitor and click OK. A window will appear asking you to select the specific
class that you wish to search on
This will enter the Class to search for in the previous window as shown below:
Click OK, and all patients on an ACE-Inhibitor will be displayed.

Note: To display all patients NOT on an ACE-Inhibitor, tick the Find Exceptions checkbox.
You may then want to find all patients who are on the ACE-Inhibitor and Warfarin. To do this, click on the Rx
button again. This time, click on the Generic radio button and enter Warfarin in the search field.
Tick the Search Current Selection Only checkbox. This tells Genie to only search amongst the list of patients
already displayed.
You can use this function in combination with other searches. For example you may want to find all diabetics
who are NOT taking an ACE-Inhibitor. To do this you would first search for diabetics to display them in the
patient list. Then do the ACE-Inhibitor search, ticking both the Search Current Selection Only and Find
Exceptions checkbox.
You can also limit the search only to those prescriptions which have been printed on or after a particular date.
Polypharmacy
In this same window you can search for patients taking more than x number of prescriptions. To do this, click on
the Polypharmacy tab and enter the number of prescriptions in the search field.
Note: You can also limit this search to just the current selection patients.
7.6.5 Printing a Prescription to Multiple Patients

Print One Presciption is commonly used to print the same prescription to multiple patients. For example, if you
want to send a prescription for Fluvax to all your over-65 patients, open the Patient list (Open > Patients) then
search on the patient's Age field to display them in the list (for more information on Searches, see Queries &
Searches).
Note: The prescription you are planning to print must be in your QuickScript menu. If it isn't already, you
should do that now (See Add to QuickScript in Adding a New Prescription).

Then select Patients > Print One Prescription
A window will appear asking you to confirm if you wish to create a prescription of the selected patients.
Click OK.
Your QuickScript list will be displayed.
Select the prescription you want and click OK.
The prescriptions will be created. Before they print, you will be asked to confirm once more. Make sure you have

enough prescription paper loaded in your printer before clicking Print.
Note: You may want to also send a covering letter to these patients along with the prescription. In this
case you can create a merged letter template for the currently displayed list of patients. See the Merged
Letter Templates chapter for more information.
7.7 Recalls
Recalls can be added from:
· the Clinical window by clicking on the Recalls icon
· the Patients list by selecting Patients > Add a Recall.
· the Appointment book by selecting Appts > Add a Recall.
· the Pathology Action List window when linking pathology results
When adding a recall from the Pathology & Radiology list or from within the Clinical window, a list of recalls
already in existence for that patient will be displayed.

Genie Manual Clinical: Recalls
Click on the Add button as shown above to create the new recall record which will open the window below.
In this window you can enter the reason for the recall by either typing it into the Reason field, or by selecting it
from the popup menu to the left of this field. Enter the Due Date by specifying the number of months ahead, or
by entering the actual date.
If this is going to be a recurring recall, select the Make This a Recurring Recall checkbox, and enter the
frequency in months. This will reassign the recall to its next due date after it is printed, so you do not have to
keep adding the patient to the recall list.
Click the Save button to save the record.
Flagging of Patient Record

When recalls are printed (see Printing Recalls in Reception Module), the patient record is automatically flagged.
If the recall is currently overdue, then the Flagged Date is set to one week ahead. Otherwise, the Flagged Date
is set to one week after the recall is actually due.
When a User enters a flagged patient file they will be notified that it is flagged and be provided with the flag
reason. After the flagged date has passed, the user that the recall is assigned to will be notified when logging
into Genie. Flagged patients can be viewed at anytime through Patients > Flagged Patients in the Patients List
(Open > Patients).
7.8 Disease Register

The Disease Register can display those active patients who have been marked as having diabetes, or who have
CHD. To display CHD patients automatically, requires that the relevant Current Problems and Past History have
been coded with ICPC2 Plus.
You can also display the disease register for any patient records displayed in the Patients List. So even if you
aren’t using ICPC, you can still do a text search to find those patients with “angina” for example.
Patients can be individually marked as diabetic by clicking the Diabetic checkbox in either the Demographic
window, or the clinical window.

Genie Manual Clinical: Disease Register
Patients are automatically marked as diabetic when a new Current Problem is added from the Current Problems
menu, which meets the criteria below:
1. Where the problem contains the text “diabetes” or “insulin”

2. Where the problem starts with “Type 1” or “Type 2”
3. Where the problem is equal to “NIDDM”, “N.I.D.D.M.”, “IDDM”, and “I.D.D.M.
4. Where the ICPC Code equals “T89” or “T90”
5. Where the ICD10 Code begins with “E10” or “E11”
Note: The patient is NOT automatically marked when you right-click on a Presenting Problem and
choose Add to Current Problems. Also note that if you subsequently delete the Current Problem, the
patient is not automatically “unmarked”. This needs to be done manually.
It is possible that non-diabetic patients might be marked e.g. If they have a Current Problem of “Gestational
diabetes”, or even “No history of diabetes”. It is therefore the practice’s responsibility to ensure that all diabetic
patients have been marked correctly.
When updating to Genie v7.2.8, Genie will have tried to automatically mark your diabetic patients by searching
for Current Problems matching the criteria above. This is a rather limited search, particularly if you are not using
ICPC or ICD10 codes. Therefore, there is no guarantee that all your diabetic patients will have been correctly
identified during the update.
Disclaimer: Genie Solutions will accept no responsibility for any loss of income, or any law suits,
actions, proceedings, liabilities, claims, damages and the like arising directly or indirectly from this
attempt to automatically identify your diabetic patients.
Opening the Register

The Register is opened by selecting Patients > Disease Register in the Patients List. The window below will
appear:
Option 1: Diabetes

Genie will display all patients who have been marked as Diabetic, but who have not been marked as Inactive.
There is no time limit on when they were last seen. Therefore the number of patients found may be higher than
those found in the NPCC Report.
Option 2: CHD
If you are not using ICPC coding, the CHD option will be disabled. Otherwise, Genie searches the Past History
and Current Problem tables for relevant ICPC codes. These are the same codes as used in the NPCC Report,
but again there is no time limit on when they were last seen. Therefore the number of patients found may be
higher than those found in the NPCC Report.
Option 3: Use Current Selection

This option will display a register for all patients currently on display in the Patients List, whether they are Inactive
or not.
If there are no patients currently on display, this option will be disabled.
Check Hypoglycaemics: If this checkbox is ticked, Genie will check each patient to see if they are taking
insulin, a sulfonylurea, metformin and a Thiazolidinedione. This is ticked by default when Option 1 is selected.
Unticking it for Option 2 and 3 may allow the register to gather information faster.
Using the Register

As the register window opens, Genie searches for other information about each patient as detailed below:
Last Visit: This is the last invoice date, and therefore not necessarily the last consultation note.
Next Appointment: Displays the date of the next appointment after the current date.
Last 721/723/725/727: Displays the date that these items were last billed. For tracking any other items
please refer to the Item Register
Provider: If the Usual Provider field in the Demographics window has an entry, then Genie will
insert this. Otherwise it displays the last provider who billed the patient with an
asterisk in front of their name eg *Dr Joe Smith.
Right clicking on this allows you to set or modify the Usual Provider field (see below).
SIP Trigger: Displays the last date a SIP item was billed. The items searched for are 2517, 2518,
2521, 2522, 2525, 2526, 2620, 2622, 2624, 2631, 2633 and 2635.
Eye Exam: This searches consultation records where at least one of the Presenting Problems
starts with “Referral to Op”, or contains “eye exam”. This is to cover the terms
“Referral to Ophthalmologist” (This is ICPC code F67) and “Referral to Optometrist".
It is suggested that you add one or all of these terms to the Presenting Problems
drop down menu to avoid having to get the spelling right each time.
Foot Exam: This searches consultation records where at least one of the Presenting Problems
begins with “Referral to Podiatrist”, if you are using ICPC, the full term is actually
“Referral to Podiatrist/Chiropodist", or contains the text “foot exam” or “feet exam”.
Again, it is suggested that you add one or all of these terms to the Presenting
Problems drop down menu.
Statin: Displays “Yes” if the patient has a statin in their current medication list. The date it
was last printed is irrelevant i.e. even if it hasn’t been printed in the past 12 months,
Genie will still report a “Yes”, because the patient may have got the script elsewhere.
ACE-I: Displays “Yes” if the patient has an ACE_Inhibitor in their current medication list.
Again, the print date is irrelevant.
Insulin/Sulfonyl/ Displays "Yes" if the patient has one of these drugs or classes in their current
Metform/Thiaz medication list. These columns are only displayed if the Check hypoglycaemics
checkbox was ticked in the initial choice window.
Last BP: Displays the patient’s last recorded blood pressure from the Measurements table in
the Consult window.
BP Date: The date of the last recorded BP reading.

BMI: Last recorded BMI in the Measurements table in the Consult window.
Date: Date of the last recorded BMI.
W-Hip%: Last recorded waist-hip ratio in the Measurements table in the Consult window.
HbA1C: Last recorded HbA1C as recorded in the Measurements table. If this is not being
automatically extracted from downloaded pathology results, and you are not entering
it manually, then this may be incorrect.
Date: Date of last record HbA1C.
Creat: Last recorded Creatinine result.
GFR: The GFR recorded on the same date as the latest Creatinine. If the patient’s height
has not been entered, then the GFR will not have been calculated.
Date: Date of last recorded Creatinine.
Microalb: Last recorded microalbuminuria.
Date: Date of last recorded microalbuminuria. This is not automatically extracted from
downloaded results, so you would have to be entering this manually.
Chol/Trigs/LDL/HDL: Last recorded lipid measurements. If these are not being automatically extracted
from downloaded pathology results, and you are not entering them manually, then
these may be incorrect.
Date: Date of last lipids.
Double-clicking on a line will open that patient’s clinical record.
Right-clicking on the Provider’s name allows you to set or modify the Usual Provider field.
Right-clicking on a measurement allows you to graph or edit the measurement record.
The display can be sorted by clicking on any of the headers. In a multi-doctor practice, if you only want to view
your own patients, click on the Provider header to sort by Provider. You may then highlight your patients by
clicking on the first of your patients and Shift-clicking on the last. Click on the Use Selected button to remove all
the non-highlighted patients.
To display all patients again, click on the Show All button.
To create a Task e.g. to recall the patient, click on the patient and then click the Create a Task button.

To create an actual recall, click the Recall button.
To mark a patient as Inactive so that they stop showing up on the register, click the Make Inactive button.
To remove a patient from the diabetic register, click the Remove from Diabetic Register button. This unticks
the Diabetic checkbox in the patients demographics and clinical window.
Note: It is not possible to print the register directly. However, the data can be exported to an Excel
spreadsheet and printed from there.
7.9 Diabetes Care Status (EPC Summary)

The Diabetes Care Status is designed to make handling and keeping up with a cycle of care for diabetics easier,
so that the relevant SIP item number can be charged. It is accessed through Open > Patients, Patients >
Diabetes Care Status.
This will display all your diabetic patients (marked as such through their demographics or clinical window) with
age, sex, last SIP trigger, next appt, last visit etc.
Initially the Status column will read "No Cycle Recorded". Clicking on the Update All button, will loop through
each patient looking for the relevant activities. To update just one patient, click their name and click the EPC
Summary button. The EPC Summary can also be accessed through the EPC Summary button in a patients
clinical record or right clicking on their name in the Appointments Book and selecting EPC Summary.
If there has been a previous SIP item number charged, then Genie will set the Cycle Start date to one day after
that date. Otherwise the Cycle Start will be 1 year prior to the current date. To change the Cycle Start Date, you
need to open the EPC Summary window, and change the date at the bottom of the screen.
Note: When you click the EPC Summary button in the clinical window, the information is displayed in
the usual display area, not in a separate window, so you can't change the start date here. You would
have to do it through the Appointments book (R-click) or through the actual Diabetes Care Status list
EPC Summary button.
Depending on the Cycle Start Date, Genie will assign a Status of:
Bad Cycle: where a 6 monthly check hasn't been done within 6 months of the start date. In this case you
probably need to enter a different start date, or complete your records as below.
On Track: if the 6 monthly activities were completed, but there are still activities to complete before the 12
months is up.
On Track- LESS THAN A MONTH LEFT TO COMPLETE: as above, but time is running out.
On Track- OVERDUE: if you ignored the previous warning
Activities Complete: if everything has been done but it's not yet 12 months since the last SIP was billed.
Ready to Invoice: if all activities are complete and it's been at least 12 months since the last cycle.
How the EPC Summary works:

Genie Manual Clinical: Diabetes Care Status (EPC Summary)
The EPC Summary will display the dates of any Health Assessments, GP Management Plans and/or Mental
Health Reviews based on when the relevant items were last invoiced.
Eye Examinations: need to be recorded as a Presenting Problem in a consultation record. Genie looks for either
"Referral to op@", or "@eye exam@"
Foot Examinations: again recorded as a Presenting Problem, with either "Referral to podiatrist@", "@foot
exam@", or "@feet exam@".
(where @ is a wild card character/s)
The Measurements i.e. BP, BMI, Chol, Trigs, HDL, Microalbuminuria are pulled from the Measurements table in
the consult window.
7.10 Checklists
Checklists within Genie are a method for creating your own unique forms for data collection. They can be used
to quickly and easily collect consultation notes, physical exams, pre-operative checks, and operation reports.
They can be created from 3 different places:

1. The Other or Checklists/Script Archive tab in the clinical record.
2. The New Consult window in the clinical record.
3. From within a Procedure record.
7.10.1 Creating a Checklist

To create a checklist:
1. In the Other or Checklists/Script Archive tab in the clinical record, click on the Blue Plus icon.
This displays a list of available checklist templates:

Genie Manual Clinical: Checklists
2. Click on the Add button to create a new checklist template. Enter a name for the checklist, then click OK.
Note: The name of the checklist cannot contain unusual characters, i.e. ?,/,\, <,>.)
3. The new template will be added to the list and should be automatically selected.
4. Click the Select button to open the new, blank checklist.
5. The left-hand bank of buttons allow you to select the type of field you want to add to the checklist. In order
from the left they are:
a) Text (up to 80 characters) - 20 fields available per checklist
b) Number - 20 fields available per checklist
c) Checkbox -10 available per checklist
d) Radio Buttons -10 available per checklist
e) Date - 3 available per checklist
f) Picture - 2 available per checklist
g) Large Text (32000 characters) - 2 available per checklist
h) Break Headers - 4 available. These allow entry of any text. They are usually used for headings such as
“Findings”, “Technique”, “Postop Orders” etc.
Note: Text fields cannot contain unusual characters, i.e. ? / \ < > , . @ ( )
To add a field, click on the field required, then click the Blue Plus sign.

e.g. To add a text field, click on the Text button, then click the Add button (blue plus sign). You will see that a
text field is added to the form. On the right of this field is a popup menu which allows you to add any number of
items for faster data entry into the field.
Click on the Field label Text Field 1, and enter the label you would like displayed. For example if you are creating
a template for taking a headache history, the first label might be “Frequency”. The popup menu would contain
daily, weekly, monthly, all the time, etc.
Radio buttons can also be formatted. The default is “Yes” and “No”, but this can be changed by clicking on the
Format button.
Locking a Checklist
To the right of the Print button is a button which signifies if the checklist is locked or not.
You would normally only lock a checklist if you wanted it to become a medico-legally valid record eg.an operation
report. Once a checklist has been locked it can no longer be edited, although it can still be deleted.
Note: The original template can be changed. It is only the checklist for their particular patient that is
locked.
Uploading a Checklist Template

Once you have created a template you can upload it to the Genie Solutions FTP site so that other Genie users
may download and use your template themselves. You can upload a Checklist template by clicking on the
Upload Template button.
Conversely, you can download templates created by other Genie users. You can do this by selecting Get
Checklists from the Special menu i.e. Special > Get Checklists.
This will take you the the FTP site where checklists are grouped under Specialties. Just double-click on the one
you want and it will be downloaded directly into your data file for immediate use.
Note: You shouldn’t have a checklist open when you do this.
7.10.2 Linking a Checklist to a Procedure

The Link to Procedure button allows you to link the checklist to a specific Procedure from this patient's clinical
record.
Once a checklist has been linked to a Procedure it can be accessed from the Pre-Op tab of that Procedure

record.
It also prints as an Operation Report. It can be unlinked by holding down the Alt key whilst clicking the Link
button. If the checklist is created from within the procedure record, then it is automatically linked.
7.10.3 Using Checklists within a Consultation

If you add a checklist from the Consultation page (i.e. Ctrl N or Tools > New Consultation) some extra buttons
are displayed.
On the left there is a radio button which allows you to specify where you would like the notes collected in the
checklist to be deposited .i.e. in the History, Examination or Treatment notes sections.
Note: Clicking on the 'Save Only to Consultation Notes' button will transfer the notes in the checklist to
the appropriate section of your consultation notes, but the actual checklist itself is not saved. This is to
avoid unnecessary duplication of data. If you do want to keep the checklist as well as the consultation
notes, then you should click the 'Save' button instead.
7.11 Pathology and Radiology
Set Up
You will need to contact your Pathology and Radiology providers to setup their company specific software and to
supply you with their computerised request forms.
The download software should ideally be installed on a client machine. However if this is not feasible, it can be
installed on the server.
The directory into which downloaded results should be deposited is the "LabRslts" folder within the Genie folder.
On Windows the pathway will usually be: C:\Genie\LabRslts\
On Macintosh the pathway will usually be:/Applications/Genie/LabRslts/

Genie Manual Clinical: Pathology and Radiology
7.11.1 Ordering Pathology
To order pathology click the Pathology icon in the patient's clinical file. The following window will open:
Select the Pathology laboratory you wish to send the patient to using the Laboratory drop down list at the top of
the window. Pathology laboratories can be added by selecting New Provider... from this list. You can set the
default provider i.e. the company you refer to most by selecting Set Default... and double clicking the laboratory
you require.
Doctor Code: is set by the laboratory and only needs to be entered once and Genie will remember it for that
company.
Note: Once you have added the Pathology company, you cannot change the details associated with it,
ie. laboratory, address and telephone. If these details change, delete the provider from the list (ALT +
Click on the entry to be deleted) and then re-add the Pathology Company with the new details.
To order a test from the list of tests at left either scroll through and find the test you need or type the test into the
blank box at the top of the list to find it. Double click the required test or use the green arrow or drag and drop
the test into the request box under the Sets drop down list.
If the test is not in the list at left you can add it with the Blue Plus button. Tests that you may never use can be
deleted altogether by highlighting the test and clicking the Garbage Can button at the top of the list.
If you have added a test to the list of requested tests by mistake, highlight the test and click the Garbage Can
button next to the Sets drop down list.
A reason for the test can be added via the Reason drop down menu. Alternatively, you can use the Procedure
Info button to automatically insert the name and date of the patient's last Procedure into the Reason field.
Copies will automatically be sent to the referring doctor if Copy Results to Referrer is ticked in your User
Preferences (File > User Preferences). Otherwise, copies can be sent to any doctor/s in your Address Book by
clicking the Copies to... button.
If your pathology stationary has labels on it, tick the Print Labels tickbox which will format the request to print the
patient information on these labels.
Reprinting Request Forms

Request forms can be reprinted through Open > Investigations Audit. Find the request that needs to be
reprinted, double click to open the request window and click the Reprint button at the bottom of this window.

Creating Pathology Sets

For commonly ordered sets of tests you can create a Pathology Set so you will only need to select the Set from
the Sets drop down list and it will slot in the appropriate tests you have set up. There are quite a few default Sets
already set up in the drop down list which can be deleted or modified as appropriate.
To create a set, drag all required tests for the set into the request box. Select Save Set... from the Sets drop
down list and give the Set a name as prompted.
Pathology Templates
If a pathology template needs to be moved in any direction as a whole, use the green/blue arrows at top right.
To adjust individual field in a pathology template click the Edit Templates drop down menu and select the
template to edit (usually Standard Preprinted).
Fields can be moved by clicking and dragging them to the desired position and resized by dragging the blue dots
accordingly.
To remove a field from a template, click and drag it off the printable area.
To edit the Text Properties in a field, double click and a Properties list will appear with options to adjust the Style

and Size etc. of the text.
Be sure to Save the Template before closing using the Save button.
7.11.2 Ordering Radiology
To order radiology, click the Radiology button in the patient's clinical file. This will open the window below:
Select the Radiology company you wish to send the patient to using the drop down list under Requested By: at
the top of the window. Radiology companies can be added by selecting New Provider... from this list. You can
set the default provider i.e. the company you refer to most by selecting Set Default... and double clicking the
laboratory you require.
Note: Once you have added the Radiology company, you cannot change the details associated with it,
ie. Company name, address and Radiologist. If these details change, delete the provider from the list
(ALT + Click on the entry to be deleted) and then re-add the Radiology company with the new details.
To order a test from the list of tests at left either scroll through and find the test you need or type the test into the
blank box at the top of the list to find it. You can double click the required test which will move it into the request
box in the middle of the window or you can drag and drop the test into the request box.
Double click (or drag and drop) the region required from the list at right, as above, which will place it in the
request box after the test ordered. You can also type additional information into the request box eg. left or right,

by simply clicking into the box and typing what is required.
If the test or region is not in the list you can add it with the Blue Plus button. Tests or regions that you may never
use can be deleted altogether by highlighting the test or region and clicking the Garbage Can button at the top
of the list.
If you have added a test/region to the request box by mistake, simply highlight and press the delete key on your
keyboard. The Procedure Info and Workcover Info buttons allow you to add information from either or both of
these records into the Reason box.
Copies will automatically be sent to the referring doctor if Copy Results to Referrer is ticked in your User
Preferences (File > User Preferences). Otherwise, copies can be sent to any doctor/s in your Address Book by
clicking the Copies to... button.
Reprinting Request Forms

Request forms can be reprinted through Open > Investigations Audit. Find the request that needs to be
reprinted, double click to open the request window and click the Reprint button at the bottom of this window.
Radiology Templates
Unfortunately, Radiology companies, unlike Pathology companies, do not have a standard pre-printed form
(except in VIC and SA) so the template needs to be set up for your common providers. This can be done using
the Custom 1, 2 & 3 templates in the Edit Templates drop down list.
This process will be on a 'trial and error' basis, whereby you print and adjust accordingly until all fields line up on
the Radiology stationary.
Fields can be moved by clicking and dragging them to the desired position and resized by dragging the blue dots

accordingly.
To remove a field from a template, click and drag it off the printable area.
To edit the Text Properties in a field, double click and a Properties list will appear with options to adjust the Style
and Size etc. of the text.
Be sure to Save the Template before closing using the Save button.
7.11.3 Selecting the Results Format

Most Laboratories can now send results in either PIT (Pathology Internet Protocol) format, or HL7 (Health Level
7) format.
The difference between the two formats is simply how the text is formatted in the downloaded file. In the
beginning PIT was the only format. In the past few years there has been a move to HL7.
Genie can handle either format transparently. That is, there are no settings you need to make in Genie to
receive in either format. During the import, Genie can tell the difference between a PIT file and an HL7, and
imports them in different ways.
You can receive PIT files from one lab and HL7 files from another.
HL7 has an advantage over PIT files in that they are more "atomic". That is, in a PIT file, an MBA result is one
block of text. In an HL7 file, each result is presented separately allowing Genie to extract just the Creatinine
result for example.
Note: Genie makes an attempt to extract a handful of separate results from a PIT file simply by seaching
the block of text when the result is linked to a patient. It then creates a consultation record and inserts
the result into the consultation record. However this only works for some labs depending on how the

text is presented. If this isn't working, this option can be switched off in your User Preferences (File >
User Preferences > Clinical tab) by deselecting the Extract Pathology Results PIT Format checkbox.
If you receive results in HL7 format you have a great deal more flexibility in what results you want to extract and
subsequently graph.
For more information on how to track and graph HL7 results select File > Maintenance & Reports: General
Tab and click on the Track Pathology Results button.
7.11.4 Importing Downloaded Results

This section refers to results that have been downloaded into the "LabRslts" folder as described previously (see
Pathology and Radiology Results).
Once the result files have been downloaded into the LabRslts folder, select Open > Pathology and Radiology.
Whenever this menu item is selected Genie looks in the local LabRslts folder to see if there are any new files.
If there are you will be asked if you want to import them now.

If you click Open, the Import window will open as shown below.
All results will be ticked by default, if you wish to import only a few of the results listed you can click the Deselect
All button and tick just the required result.
Click the Import button and Genie will import the downloaded files into the database. Once the import is finished
these results can be accessed by anybody on the network.
If the laboratory's downloading application has been installed on the server, then Genie can import the results
automatically by ticking 'Allow Pathology Import On Server' in Practice Preferences (File > Practice
Preferences > Miscellaneous tab).
Otherwise you will need to import them manually to the local machine. In this case, the Import window can be
opened from the Downloaded Results list by clicking the Import button and then the results can be retrieved
from the server by clicking the Retrieve From Server button. This will copy any results in the LabRslts folder on
the server to the local LabRslts folder. If the retrieval is successful, the copied results are also placed into a
folder called "ArchivedResults" inside the Genie folder on the server, in case you need to try importing them
again.
During the import procedure, if Genie finds any problems with the downloaded file you will receive a message
saying that the file is not a valid results file. Usually this is because it has not been decrypted, or it is not actually
a results file at all, or there is a problem with the PIT or HL7 formatting from the laboratory. Although HL7 is a
"standard", it is a very loosely defined and interpreted standard and some laboratories may format results in
ways that Genie does not expect. Any invalid results will go into the folder named "Invalid Results" in the
LabRslts folder.
You can choose to send Acknowledgements back to the lab to let them know you have successfully imported
the results by ticking the 'Create Pathology Acknowledgements' box in Practice Preferences as shown in the
above screenshot. However it is up to the lab to set up their software to retrieve those acknowledgements out of
the HL7 ACKS folder in the LabRslts folder.

7.11.5 The Downloaded Results List

Once the import has completed, the Import window will close and a list of unlinked results will be displayed in the
Downloaded Results list (Open > Pathology & Radiology).
Note: The title bar will display the number of unlinked results displayed, and the total number of results
held in this table. This is not a holding table. This is where all results are stored whether they are linked
to a patient or not. DO NOT delete results from here after they have been linked to a patient, or they will
be deleted from the patients clinical file also!
The Find button allows you to search the entire table by Surname, First name or test name.
The Print button allows you to print out the list of displayed results as a QuickReport (For more information
see QuickReports).
The Info button will display the run numbers received by each laboratory for the last 30 days. Use this
button if and when you receive a message that you are missing a run number. Check to see if the run number
really is missing. If it is, you should call the lab and ask them to resend it.
The Import button will open the Import window and display the contents of the LabRslts folder on this
computer.
The Delete button will delete the highlighted results.
The Doctor menu allows you to select just your own results for linking. This menu is built when the window is first
opened. If your name isn't here, then you don't have any results to view.
Note: There may be several variations of the one Doctors name in this list. This is due to variations
between Laboratories in the way the Doctor's name is recorded. If you want consistency you will need to
contact each Laboratory and request the format you wish the name to be in.
The Linked popup menu allows you to quickly shift between displaying Linked, Unlinked or All results.
The Result popup menu allows you to quickly shift between displaying Normal, Abnormal or All results.
Note: It is the Laboratory that marks a result as Normal or Abnormal. Not all labs do so. If you disagree
with the marked normality or otherwise, please don't call us. Take it up with the lab.
The Last column in the screenshot above refers to whether or not the result is the last result in a group of
ordered results. That is, if you order a FBC and TFT's, the FBC might come back later that day and will be
marked and "N", meaning not the last result for the group ordered. When the TFT comes back it will be marked
as "Y".
Note: Again, if the Last is marked as "Y" but you know it is not, take it up with the lab.
The Hide Results on Hold checkbox is used to hide from the display area those results which have been put on
hold. This would usually be used by Specialists where they may receive results ordered as a copy from the
referring GP. The results may arrive well before the patient does, so the results can be put on hold until the
patient turns up.

7.11.6 Matching and Linking Results to Patients

Select Open > Pathology & Radiology and select your name from the Doctor drop down menu.
Double-click on the first record in the list to open and view the actual result.
In the top left of the screen, in blue, is the patient's demographic information as held by the Lab. Just to the right
is the information held in the Genie database.
As the record opens, Genie attempts to match it to an existing patient record. The initial search is made on
Surname and the first 3 letters of the First Name.
If one patient record found:

If BOTH the Medicare No AND the DOB don’t match, then Genie assumes that this is the wrong patient with the
same name, and so then searches just by DOB.
If more than one patients found:

Genie searches the found records for a matching DOB. If it doesn’t find any match, then it reverts to displaying
the records found by the original search, and puts them all in the drop down
No patients found:
Genie does a second search by DOB and the last 3 letters of the surname
If at the end of all this, there is more than one matching record, Genie puts them in the dropdown menu and then
loops through them until it finds someone with either a matching address, DOB, or Medicare No.
If it doesn't find a good match, then no patient information will be displayed.
In the above case it has found a matching patient record in the database, however there is a mismatch with the
address and Medicare number. This is a fairly frequent occurrence, particularly when Medicare cards are re-
issued. The last digit of the Medicare number is the issue number.
When this happens, you can simply drag the Medicare number from the lab's information onto the Medicare
number of the Genie database to automatically update the Genie data. You can do the same with the address
and Date of Birth, assuming you are happy that the lab has got it right and that you are wrong!

If Genie has not found an automatic match when the result is displayed, you should click on the Match
button to search again. If it still doesn't find a match, you can search for the patient in your database by using
the Find button .
As with all searches, the less you type in, the more likely you are to find the correct record, particularly if there is
a spelling mistake in the name. You could also just search on the First name if you suspect the Surname has
been spelt incorrectly.
If this search finds more than one matching record, you will be warned of the fact.
In this case, all the matching names will be held in the Name popup, allowing you to scroll through and hopefully
find the correct patient.
If you still cannot find the patient in your database then you can create a new patient record using the New
button . Be judicious about creating a new patient record. This is an excellent way of creating duplicate
patient records. Frequently either you or the lab have simply spelt the name incorrectly. If you printed the original
request then the patient is almost certainly in the database.
Once you have a good match, click on the Link button
If you get the below message it means that either the Address, DOB, or Medicare Number do not match as

indicated by the red ¹ sign.
You can choose to fix the information or Link anyway.
The Action List window will open.
This window allows you to select the message for the Receptionist to tell the patient when they call, or the action
you want the receptionist to take now.
This list is modifiable. You can Add and Delete items from the list using the buttons down the side of the list
window.
You can also re-sort the list by dragging and dropping items within the list.
The Alternative message field allows for free text entries, up to 80 characters in length.
You can also change the Normal/Abnormal marking if you disagree with the lab's decision.
The Add to Action List checkbox is checked by default if you have selected the Move to Action List after linking
checkbox in your User Preferences (File > User Preferences). This means that the result will be moved to the
Action List after linking so that the receptionist/practice nurse can go through the Action List taking whatever
action necessary for each result (see Pathology Recalls (Investigation Action List) for more information). You
can tell if the requested action has been taken when in a patients clinical file by looking to see if the Notification
column has a [N] in it in the Contacts list.
If you don't use the Action List deselect the checkbox in your User Preferences.
If the This is a Pap Smear Result checkbox is ticked, an extra drop down menu will appear directly below. This
allows for the entry of the smear result. This smear result and the test date is then automatically inserted into
the Last Pap field in the patients clinical record.Whenever a result is linked Genie searches the text looking for
the words "smear" and "endocervical". If it finds either of these words then this checkbox will be automatically
ticked. However, sometimes, it may get it wrong and either misidentify a result as a Pap Smear or else not
recognise a result as a Pap Smear result. In this case you can manually select or deselect this checkbox.
The Flag Patient's Record checkbox is used when you want to ensure that a recalled patient actually turns up
within a certain period of time. When the clinical record is next opened you are given the opportunity to unflag

the patient, however if the patient doesn't turn up, then presumably the clinical record won't be opened and
unflagged and Genie will start warning you once the due date has passed, whenever the program is launched
(see Flagging of Patient Record for more information).
The patients next appointment will automatically be displayed in red, noting the doctor they are booked in to see,
date and time of this appointment. If the patient does not have a future appointment, then you will be notified of
this.
The Create Task button allows you to create a task for the patient regarding the pathology result. When the
task window opens, the title of the task contains the words 'path result' and the patients name. The body of the
task contains the name of the pathology tests and the test date. Additionally, this task is automatically linked to
the patients clinical record.
The Create Recall button allows you to create a proper Recall record rather than just asking the receptionist to
recall now in the Action List. You would usually do this when the recall isn't urgent but you want to repeat the test
in 3 months for example.
Click the Link button to link this result to the patient.
Genie will then display the next result in the list until you reach the last one.
Incorrectly Linked Results

If you have linked a Pathology/Radiology Result to the wrong patient, you can unlink this result and then link the
result to the correct patient by going to Open > Pathology & Radiology and using the 'Linked?' drop down menu,
and select 'Linked'.
This will display a list of all patients who have Pathology/Radiology results linked to their records.
Identify the patient who has the incorrectly linked result, and double click on the result.
Click on the Unlink button, and then link the result as per usual to the correct patient.
7.11.7 Other Buttons
The Last button can be used when there has been a spelling mistake by the lab in the patient's name, which has
forced you to perform a manual search for the patient. If the patient has several results to review, you don't want
to have to do a search to match each result. In this case just click on the Last button and Genie will match it to
the last patient that was matched to a result.
The Unlink button will unlink the result from the patient, in case you have accidentally linked it to the wrong
patient.
The Redirect button is used to change the Addressee i.e. the doctor to whom the result is being sent for review.
For example, if you see your partner's patient while he is on holiday and order an INR*6, you don't want to keep
getting the INR results for the next 6 months. In this case, click on the redirect button and send it back to it's
rightful owner!
The INR button allows you to keep track of a patients INR control which is accessed through the Tools menu in
the clinical window for the patient.
The Clin button opens the patient's clinical window.
The Edit button opens the patient's demographic window.
The Print button prints the result.
The Lesions button allows you to link this result to the lesions module which is accessed through the Tools
menu in the patients clinical window.

The Email button allows you to email the result to the patient provided the patient has an email address in their
demographic window.
Note: The shortcuts for these buttons can be found in Keyboard Shortcuts.
7.12 Reviewing Correspondence

This option would usually be used by Specialists or GP's who have someone else type their letters.
Once the typist has finished the letter, they would Save it without printing.
You can then open Review Correspondence from Open > Outgoing Letters
or Open > Patients, Patients > Review Correspondence or click the Review Correspondence icon from
the appointment book.
This opens a window in which the correspondence can be displayed according to different criteria. It will open to
'To be Reviewed' by default.
This will display all letters which do not have the Reviewed checkbox ticked, and which have not yet been
printed.
In a multi-doctor practice, select your own name from the 'From' drop down menu, to display just those letters
which have been marked as from you.
Double-click on the first letter in the list to open the letter.
Once you have reviewed and/or corrected the letter, click the Reviewed checkbox.
This will then automatically move you to the next letter in the list, or you can move to the next letter by clicking
the Next button.
Once you have finished reviewing the letters, you can print, fax or email them, or leave this job for your
receptionist.
Reviewing Letters Offsite

Letters can be reviewed offsite in two ways. First, you can use Offsite Logging. Alternatively, clicking on the
Word button will export any highlighted letters as Word documents.
They are placed in a folder called "Letters Folder" inside the Genie folder, on the local machine. If the Letters
folder doesn't exist, Genie will automatically create it.
This folder can then be taken home on a laptop, floppy disk, external drive etc. The following day, replace the

Genie Manual Clinical: Reviewing Correspondence
Letters folder in the Genie folder, on the local machine that will import the letters, open the Correspondence
window and click on the Import button.
This will import the Word documents with any changes, and replace the original 4D write documents. You will be
asked if you want the imported letters to be marked as having been reviewed. Click Yes.
Once the import has finished, you will be asked if you want to delete the Word documents in the Letters folder.
You should agree to this, otherwise they will still be there the next time you do this procedure unless you delete
them manually in the meantime.
7.13 Procedures
This chapter deals with the management of Procedure records, including Quotes and Operation reports.
7.13.1 Adding a Procedure

Procedures can be added from either the patient’s clinical record or the appointment book.
Adding a Procedure from the Clinical Window

Procedures can also be added from within the patient’s clinical record, by selecting Add Procedure from the
Tools menu.
In this case, the Procedure is NOT linked to an appointment.
Note: The current date is entered and the time defaults to 12:00 AM.
There are two reasons why a Procedure would be created from the clinical record.
1. You are performing a minor procedure such as an excision on the day, and you just want to record the fact. In
this case you would deselect the Needs an Appointment checkbox, at the bottom right hand side of the screen
and just save the record by clicking OK.
2. You have seen the patient and decided that they need an operation at some time in the future:
a) If you know when you are going to perform the operation, you would enter a date and time, tick the Needs an

Genie Manual Clinical: Procedures
Appointment checkbox, and then click the Make Appointment button.
This will automatically create an appointment for the patient with the procedure already linked, on the stated date
and time.
b) If you don’t know when the procedure will take place (e.g. the patient has to first arrange time off work), you
would leave the time field blank, tick the Needs an Appointment checkbox, and then click the Appointment
Pending button. This will mark the Procedure as a Pending Procedure and will place a [P] in front of the
procedure name in the Contact List (for more information see Pending Procedures).
Adding a Procedure from the Appointment Book

To add a procedure record from the Appointments Book (i.e. book a patient into Theatre, highlight the patient’s
appointment and click on the Procedure button.
This will create a new Procedure record. If the appointment already has a procedure linked to it, then the existing
Procedure record will open.
Note: The Date and Time fields have been taken from the appointment date and time. If the appointment
is subsequently moved to a different date or time, these fields will be updated automatically. If
necessary, you can manually adjust the time of the procedure by simply clicking in this field and
entering the appropriate time. This wont move the procedure from the current appointment spot.
Note: The Provider has been taken from the column in the appointment book.

7.13.2 Pending Procedures

Pending Procedures can be viewed from the appointments book by selecting Appointments > Pending
Procedures.
This opens a window listing all current Pending Procedures
If you now have a date and time for the procedure, double-click on the Procedure to open it. Enter the date and
time. The Save button will change to Make Appointment. Click this button and the appointment will be made
automatically.
Alternatively, you can make the appointment for the patient as usual. When you click on the Procedure
button, Genie will check for any Pending Procedures for this patient and offer to link the Procedure to the
appointment.

7.13.3 The Procedure Window
The Details Tab
The Provider's name will be filled when booking a Procedure into the Appointment book, or if the record is
created by the Provider themselves.
The Hospital drop-down list is determined by what 'Rooms' are entered in Genie. See Theatre Lists for more
information on setting up Rooms in Genie. A Hospital must be assigned in order for the Procedure to be
included and therefore printed on the Theatre list.
Enter the name of the Procedure by simply typing it in, or selecting it from the drop-down menu, if the particular
Procedure has previously been added. If you are using ICD10 or ICPC coding, enter a keyword which best
describes the Procedure. If this Procedure involves multiple operations, just enter the major one, and type the
remaining Procedures in as free text. If you are using ICD10 coding, an Operation record will also be created
with the correct Medicare Item Number. The Operation record itself will also receive an ICD10 code.
You can build a list of your common Procedures by clicking on the Add To List button. This will add the
Procedure name you have entered in the Procedure field to this fields popup menu.
You can add this Procedure to the patient's Past History list by clicking on the button with the Blue Plus sign
button.
The Left or Right radio buttons allow for the specification of which side the procedure applies to.
Pre and Post-op diagnoses can also be entered.
Clicking on the Blue Plus sign button to the left of Pre or Post-Op Diagnosis will add the diagnosis to the
patient's Current Problems list.
Clicking on the Workcover Info button allows you to select the relevant Workcover claim and inserts into the
Pre-Op Notes field the claim number, injury date, employer and insurer details.

Any pre-op notes you make will print on the Theatre list.
The Pre-Op Tab
Category, Magnitude and Infection Risk are optional fields in which you can add your own criteria to the drop-
down menus.
Procedure Type must be selected if you intend to use the Quotes section. Anaesthetist and Prosthesis
information will print on the Theatre list.
When you click on the Assistant, Anaesthetist or Paediatrician fields, Genie searches the Address Book for
doctors who have been assigned this speciality. If it finds any you will be given a list of matching records from
which to select.
The various tick boxes in this window can be used for the Pre-op Notification function (see Pre-Op Notifications
Check).
In the lower part of this screen you can add a Checklist for this procedure. These could be used as a pre
operative checklist or as the actual Operation report. For more information, see Checklists.
The Quotes Tab

This window allows you to create a Quote for the patient, based on the item numbers selected for the Procedure.
Please refer to Quotes for more information.
The Op Notes Tab
Findings, Technique and Post-op information can be entered in this window.
As these notes are generally the same for the specified procedure, they can be saved along with other relevant
information into a template.
For more information on creating templates, see the Procedure Templates.
The Post-Op Tab

The Post Op page contains fields for recording audit information about the procedure.
There are a range of checkboxes covering a variety of common complications. Some are general such as post-
op infection. Others are speciality-specific such as "T-zone Breakdown" for Plastic Surgeons and "Bile Leak" for
general surgeons.
When you tick a checkbox, note that a summary of complications is entered into the Audit Summary field. This is
so that this field can be referenced in a post-op letter to a referring GP. e.g. "Operation was performed,
complicated by...".
As well as the supplied complications you can add any other complications using the Complications menu.
7.13.4 Procedure Templates

Generally, procedures will be performed in the same manner, with the same billing outcomes. For this reason
many of the entries in the Procedure window can be saved using the Save Template button.
The fields that are saved on the template include:

· Procedure Name
· Pre-op diagnosis
· Post-op diagnosis
· Indications
· Pre-op notes
· Checklists
· Item Numbers
· Op Notes
When linking this procedure to a patient in the future, the template can then be selected via the Load Template

button.
7.13.5 Printing an Audit Report

To print the actual Audit Report, select Open > Procedures.
This opens a list of all Procedures performed, sorted by date.
Click on the Audit Report button.
The window below will open, allowing you to set the parameters of the report.
The items to check are on the left. You can deselect those items which are irrelevant.
You can choose between different providers across a range of dates. In addition you can do a report for all
Procedures performed or just for a specific Operation, as well as either all hospitals or just for a specific hospital,
making it possible to compare infection rates for example. As well as reporting on the listed items, the audit will

also report on any user-added complications.
7.13.6 Conversion Ratios

Note: Conversions are currently only available if your Practice Type is set to “Plastic Surgery”.
Conversion Ratios measure the number of patients who call to enquire about a procedure, the percentage who
progress to a consultation with a provider, and the percentage who subsequently proceed to have the procedure
performed.
In the Patient Demographic screen, there is a tab labeled Conversions. This is used initially to record when a
patient rings to make an appointment about a new procedure, or to enquire about a procedure and its costs. The
patient would have to have a patient record in Genie in order to add the new Ratios record. This is done by
clicking on the Blue Plus button.
This will enter the current date and current user in the Initial Contact fields.
If an appointment is made, and the patient turns up and is added to the waiting room, you will be prompted to
add this date and provider into the Ratio record.

Click Save if this is the doctor’s appointment that is related to the initial contact.
If a procedure is booked into the Appointments book, you will again receive a prompt to record this as the
planned procedure.
Note: If you enter the details manually via the demographic window, then it is strongly advisable to use
the small paperclip button to select the procedure, rather than just typing in the date and procedure
name. Using the paperclip links this record to the actual procedure, so that if the procedure date is
subsequently changed, then the Ratios record will also be updated.
For the procedure to count as having been completed, the Procedure Performed checkbox must be ticked.
This can be done manually through the demographics window or you will be prompted to complete it when you
save the procedure record after the Procedure Date has passed.

Viewing Conversion Ratios

In order to view the Conversion statistics, go to Appts > Conversion Ratios
Select the date range from the Date of Initial Enquiry dropdown menu, or enter the dates manually. This is the
date range which will contain the dates of the Initial Contact.
Genie will then display the conversion ratios in the right-most column, whether the appointment and procedure
falls within this date range or not.
You can also filter according to Procedure Name using the Planned Procedures dropdown menu.
Double-clicking on any of the lines allows you to burrow down to the original Ratios record if you need to make
any changes.
7.14 Images
The following sections explain how to attach images such as photos using ImagePro, and how to view and
manipulate these images once they are attached.
For information on scanning see the Scanning section in the Reception module.
7.14.1 Attaching Images
Attaching Images Direct from a Digital Camera
Open the Image Browser window from the patients clinical window using the Image Browser button.
Open the ImagePro Control window using the Camera icon.
Connect your camera to your computer and turn it on. Genie should recognise your camera in the drop down
menu as below. If not, you may need to install the camera driver using a CD that would have come with your

Genie Manual Clinical: Images
camera.
Click on the Camera icon and Genie will bring up a list of photos on your Memory Stick. Highlight the images you
want to attach to this patient. If you want to select multiple images, SHIFT or CTRL click on the images you
require. Click OK. Genie will prompt you for a description for the image/s. For multiple images, Genie will name
the images: name_1, name_2, name_3 etc.
Note: It is best to take photos in VGA or email mode to keep them at a reasonable size. The quality will
still be adequate for viewing purposes, it is only if you are going to print the photo bigger than 6x4 that
you need higher resolution. VGA/email will be a size setting on your camera itself.
Attaching Images from File
Open the Image Browser window from the patients clinical window using the Image Browser button.
Click the Blue Plus at the top left of the Image Browser window
This will open a Browse window allowing you to navigate to where the images are stored. Select the image you
wish to attach and click OK.
Note: Images can only be attached one at a time.

These images will need to be named before attaching or renamed using the Rename icon once attached.
7.14.2 Viewing Images

The Image Browser window displays the contents of the selected patient's folder on the server.
It can be opened where you see this button .
Button Description
The Blue Plus button allows you to add an image stored on your hard disk to the selected patient's folder.

The Filter Image button allows you to apply a variety of changes to an image such as Contrast, Brightness, Hue,
Saturation and RGB Balance.
The Information button opens a window which stores information about the image, including the size, camera
information, type and source of the picture. If you assign the Type as "Mugshot" and have the 'Display Patient
Mugshot' option ticked in File > User Preferences, this photo will be displayed when the patient's demographics
or clinical window is opened. You can also assign up to three keywords so that you can subsequently find
everybody for whom you have a photo of a melanoma for example (see Search for Attachments and Images)
The Rename button allows you to rename the image.
The Drawing button opens the image in the drawing module, allowing you to draw on and annotate the image.
Note: These changes actually become part of the image and therefore are permanent. You cannot
subsequently delete your annotations.
The Garbage Can button will delete the image permanently from the Server.
Note: If the selected item is a document rather than an image, all the above buttons will be disabled
except for the Delete and Rename buttons.
The Acrobat button will open a selected PDF in Acrobat Reader.
PDF's can be viewed without Acrobat on Windows machines with the aid of a freeware program called GPL
Ghostscript. This can be downloaded from http://www.cs.wisc.edu/~ghost/.
1. Click on the most recent link for GPL Ghostscript
2. A new window will open, scroll down to the Microsoft Windows heading and select the .exe file for 32-bit
Windows which will be named something like gs864w32.exe.
3. Save this file and then run the executable from the location you saved it to, accepting the default settings.
Once you have run the installer, open the ImagePro Control Window and click on the Where is Ghostscript
button in Preferences. Navigate to the gsdll32.dll file which will be located at C:\Program Files\gs\gs8.xx\bin
\gsdll32 if you accepted the default installation, where 'xx' is the version number of Ghostscript that you
downloaded.
After you restart Genie you will be able to view PDFs directly in the Image Browser window.
The Synchronise button synchronises the records held in Genie with the actual file present in the patient's
folder on the server. Synchronising you images can be useful if images have been added or removed from the
patient's folder on the server, and this is not reflected in their Genie folder.
The Multiple-TIFF button opens a window where you can drag and drop images and then
combine them into a single TIFF file.
Note: These files can be very large, so it's not a particularly useful feature!
Note: You can't drag items from the Album list. To combine album images, you first need to click the
Use Album button and then drag the desired files to the Multi-TIFF window.

The created TIFF file is automatically placed in the same folder as the original files. The original files are
untouched. If you want to delete them you must do so manually.
Organising Images:
The Image Browser window allows you to organise patient images and attachments into a folder hierarchy.
Folders can be added or deleted, and images dragged into them. Doing this actually creates the folders on the
server machine and moves the images around on the server.
To add or delete folders, click on the Blue Plus icon, or the Garbage Can icon, see below.
At the top of the Image Browser window is a button which will display the name of the current patient. Clicking on
this button opens a Search window, allowing you to quickly switch to another patient's folder. This could be
particularly handy when setting up albums. See Creating Albums below for more information.
To view a single image:

Click once on the image. This copies it from the server to the TempImages folder on the client.
To quickly view the list of images attached to a patient, hold down the Alt key and click on the Image Browser
button. This will open an Attachments window. From this window you can select the required image and open it
by clicking on the Open File button.
To view multiple images on the one page:

Click on the folder containing the images you want to view, then click on the View Contents button.
In this window you can sort the pictures by dragging and dropping them into the required position, as well as set

the number of columns and the number of images per page that you wish to have on display, by using the
Columns slider bar and Images per Page slider bar respectively.
Using the Forward and Back arrows will allow you to move to the next set of images on display. Additionally you
can skip to a specific picture by right clicking on the 'showing 1 to 2 of x images' and selecting the image that
you wish to view.
Right clicking on the image allows for the rotation of the selected image.
Clicking on the Printer icon will allow you to print the images contained in this window. The Patients name, DOB,
current date and file descriptions will be included on this print out. If there is an image on display that you don't
wish to print, select the image and click the delete button on your keyboard. This will only remove the image from
the current display, it DOES NOT delete the image from the patients folder.
The Deselect Picture is designed for Window machines as it allows you to deselect pictures which are currently
highlighted, and difficult to view due to the inverting of colours.
Creating Albums
You can also create your own album of favourite photos for use in presentations, or to show the likely results of
surgery to a new patient for example.
To add an album, firstly click the Display Album button, and then use the Blue Plus button which becomes
active.
To add an image to your album, simply drag and drop it from the patient's display area into the Albums folder.
Note: The Album area is not automatically displayed when the Image Browser window first open. You
need to click the Display Albums button to view the contents of the Albums folder.
The Albums folder is actually created inside the Images folder on the server. Albums are NOT patient specific.
Albums are created for global use for display purposes or for collating images or photos into particular groups.
7.15 Offsite Logging

Offsite Logging allows you to use a laptop to edit patient records at a remote site e.g. in theatre, a patient's home
or nursing home, and then update the main database with the changes, even though the main database may
have been in use while you were away.
Setup

Genie Manual Clinical: Offsite Logging
You must have the single user version of Genie installed on your laptop. It must be in the same Genie folder as
the Genie Client application.
On Macintosh, your Genie folder should contain the 2 applications as shown here.
The Offsite Log Folder is automatically created the first time you begin offsite logging.
On Windows, your Genie folder should contain the files shown here.
The Version Number of Genie on your laptop must be the same as the Version Number of the network version
of Genie on the server.
When you update Genie on your server, you must also update Genie on your laptop before attempting any
offsite logging.
This is because a newer version of Genie may have a different structure with new fields in some tables. If you try
to import a log created with an older version, you may get unexpected results, if it works at all.
Before copying the data file from the server, open your User Preferences, and on the Clinical tab make sure that
the Remind me to Start Offsite Logging checkbox is selected.
7.15.1 Copying the Data File from the Server

On Macintosh, Genie Server must be quit before you are able to copy the data file to your laptop. This is
because the Macintosh Operating System will not allow a file that is in use to be copied. If you attempt to do this,
you will usually get an error message saying that you do not have enough privileges to perform the requested
action.
On the Windows operating system you do not need to close an application to copy a file, however YOU MUST
CLOSE GENIE SERVER BEFORE COPYING YOUR DATA FILE to make sure that the data file is not active
and to prevent data corruption while it is copying.
On Windows and Macintosh, you need to copy Genie.4DD and Genie.4DR and optionally, the Images folder if
you wish to view images offsite.
Copy the appropriate file/s from the Genie folder on the server into the Genie folder on your laptop.
Creating a Data Copy Script

Note: In most cases this will work but if it doesn't, you will need to speak to your IT representative (not
Genie) about setting up a script manually. Genie Solutions will not set up or support third party file and
folder synchronisation programs (eg. RSynch, SilverKeeper etc). The installation and configuration of
these programs is solely the responsibility of the practice concerned or their nominated IT
representative.
In File > Maintenance & Reports, Administrator tab, you will find the icon below.
Clicking on this will bring up a window where you will need to navigate to your Genie folder on the server using
the Browse button.
If you would like to be able to view scanned images while you are offsite then you will need to tick Copy any new
images. If you are required to enter a username and password when you connect to your server across the

network then you can store it in this window by ticking the Store your username and password tick box. If you do
not want to store your username/password you can enter them in each time you run the copy data script.
When you click on Create, an icon will be created on your desktop for you to use each time before you go
offsite.
Note: The name of the hard disk on the Mac server and the Mac client machines must not be the same.
eg. If both hard disks are named 'Macintosh HD' the copy data script will not work. Consider renaming
one of the hard disks to 'Macintosh_HD' or something similar.
7.15.2 Running an Offsite Log

When offsite, launch the single-user version of Genie. You will be asked if you want to start offsite logging
(provided you have Remind me to start Offsite Logging ticked in your User Preferences, File > User
Preferences).
Click Yes.
If logging is successfully started, you will receive a confirmation message and a small window will open in the top
right of the screen indicating the size of the log and logging status.
If Genie is unable to start offsite logging, you will receive an error message that logging has not commenced.
The usual reason for failure is that the network and single user versions of Genie have different version
numbers, or that you haven't taken a fresh copy of the data file. In either of these cases you will not be able to

use offsite logging unless the problems are rectified.
When the offsite logging process begins, Genie creates a text file inside the Offsite Log Folder, inside the Genie
folder. i.e. C:\Genie\Offsite Log Folder\ or /Applications/Genie/Offsite Log Folder
This file is named using the current date and time, in the format of year, month, day, hour, minutes, seconds.
For example, the log file shown here was created on 26/10/2005 at 11:10:43.
This is so that you can easily find a log from a particular day, and secondly, so that when a number of logs are
imported back into the main database, they are imported in the correct chronological order.
Note: The log file is just a text file. It can be opened and examined with any word processor.
You should keep an eye on the logging status window to ensure that logging doesn't stop for any reason. You
can re-commence logging if necessary by selecting File > Start Offsite Logging. To stop offsite logging, Quit
Genie (File > Quit).
7.15.3 Importing Logs

When you return to your rooms and connect to your main database by launching the Genie Client application,
Genie checks the Offsite Log Folder to see if there are any new logs. If so, you will be asked if you want to
import them. Click Yes.

Genie will then import the log and make the changes in the main database.
You should check that the changes have been made in the correct patient's record. The code dealing with
Offsite Logging is extremely complex, and if it is not done correctly it is possible to get unexpected results.
Once the log has been imported it is moved into an Archive folder within the Offsite Log Folder, so that it can be
opened and viewed if there have been any problems with the import. i.e. C:\Genie\Offsite Log Folder\Archive\ or
/Applications/Genie/Offsite Log Folder/Archive
If you have created new patient records while offsite, the data file on your laptop is marked as "tainted" once the
log is imported. You will not be able to use this copy of the data file for further offsite logging. Before going offsite
again you must get a fresh copy of the data file.
7.15.4 Limitations
Offsite logging only deals with the patient's clinical record. It does not log any billing entries. This doesn't mean
that you can't generate invoices and receipts whilst offsite. You can still do this, however you would need to print
out the Daily Billing Report so that your receptionist can re-enter the billing information in the main database.
Not all clinical data can be logged. The table below shows which records can be added, deleted or modified.
Table Add Delete Modify

Address Book Yes Yes Yes
Address Book Letters NO NO NO
Admissions NO NO NO
Allergies Yes Yes Yes
Allergy Choice List NO NO NO
Antenatal Visits Yes Yes Yes
Appointments Yes NO Yes
Checklists Yes Yes Yes
Checklist Templates NO NO NO
Consultations Yes Yes Yes
Correspondence (outgoing) Yes* NO Yes
Correspondence (incoming) NO NO Yes
Current Problems Yes Yes Yes
Documents (not letters) NO NO NO
Drawings NO NO NO
Email NO NO NO
Email Addresses NO NO NO
Employers NO NO NO
Eye Examinations NO NO NO
Flagging Patients Yes Yes Yes
Health Assessments Yes Yes Yes
Images & Attachments NO NO NO
INR Control NO NO NO
Interested Parties Yes Yes Yes
IVF NO NO NO
Journals NO NO NO
Laboratory Doctor Codes NO NO NO

Labels NO NO NO
Laboratories NO NO NO
LASIK Post-op NO NO NO
Lesions Yes Yes Yes
Letterheads NO NO NO
Letter Templates NO NO NO
Library Pictures NO NO NO
Life Events Yes Yes Yes
Lookup Lists, e.g. Dosage NO NO NO
Macros NO NO NO
Measurements Yes Yes Yes
Medication Reviews NO NO NO
Obstetric History NO NO NO
Orthopaedic Scores Yes Yes Yes
Past History Yes Yes Yes
Pathology/Radiology NO Yes NO
Requests
Pathology Results NO NO Yes (ie. Link)
Pathology Tests List NO NO NO
Patient Demographics Yes1 NO Yes
Postcode Lookups NO NO NO
Practice Preferences NO NO NO
Pregnancies Yes Yes Yes
Prescriptions Yes Yes Yes
Printing Preferences NO NO NO
Procedures Yes Yes Yes
Procedure Complications NO NO NO
Procedure Items Yes Yes Yes
Procedure Templates NO NO NO
QuickReports NO NO NO
QuickScript List NO NO NO
Radiologists NO NO NO
Recalls Yes Yes Yes
Referrals Yes Yes Yes
Rooms NO NO NO
Sites of Service NO NO NO
Tasks Yes Yes Yes
User Preferences NO NO NO
Vaccinations Yes Yes Yes
Vaccine List NO NO NO
Workcover Claims Yes Yes Yes
Workcover Certificates NO NO NO
Any Billing or Account Holders NO NO NO
*CCs on letters are not logged and will need to be reinserted in the main database. They will be noted at the

bottom of the letter but will not be recognised by Genie as a CC until reselected.
Notes:
1. New patient records can only be added from Open > Patients. They cannot be added from the
Appointments Book.
2. If Appointment Types are created while Offsite Logging, you will need to re-create the Appointment
Type name when back on the network. The previously selected Appointment Type colour will be
automatically assigned to this Type when re-created.
3. If you wish to view Images while offsite logging, you will need to take a copy of your images folder
from the Server each time that you go offsite.
4. Items added to the Past History and Current Problem menus are not logged. It is only the actual items
added to a patient record which are logged.
5. Any Merged Letter Templates or Referral/Reply Letter Templates that are created offsite should be
saved to disk using the File > Save As... option in the template area. Then when back on the main
database, imported by selecting File > Open in a New Template.
6. AS A GENERAL RULE YOU SHOULD NOT BE USING OFFSITE LOGGING TO CREATE ANY SORT OF
TEMPLATES, MENUS, CHECKLISTS AS THEY WILL NOT BE LOGGED. OFFSITE LOGGING IS FOR
EDITING EXISTING PATIENT INFORMATION, NOT AS A WAY TO SET UP YOUR DATABASE WHILE AT
HOME!
7.16 Synchronising With iCal/Outlook

Note: If you have upgraded from a previous version of Genie, then only true Patient Appointments (i.e.
actually linked to a patient), are ready for synchronising. No Tasks will be ready for synchronising
unless you open them and tick the Sync checkbox. No Address Book records will be ready for
synchronising, unless you open and Save them.
What gets Synchronised?

On Macintosh:
Appointments iCal Appointments Appointments iCal Appoinments
Tasks iCal To Dos OR Tasks iCal To Do's
Address Book Apple's Address Book Address Book iCal Address Book
User Preference set to only synchronise one
way
On Windows:
Appointments Outlook Calendar Appointments Outlook Calendar
Tasks Outlook Tasks OR Tasks Outlook Tasks
Address Book Outlook Address Book Address Book Outlook Address Book
User Preference set to only synchronise one
way
Address Book
Open your User Preferences (File > User Preferences), and in the General tab, tick the Synchronise the
Address Book checkbox. If you only want Addresses with an email address synchronised then tick Only

Genie Manual Clinical: Synchronising With iCal/Outlook
synchronise those with an email address also.
Synchronisation will then occur at the time you save a new address book entry.
Note: Address Book synchronising is one-way only i.e. addresses added to Outlook or Apple's Address
Book are not copied to Genie. Not every field in the Address Book is synchronised
Tasks/Appointments
In Outlook on Windows, you must create a Category called GenieSync
On Macintosh, Genie will automatically create a calendar in iCal, and a Group in Apple's Address Book named
GenieSync.
When creating tasks or appointments in either iCal or Outlook, you must classify them as GenieSync so that
they will synchronise into Genie.
Note: You must not use Return characters in the Notes field of a To Do/Task in iCal/Outlook. This will
result in an extra blank Task being created.
If you change the name of a To Do in iCal, a new Task is created in Genie because when synchronising
back, Genie searches for a task with the same name, date and time. Changing the subject of a task in
Genie has no effect on the To Do in iCal.
On Macintosh, task synchronisation is only supported with the version of iCal that ships with OSX 10.4
(Tiger) or later.
In Genie, for Tasks to be synchronised back to iCal/Outlook they must be marked for synchronisation at the time
of creation.
For appointments to be synchronised they must either be a patient appointment, or a non-patient appointment
whose name is not equal to an Appointment Type. Therefore, a group of appointments which you have blocked
off using the Appointment Type popup menu will not be synchronised.
Note: You need to be logged into Genie as the user who wishes to synchronise their Tasks/
Appointments eg. you must be logged in as Dr J Smith if you want to synchronise Dr J Smith's
appointments. The synchronisation for a user can only happen on one machine on the network. If you
try to do it from another machine for the same user then nothing will synchronise.
To begin the Synchronisation of Tasks and Appointments, go to Appts > Sync with Outlook/iCal. The
Synchronise setup window will appear where you can choose which tables you wish to synchronise and enter a
date range for your appointments. Click the Synchronise button for process to begin.
If an appointment is deleted in Genie it will not be deleted from iCal/Outlook and so when another
synchronisation is done it will come through into Genie again. To prevent this from happening you must set your

Genie Manual Clinical: Synchronising With iCal/Outlook
User Preference to only synchronise one way.

Part
VIII
Practice Management
Genie Manual Practice Management:
8 Practice Management
The following sections are most relevant to Practice Managers.
Maintenance and Reports contains data maintenance routines that maintain and can fix many data issues.
It also has multiple Practice Management reports such as doctors' earnings and items billed.
Monthly tasks such as overdue accounts are also performed through Maintenance and Reports.
Archiving explains how best to maintain your data and keep it at a minimal size.
Queries and Searches describes how to perform basic and more complex searches on your data that go
beyond those outlined in Maintenance and Reports.
Quick Reports takes searches to the next level and produces reports that can pull information from multiple
tables in the database.
Email explains the setup and use of the basic email program in Genie that can be used to email
correspondence and attach incoming emails to patients files. (Note: Genie email is not intended to replace
Outlook Express or Apple Mail).
8.1 Maintenance and Reports

The Maintenance and Reports window is accessed via File > Maintenance & Reports.
8.1.1 The General Page
Postcodes
Lists all the postcodes which have been entered into Genie.
Import and Export QuickReport Templates

This allows you to export and email a QuickReport to another Genie user and vice versa. Clicking Export will
export the QuickReport template you select to your Genie folder. It will be exported in two components the
QuickReport itself and a resource file ending in 4QR. You must email both of these.
Clicking Import will allow you to search for the QuickReport file which should be located alongside the resource
file (4QR).
Journal Index

Genie Manual Practice Management: Maintenance and Reports
Provides the functionality to allow you to create a searchable index of your Medical Journals. In addition to
keywords, the following data can be inserted:
· Topic
· Title
· Publication
· Month
· Year
Track Individual Pathology Results

This allows you to specify which results to individually track if your laboratory is sending results in HL7 format,
rather than PIT format.
This feature will only work if:
1. Your local laboratory is transmitting results in HL7 format, AND

2. Your local laboratory is using the universal LOINC codes to identify specific tests.
Some laboratories do not transmit the universal LOINC code. If this feature is not working for you, then speak
with your local laboratory. It is not possible for Genie to include each laboratories codes.
If you select any tests in this window, then a separate record will be created at a time of importation. This record
will contain the numeric value of the result, which can then be graphed for each patient who has had this test
performed.
You can select or deselect tests at any time, however, while a test is deselected, any results coming in will not
be stored so as to be able to be graphed.
If a test is selected, relevant results will only be able to be graphed from the date of selection. In short, this
function is NOT retrospective.
Space Consideration:
Bear in mind that a separate record will be created for every specific result that you select. For example
if you select creatinine, glucose, cholestrol & triglycerides to be tracked, then FOUR separate records
will be created with every E/LFT you perform, as well as the main result record.
Although this is well within Genie's capabilities, backups and data file rebuilds may take longer to perform. Since
the only advantage to this feature is the ability to graph specific results you should ONLY TRACK TESTS
WHICH WOULD BE MEANINGFUL OR USEFUL AS A GRAPH.
Delete 4D Preferences
Deletes your 4D Preferences folder and it's contents. This can help solve a number of problems. After you click
the button, Genie will automatically quit on your computer, delete the 4D Preferences folder, and then restart
Genie.
Create All Patient Image Folders

Create a folder on the server for each patient in which to store their images and attachments. This is used if you
do not use ImagePro or attachments in Genie and prefer to attach files to patients directly into their folder on the
server.
Audit Patient Images

Ensures that references have been correctly created for the actual contents of the patients images. This works
in a similar manner to the Synchronise button in a patients Image Browser except that it does this for every
patient. IT DOES NOT DELETE IMAGES, it only deletes any invalid references to images that no longer exist on
the server or creates references for new images. ImagePro should do this on its own, but in some
circumstances it does not.
Note: This needs to be run in the Single User mode, on the Server and may take considerable time,
depending on the number of patients and images.

Rebuild Indices/Rebuild Data File

This will rebuild all indices in the data file and can resolve many data corruption problems. This is quicker and
more convenient than rebuilding the database using 4D Tools' Recover By Tags.
The Genie Server doesn’t have to be shutdown whilst this is done, however it is advisable to tell others on the
network to cease any activity until it is finished.
ALT-clicking on the Rebuild Indices button will rebuild the data file by exporting and then importing all records.
This is safer than performing a Recover by Tags and will produce a better result. However, you need to shut
down Genie Server and be able to log into Genie Solo on your server in order for this to work.
Clean Up Data File

Examines every field of every record in the database and repairs any invalid values. Both this and a rebuild
indices can be done on occasion as maintenance to help prevent data corruption.
Extract Embedded Pictures

Replaces pictures pasted directly in to letters with a reference to them. This can save significant space in your
database.
This routine will go through your patient correspondence and extract and store in the Picture Library any pictures
which have been pasted into a template. This can be useful if you find that your data file is growing rapidly. The
most likely cause of this is a picture which has been pasted into a template, rather than referenced from the
Picture Library.
For example, if you have a 50Kb picture in a letter template and you create 50 letters a day then your data file
will be growing by 2.5MB a day unnecessarily!
Reset ID Numbers
Clicking on this icon resets the counters used to generate unique IDs in Genie. This can be used if you get a
"failure to save non-unique data" error.
8.1.2 The Daily Page
Daily Billing Report

The Daily Billing Report lists all the items invoiced on a particular day.
The report can be printed by clicking on the Printer button. In a multi-doctor practice you can view and print one
particular doctor’s billing or all the billing for the day. You can include or exclude credits applied to invoices by
selecting the Show Reversals checkbox. You can view the billing for previous days by clicking the date arrows.
Note: If you view billing from previous days, then the Payment column does not necessarily correspond
to what was actually received on the day the invoice was created. The Payment column is showing what
has been receipted against the item at any time since it was originally invoiced.
Daily Banking Report

See The Banking Report for information.
Daily Transaction Report

The Daily Transaction Report displays all transactions for that day including invoices, receipts, credits and
reversals. This report can display all transactions or just transactions involving a particular doctor. Individual
provider reports will include any surgical assist fees also.
Note: In a multi-doctor practice, a receipt may cover items charged by different doctors. That is, if a
patient has been seen by Dr A and Dr B and charged $50.00 each, and comes in with a cheque for $100
which is receipted against both items, then that receipt transaction will involve both doctors. Therefore,
if you view Dr A’s daily transactions there will be a receipt for $100. If you view Dr B’s report then the
same transaction for $100 will also appear because the transaction involves both doctors.
For this reason, if you pay employee doctor’s on their receipts, you should not use this report to determine their
receipts. You should always use the Billing vs Income Report which distinguishes between the actual payments
for each doctor.
Manual Batches
Please see the Manual Batching chapter for more information.
Bulk Bill/DVA Transmissions

Please see Bulk Bill and DVA Claims for more information.
Patient Claims Transmission

Please see Patient Claims for more information.

8.1.3 The Monthly Page
Stored Accounts
This will print out all invoices which have not yet been printed i.e. those invoices where the Store button was
clicked rather than Print or Defer.
Once they have been printed the current date will be inserted into the Print Date field of each of the items.
Overdue Accounts
Prints overdue accounts. You are asked to specify parameters as shown in the window here.
You can choose to print for all providers or an individual provider. If you have chosen to use individual providers’
ABNs in Practice Preferences, the All option is hidden. In this case you must print overdue accounts for each
provider individually.
Deselect the Include Blacklisted Accounts checkbox if you don’t want to send overdue reminders to people you
have written off as bad debts.
Note: Overdue by is calculated from the Print date of the invoice not the Invoice date. Genie assumes
that an invoice cannot be overdue if the patient has never received it.
During printing, Genie will include an overdue message at the bottom of each invoice, depending on how
overdue the account is.

These messages can be edited by selecting Open > Account Messages.
After printing has completed, Genie will insert a note in the Account Holder’s record (Open > Account Holders),
indicating that an Overdue reminder has been sent, as shown below.
Deferred Accounts
This will display a list of all account holders with deferred invoices, allowing you to select just one for printing.
Transaction Summary
Displays all the transactions for the selected month. See the comments regarding The Daily Transaction Report
for an explanation of the limitations of this report.
Stored Updates

This will show a list of all updates that have been stored for later activation eg. fee schedules.
The user that performed the download will be alerted on the activation date when they log in as to whether they
would like to apply the update, or they can be done at any stage through this button.
Check Integrity
Note: This should be performed before any Income/Billing reports are printed or analysed, to ensure
accurate figures are obtained.
Click the Check Data button. Genie will check all the billing records in the data file. If it finds any discrepancies,
the problem record will be displayed in one of the four panes at the lower left of this window.
You can then double-click on the item to open the record and fix whatever is wrong. You can leave this window
running while you open the Patients or Account Holders list to examine their account history. If there is an
Account Holder with an incorrect balance, you can double-click on it to open the Account Holder’s record, and
then click the Update Balance button to correct this.
This process also updates the summary records. A Summary Record is kept for each provider for each calendar

month. It keeps a running tally of all invoice and receipt totals. These summaries are used to display the Billing
vs. Income report, so it is advisable to run at least the Update Summaries section of the Data Checker before
making payments to providers based on their billings or receipts.
You can view the Summary Records by clicking on the Summary Records button in the Billing vs. Income
Report window. You can print the Summary records using a QuickReport for the [Summary] table (see
QuickReports for more information).
Archive Patient Correspondence

Archives old letters by storing them on the server in RTF format. You will be prompted for the cut off limit once
you click the Garbage Can. See the Archiving chapter for more information on this and Archiving Pathology
Results.
Archive Pathology Results

Archives old pathology results by storing them on the server as text files. You will be prompted for the cut off limit
once you click the Garbage Can.
Cull Script Archive

Deletes patients' script archives in the clinical file from the database. You will be prompted for the cut off limit
once you click the Garbage Can.
The Script Archive is a table containing copies of every prescription printed. It is a legal requirement that a copy
of all printed prescriptions be retained for 12 months (24 months in some states). After that you can delete them
to free up space in the database. Note that this does not delete any of the prescriptions in the patients' current
medication list
Cull Old Invoices

Deletes old invoices which have been fully paid. Afterwards the database will be compacted to recover empty
space.
Archive HIC Online Claim Text

Archives the encrypted claim message of finalised HIC Online transmissions which are more than 3 months old.
Note: Patient records are Archived through Open > Patients, Patients > Cull Records. See The Patients
Menu for more detail.

8.1.4 The Practice Analysis Page
Billing vs Income Report

This is the main report in Genie and is the one that should be used for determining providers’ pays/dividends.
You can specify any date period you like by selecting one of the set date options, or by selecting Custom Date,
which allows you to enter any date range you like. You can specify whether the report should be divided by
provider or month. For each provider in the practice, this report will detail billing and receipts, including GST
totals.
Note: The GST amount indicated in the Billing vs Income report may vary when compared to GST
amounts in other reports in Genie, over the same period of time (i.e. the GST in banking report). This is
due to the fact that if an account which includes GST is deleted,and the Banking batch in which it is
contained is sealed, then the Banking report GST amount is not updated to reflect this deletion, whereas
the GST reported in the Billing vs Income report is.
Note: It is strongly recommended to perform an Integrity Check before using any figures in the Billing vs
Income Report to ensure accuracy of the figures.

Billing: This first column shows the gross billing, and includes invoices which have subsequently been credited.
It also includes any GST amounts.
Credits: This column shows the total amount of credits applied to invoices.
Discounts: This column shows the total amount of discounts applied to invoices.
Net Billing: Equals gross billing less GST less credits, less discounts, and is therefore the real, actual billing for
the practice that this provider has performed.
Receipts: This column shows the total amount that has been receipted to this provider for the time period
selected, and includes any GST.
Contacts: This actually shows the number of invoices billed to this provider, and so is not necessarily the actual
number of patient contacts.
Highlight the doctor's name for the below buttons to become available:
Print Breakdown: This will print a more detailed breakdown of invoices and receipts, including a breakdown
between bulk-billed Medicare and DVA, private and other organisation billing and receipting.
Print Sales: Prints all the items invoiced during the selected time period.
Print Receipts: Prints all the receipts for the selected time period, whether the actual invoice was created during
this time period or not.
Summary Records: Displays the Summary records for each provider. These are up-dated during a Data
Integrity Check (See Check Integrity for more information). They can be printed using a QuickReport (File >
QuickReports), and selecting the [Summary] table.
To display the billing by Site of Service click the black arrow next to the doctors name.
Printing the Billing vs Income Report
Use the Printer icon to print and the Graph icon to graph the Billing v Income report.
Item Report
This report displays the number, total value and average fee for either all items, or a selection of item numbers
during a specified time period.
For example, to find all minor excisions click on the Select button and enter 312, then hit the TAB key. Genie
performs a wildcard search and finds all items beginning with “312”.
To find which patients have actually had these items, highlight the record/s you want and click the Display

Patients button as shown below.
The total of fees charged for all item numbers may not necessarily be the same as shown in the Billing vs
Income report.
This is because, if you create an invoice for an item worth $100, then fully credit it because it was billed to the
wrong patient, then that item will not be included in the Item Report and the total will be $100 less than the total
in the Billing vs Income report.
This is deliberate, because otherwise the number of times that item has been billed would be incorrect, and the
average fee would be skewed downwards.
Items can also be subtotaled by Category or Time. Time is entered in the Time Spent field at the very bottom of
the Add Item to Invoice screen and Category is taken from the Category entered for the item in Open > Billing
Items.
The report can be exported to Excel using the green X icon at the top of the window.
Paid on the Day

This report displays the percentage of income which is actually paid on the day. It may be useful if a discount is
offered for payment on the day, in which case you can see if it has had the desired effect.
Patient Type
This displays a breakdown of invoicing by patient type. This is determined by the Account Type selected in the
patient's demographics, regardless of how the patient is invoiced (e.g. if the patient is classified as Private, yet
you invoice them to Workcover, this will still be calculated under the Patient Type of Private).
Account Holders Report

Displays a breakdown of billing by account holder and organisations such as Workcover, Health Funds,
Medicare and Private Accounts. The Account holder is determined by who the invoice is made out to (e.g. if the
patient is classified as Private, yet you invoice them to Workcover, this will be calculated against Workcover).
Sales by Postcode
Displays sales within a specified postcode range. These can be grouped and exported to Excel if need be.
Aged Debtors Report

This report shows outstanding debts, subdivided by current, 30, 60 day, etc.
There are two types of aged debtor reports

1. By service date
2. By invoice date - to run this report "Alt-click" on the print icon
Aged debtors by service date

The "Cut off" date is used to determine which services are included in the report. Any services after the "Cut off"
date are excluded from the report.
The "As of" date is used to calculate the age of the debtors listed. For example; if you set the "Cut off" date at
31/12/2005 and set the "As of" date at 31/03/2006, any debts which were current at 31/12/2005 are still
outstanding at 31/03/2006 would be shown 90+ column.
Any report produced after the "Cut off" date will reflect payments made between the "Cut off" date and the date it
is printed. For example assuming:
- A "Cut off" date of 31/12/2005 and book debts of $15,000 at this date
- Payments of $13,000 received between 31/12/2005 and 31/03/2006
A report printed on 31/03/2006 would have net book debts of $2,000.
Aged debtor report by invoice date

The "As of" date will produce a report by invoice date as if it were produced on the date selected. All invoice
dated up to and including the "As off" date are included in the report.
The report ignores payments and credits raised after the "As of" date. For example, assuming:
- An "As of" date of 31/12/2005 and book debts of $15,000 at this date
- Payments of $13,000 received between 31/12/2005 and 31/03/2006
A report printed on 31/03/2006 would have net book debts of $15,000 - being the debts outstanding at
31/12/2005
Facts about both types of aged debtor reports
1. Neither report restores:

- deleted invoices
- deleted payments or
- adjustments to fee amounts
where these deletions or adjustments occur:

- after the "Cut off" date (in the case of aged debtor reports by service date) or
- after the "As of" date (in the case of aged debtor reports by invoice date)
For example assuming:

- A "Cut off" date of 31/12/2005 and book debts of $15,000 at this date
- $500 worth of invoices that were outstanding at 31/12/2005 but subsequently deleted
A report run on 31/03/2006 would have net book debts of $15,000, not $14,500.
2. If a provider's name is changed after the "Cut off" date neither report will reinstate the original provider name.
Sorting Columns
You can click on the column headers in the Aged Debtors report to sort by that column. Alt-click to do a reverse
sort.
The report can be printed or graphed by selecting Reports > Print Report or Reports > Graph.
GST Report
The GST Report prints an itemised report of all invoiced items which attracted GST in a particular time period.
You can create your own QuickReport template for this. See the QuickReports chapter for instructions on how to

create a GST Report.
Referrals Report
This report will give a breakdown of the number of referrals from each referring doctors in the previous six
months.
Alt-click on this button to get a Referrals Value Report, detailing the value of referrals from each referring doctor.
Shift-click on this button to get a Referral Source Report. A referral source is recorded only for the first time that
a patient is invoiced, not for any subsequent billing.
The report can be exported to Excel using the green X icon at the bottom of the window
Banking Summary
The Banking Summary records are created when a banking batch is sealed (see The Banking Report for more
information). This summary report details the totals for cash, cheques, EFTPOS etc.
Assistants Report
Allows you to either print or preview a report of Assistants' billing and receipts for each surgeon.
Insurance Report
Displays all the billing for every patient of a specified fund. This report can be broken down by provider and/or
item number.
8.1.5 The Administrator Page
Note: to be able to access this page from Maintenance and Reports, you must be logged on as the Genie
Administrator ie. the username indicated with the red tick beside their name.
Payments
Allows all receipts and credits to be viewed, searched or printed using a QuickReport. For more information on
using QuickReports, see the QuickReports chapter.
Sales
Allows all billed items to be viewed, searched or printed using a QuickReport. For more information on using
QuickReports, see the QuickReports chapter.

Audit
This allows the Administrator to view all billing changes which may have been made.
The Suspicious Entries button will display those changes which could be suspicious.
For an explanation of what makes an entry suspicious, one of the practice principals should speak to someone
at Genie Solutions.
Correspondence Log
This function allows you to keep track of letters which have been sent and received from third party carriers (e.g.
Healthlink & Argus). For more information on using third party carriers, please see Electronic Correspondence
(Sending via 3rd party).
Create Data Copy Script

This copies the data file from the Server to the Client for use with Offsite Logging (see Offsite Logging for more
information), or for a take home Back Up (see the BackUps chapter for more information).
On a Windows machine, it creates a shortcut on the Desktop to an automatically generated BAT file, which
copies the data file.
On Macintosh machines, it creates a terminal shell script which automatically mounts the server Hard Drive and
copies the data file to the Client.
XML Export
Exports your entire Genie database in XML format to a XML_Export folder in your Genie folder.
HIC Online PSI Store

Allows you to create and maintain your HIC online PSI stores.
To open up the HIC Online PSI Store window, highlight the required PSI Store and double click. This will open
the window below.
In here you are able to perform several tasks including:

1. Import Certificates
2. Update Location Certs
3. Change Passwords
4. Update HIC Certs

Upload HIC Online Log Files

Sends your HIC Online log files to Genie Solutions for analysis of a problem. You need to be connected to the
Internet for this upload to work, as you will be connecting to Genie's FTP site. If you are unable to upload your
logs, it is typically due to either a Firewall blocking this connection, or you are not connected to the Internet.
Find HIC Online related files on your computer

Produce a list of all HIC Online related files on your computer.
Check HIC Online Installation

Performs a self-diagnostic check of the HIC Online installation on the current machine. Should be useful in
quickly diagnosing any HIC Online Installation problems.
Restore a Backup
Restores a backup file to data file format. For more information read the chapter on Backups.
8.1.6 Other Reports Page
NPC Collaborative Report

This is for doctors that are part of the National Primary Care Collaboratives incentive. It creates the reporting
required on patients with IHD, AMI and Diabetes.

Appointments Report
Displays an analysis of urgent vs non-urgent appointments.
Note: Urgent appointments are classified as those that are booked in on the day (i.e. creation date =
appointment date).
The number of days that a provider works in the specified period, is displayed in brackets beside the relevant
day.
The Average column displays the average number of appointments on that day, over the specified period.
The Urgent column displays how many of those appointments are urgent, and therefore the percentage of
urgent vs non-urgent appointments.
Alt-clicking on the Appointments Report icon will generate a report on patient appointment types. This gives a
count of patient appointments that have been classified using the Type menu in the appointments window for a
given time period. For more information on Types see Appointment Types in the Appointments section.

Note: The garbage can will only be active in the Non Patient Appointments tab.
Health Service Utilisation Report

Provides a breakdown for Health Services detailing the number of patients seen, consults performed and
presenting problems, for the specified time period.
This report can be exported to Microsoft Excel if required.
8.1.7 The Disease Coding & Data Conversion Pages
If you wish to use either the ICPC or ICD10 coding systems, this section allows you to import and manage these
systems.
Data Conversions
This is for use by Genie Solutions technical staff only.
8.2 Archiving
Over time Genie's data file will grow in size as new records are added. In a busy multi-doctor practice it can grow
to significant sizes. After a few years it is not unusual to have a data file 300 to 500MB in size.
This is particularly so, if you are downloading pathology results electronically, and/or writing many letters. Unlike
scanned images which are stored externally to your data file, pathology and letters are imported into your data
file, thus adding to it's size.

Genie Manual Practice Management: Archiving
Is a Large Data File a Problem?

Genie will function equally well whether your data file is 50MB or 500MB. The only restriction occurs when the
data file reaches 2GB (2,000 MB) since this is the size limit of a single data file.
At this stage, the data file can be segmented, so that you now have 2 data files. If the second file hits 2GB, then
it can also be segmented to create a third, forth and so on. This means that effectively, there is no limit to the
amount of data you can store.
However, keeping things simple is always better, and a single data file is easier to look after than multiple data
files. Also, routine maintenance and emergency jobs like compacting or recovering a damaged data file will be
faster.
Before Archiving
There are a couple of things to do before performing an archive:
1. Before archiving any results or letters, it is recommended that you perform a backup as outlined in the Backup
section.
2. Make sure you have enough room on your hard drive to hold the archived data. As a guide, ensure you have
at least the size of your data file available as free space on your hard drive.
Performing the Archive Routines

Genie provides the ability to archive both downloaded pathology results and patient correspondence. These
routines are performed in the Maintenance & Reports window (File > Maintenance & Reports).
Archiving can be performed on a client machine, or by using the single-user version of Genie on the server.
There is no speed difference between the two.
Note: If you are archiving many records the process may be quite lengthy. You won’t be able to do
anything else on this machine whilst the archiving is in progress, and the rest of the network will run
slowly. For this reason, it is recommended that you perform the Archiving process at non-peak times
only.
To archive old letters, click on the Archive Patient Correspondence button. You will be prompted as to the
cutoff limit in months. A search will then be made for old letters and you will be asked to confirm that you want to
archive them. Click the Archive button to proceed.
To archive pathology results, click the Archive Pathology Results button. You will be prompted as to the cutoff
limit in months. A search will then be made for old letters and you will be asked to confirm that you want to
archive them. Click the Archive button to proceed.
What Actually Happens

If performing this on a client machine, the client instructs the server machine to perform the actual archiving.
This works in much the same way as images and other attachments are handled.
Genie loops through each record to be archived, and creates a folder for each individual patient (if it doesn't
already exist), inside the Images folder. Inside the patient folder, another folder called “Archived Results” or
“Archived Letters” is created. Inside this folder, a file is created containing the actual archived data.
If you are archiving pathology results, a plain text file is created. The name of this file is made up of the unique
ID number of the result and the name of the actual test. For example, if you are archiving a FBC result for John
Smith, the pathway on the server would look something like this:
C:\Genie\Images\S\SmithJ1234\Archived Results\423-FBC.TXT on Windows, or

/Applications/Genie/Images/S/SmithJ1234/Archived Results/423-FBC.TXT on Macintosh.
If you are archiving patient correspondence, the file containing the letter is created in Rich Text Format (RTF), so
that the formatting of the letter is preserved, and so that it can subsequently be opened by any word processor.
The name of this file is made up of the unique ID number of the letter and the Title or Addressee. For example,
the pathway would look something like this:
C:\Genie\Images\S\SmithJ1234\Archived Letters\789-Dr Peter Jackson.RTF on Windows, or,

/Applications/Genie/Images/S/SmithJ1234/Archived Letters/789-Dr Peter Jackson.RTF on Macintosh.

Genie Manual Practice Management: Archiving
Note: The naming of these files is very important, because this is how Genie finds them again if ever
you need to view them. YOU MUST NOT CHANGE THE FILE NAME.
Viewing Archived Files

Once a file has been archived, it is still quickly and easily accessible from within Genie.
The archive process doesn’t delete the original record. It only extracts the data which is taking up the space. In
the case of pathology results, this is the actual text of the result itself.
The record is still in Genie with all the information about who ordered the result, the date, the test name etc. In
the case of letters, it is only the body of the letter which is archived.
Dates and Addressees are still present with the original record.
If you wish to view a letter which has previously been archived, simply double-click on the letter in the patient’s
Clinical window as you normally would. Genie recognises that the letter has been archived and asks the server
to retrieve it. The whole process is totally transparent.
Note: When you open an archived letter, it becomes “de-archived”. That is, the body of the letter will
stay within the data file until you next run the archiving procedure.
If you wish to view a pathology result which has been archived, just click on the result in the patient’s Clinical
window, and Genie will ask the server to return the body of the result, which should then appear in the usual
place.
Compacting the Data File

After archiving results and/or letters, the data file does NOT automatically shrink in size. To reclaim the space
you have created, you need to compact the data file using 4D Tools - Recover By Tags. For detailed instructions
on this process, see the section on 4D Tools.
Backing Up the Archive

Now that a great deal of important data is stored in the Images folder on the server, you will, of course, be very
keen to backup this data to a safe place!
Burning a copy of the Images Folder to a CD and storing it with the CD with the intact data file would be a very
good idea.
8.3 Queries & Searches

Genie allows you to make very precise and/or complex searches of your data. The following section outlines the
use of Queries and Searches in Genie.
8.3.1 The Query Editor

The Query Editor is the window to your practice data. Using the Query Editor you can search a single table in the
database or build complex searches across multiple tables.
The Query Editor is accessed by selecting Open > Patients, Records > Search.
The Query Editor lists the fields in the active table in the left-hand list (in this example the [Patients] table), and a
selection of comparisons in the right-hand list. The value to search for is at the bottom of the window. The

Genie Manual Practice Management: Queries & Searches
completed Query is displayed at the top of the window.
A Field, Comparison and Value must be selected/entered for the search to be valid (i.e. for Query button to
become active).
Once a query has been built, there are two ways to perform the search:
1. Query
Clicking "Query" will search through all the records in the table(s) you are querying.
2. Query in Selection
Clicking "Query in Selection" will search through the current found set (i.e. the currently displayed selection of
records). This is useful if you want to perform multiple queries to refine your search.
8.3.2 Simple Queries

The following examples highlight typical searches that are possible within 1 database table e.g. the Patients
table.
Example 1: Find all patients aged 45.

1. Select Open > Patients.
2. Click OK to get rid of the Search window if it appears.
3. Select Records > Search.
4. Click on the Age field in the field list on the left.
5. Click on "is equal to" in the comparisons list on the right

6. Type "45" in the Value field. The window should now look like this:
Note: The upper pane contains the finished query.
7. Click the Query button. (The Query button will remain disabled until you have entered a valid query.)
All the patients aged 45 will be displayed.
Example 2: Find all male patients aged between 45 and 50.

4. Click on the Age field in the field list on the left.
5. Click on "is greater than or equal to" in the comparisons list on the right.
6. Type "45" in the Value field.
7. Click on the Add Line button.
8. Click on the Age field again in the field list on the left.
9. Click on "is less than or equal to" in the comparisons list on the right
10.Type "50" in the Value field.
11.Click on the Add Line button.
12.Click on the Sex field in the field list on the left.
13.Click on "is equal to" in the comparisons list on the right
14.Type "m" in the Value field.
15.Click the Query button.
All males aged between 45 and 50 (inclusive) will be displayed.
Example 3: Find all patients aged between 45 and 50 whose first name is either "John" or "Jon".
After performing the search in Example 2:
2. Click on the First Name field in the field list on the left.
4. Type "John" in the Value field.
6. Click on the Or button in the lower left of the window.
7. Click on the First Name field again in the field list on the left.
9. Type "Jon" in the Value field.
10.Click the Query in Selection button, which will search only the list of patients aged between 45 and 50 rather

than the whole database.
Example 4: Find all patients whose first name is "John" who live in "Main" Street.
8. Click on the Address Line 1 field in the field list on the left.
9. Click on "contains" in the comparisons list on the right
10.Type "Main" in the Value field.
Example 5: Find all patients whose first name is "John" who don't live on Main Street.
8. Click on the Except button in the lower left of the window,
9. Click on the Address Line 1 field in the field list on the left.
10.Click on "contains" in the comparisons list on the right
11.Type "Main" in the Value field.
8.3.3 Wild Card Searches

The wildcard character is used as a substitute for one or multiple other characters. In Genie, the wildcard
character is the "@" character. Enter this by typing Shift-2 (just as you would in an email address).
To find everyone whose surname contains the letters "smi", you would create a search where the value is
"@smi@".
Note: The wildcard character can be used instead of the "contains" comparison.
Example 1: Find all patients whose surname begins with "Smi"


4. Click on the Surname field in the field list on the left.
6. Type "smi@" in the Value field.
7. Click the Query button.
This would find all the Smiths, Smithsons, Smileys etc
Example 2: Find all patients whose surname contains "Smi"

4. Click on the Surname field in the field list on the left.
6. Type "@smi@" in the Value field.
7. Click the Query button.
This would find all the Smiths, Smithsons, Smileys etc as in the previous example, but would also find the
Arrowsmith, Goldsmith and Cosmic families.
8.3.4 Searching Across Related Tables

The following examples demonstrate how to create searches within Genie across related tables.
Example 1: Find all males who have diabetes.

4. Click on the Sex field in the field list on the left.
6. Type "m" in the Value field.
8. Select All Tables from the popup menu above the list of Fields.
9. Click on the triangle or plus (+) to the left of the [Current Problems] table to expand it to show the fields in the
Current Problems table.
10.Click on the Problem field.
11.Click on "contains" in the comparisons list on the right
12.Type "diabetes" in the Value field.

Note: This assumes that you have actually entered the diagnosis using the term "diabetes" in the
patients records. You may also wish to search on "IDDM".
Using disease coding such as ICPC or ICD10 can get around this problem. For more information, read the
chapter on Disease Coding.
Other tables related to the patients table are:

· Admissions
· Allergies
· Care Plans
· Checklists
· Consultation Problems
· Current Problems
· Downloaded Results
· Health Assessments
· IVF Treatment Cycles
· Life Events
· Obstetric History
· Past History
· Patient Correspondence
· Pregnancies
· Prescriptions
· Procedures
· Recalls
· Script Archive
· Vaccinations
· Workcover Claims
8.3.5 Saving a Query for Reuse

If you have built a complex query which you may use again in the future, you can save the query as a template
which will save you from having to recreate it the next time you wish to use it.
To do this:
1. Build your query as outlined above in the above examples.

2. Click the Save button in the Query Editor window
3. Specify a name for the template
4. Save it somewhere you can easily retrieve it again later e.g. you might want to create a folder named "Search
Templates" inside the Genie folder and save all your search templates into here.
When you want to use the same search again, click the Load button and open your previously saved template
and then just click Query.
8.3.6 ICPC and ICD10 Searches

If you have ICPC2-Plus or ICD10-AM codes installed, searches are easier, faster and more accurate.
Note: While the following instructions have been written with reference to ICPC, the procedure is
identical for ICD10 searches.
ICPC Search
To perform an ICPC search, open the Patients list (Open > Patients) and click on the ICPC Search
button.

This will display the ICPC Search screen, below:
Example 1: Patients over the age of 40 with Insulin Dependent Diabetes

1. Select the "Current Problems" table from the Table to Search popup menu in the top left of the screen.
2. In the Keyword Search field, begin to enter "diabetes". You should notice that the field auto-completes.
3. Press the TAB key on your keyboard. This will display all the relevant conditions and terms in a hierarchical
list on the right, with major topics and subtopics.
4. In this case we are searching on the major topic of "Diabetes, Insulin Dependent".
5. In the Age Range fields, enter "40" for the bottom end of the range and "120" for the top end. This will ensure
everyone over 40 is accounted for.
6. Clicking the Query button will search the entire database of patients.
The list of patients over the age of 40 who have insulin dependent diabetes will be displayed in a patient list.
Note: Clicking the Query in Selection button will search amongst only those patients who are already
displayed in the Patients list.
Note: Clicking the Show Exceptions checkbox will find patients over 40 who are not diabetics.
Example 2: Find diabetics who are not taking an "HMG-CoA reductase inhibitor.
Following on from the last query:
1. Click on the Rx Search button at the top of the Patients list.

2. Click on the Class radio button and enter the brand name of a drug in the particular class eg. Zocor.
3. Click OK and the class will now be entered in the Search for field.
4. Click the three checkboxes named Find all Strengths, Search Current Selection Only, and Find Exceptions.
This instructs Genie to search only amongst the patients already displayed, and to search for those patients
who are not taking the particular class of drug. Your search window should look like this:
5. Click Ok.

The list of patients from the last query will be refined to only include those patients not using HMG-CoA
reductase inhibitor.
Example 3: Find all patients over 65 who haven't had a pneumococcal vaccination in the past 5 years.
1. Setup the ICPC Search window as shown below:
2. Click the Query button to start the search.
8.3.7 Searching Attachments/Images

It is possible to search within Genie for all patient images tagged with a particular keyword. This may be useful in
a scenario where, for example, you wish to find all patients who have an image tagged with a keyword of
'melanoma', for example.
To do this:
1. Go to Open > Patients

2. Click OK to move past the search window if it appears
3. Click on the Search for attachments and Images icon
4. In the 'Attachments' window that appears, type the relevant keyword into the 'keyword' field (for example,
'melanoma') and click on the Query button
This will display all patients in the Open Patients window who have an image that has been tagged with that
particular keyword.

8.4 Quick Reports

Quick Reports allow you to customise the display/printout of your complex searches in a variety of ways.
To access the Quick Reports screen, select File > Quick Reports. This will open the Report Builder window.
There are 6 tabs in the Report Builder that can be used to customise your report.
1. Tables
2. Columns
3. Groups
4. Formats
5. Styles
6. Layout
The Header Text field allows you to specify a title that will appear on the top of the printed report.
Along the bottom of the Report Builder are several buttons that are accessible from all tabs. Their functions are
outlined below:
Load: Allows you to select a saved report from a list.
Save: Saves a report for later use.
Export: Allows the data to be exported to various file formats. These are:
· ASCII Text
· EXCEL Spreadsheet
· HTML
Preview: Allows you to preview the report before printing.
Print: Prints the report. It is recommended that you create a PDF first, to ensure the report generated is what
you are after.
Page Setup: Allows you to set your paper size and orientation.
8.4.1 Report Builder

The easiest way to learn how to use the Report Builder is to run through a few examples.
Example 1: Print a list of all patients aged 65 and over

To do this select Open > Patients and search for all patients aged 65 and over. For information on how to do
this please refer to the Queries and Searches Chapter.
Click on the Print button at the top of the Patients List.

Genie Manual Practice Management: Quick Reports
The Report Builder window will open as shown below:
The Tables Window

This window displays a list of all Tables in the database. All you need to do is select the table for the report. On
the right of this window, you have the option of searching the Patients Table again or of selecting ALL records in
the table.
The Columns Window

This window allows you to select the columns to be included in the report.
To add a column, double-click on the field in the list on the left and it will be transferred to the list on the right.
Alternatively, you can drag and drop a field from left to right.
To remove a field from the Report Columns list, drag and drop it from right to left.
To change the order of the columns, drag and drop the fields within the list on the right.
Because the Patients Table is related (linked) to the Account Holders Table, we can also include fields from the
Account Holders Table.
To do this, click on the triangle or plus (+) sign next to [Patients] to hide the fields from the Patients Table and
then click on the triangle/plus next to [Account Holders] to display the fields in the Account Holders Table so that

the window now looks like this:
Add the Account Holder's balance field to the Report Columns list:
The Groups Window

Grouping is similar to sorting.
To have a report sorted by the values in a column, select the column on the left then tick the Group Column Data
checkbox.
To sort the records alphabetically by Surname click on the Surname field on the left and then click the Group
Column Data checkbox.
Note: You can sort in either Ascending order (usual) or Descending order.
The Repeat Value Every Row checkbox ensures that the value for every record is printed.

ie. instead of: it will print as:

Smith Amy Smith Amy
Bill Smith Bill
Charles Smith Charles
The Show Group Subtotals checkbox would add the number (count) of each particular value to the report. i.e. it
would tell you that there were 30 Smith's, 4 Smithey's and 1 Smitherton etc.
The Subtotals on Separate Pages creates a new page for each new value in the selected column.
The Hide Detail checkbox hides the details of the report. i.e Smith 30
Smithey4
Smitherton 1
The Show Grand Totals checkbox displays the grand total for the selected columns at the bottom of the report.
The Formats Window

This window allows you to change the title of the column, as well as specifying formats for date and number
columns.
The Column Title allows you to override the field name in the database to a column title more appropriate.
The Column Width allows you to specify the width of the column as it will appear on the report. The
measurement is in Points. This varies between platforms and computer Display settings but as a rough guide
Macintosh has approximately 30 Points to a centimetre and Windows has approximately 40 points.
The Format tab allows you to format date and number fields by selecting the required format from the drop down
menu.
Subtotals allows you to display numerical columns accordingly (e.g. by sum, average, etc)
The Styles Window

This window allows you to customise the appearance of the report including font and font size, background
colours and banding, and whether or not each particular field will be surrounded by a border (like an Excel
spreadsheet).

The Layout Window

In this window you can assign a watermark. You can add your own watermarks by placing a picture file inside
the "Report Watermarks" folder in the Genie folder.
Example 2: Creating a GST Report

The GST Report in Maintenance and Reports also uses a QuickReport. When you click on the GST Report
button, the Report Builder will open to the following window, with the GST Records table already selected.

Click the Columns tab and select the fields as shown.
Note: You have access to both the [GST Records] and the [Sales] tables.
Click on the Groups tab and set it up to look like this.
Note: The Provider column is grouped so that the report will split the GST between providers.
Selecting the Show Group Subtotals and Show Grand Totals will subtotal each Provider's GST and give a Grand
Total at the end of the report.

Click the Formats tab and set up like this
Note: If you do not select Sum for GST Billed and GST Received then these subtotals will not show up
on the report.
Give your report a name and Save it so that when you next go to print a GST Report through Maintenance and
Reports all you will need to do is Print it!
Example 3: Printing a List of your Private Fees

Select Open > Billing Items and search (Records > Search) for all items where Private Fee field is 'not equal
to zero'.
Click on the Print button to open the Report Builder and create a report like the following.
The Columns Window
The Groups Window
The Formats Window
Because the Description field contains a lot of text, we want to limit its width to about 120 points or so.
You can now print your private fees!

8.4.2 Saving/Loading Reports
Saving a Template
Reports can be saved as a template so you don't have to set up the tabs each time you perform the same
search.
Click on the Save button. If you haven't already given the report a name, do so when asked. If there is already
another report with the same name you will be asked if you want to overwrite that template. If you don't then give
this report a different name before saving it. This template is saved within the datafile so that it is available to all
other computers on the network.
For the example used in the Report Builder section, the next time you click on the Print button in the Patients
List this report will automatically open if it is the only template setup for the Patients Table. If you have created
more than one template for the Patients Table, you will first be asked which template to use. Select the template
and click the Open button.
Loading a Template
To load a template, click on the Load button in the Report Builder window and select from the list of saved
templates. You would then perform your search as usual and then print the report without having to setup each
tab.
Note: To delete a template, click the Load button and select the report to delete, then click the Delete
button.
8.4.3 Quick Report Editor (Expert Mode)

Instead of using the Report Builder as detailed above, you can also use the built-in Quick Report Editor. This has
many more options and is useful for creating more detailed or complex reports. The resulting report can also be
output in a variety of ways including graphs and HTML.
For help in using the QuickReport Editor, please refer to the 4D 2003 QuickReport Editor.pdf file. This should be
located in the "Documentation" folder inside your Genie folder.
There are two ways to access the QuickReport Editor:

1. Hold down the ALT key whilst selecting File > QuickReports,
2. Hold down the ALT key whilst clicking on a Print button which would normally open the Report Builder.
Important: Please note that the QuickReport Editor is for expert use only. Everything you need to know
about it is contained in the documentation. Our staff do not provide support for the use of the Quick
Report Editor. Please refer to the documentation for any questions you may have.
8.5 Email
The Genie email module will send and receive mail to perform the following functions:
· Receive electronic pathology results.

· Transfer patient files from doctor to doctor.
· Exchange Genie data with other Genie users eg. patient correspondence.
· Allow doctors to send email to patients who have a valid email address, keeping a record of the

Genie Manual Practice Management: Email
correspondence in the patient’s notes.

· Send and receive appointment reminders for patients
Note: The email module provides basic sending and receiving capabilities and is not intended to be a
replacement for all email correspondence, nor does it provide advanced message handling such as
IMAP or Microsoft Exchange support.
It is suggested that a separate email account is set up with your ISP and maintained exclusively for use with the
email module, to avoid bloating the data file with unwanted spam.
Genie can also encrypt correspondence using GnuPG, a free open-source program available for both Windows
and Macintosh.
Email can be accessed by selecting Open > Email. The general use of the Email module should be fairly self
explanatory as it is very similar to other email programs.
8.5.1 Setup
Email Accounts
Decide whether you want just a single account for the practice, or whether you want to have separate accounts
for different users. An “account” is essentially just a different email address.
By default, Genie creates an account with the name of “Primary Account”, which is then used by all the users on
a network.
If you want certain users to have their own account, open their User Preferences i.e. File > User Preferences,
click on the 'Internet/HIC Online' tab and tick the checkbox Create a separate email account for me. This will
create a new account in this user’s login name.
Account Details
For each email account you wish to use in Genie, you need to enter the appropriate account settings. These
details are supplied to you by your Internet Service Provider (ISP) and have nothing to do with Genie. If you are
unsure of them, copy them from your regular email program’s Preferences if you are already using email. If not,
you will need to call your ISP to find out the details. To configure an email account:
1. Open the Email module i.e. Open > Email.

2. Select the account you wish to setup from the Accounts popup menu which is in the top right hand corner.
3. Click on the Preferences button.
4. The Preferences window will appear. Information about the contents of each page of this window appear
below:

Account Tab
Fill in your account details in the window shown below. Use the example text to the right of the fields as a guide.
Note: The Incoming Server commonly takes the form of either “mail.host.com” or “pop.host.com”. The
Outgoing Server commonly takes the form of either “mail.host.com” or “smtp.host.com”.
The "PGP Password" is the password that you will use to control the GnuPG encryption program. You may enter
that later, or leave this field blank so that you will be asked to enter it manually whenever you want to decrypt an
incoming message.
The Use Authentication tickbox should be ticked if you need to authenticate your username and password when
sending mail.
The "Signature" is a customisable footer that you can choose to attach to all outgoing email from this account.
Typically it would hold your name and other contact details, such as phone and fax numbers.
Detail Tab

By default, once Genie has downloaded an email from your ISP, it is deleted from the ISP’s server. However, if
you tick the Leave messages on server after download checkbox, then Genie will delete them when you next
perform a download after the specified number of days.
Note: It is recommended to tick this box so you can also download the messages into another email
program eg. Outlook Express or Apple Mail, as it is not generally recommended to use the Genie email
as your primary email program due to its simplicity.
When messages first arrive in the In Box, they are displayed in bold. Once you click on them, they are marked
as read after the specified number of seconds, and then display in plain text.
If you find that there are messages downloaded into your other email program but are not downloading into
Genie email when you click Get Mail, then click the Reset Retrieved Msg IDs.
In this window, you can also specify that messages in your 'Sent' and 'Deleted' folders can be automatically
deleted after a specified number of days. Deletion of these records occurs when you close the Email window.
Only messages in the currently used Account are deleted, so if you have multiple Accounts but never open
them, these old messages will never be deleted automatically.
Advanced Tab
This tab allows you to override the default mail server ports. You shouldn’t have to change the default POP3 and
SMTP Port numbers unless your ISP tells you that they use different ports.
The "Account Password" field can be used to prevent other users from accessing this window and accidentally
changing your details.
Entering Email Addresses

Before you can send an email to someone else, you need to know their email address.
Genie keeps email addresses in a separate table in the database. However, whenever you enter an email
address into the ordinary Address Book, or the Patient Demographics window, Genie automatically creates an
entry for that person in the Email Address table.
If you need to add, modify or delete an email address, click on the Address Book button.
You should also add your own name and email address, to allow you to send a test message, as detailed below.
Send a Test Message

To make sure you have entered your email account details correctly, you should send a test message to
yourself.

1. Click on the New button to create a new email.

2. Start typing your First or Surname, and a popup will appear displaying any matching email addresses.
Use the mouse or hit the Enter key to select the record you want. If you have performed this correctly, your
name should now be displayed in the To: area.
Note: The Return key does nothing. Only the Enter key works in place of using the mouse.
The cursor should now be in the Subject area. Enter a subject like “Test”, then TAB to the body of the message.
Type a few lines in the body, then click the Send Now button.
Assuming you are already connected to the Internet, Genie should send the message. If you get an error
message, read it carefully. It will frequently tell you what the problem is e.g. an incorrect account password, or
account login name.
If the message has been sent successfully, wait a few moments and then click on the Get Mail button. The
window below will appear:
Clicking on the Send and Receive icons will switch these options on and off. Because we don ’t actually have
anything to send at the moment, click on the Send icon to switch it off, then click the OK button to retrieve any
messages on your ISP’s server.
The test message you just sent should now be in your Inbox.
8.5.2 Encryption and Keys
Setting up Gnu Privacy Guard (GnuPG)

GnuPG is an encryption program for both Macintosh and Windows. It is free and open-source.
If you haven’t already done so, you need to download and install it onto any of the client computers in your
network which need to send encrypted mail.

Click on the Keys button, to open the window below:
Click on the SourceForge Website button. Your browser should open to the SourceForge URL for your
particular platform i.e. Windows or Macintosh.
8.5.2.1 Windows Setup

The instructions below are very brief and refer to Windows 2000 and XP. If you are using another flavour of
Windows, or require more detailed instructions, click on the Instructions for Installing GnuPG on Windows
button (This button is only visible on Windows machines).
1. On the SourceForge website, scroll down until you see the binary download file. This will be called
something like “GnuPG 1.4.2 compiled for Microsoft Windows”.
Note: You must download the binary file, not a Source Package.
2. The downloaded file will probably be named something like “gnupg-w32cli-1.4.2.exe”. Double click on this to
launch the installer. Follow the prompts and when prompted for the destination Folder be sure it is at the root
of your C drive i.e. C:\gnupg.
3. Edit the PATH environment so that Windows knows where the program is installed. To do this, select Start >
Settings > Control Panel > System, click the Advanced Tab then click the Environment Variables button.
In the System Variables section is a variable for PATH which can be changed by clicking the Edit button.
The values in this variable are separated by semicolons, so add ;c:\gnupg to the end of the variable. For
example,if your PATH variable is currently: c:\windows;c:\utils change it to c:\windows;c:\utils;c\gnupg.

To test if you have installed it correctly, open the Command Prompt (Start > Run, Type cmd) and enter: gpg
--version
Hit the Return key and you should see something like the following output:
gpg (GnuPG)1.4.2 Copyright (C)2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc.This program comes with
ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY.This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain
conditions. See the file COPYING for details.
Home: c:/gnupg
Supported algorithms:
Pubkey: RSA, RSA-E, RSA-S, ELG-E, DSA, ELG
Cipher: 3DES, CAST5, BLOWFISH, AES, AES192, AES256, TWOFISH
Hash: MD5, SHA1, RIPEMD160
Compress: Uncompressed, ZIP, ZLIB
8.5.2.2 Macintosh Setup

1. On the SourceForge website, there are 2 files to download.
a) GNU Privacy Guard for the appropriate version of MacOSX.
b) GPG Keychain Access application.
2. When the download has finished, these 2 files should appear as mounted images. Double-click the installers
and follow the prompts to complete the installation.
8.5.2.3 Creating/Acquiring Keys
About Key Pairs

In order to receive encrypted messages, you must first create a “key pair", consisting of a Public Key and a
Secret Key, and then make your public key available to anyone who might want to send you encrypted
messages.
Other people use your Public Key to encrypt the message. Subsequently, only your Secret Key can decrypt it.
In turn, to send encrypted messages to someone else, you must get their Public Key. In addition, their public key
must correspond to the email address to which you are sending the message. For example, if Dr Joe Blow has
sent you his public key for his email address joe@isp.com.au, then that is the email address to which you must
send the message. If he has another email address j.blow@isp.com.au, then you will not be able to encrypt
messages going to that email address with his original public key. (Unless there is a sub-key, but that’s a whole
new layer of complications!)
Obviously, you should never give your Secret Key away!
Creating a Key Pair

Click the button.
On Macintosh, the Terminal will open. On Windows, the Command Prompt will open. In either case, simply
follow the prompts, accepting the default choices in each case. On Macintosh, when you are finished type exit
and hit the Return key, and then quit the Terminal.
If you don’t want to be asked for your encryption password each time you try to decrypt a message, you should
enter it into the PGP Password field in your Email Preferences now.

Click the Keyring Tab to display the window below:
This window displays any Public or Secret keys installed on this computer.
Note: These keys are NOT stored in the Genie data file. They are stored in their own directories on the
computer. On Windows, they are stored in the gnupg folder you specified earlier. On Macintosh, they
are stored in an invisible folder called “.gnupg” in your home directory.
Making Your Public Key Available

You can send your public key to other people in several ways:
1. Email it to them by clicking the Email Key button. This creates an email message with your public key in the
body of the message.
2. Export it to disk by clicking the Export button. Then email it to them as an attachment.
3. Make it available on a keyserver.

A keyserver is a computer on the internet which stores public keys which can then be downloaded by anyone.
There are many of these keyservers around the world. Some of the GP Divisions are beginning to host their
own keyserver for the doctors in their division. In Genie, there are 2 default keyservers installed. The first is
Tony Lembke’s at: keyserver.medicineau.net.au. The other is: subkeys.pgp.net just as an example. To upload
your public key to a keyserver, select the keyserver from the popup menu at top right, click on your public key,
and then click the Upload button.
If your local division already has a keyserver, type in the address, and then select Add to Favourites from the
popup menu above.
Acquiring Others’ Public Keys

There are several options for acquiring other people’s public keys:
1. Using a keyserver
If they have placed their key on a keyserver, you can find and retrieve it by clicking on the Keyserver Tab to

display the following window:
Enter the Keyserver Address and the Search String. The search string can be one item, or a combination of first
name, surname or email address. If you enter more than one search string, they should be separated by a
comma.
A list of matching keys will be displayed if the search is successful. Highlight the one you want, and then click
the Download From Keyserver button. You can now send encrypted emails to this person!
Via Email
If your correspondent has emailed you their key, you can save it into a text file on your hard drive, and then click
the Import button in the Keyring Tab.
Alternatively, on Macintosh only, you can copy the text of the key, click the Paste Key button in the Keyring Tab
(this button is only available on Macintosh machines), and paste the key into the displayed area.
8.5.2.4 Encrypting/Decrypting Emails
Encrypting an Email Message
Create an email message as usual, and then click on the Encrypt button. Genie will search amongst your
public keys for an email address corresponding to the addressee. If it finds one, the message will be encrypted
using that key. Genie also encrypts it with your own public key so that you can also decrypt it again in case you
need to change something.
If it doesn’t find a corresponding public key, Genie will offer to search for it on a key server. If you know where it
might be you can proceed with the search.
Note: Genie will also encrypt any attachments to the email.
Encrypting to Multiple Recipients

If you are sending an email to multiple recipients, Genie will encrypt the message using all of their keys so that
each recipient is able to decrypt it. However, if you don’t have a public key for each and every recipient, the
message will not be encrypted.
Decrypting Incoming Mail

If you receive an encrypted email message, simply click on the Decrypt button in the main email window.
Assuming it was encrypted using your installed public key, then the message will be immediately decrypted.
Trouble-shooting GnuPG Encryption

DISCLAIMER: Please note that GnuPG is not a product of Genie Solutions, and therefore is not

supported by us. If you are unable to work out how to use it, there is a knowledge database, FAQs and
email lists accessible from the SourceForge website (http://www.gnupg.org).
Keys Are Stored on Individual Machines

Because keys are stored on individual computers, you cannot create your own key pair on one computer and
then encrypt from another computer.
You would first have to copy the keys to the other computer i.e. by exporting to a file, copying the file to the other
computer, and then importing it on that computer. By the same token, you cannot import a recipient’s key on one
computer and then send encrypted emails from another computer. Again, you need to import the key on any
computers from which you want to email.
Make a Backup of Your Keys

You should make a backup of your public and secret keys in case you lose the originals. You can do this by
exporting them and then copying them to a safe place.
8.6 Updates
Genie Solutions will send you a CD Update for major Genie releases. Instructions on performing the update will
be included with the CD.
Genie can be updated at any stage via:
1. Our Web Server which can be accessed through Special > Software Updates. This update can be applied
now or can be downloaded and installed at a later time.
2. By downloading the update from 'Downloads' in the Support section of our website http://www.geniesolutions.
com.au
Medicare, DVA and Private Health Fund Fees etc. can also be updated via the Special menu.
8.6.1 Automated "Special Menu" Update

Genie can perform a web update itself by selecting the Apply Update option of Genie Updater in Special >
Software Updates. This particular update can be done from any client machine.
Note: Before performing an automatic update, you must ensure all other users on your network are
logged off, as the Genie Server will automatically quit and restart as part of the update process.
1. Ensure everyone is logged off.
2. On your client machine, go to Special > Software Updates. Tick Genie Updater and click Install 1 Item.
Click Apply Update.
Genie will AUTOMATICALLY:
3. Download the update:

Genie Manual Practice Management: Updates
4. Send the update to the Server
5. Shutdown Genie Server.
6. Apply the update:
7. And restart Genie Server
All you need to do is log your clients back on!
Offsite Logging Laptops

If any of the doctors use offsite logging then the single user version of Genie on the laptop will also need to be
updated in order for offsite logging to function correctly:
If the laptop has a different platform to the server ie. Windows vs Mac or vice versa then perform step 2 in the
single user version of Genie on the laptop. This will apply the update automatically as described, but to the single
user version rather than the network.
If the laptop has the same platform as the server ie. both Windows or both Mac then just log the laptop into the
network and Genie will detect that the single user is out of sync with the network, prompting you to allow Genie
to update the single user version.
8.6.2 Manual "Special Menu" Update

If you would prefer to do the update manually on the Server machine itself or download the file from a client and
perform the update later on the Server, then select the Just Download It option of Genie Updater from Special
> Software Updates.
Note: If you are downloading the file on a client machine and performing the update on the Server later
then the downloaded file must be saved somewhere where the Server machine can access it across the
network. You will then only need to perform steps 8-12 below on the Server.

Genie Manual Practice Management: Updates
1. Ensure everyone is logged off and shut down the Genie Server (therefore typically a good time to do this is at
close of business).
2. Log into the Single User version of Genie on the Server (i.e 'Genie Solo' as opposed to 'Genie Server').
3. Go to Special > Software Updates. Tick Genie Updater and click Install 1 Item
4. Click the Just Download It button.
5. Save the file to your DESKTOP, when prompted.
6. Quit out of Genie Solo.
7. Double click on the 'Genie_Updater' icon on your DESKTOP.
8. Follow the prompts and allow the update to run.
9. Log back into Genie Solo and click Update if prompted, and then quit out again.
10. Start Genie Server.
11. Log on Clients.

If the laptop has a different platform to the server machine ie. Windows vs Mac or vice versa then perform steps
2-9 in the single user version of Genie on the laptop.
If the laptop has the same platform as the server machine ie. both Windows or both Mac then just log the laptop
into the network and Genie will detect that the single user is out of sync with the network, prompting you to allow
Genie to update the single user version.
8.6.3 Web Update

If you are unable to access our FTP site due to firewall restrictions in your practice, you may need to manually
download Genie updates from our website.
Download the Update

1. Browse to our website at http://www.geniesolutions.com.au
2. Click on the Support link on the left of the page.
3. Click on the Downloads link on the left of the page (under 'Support' heading).
4. Under the Genie Software heading, click on the link (i.e. the file size) under your server platform, either Mac or
Windows.
5. The download will commence, saving the updater to your default download location (normally your desktop). If
you receive a prompt asking you to select a location to save the updater, select desktop.
Note: If you are downloading the file on a client machine and performing the update on the Server later
then the downloaded file must be saved somewhere where the Server machine can access it across the
network.
Run the Update

1. Ensure everyone is logged off and shut down the Genie Server (therefore typically a good time to do this is
at close of business).
2. Double click on the 'Genie_Updater' icon on your DESKTOP.
3. Follow the prompts and allow the update to run.
4. Log back into Genie Solo and click Update if prompted.
5. Quit Genie Solo.
6. Start Genie Server. The update is now complete.
7. Log on Clients.

If the laptop has a different platform to the server ie. Windows vs Mac or vice versa then download the update as
above and perform steps 2-5 of Run the Update in the single user version of Genie on the laptop.
If the laptop has the same platform as the server ie. both Windows or both Mac then just log the laptop into the
network and Genie will detect that the single user is out of sync with the network, prompting you to allow Genie
to update the single user version.

Genie Manual Practice Management: Import/Export Genie Data
8.7 Import/Export Genie Data

Genie has a number of ways to create new patient records quickly:
1. Via importation of a text file previously exported from another application.
2. Via demographic details sent to you by your pathology provider
3. Via imported pathology results
Exporting data from another application

Genie has a very customisable import procedure which allows you to import data stored in a text file in any
number of configurations.
The first step is to export the data from the application in which it is already stored.
The standard format for text files on Macintosh is “Tab-delimited” fields and “Return-delimited” records. All this
means is that there is a “Tab” character between each field of a record, and a Return character between each
individual patient record. Genie then “knows” where to put individual field details, and when to create a new
record for the next set of field details.
Most applications will allow you to specify other delimiting characters however. This is sometimes necessary if a
particular field already contains a Return character e.g. an address field such as:
10 West St.
Westville.
In this case, if you specified “Return-delimited” records when importing, the importing application would see the
Return character after “10 West St.”, and assume that this was the end of this record, and create a new record
using “Westville” as the surname of the new patient record!
When exporting the data from the original application, write down the names of the fields in the order in which
you are exporting them. You will need this information in order to match the same fields in the same order when
importing them into Genie. e.g.:
1. Surname
2. First Name
3. Street Address
4. Suburb
5. Date of Birth
Importing Data into Genie

Open the Patients list i.e. Open > Patients, and then select Import from the File menu i.e. File > Import.
Genie’s Import window will open.
The list on the left side of the window displays all the fields available in a patient record. The list on the right side
of the window is to display the fields which are to be imported. This list is initially empty. To build the list of fields
to be imported, select the field from the list on the left, and then click “Append” to place the field at the end of the
new list, or “Insert” to insert the name at the selected place in the new list. You can drag-and-drop fields in to
reorder them if you make a mistake.
Make sure that the Field and Record Delimiters match those in the text file you are importing. The default
delimiters are Tab (9),and Return (13). Click on the Import button and then open the text file you want to import.

Genie Manual Practice Management: Import/Export Genie Data
Genie will now import the text file and create the new patient records.
Note: By opening the Address Book instead of the patients list, you can import a list of non-patient
contacts into Genie.
Importing Medical Director XML Export of Single Patient

This is done through File > Maintenance & Reports > Conversions. Double click on Medical Director Single
Patient. From here you will be prompted to Browse for the Export file or folder and to specify which components
of the clinical file you would like to import.
Exporting Data from Genie

Exporting data from Genie is simply the reverse of importing.
To export patient data:

1. Open the Patients list. (Open > Patients)
2. Display the list of patients to export. (Records > Use Selected)
3. Select “Export” from the File menu (File > Export)
4. Select which format you wish to export the data in i.e. Genie Format or ASCII Format
5. If you selected Genie Format then this will export the complete clinical records of the patients on display into
the Export folder in your Genie folder. These can then be imported into another Genie database by placing the
Export folder into their Genie folder and selecting File > Import from the Patients list and clicking Genie
Format.
6. If you selected ASCII Format, select the fields you want to export from the list on the left side of the window,
and place them in the list on the right, in the order in which you want them exported. Set the Field and Record
delimiters to whatever you require. Click the Export button and you will be asked to name the text file to be
exported. Type in a name, and select where you want the file to be stored, then click Save. This will only
export the patient demographic information of the patients on display.
Note: Genie can import and export data from other tables in the data file e.g. Address Book, Fee
Schedule. It depends on which file you have open when choosing Import or Export from the File menu.
Exporting in XML Format

If you would like to export your entire Genie database in XML format then this is done through File >
Maintenance & Reports > Administrator tab. Genie will export your data to a XML_Export folder in your Genie
folder.

Part
IX
Technical Reference
Genie Manual Technical Reference:
9 Technical Reference
This section covers advanced topics which would be most relevant to IT Professionals or the nominated 'IT
Expert' in the medical practice.
9.1 4D Tools
The primary function of 4D Tools is to help you analyze and repair a damaged database. Databases can
become damaged when, for instance, there is a power failure while 4D is writing to cache, or when the disk
containing the database becomes damaged. You will receive a message the next time you open it saying that
“An error occurred while data was being flushed to disk. Use 4D Tools to check and recover your data file.”
Important: Before using 4D Tools it is important to take a backup of your Genie.4DD and Genie.4DR
files.
9.1.1 Recover By Tags

9.1.1.1 Macintosh
The following instructions outline the procedure for performing a "Recover By Tags".
1. Quit Genie or Genie Server if they are already running.

2. Open 4D Tools. The application 4D Tools can be found in a folder called “4D Tools” inside your Genie folder.
i.e. /Applications/Genie/4D Tools
3. You will be presented with an Open dialog box. Change the "Enable" drop down menu so that "Compiled
Database" is shown.
4. Navigate to the folder /Applications/Genie/. Click on the yellow lamp icon named "Genie". The window should
now look like this:
5. Click the Open button.

Genie Manual Technical Reference: 4D Tools
6. You will be presented with another Open dialog box. Select the blue "Genie.4DD" file.
7. Click the Open button

8. If there is corruption in your database, you will be presented with the window displayed below. If you don't get
this window, skip straight to Step 10.

9. Click the Other... button.

10.Click the Repair tab to bring up the window displayed below:
11.Click the Recover button. The following Save dialog will appear:
12.Change the file name to "Genie2.d1".
Important: You need to manually navigate back to the Genie folder i.e. /Applications/Genie/ before clicking
the Save button. To do this, change the drop down menu beneath the "Save As" field to "Genie".
13. The recovery process may take from 5 to 30 minutes or more depending on the size of the data file and the
speed of your computer. When the recovery process has completed a message will appear in the 4D Tools
main window saying “The datafile is recovered.” Your recovered data file will now be called Genie2.d1
14. Click OK.
15. Quit 4D Tools.
16. You will now have 2 data files in your Genie folder i.e. /Applications/Genie/
17. Delete Genie.4DR
18. Rename Genie2.d1 to Genie.4DD. If prompted to confirm the filename change, confirm that you want to

"Use .4DD".
19. Rename Genie2.4DR to Genie.4DR.
20. Delete Geni_.4DD (this is your old data file that has been renamed by the repair process).
The "Recover By Tags" procedure is complete.
Restart Genie Server, if you are running a network, or the Genie application if you are a single user.
Common Problems
1. Forgetting to quit 4D Tools.
If you don ’t quit 4D Tools, then the new data file is considered to be still in use by 4D Tools.When you open it
with Genie, it will only open in “Read Only” mode, because it remains locked while 4D Tools is open. This will
generate an error like “Unable to write beyond the end of the file.”
2. Trashing the new file instead of the old one.

You would usually only make this mistake once!
3. Creating the new data files in an unknown location.

When 4D Tools asks you what to name the new file and where to save it, double-check to make sure that it is
going to be saved inside the Genie folder. If, at the end of the data recovery, the new file is not in the Genie
folder, please don’t call to ask us where it is, because we won’t know either!
9.1.1.2 Windows
The following instructions outline the procedure for performing a "Recover By Tags".
1. Quit Genie or Genie Server if they are already running.

2. Open 4D Tools. The application 4D Tools.exe can be found in a folder called 4D Tools inside your Genie
folder. i.e My Computer > C:\Genie\4D Tools\4DTools.exe
3. You will be presented with an Open dialog box. Change the Files of type: drop down menu so that "Compiled
Database (*.4dc)" is shown.
4. Navigate to the folder C:\Genie\Solo Application\Database\. Click on the file named "Genie.4DC". The window
should now look like this:
5. Click the Open button

6. You may be presented with another Open dialog box. If so, select the blue "Genie.4DD" file in your Genie
folder i.e. C:\Genie\
7. If there is corruption in your database, you will be presented with the window displayed below. If you don't get
this window, skip straight to Step 9.

8. Click the Other... button.

9. Click the Repair tab to bring up the window displayed below.

10.Click the Recover button. The following Save dialog will appear:
11.Ensure the File name is set to Genie_2.4DD.
Important: You need to manually navigate back to the Genie folder i.e. C:\Genie before clicking the Save
button. To do this, change the Save in: drop down menu to "Genie".
12.The recovery process may take from 5 to 30 minutes or more depending on the size of the data file and the
speed of your computer. When the recovery process has completed, a message will appear in the 4D Tools
main window saying “The datafile is recovered.”
13. Click OK.
14. Quit 4D Tools.
15. You will now have 2 data files in your Genie folder i.e. C:\Genie\
16. Delete the Genie.4DR and Geni_.4DD files (this is your old data file)
17. Rename Genie_2.4DR to Genie.4DR.
18. Rename Genie_2.4DD to Genie.4DD.
The "Recover By Tags" procedure is complete.
Restart Genie Server, if you are running a network, or the Genie application if you are a single user.
Common Problems
1. Forgetting to quit 4D Tools.
If you don ’t quit 4D Tools, then the new data file is considered to be still in use by 4D Tools.When you open it
with Genie, it will only open in “Read Only” mode,because it remains locked while 4D Tools is open. This will
generate an error like “Unable to write beyond the end of the file.”
2. Trashing the new file instead of the old one.

You would usually only make this mistake once!
3. Creating the new data files in an unknown location.

When 4D Tools asks you what to name the new file and where to save it, double-check to make sure that it is
going to be saved inside the Genie folder. If, at the end of the data recovery, the new file is not in the Genie
folder, please don’t call to ask us where it is, because we won’t know either!
9.2 Network Troubleshooting

The following sections explain how to optimise your Genie Server, find out your IP address, which you may be
asked to do by Genie Solutions Support, and how to test that your network is functioning properly. These
network tests are commonly done after getting an error 10002 to help pinpoint the problem.

Genie Manual Technical Reference: Network Troubleshooting
9.2.1 Error -10002
This error message means that the Genie Client application cannot see the Genie Server application on the
Server computer. Typically you will get this message when trying to log in.
Click OK and the Connection to 4D Server window will appear as below
This window displays recently used databases. Although it shows Genie in this window, this doesn't mean that
Genie Client can actually see Genie Server. It simply means that Genie has been accessed previously. That is,
this window will always display Genie, regardless of whether the Server is running or not.
To determine whether Genie Client can actually see Genie Server, you must click on the TCP/IP tab in this

window.
If Genie is displayed in this window, it means that the IP address of the Server has changed since last log on. In
this case you can log on simply by clicking on Genie, then click OK.
If this window does not display Genie, then it means that Genie Client cannot see or connect to Genie Server.
The most common causes of this problem are:

1. Genie Server isn't running.
2. Genie Server hasn't fully launched, usually because there is a dialog box asking you to select a data file to
open.
3. Genie Server is currently performing a backup.
4. Genie Server has frozen or crashed.
5. The Hub or Switch is "jammed". This can sometimes occur after a power failure.
6. There is a loose Ethernet cable between the Client machine and the Server.
7. The IP address of the Client or Server computers have been changed so that they are no longer in the same
subnet or IP range.
8. You have an active Firewall on one or both of the computers.
To determine the cause of the connection failure, you should perform the following diagnostic steps. Please
perform these checks prior to calling the Genie support line.
Check Your Server

Go to the Server computer. Make sure it is running. Make sure Genie Server is running and fully opened. You

should be able to see the Genie Server process window as shown below.
In this window make sure that you can see that the data file is the correct one i.e. it should just read Genie.4DD
Make sure there are no other dialog windows open. For example if your data file had been renamed, Genie
Server will be asking you to select a data file to open.
Check the Backup Scheduler to ensure that a backup isn't currently occurring. "Backup in Progress" would be
visible at the bottom of the Genie Server window.
Click on the File menu to make sure that it is active and that Genie Server hasn't frozen.
If you haven't solved the problem yet, then the problem lies with your network. Either there is a faulty physical

connection (cable or hub), or a problem with the computers network settings.
QUESTION: Is it only one client computer that is unable to log in?
If so, then the problem is probably with the ethernet cable or the network settings of just this computer. If none of
the Clients can log in, then the problem is probably with the hub, the ethernet cable attached to the Server, or the
network settings on the Server computer.
You should physically remove and then reinsert the ethernet cable from the computer and the hub. Make sure
that the hub has power i.e. there are flashing green lights visible. Try removing the power from the hub, quit
Genie Server and turn all computers off. Wait 30 seconds, then return power to the hub, start the Server and
start the other computers on the network.
If you still cant log in with Genie Client, then you need to check the IP Addresses and the Subnet mask for the
Server and the Clients.
IP Addresses
To find the IP Address of a computer see Discovering Your IP Address for either Windows or Macintosh.
The IP Address should usually be set to something like 192.168.0.x, where x can be any number between 1 and
255. Each computer on the network must all have a unique IP Address, but they must all start with the same
three numbers, i.e. 192.168.0.
Wireless networks traditionally use an IP Address in the 10.0.0.x range.
The Subnet mask is usually 255.255.255.0.
The IP Address can either be set manually or be automatically assigned from other computer or router.
Pinging
Once you are sure that the IP Addresses for the computers are set correctly, you can test the actual network by
"pinging" other computers on the network. Pinging sends "packets" of data to the IP Address of another machine
and then waits for a reply from that machine to tell it that the packet arrived.
The ping test should be done on the client which is unable to login. See Ping Testing the Network for either
Windows or Macintosh.
If you receive a reply then the client computer can see the server. Otherwise, you will get a message saying that
the packets were lost. If this is the case, then you need to double check the physical connections i.e. the
ethernet cables and hub.
Connecting Manually
If you can ping the server successfully but still cannot access Genie on the server, you can try to connect
manually. To do this, click on the Custom tab of the Connection to 4D Server window.
In the Database Name field, enter Genie.4DC.
In the Network Address field, enter the IP address of the server computer. To find the IP address of your server
perform the Discovering your IP Address instructions on your server machine.
If it still cannot connect to Genie Server, then the most likely problem is that a Firewall has recently been
installed or activated on one of these computers.
Firewalls
Norton's Internet Security/Norton Antivirus is a common software package in use on Windows. If you have
recently installed this, or have other firewall software installed, you should try disabling it.
The Windows XP inbuilt firewall is also known to prevent login. This MUST be disabled or an exception set for
Genie Client.
To do this go to Start > Control Panel > Security Centre > Windows Firewall. You can either set it to Off or
click the Exceptions tab and add Genie Client as an exception using the Add Program... button.
Faulty Hardware

If you are still unable to log in with Genie Client, then the problem is probably one of the following:
1. A faulty hub. You may need to get a replacement.
2. A faulty cable on the client or server machine. If you can't login from any client, then try replacing the ethernet
cable attached to the server with a cable from one of the client computers. If only one client is able to log in, try
replacing the cable attached to this computer with a cable from another client.
3. A faulty ethernet card. If none of the clients can login then it is the server's card that needs replacing,
otherwise it's the client's computers card.
In this case you need to contact your hardware/network administrator to resolve the problem.
9.2.2 Error - 10030/10001

Error 10030 or 10001 usually indicate a timeout between the Genie Client and the Genie Server.
You can increase the Client-Server timeout connection on the Genie Server by:
1). Go to Edit > Preferences (Windows Server) or Genie Server > Preferences (Macintosh Server).
2). Select Client-Server from the left hand menu.
3). Drag the Client-Server Connections Timeout slider bar to halfway between the 5min and 15min mark.
Note: leaving a menu open or holding down the mouse button too long when scrolling can cause
timeouts. While these activities are occurring, the Genie Client and Server are unable to communicate
with each other.
9.2.3 Macintosh
Discover Your IP Address

The following procedure will help you discover the IP address of the computer on which you are working. The IP
address is a way of addressing a computer on a network. Each computer should have a unique IP address
within your network.

1. Open the System Preferences from the Apple menu which is located at the top left of the desktop screen.
2. Click the Network Icon.
3. The IP address should be listed next to the "Built-in Ethernet" title.
Ping Test the Network

The following procedure will test at a very basic level whether one computer can connect to another computer on
the network. This is best used between a client and a server to determine whether there is a problem with the
underlying network.

1. Open the finder and navigate to Applications > Utilities > Network Utility
2. Double Click on Network Utility
3. Click on the Ping tab
4. Under the title "Please enter the network address to ping" enter the IP address of the computer with which you

are testing the connection and click the Ping button.
5. If the connection works it will have lines on the screen saying "64 bytes from <IP address> ...
6. If the ping fails it will display lines saying "Host is down", this means the two computers can not connect to one
another or you have entered the wrong IP address.
7. If it displays a combination of the two, with some lines saying "Host is down" and some lines saying "64 bytes
from", there is a significant network problem.
Check the Server is Available

This process checks whether the Server is waiting for connections on the standard port (usually 19813 for
Genie).

1. Click on Finder and navigate to /Applications/Utilities/Network Utility, as shown:
2. Double click on Network Utility.

3. Click on the Port Scan tab.
4. Enter the IP Address of your Genie Server. If you do not know the IP Address of your Server, refer to
Discover Your IP Address.
Tick the box Only test ports between and enter 19810 in the first box and 19820 in the second box.

Click on the Scan button.
A result similar to the one above indicates that the Genie Server application is running on the Server and is
ready to accept incoming connections from Genie clients.
If your result returns as below:
Port Scan has started ...
Port Scanning host: 192.168.0.13

Port Scan has completed ...
This indicates that there are no open ports in this specified range. Re-check the following:
· Server running
· Firewall on Server, blocking some or all Ports
· Network problem?
· Loose cable
· Reset Network hub
9.2.4 Windows
Discover Your IP Address

The following procedure will help you discover the IP address of the computer on which you are working. The IP
address is a way of addressing a computer on a network. Each computer should have a unique IP address
within your network.
1. Open the Windows run dialogue by pressing the 'R' key while the windows key is pressed or selecting "Run"
from the Start Menu

2. Open the command prompt by typing "cmd" into the run dialogue and pressing enter.
3. Type "ipconfig" at the command prompt and press "Enter".
The number in the form of xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx next to the title IP Address will be the local IP address of your
computer.
Ping Test the Network

The following procedure will test at a very basic level whether one computer can connect to another computer on
the network. This is best used between a client and a server to determine whether there is a problem with the
underlying network.
1. Open the Windows run dialogue by pressing the 'r' key while the windows key is pressed or selecting "run"
from the start Menu
2. Open the command prompt by typing "cmd" into the run dialogue and pressing enter.
3. Type "ping <ip address>" at the command prompt where <ip address> is replaced by the ip address of the

comptuer you are trying to connect to and then press the enter key.
If the screen contains four lines starting with "Reply" as shown above then the computer you are on can connect
to the computer who's IP address you entered.
Alternately you might get a screen like this:
Which means that the computers can not connect to each other.
Check the Server is Available

The process checks whether the server is waiting for connections on the standard port.
1. Open the Windows run dialogue by pressing the 'r' key while holding down the Windows key or selecting Run
from the Start Menu
2. Open the command prompt by typing "cmd" into the run dialogue and pressing Enter.

3. Type "telnet <Server IP Address> 19813" where <Server IP Address> is replaced by the IP address of the
server and press enter. You may obtain the server IP address by using the "Discover your IP address"
procedure on the server.
4. If the screen flashes and goes away then there is a problem with connecting to the server, if the screen shows
some odd dialogue and something similar to "Genie.4DC" then you should be able to connect to the server
and you can close the black window.

9.2.5 Troubleshooting Check List

Genie Manual Technical Reference: Error 9913 SOAP Server not Reachable
9.3 Error 9913 SOAP Server not Reachable

This error can occur if you use Microsoft's ISA Server product to filter internet traffic to and from your clients.
Genie uses two ports to perform the software updates: 8080 for HTTP and 21443 for HTTPS (SSL). By default,
ISA Server only allows SSL traffic over port 443, so when Genie tries to connect with port 21443, the ISA Server
blocks it and the "9913 SOAP Server not Reachable" error message is returned.
Important Note: The following workaround applies to ISA Server 2004. It may work with other versions of
ISA Server but it has not been tested with them. Regardless of which ISA Server version you use, always
backup your ISA configuration before changing it. Use at your own risk. If you are not comfortable with
editing the ISA Server configuration, you should get your IT provider to perform the change for you. The
Genie Support desk staff have no experience with the ISA Server product and will not be able to talk you
through applying the change to it.
The easiest way to configure ISA Server to allow SSL requests on port 21443 is to download Steven
Soekrasno's ISA Server 2004 Tunnel Port Editor, either from here:
http://www.isatools.org/tools/ISAtrpe.zip
or from here:
http://www.geniesolutions.com.au/downloads/win/ISAtrpe.zip
1. Unzip and install the software on the ISA Server computer.

2. Run the program by double-clicking the ISAtpre shortcut which will have been created on your desktop by the
Setup process.
3. When the editor window opens, enter 21443 into the LowPort and HighPort fields, and enter GenieSSL into
the TunnelPortName field as shown here:
4. Click Add Tunnel Range and then click Refresh to see the new GenieSSL entry in the list.
5. Click Close to exit the program.
Note: You may need to allow a few minutes for the change to be realised in the ISA Server.
More information on this process is discussed here:
http://www.isaserver.org/articles/2004tunnelportrange.html
9.4 Optimising Genie Server

Note: The information provided in this chapter is for advanced users only. These steps are optional.
There are several "tweaks" you can make to ensure that Genie Server is running at the best possible speed on
your system.

Genie Manual Technical Reference: Optimising Genie Server
9.4.1 Assigning CPU Priorities

Access the preferences on the Genie Server (Mac: Genie Server > Preferences Win: Edit > Preferences)
In the Application theme, click on CPU Priorities as displayed below:
The middle slider allows you to specify the percentage of CPU cycles used by 4D Server (Genie Server). The
default midline position gives 4D Server 20% of CPU cycles, and leaves 80% for the operating system and other
applications.
However, if Genie Server is the only application running on your server computer, moving this slide to the right
gives Genie Server 80% of cycles, leaving 20% for the operating system. This may result in better performance
but it could equally make it worse. If you change this setting, ensure that you monitor the impact on performance
and return it to the middle position if it causes the server machine to run more slowly or use too much
processor.
Note:
· If you have other applications running on the server, or if you have 2 or more copies of Genie Server
running separate databases, then you should leave this slider in the midline.
· Changes made will not take effect until the server machine is rebooted.

9.4.2 Adjusting The Memory Cache

Access the preferences on the Genie Server (Mac: Genie Server > Preferences Win: Edit > Preferences)
Click on the Database theme to display the window below:
The memory cache is a portion of the installed RAM which Genie uses to hold data. When you perform a search
e.g. to find a patient, Genie first looks for the record in memory. If it isn't there, it retrieves the record from the
hard disk. However, retrieving a record from the hard disk is many, many times slower than retrieving it from
memory.
Once records have been searched for and found, they are then stored in the memory cache. Once the memory
cache is full, records are progressively cleared from memory.
Therefore generally speaking, the larger the cache, the faster Genie will perform searches. Increasing the cache
beyond some point however will cause performance to degrade as the operating system and the Genie Server
application itself are starved of memory and the amount of data being maintained in the cache by the Genie
Server places an unacceptably high burden on the Genie Server application. If the cache is large enough then all
the commonly used records can reside in memory, and Genie will be performing at top speed. The Cache Hit
Ratio thermometer bar in the Genie Server window gives an indication of the percentage of records being found
in the memory cache. The higher this is, the better. If it starts falling below about 85%, you should think about
installing more memory in the server, or adjusting the memory cache settings as explained below. Note that this
indicator will not give a true reading until the Genie Server program has been running with a number of active
users for a reasonable period of time.
Calculation of adaptive cache

This checkbox should be ticked. In this mode, management of the memory cache is performed dynamically by
the operating system, respecting the minimum and maximum limits which you set. The size of the memory
cache is calculated dynamically depending on the parameters set here.
Physical memory to be reserved

This is the amount of memory (RAM), to be reserved for use by the Operating System and all applications which
may be
running on the server.
Percentage of available memory used for cache

This is the percentage of the remaining RAM to be allocated to the cache by default.

Maximum Size
The maximum amount of memory that can be used by the cache. This value cannot be greater than 2000MB
(2GB) but in our experience setting it higher than 1000MB will cause even the most memory rich systems to
suffer performance degradation. As a general rule it is unadvisable to set the maximum amount higher than one
quarter of the physical memory (RAM) in the machine.
Minimum Size
The minimum amount of memory that must be reserved for the cache. This value cannot be less than 4MB.
Genie's default settings are designed to allow Genie to run on a computer with only 256MB of RAM, and which
may be running other applications. Therefore, 128MB is reserved to allow the Operating System enough RAM to
run. Of the remaining 128MB, Genie will take 50%, and leave the rest for any other applications which may be
running (including the Genie Server application itself). The cache in this case would be 64MB of RAM. We have
set a minimum of 30MB, so Genie will end up using between 30 and 64MB of RAM. The 1000MB maximum we
have set is irrelevant with these settings.
However, if you have more installed RAM, and you don't have any other applications running on the server, you
can modify these settings to allow a much larger cache, and therefore much faster operations.
For example, if you have 1GB of installed RAM, a good setting would be:
· Physical memory to be reserved: 512MB (gives the Operating System a bit extra - most current operating
systems will struggle with anything less than this)
· Percentage of available memory used for cache: 50%
In this case your memory cache would be 256MB, which is typically enough to fit most of the frequently
accessed records of a large database in memory.
If you have 2 copies of Server running, make the percentage at 35%.

If you have 3 copies of Server running, make the percentage 20%.
Note:
· When you install an updated version of Genie, these memory settings are reset to Genie's defaults, so
you should remember to reset them after each update.
· Changes made will not take effect until the server machine is rebooted.
9.5 Advanced Configuration

9.5.1 Running 2 Instances of Genie Server (Mac)
In situations where two separate practices wish to run their own Genie database, it is possible to run more than
one instance of Genie Server on the same machine. There is no logical limit, but from a maintenance and
recovery point of view, more than 2 databases on the one machine is not recommended.
Note: An intermediate to advanced level of computer knowledge is assumed. You must be able to
confidently navigate to and rename different files and folders on a Macintosh computer. You must also
be aware of the risk of loss of data or the possibility that the program may not run if you do not follow
these instructions. If any doubt exists about the level of competency of the person undertaking this
task, it is suggested that you do not proceed. Instead you should contact your computer administrator
or designated IT support person.
Server Computer
1. Assuming you have already installed Genie Server on your server machine, duplicate the entire Genie folder
by selecting it and pressing CMD+D.
2. This will create the duplicate of the Genie folder as 'Genie copy'. Rename this and the original Genie folder
eg. "Genie_1" and "Genie_2".
3. Create aliases to each application on the desktop as follows:

Genie Manual Technical Reference: Advanced Configuration
i. Navigate to /Applications/Genie_1/Genie Server.app

ii. Select the Genie Server.app and press CMD+L to create an alias
iii. Drag the alias onto the desktop and rename it appropriately eg. "Genie Server_1"
iv. Navigate to /Applications/Genie_1/Genie.app
v. Select the Genie.app and press CMD+L to create an alias
vi. Drag the alias onto the desktop and rename it appropriately eg. "Genie Solo_1"
vii.Repeat steps i -> vi for the second Genie Database ie. "Genie_2".
viii.You should have four (4) aliases similar to those shown below.
3. The 2 copies of Genie Server must publish on separate ports. The default port number is 19813. To specify
an alternate port for the second instance of Genie Server, do as follows:
i. Quit the 1st instance of Genie Server

ii. Start the second instance of Genie Server by double clicking on the shortcut to the executable
iii. Click on Genie Server>Preferences>Client-Server>Configuration
iv. Change the port number to something other than 19813 eg. 19814
v. Click OK
5. Quit and restart the 2nd instance of Genie Server so the changes can take effect.
6. Configure and schedule the backup of the second instance of Genie Server
Client Computer
1. If you want to run two instances of Genie Client on a client computer, duplicate the Genie folder (as was done
under the server configuration) renaming it to "Genie_2" (for example).
2. Create a desktop shortcuts to each instance of Genie client
i. Navigate to /Applications/Genie_1/Genie Client.app

ii. Select the Genie Client.app and press CMD+L to create an alias
iii. Drag the alias onto the desktop and rename it appropriately eg. "Genie Client_1"

iv. Repeat steps i -> iii for the second Genie Database ie. "Genie_2".
If you are running two Genie Clients on the one computer, ensure that the shortcut is renamed so it is readily
identifiable as the logon to the second database.
3. Click on the shortcut to the Genie Client logon and the login screen should appear.
You can now re-start the 1st instance of Genie Server on the server computer and the remaining clients can log
on as usual.
9.5.2 Running 2 Instances of Genie Server (Windows)

In situations where two separate practices wish to run their own Genie database, it is possible to run
more than one instance of Genie Server on the same machine. There is no logical limit, but from a maintenance
and recovery point of view, more than 2 databases on the one machine is not recommended.
Note: An intermediate to advanced level of computer knowledge is assumed. You must be able to
confidently navigate to and rename different files and folders in Windows. You must also be aware of
the risk of loss of data or the possibility that the program may not run if you do not follow these
instructions. If any doubt exists about the level of competency of the person undertaking this task, it is
suggested that you do not proceed. Instead you should contact your computer administrator or
designated IT support person.
Server Computer
1. Assuming you have already installed Genie Server on your server machine, quit the Genie Server program
and copy the entire Genie folder renaming it to "Genie_2" (for example). Alternatively, you can re-run the
Genie installer from the CD (Full Installation), changing the default installation path to "C:\Genie_2".
2. Create desktop shortcuts to the second instance of Genie Server and Genie Solo with the properties as
shown:
i. "C:\Genie_2\Server\Genie Server.exe"

ii. "C:\Genie_2\Solo Application\Genie.exe"
3. Ensure that each shortcut is renamed so that is is readily identifiable.

4. The 2 copies of Genie Server must publish on separate ports. The default port number is 19813. To specify
an alternate port for the second instance of Genie Server, do as follows:
i. Quit the 1st instance of Genie Server
ii. Start the second instance of Genie Server by clicking on the shortcut to the executable
iii. Click on Edit>Preferences>Client-Server>Configuration
iv. Change the port number to something other than 19813 eg. 19814
v. Click OK

5. Quit and restart the second instance of Genie Server so the changes can take effect.
6. Configure and schedule the backup of the second instance of Genie Server
Client Computer
1. If you want to run two instances of Genie Client on a client computer, copy the entire Genie folder renaming it
to "Genie_2" (for example). Alternatively, you can re-run the Genie installer from the CD, changing the default
installation path to "C:\Genie_2". If you are only running one instance of Genie Client to connect to the second
database, then you need only run the Genie Installer (Client Installation) once without renaming or specifying
an alternate installation path.
2. Create a desktop shortcut to the second instance of Genie Client (if not created by the installer):
"C:\Genie_2\Client\Genie Client.exe"

Ensure that the shortcut is renamed so it is readily identifiable as the logon to the second database if you are
running two Genie Clients on the one computer.
3. Click on the shortcut to the Genie Client logon and the login screen should appear.
You can now re-start the first instance of Genie Server on the server computer and the remaining clients can log
on as usual.
ImagePro and FTP
If you are a registered ImagePro user you will need to create an extra FTP user on the server computer so that
the images are linked to the correct patients in each instance of the Genie database.
Server Computer
1. Install the TypSoft FTP program from the CD if it is not already installed.
2. Click on the FTP Server icon in the system tray at the bottom right hand side of the screen.
3. In the TypSoft FTP Server dialog box, click on Setup>Users
4. Click on New User
5. Create the new username
6. Highlight the newly created username and nominate a password
7. Nominate the Root Directory for the images folder path for the second instance of the Genie database
8. Tick the remaining options as shown:
9. Click Save and Close
10.Click Setup>FTP and ensure that the screen is the same as shown:
Client Computer
1. Log into the second instance of Genie Client on the client computer.
2. Click on File>Practice Preferences.
3. Double-click on the clinic name.
4. Click on the Images and Attachments tab.
5. Set the path to the images folder the same as specified in Step 7 in the section above.
6. Click Save.

Genie Manual Index
Cancellation List 110
Index Change Date 46, 93

Check Forward Referrals 46
Copying 93
Delete 94
-3- Double Booking 97
Fill Down 46
3rd Party Providers 236 Finding 45
Interval 83
-4- Linking Procedure 107
Moving 93
Preferences 82
4D Tools 406
Printing 85, 106
-A- Repeating 105

SMS/Email Reminders 46
Status 100
ABN 55, 63 Today's 39
Account History 163 Types 101
Applying Credit 169
Undelete 95
Changing Account Holder/Patient 168
Views 97
Deleting a Payment 170
Appointments Report 370
Deleting Invoice 168
Editing Receipt 170 Appts Menu 44
Editing/Modifyig Invoices 167 Archiving 372
Cut Off Limits 56
Find Batch 166
Pathology Results 363
Itemized Receipt 166
Patient Correspondence 363
Modifying an Item 167
Print Report 166 Assistant Fee 140, 159
Print Statement 165 Assistant Fee Percentage 181
Refunds 171 Assistants Report 368
Reprinting a Receipt 165 Attaching Documents, Scans & Images 342
Reprinting an Invoice 165 With ImagePro 266, 342
Viewing 164 Without ImagePro 250
Account Holders 29 Audit - Billing 369
DVA 124 Audit - Patient Images 357
Medicare 124 Audit - Surgical 339
Organisations 123
Patient 122 -B-
Account Holders Report 366
Account Messages 31 Backups 14
Account Warnings 57 Automated Backup 17
ACIR 43 Restoring a Backup 21, 370
Add User 77 Banking 171
Adding Non MBS Items 125 Banking Report 172
Default Bank Account 63
Address Book 27
Setting Up Bank Accounts 31, 171
Administrator (Setting) 25, 78
Aged Debtors Report 366 Banking Summary 368
Alcohol Audit 294 Billing Items 31
AMA Fees (Importing) 125 Billing Menu 36
Applying Credit 169 Billing V Income Report 364
Appointments 82 Blacklisted Accounts 30
Adding/Making 88 Overdue accounts 360
Button Description 86 Bug Reports 24

Genie Manual Index
Bulk Bill/DVA Transmissions 196, 359 Default Bank Account 63

Default Patient Type 57
-C- Default Receipt Type 57
Deferred Accounts 361
Cancellation List 110 Delete 4D Preferences 357
Care Plans (see GP Management Plans) 293 Delete User 77
Centrelink Certificates 293 Deleted Sales/Payments Audit 369
Change Practice 25 Deposits 156, 157
Change User 25 Accepting 157
Chart Numbers 56 Applying 158
Check Integrity 362 Deleting 158
Checklists 315 List 36
Create 315 Diabetes Care Status 314
Download 51 Diagrams 285
Link to Procedure 317 Dictated Letters 40
Locking 317 Disease Register 310
Uploading 317 Opening 311
Use in Consultation 318 Using 312
Clean Up Data File 358 DMMR template 221
Clinic Name 54 Doctors Income 364
Clinical Module 276 Documents - Adding 292
Button Description 276 Drawing Module 285
Clinical Window - Overview 276 Drug Interactions 302
Consultation Notes 283 Duplicate Records 35, 41
Adding 286 DVA Account ID 55
Deleting 289
Drawing Module 285
Editing 286
-E-
Fee to Charge 295
Edit Account Types 38
Keeping Separate Consults 288
Edit Patient 90
Measurements 287
Electronic Correspondence (Sending via 3rd Party)
Presenting Problem 283
231
Printing 288, 290 Checking Imported Letters 234
Viewing 288 Set Up 231
Consultation Summary 290 Using 233
Consumer Medicine Information 298 Email (Setup) 390
Conversion Ratios 92, 340 Encryption & Keys 398
Copy Patient 45 Letters 219
Correspondence Log 369 Patient Records 40
Create Data Copy Script 369 Worldcare Claims 180
Credit Terms 58 Employers 30
Cull Invoices 363 EPC Summary 314
Cull Records 40 Error -10002 412
Culling Limits 56 Error 10030/10001 416
Error 9913 426
-D- Estimate PEFR 293
Export Quickreport Templates 356
Daily Billing Report 358 Exporting Genie Data 25, 402
Daily Transaction Report 359 Extract Embedded Pictures 358
Data Maintenance 358, 362, 406
Day Surgery Admissions 33
DB4's 36
Genie Manual Index
Uploading HIC Logs 370

-F- HL7 Results 323
HL7 Tracking Pathology Results 357
Families - Creating 122
Finding 38 -I-
Making Appointments 87
Feature Requests 24 ICD10 Codes 51, 372
File Menu 24 Searches 380
Flagging Patient Records 41, 247, 278 ICPC Coding 51, 372
FTP Server 257 Searches 380
Error numbers 272 ImagePro 49, 257
Troubleshooting 270 FTP Errors 272
FTP Server Installation 257
-G- Preferences 263
Synchronise Images 344
Genie Online Manual 51 Troubleshooting 269
Genie Server - Optomising 426 Using 266, 342
Viewing Images 343
Geriatric Depression Scale 294
GP Management Plans 293 Images
Attaching 342
GST 56, 125
Report 367 Creating Albums 346
Searching 342, 343, 346
-H- Viewing 343
Immunisations 281
ACIR Reporting 43
Hardware Requirements 8
Client Machine 10 Import Offsite Logs 349
Server Machine 8 Import Quickreport Templates 356
Single User 11 Importing Genie Data 25, 402
Health Assessments 293 Importing Letters 227
Health Fund Fees 181 Importing Private Fund Schedule 184
Health Services Utilisation Report 372 Inactive Patients 40
HealthLink 231 Increasing Private Fees 125
Checking Imported Letters 234 INR Control 293
Configuring 232 Integrity Check 362
Using 233 Investigation Action List 31
HIC Online 196 Investigation Audit 32
Archive HIConline Claim Text 363 Invoice Memos 58, 143
Bulk Bill & DVA Claims 196 Invoicing 122
Creating Transmissions 198 Adding Items 133
Error Messages 216 Adding Non MBS Items 125
Installation 186 Assistant's Fees 140
Invoicing Bulk Bill & DVA Claims 197 Changing Incorrect Account Holder/Patient
Location ID 56 168
Online Patient Verification 208 Creating 127
Patient Claims 202, 359 Deferring 144
PSI Store 369 Deleting 55, 168
Receipting 202 Editing 167
Requirements 186 HIC Online Exceptions/Options 136
Retrieving Reports 199 Item Information 136
Reviewing Exceptions 200 Memos 58, 143
Troubleshooting 213 Multiple Procedure Rule 138
Updating Certificates 211 Notes 136

Genie Manual Index
Invoicing 122 Printing 242

Organisations 128 Quote Templates 242
Patients without Appts 144 Saving 241
Reprinting 165 Setting Up 238
Searching Items 136 Merging Patients 41
Selecting Practice 137 MIMS 33, 296
Selecting Site 138 Disclaimer 356
Service Date 136 Updating 50
Service Time 136 Mini Mental State Exam 294
Storing 144 Modify Today's Consultation 290
Time Spent 136 Multiple Procedure Rule 138
Workcover 129
IP Addresses 416, 421 -N-
Item Number (Default) 66
Item Report 365 NATA Number 55
Itemised Receipt 166 Navigation Palette 100
IVF Treatment Cycles 33 Network Troubleshooting 411
-K- New Consultation 290

NPCC Report 370
NPS RADAR 33, 299
Keyboard Shortcuts 2 Nursing Home Sheet 298
-L- -O-
Labels 121 Offsite Logging 346
Built in Labels 121 Copying Data File 347
Laboratory Demographics 25 Import Logs 349
Lesion Module 292 Limitations 350
Letter Templates (see also Merged Letter Templates) Setup 346
236 Starting 26
Letterhead - Individual 69 Using 348
Letterhead - Practice 59 Online Claiming 196
Letters (see also Referral/Reply Letters) 217 Online Patient Verification 208
Location ID 56 Open Menu 26
LSPN 68 Overdue Accounts 57, 360, 366
-M- Overdue INR 42

Overdue Smears 43
Overseas Students 179
Macros 220, 285 Print Claim Form 56
Maintenance & Reports 356 Set Up 179
Manual - Genie 51 Ozescribe & Syberscribe 229
Manual Batching 173
Creating a Batch 175
Dealing with Exceptions 177
-P-
Receipting 176
Paid on Day 366
Marking Patients 38 Pap Smears - Adding 278
Measurements 287 Overdue 43
Medicare Account ID 55 Passwords 79
Medicare Claim Forms 55 Pathology 318
Medicare Schedule Update 50 Add 292
Merged Letter Templates 236 Audit 32
Creating Letter 239 Creating Sets 320
Genie Manual Index
Pathology 318 Audit 337, 339

Graphing 278 Booking 107
Investigations Action List 248 Details Tab 335
Ordering 319 Op-Notes Tab 337
Recalls 248 Pending 47, 334
Reprinting Request Forms 319 Post-Op Notes Tab 337
Request Template 320 Pre-op Notifications 120, 336
Results 324 Pre-op Tab 336
Tracking 287, 357 Quote Tab 336
Patient Claims 202, 359 Quotes 159
Patient Correspondence (See Referral/Reply Letters) Templates 338
217 Theatre Lists 117
Patient Handouts 32 Provider Number 63
Patient Type 366 Provider Type 63
Patients Menu 38
Payment Report 368 -Q-
Pending Deliveries 42, 47
Percentile Charts 294 Queries & Searches 374
Pinging the Network Query Editor 374
Macintosh 417 Quick History (Billing) 36, 291
Windows 422 Quick Reports 383, 390
PIT Results 278, 287, 323 QuickScript 301
Practice Details 54 Quitting 26
Practice Letterhead 59 Quotes 159
Practice Management Module 356 Invoicing from 163
Practice Management Reports 364 Preparing 159
Practice Sites 68 Printing 163
Practice Type 26 Templates 242
Pre-Op Notification Check 120
Prescriber Number 63 -R-
Prescriptions 296
Adding Drugs 303 Radiology 318
Adding Script to Patient 300 Audit 32
Button Description 298 Ordering 321
Deleting 297 Recalls 248
Display 296 Reprinting Request Form 322
Editing 297 Request Templates 322
Interactions 302 Results 324
Polypharmacy 307 Rebuild Indices 358
Printing 298, 307 Recalls - Adding 244, 309
QuickScripts 301 Flagging Patient Record 247
Searching 305 Overdue INR's 42
User Added Drug 305 Overdue Smears 43
Printing Complete Clinical Record 290 Pathology/Radiology 248
Printing Preferences 71 Printing 245, 248
Deleting Printing Preferences 75 Templates 244
Troubleshooting 76 Receipting 144
Private Health Funds Fees 181 By Invoice Number 36
Importing 184 Default Receipt Type 57
Updating 182 Deleting 170
Procedures 332 Existing Invoice for Patient 147
Adding 292, 332 From an Invoice 145
Incorrect Payment Type 172
Genie Manual Index
Receipting 144
Organisation 149 -T-
Paying the Gap 148
Troubleshooting 147 Tasks 273
Reception Module 82 Theatre Lists 117
Reconcile Banking 172 Printing 119
Records Menu 34 Set Up 118
Recover By Tags - Macintosh 406 Thyroid Control 294
Recover By Tags - Windows 409 Today's Consultation 39
Referral Report 368 Tools Menu 290
Referral/Reply Letters 217 Track Pathology Results - HL7 357
Button Description 218 Transaction Report (Daily) 359
Default Template Set Up 221 Transaction Summary 361
Editing Templates 225 Transcription Services 229
Electronic Correspondence (Sending via 3rd Troubleshooting - Network 411
Party) 231
FTP Server 272
Importing Letters 227, 230
HIC Online 213
New Template 225
ImagePro 269
Reviewing Letters 226, 331
Printing 76
Reviewing Letters - Offsite 226, 331
Registering Genie 26
Remittance Advice 57
-U-
Remove an Item from a Drop-down menu 6
Update Ages 41
Replacing Field Entries 34
Updates 399
Reporting 358, 360, 364 Fees 51, 181
Reset ID Numbers 358 Genie Software 399
Reviewing Letters 226, 331 User Details 63
Offsite 226, 331
User Letterhead 69
-S- User Levels 78

Using Highlighted Entries in a List 34
Sales Report 368

Scanning 250
-V-
With ImagePro 266
Vaccinations 281
Without ImagePro (see Attachments) 250
VSP Number 54
SCP ID 55
Screen Display 55
Searches 374
-W-
ICPC & ICD10 Searches 380
Web Update 401
Security 77
Website 51
Setting/Increasing Private Fees
Workcover 129
On the Fly 125, 135
Certificates 292
Shortcuts 2
Worldcare 179
Show All Records 34
Sign Off Field 63
SMS/Email Appt Reminders 46
Software Updates 49, 399
Special Menu 49
Specifying Fee to Charge 295
Stored Accounts 360
Syberscribe 229
Synchronise Images 344

Genie Manual v759

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Genie Manual v759

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

May 2009

Copyright 2005 - 2009 Genie Solutions Pty Ltd

Part II Hardware Requirements 8

Part III Backups 14

Part V Setting Up Genie 54

Part VI The Reception Module 82

II © 2005-2009 Genie Solutions Pty Ltd

© 2005-2009 Genie Solutions Pty Ltd III

Part VII Clinical 276

IV © 2005-2009 Genie Solutions Pty Ltd

Part VIII Practice Management 356

© 2005-2009 Genie Solutions Pty Ltd V

Part IX Technical Reference 406

VI © 2005-2009 Genie Solutions Pty Ltd

· Menu Items look like this Open > Appointments

Dates and Times

1.1 Keyboard Shortcuts

Change date to beginning of week W

2 © 2005-2009 Genie Solutions Pty Ltd

© 2005-2009 Genie Solutions Pty Ltd 3

Open Patient List Ctrl + O

4 © 2005-2009 Genie Solutions Pty Ltd

Clinical Window - General

Clinical Window - Summary Page

Clinical Window - Notes Page

Pathology & Radiology

© 2005-2009 Genie Solutions Pty Ltd 5

6 © 2005-2009 Genie Solutions Pty Ltd

2.1 Server Machine

SERVER Machine (Windows) SERVER Machine (Macintosh)

8 © 2005-2009 Genie Solutions Pty Ltd

© 2005-2009 Genie Solutions Pty Ltd 9

2.2 Client Machine

CLIENT Machine (Windows) CLIENT Machine (Macintosh)

10 © 2005-2009 Genie Solutions Pty Ltd

2.3 Single User

SINGLE USER (Windows) SINGLE USER (Macintosh)

© 2005-2009 Genie Solutions Pty Ltd 11

1. Geographically remote from the original

Where and What are the Genie data files?

· Genie.4DR which is a small resource file

On Macintosh they should be found at: /Applications/Genie/

Let ’s be Brutally Frank...

It is possible for the Genie data file to become irreparably damaged.

You are responsible for the safe-keeping of your data file.

Genie does not move the data file. Ever.

14 © 2005-2009 Genie Solutions Pty Ltd

The answer is that, unfortunately there’s nothing we can do about it.

Know where your data file is at all times!

© 2005-2009 Genie Solutions Pty Ltd 15

Another Computer on the Network

External Hard Drives

On Macintosh, you need to archive:

On Windows, you need to archive:

16 © 2005-2009 Genie Solutions Pty Ltd

3.1 Automated Backup

The images folder can be found in the following locations:

On your Genie Server:

2. Click the Preferences button. The following window should appear:

© 2005-2009 Genie Solutions Pty Ltd 17

18 © 2005-2009 Genie Solutions Pty Ltd

suitable for most practices.

7. Click the OK button to save these settings.

© 2005-2009 Genie Solutions Pty Ltd 19